Features • High Performance, Low Power Atmel®AVR® 8-Bit Microcontroller • Advanced RISC Architecture – 130 Powerful Instructions – Most Single Clock Cycle Execution – 32 x 8 General Purpose Working Registers – Fully Static Operation – Up to 20MIPS Throughput at 20MHz (ATmega329P/3290P) – On-Chip 2-cycle Multiplier • High Endurance Non-volatile Memory segments – In-System Self-programmable Flash Program Memory • 32KBytes (ATmega329P/ATmega3290P) – EEPROM • 1Kbytes (ATmega329P/ATmega3290P) 8-bit Atmel – Internal SRAM • 2Kbytes (ATmega329P/ATmega3290P) – Write/Erase cyles: 10,000 Flash/100,000 EEPROM Microcontroller – Data retention: 20 years at 85°C/100 years at 25°C(1) – Optional Boot Code Section with Independent Lock Bits • In-System Programming by On-chip Boot Program with 32KBytes • True Read-While-Write Operation – Programming Lock for Software Security • JTAG (IEEE std. 1149.1 compliant) Interface In-System – Boundary-scan Capabilities According to the JTAG Standard – Extensive On-chip Debug Support – Programming of Flash, EEPROM, Fuses, and Lock Bits through the JTAG Interface • Peripheral Features Programmable – 4 x 25 Segment LCD Driver (ATmega329P) – 4 x 40 Segment LCD Driver (ATmega3290P) Flash – Two 8-bit Timer/Counters with Separate Prescaler and Compare Mode – One 16-bit Timer/Counter with Separate Prescaler, Compare Mode, and Capture Mode – Real Time Counter with Separate Oscillator – Four PWM Channels – 8-channel, 10-bit ADC – Programmable Serial USART ATmega329P – Master/Slave SPI Serial Interface – Universal Serial Interface with Start Condition Detector – Programmable Watchdog Timer with Separate On-chip Oscillator ATmega3290P – On-chip Analog Comparator – Interrupt and Wake-up on Pin Change • Special Microcontroller Features – Power-on Reset and Programmable Brown-out Detection – Internal Calibrated Oscillator – External and Internal Interrupt Sources Preliminary – Five Sleep Modes: Idle, ADC Noise Reduction, Power-save, Power-down, and Standby • I/O and Packages – 54/69 Programmable I/O Lines – 64/100-lead TQFP, 64-pad QFN/MLF • Speed Grade: – ATmega329P/ATmega3290P: • 0 - 16MHz @ 1.8 - 5.5V, 0 - 20MHz @ 2.7 - 5.5V • Temperature range: – -40°C to 85°C Industrial • Ultra-Low Power Consumption – Active Mode: • 420µA at 1MHz, 1.8V – Power-down Mode: • 40nA at 1.8V – Power-save Mode: • 750nA at 1.8V Atmel-8021H–AVR-ATmega329P- 3290P_Datasheet_07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 1. Pin Configurations Figure 1-1. MLF/ Pinout ATmega329P CK) MS) DO) DI) C0) C1) C2) C3) C4/T C5/T C6/T C7/T M0) M1) M2) D D D D D D D D O O O VCC ND REF F0 (A F1 (A F2 (A F3 (A F4 (A F5 (A F6 (A F7 (A ND CC A0 (C A1 (C A2 (C A G A P P P P P P P P G V P P P 4 3 2 1 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 9 6 6 6 6 6 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 4 LCDCAP 1 48 PA3 (COM3) (RXD/PCINT0) PE0 2 47 PA4 (SEG0) INDEX CORNER (TXD/PCINT1) PE1 3 46 PA5 (SEG1) (XCK/AIN0/PCINT2) PE2 4 45 PA6 (SEG2) (AIN1/PCINT3) PE3 5 44 PA7 (SEG3) (USCK/SCL/PCINT4) PE4 6 43 PG2 (SEG4) (DI/SDA/PCINT5) PE5 7 42 PC7 (SEG5) (DO/PCINT6) PE6 8 41 PC6 (SEG6) (CLKO/PCINT7) PE7 9 40 PC5 (SEG7) (SS/PCINT8) PB0 10 39 PC4 (SEG8) (SCK/PCINT9) PB1 11 38 PC3 (SEG9) (MOSI/PCINT10) PB2 12 37 PC2 (SEG10) (MISO/PCINT11) PB3 13 36 PC1 (SEG11) (OC0A/PCINT12) PB4 14 35 PC0 (SEG12) (OC1A/PCINT13) PB5 15 34 PG1 (SEG13) (OC1B/PCINT14) PB6 16 33 PG0 (SEG14) 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 7 3 4 5 C D 2 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 B G G G C N L L D D D D D D D D T15) P G24) P G23) P SET/P V G 2) XTA 1) XTA G22) P G21) P G20) P G19) P G18) P G17) P G16) P G15) P N E E E C C E E E E E E E E CI S S R S S S S S S S S S S 2A/P (T1/ (T0/ (TO (TO CP1/ NT0/ ( ( ( ( ( ( OC (I (I ( Note: The large center pad underneath the QFN/MLF packages is made of metal and internally connected to GND. It should be sol- dered or glued to the board to ensure good mechanical stability. If the center pad is left unconnected, the package might loosen from the board. 2 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Figure 1-2. TQFP / Pinout ATmega3290P 6) 7) 8) 9) 3 3 3 3 G G G G E E E E CK) MS) DO) DI) 3/S 2/S 1/S 0/S DC0) DC1) DC2) DC3) DC4/T DC5/T DC6/T DC7/T CINT2 CINT2 CINT2 CINT2 OM0) OM1) OM2) VCC GND REF F0 (A F1 (A F2 (A F3 (A F4 (A F5 (A F6 (A F7 (A NC NC H7 (P H6 (P H5 (P H4 (P NC NC ND CC NC A0 (C A1 (C A2 (C A A A P P P P P P P P D D P P P P D D G V D P P P 100 99 98 97 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 80 79 78 77 76 LCDCAP 1 75 PA3 (COM3) (RXD/PCINT0) PE0 2 74 PA4 (SEG0) (TXD/PCINT1) PE1 3 INDEX CORNER 73 PA5 (SEG1) (XCK/AIN0/PCINT2) PE2 4 72 PA6 (SEG2) (AIN1/PCINT3) PE3 5 71 PA7 (SEG3) (USCK/SCL/PCINT4) PE4 6 70 PG2 (SEG4) (DI/SDA/PCINT5) PE5 7 69 PC7 (SEG5) (DO/PCINT6) PE6 8 68 PC6 (SEG6) (CLKO/PCINT7) PE7 9 67 DNC VCC 10 66 PH3 (PCINT19/SEG7) GND 11 65 PH2 (PCINT18/SEG8) DNC 12 64 PH1 (PCINT17/SEG9) (PCINT24/SEG35) PJ0 13 63 PH0 (PCINT16/SEG10) (PCINT25/SEG34) PJ1 14 62 DNC DNC 15 61 DNC DNC 16 60 DNC DNC 17 59 DNC DNC 18 58 PC5 (SEG11) (SS/PCINT8) PB0 19 57 PC4 (SEG12) (SCK/PCINT9) PB1 20 56 PC3 (SEG13) (MOSI/PCINT10) PB2 21 55 PC2 (SEG14) (MISO/PCINT11) PB3 22 54 PC1 (SEG15) (OC0A/PCINT12) PB4 23 53 PC0 (SEG16) (OC1A/PCINT13) PB5 24 52 PG1 (SEG17) (OC1B/PCINT14) PB6 25 51 PG0 (SEG18) 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 7 C 3 4 5 C D 2 1 C C 2 3 4 5 6 C 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 OC2A/PCINT15) PB DN (T1/SEG33) PG (T0/SEG32) PG RESET/PG VC GN (TOSC2) XTAL (TOSC1) XTAL DN DN CINT26/SEG31) PJ CINT27/SEG30) PJ CINT28/SEG29) PJ CINT29/SEG28) PJ CINT30/SEG27) PJ DN (ICP1/SEG26) PD (INT0/SEG25) PD (SEG24) PD (SEG23) PD (SEG22) PD (SEG21) PD (SEG20) PD (SEG19) PD ( (P (P (P (P (P 3 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 2. Overview The ATmega329P/3290P is a low-power CMOS 8-bit microcontroller based on the AVR enhanced RISC architecture. By executing powerful instructions in a single clock cycle, the ATmega329P/3290P achieves throughputs approaching 1MIPS per MHz allowing the system designer to optimize power consumption versus processing speed. 2.1 Block Diagram Figure 2-1. Block Diagram GND VCC PF0 - PF7 PA0 - PA7 PC0 - PC7 XTAL1 XTAL2 PORTF DRIVERS PORTA DRIVERS PORTC DRIVERS DATAREGISTER DATADIR. DATAREGISTER DATADIR. DATAREGISTER DATADIR. PORTF REG.PORTF PORTA REG.PORTA PORTC REG.PORTC 8-BIT DATA BUS AVCC AGND ADC INTERNAL CALIB. OSC AREF OSCILLATOR OSCILLATOR JTAG TAP PCROOUGNRTAEMR PSOTINACTEKR WATTICMHEDROG TIMING AND H CONTROL DIR.ORT LCD PH0 - PH7 PORTH DRIVERS DATAATAREGISTERREG.PPORTH OPNRBO-OCGLUHSORNICPAGDA MDIANCEMRBYIN-U GG ININPRSDSRETFETOGRLRCUAGISUOSCRTCDHTAETEIMROIRONN RPGEUEGSRNRISPXYZEATORMESARELS MCICNRUOTET UEUGCIMRNNOISERTINTTREUTER/PRRSTOL CONDTRRIVOELRLER/ D DIR.ORTJ COLNINTERSOL ALU EEPROM RESET ERS DATAREG.P AVR CPU RSETGAISTUTESR PJ0 - PJ6 PORTJ DRIV ATAREGISTERPORTJ USART SERUIANLI VINETRESRAFLACE SPI D R O ANALOGOMPARAT +- DATAPROERGTIESTER RDEAGT.APODRIRT.E DATAPROERGTIBSTER RDEAGT.APODRIRT.B DATAPROERGTDISTER RDEAGT.APODRIRT.D DAPTOARRTEGG. RDEAGTA.PDOIRR.TG C PORTE DRIVERS PORTB DRIVERS PORTD DRIVERS PORTG DRIVERS PE0 - PE7 PB0 - PB7 PD0 - PD7 PG0 - PG4 The Atmel® AVR® core combines a rich instruction set with 32 general purpose working registers. All the 32 registers are directly connected to the Arithmetic Logic Unit (ALU), allowing two inde- pendent registers to be accessed in one single instruction executed in one clock cycle. The 4 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P resulting architecture is more code efficient while achieving throughputs up to ten times faster than conventional CISC microcontrollers. The ATmel®AVR® ATmega329P/3290P provides the following features: 32K bytes of In-System Programmable Flash with Read-While-Write capabilities, 1Kbytes EEPROM, 2Kbyte SRAM, 54/69 general purpose I/O lines, 32 general purpose working registers, a JTAG interface for Boundary-scan, On-chip Debugging support and programming, a complete On-chip LCD con- troller with internal contrast control, three flexible Timer/Counters with compare modes, internal and external interrupts, a serial programmable USART, Universal Serial Interface with Start Condition Detector, an 8-channel, 10-bit ADC, a programmable Watchdog Timer with internal Oscillator, an SPI serial port, and five software selectable power saving modes. The Idle mode stops the CPU while allowing the SRAM, Timer/Counters, SPI port, and interrupt system to con- tinue functioning. The Power-down mode saves the register contents but freezes the Oscillator, disabling all other chip functions until the next interrupt or hardware reset. In Power-save mode, the asynchronous timer and the LCD controller continues to run, allowing the user to maintain a timer base and operate the LCD display while the rest of the device is sleeping. The ADC Noise Reduction mode stops the CPU and all I/O modules except asynchronous timer, LCD controller and ADC, to minimize switching noise during ADC conversions. In Standby mode, the crys- tal/resonator Oscillator is running while the rest of the device is sleeping. This allows very fast start-up combined with low-power consumption. The device is manufactured using Atmel’s high density non-volatile memory technology. The On-chip In-System re-Programmable (ISP) Flash allows the program memory to be repro- grammed In-System through an SPI serial interface, by a conventional non-volatile memory programmer, or by an On-chip Boot program running on the AVR core. The Boot program can use any interface to download the application program in the Application Flash memory. Soft- ware in the Boot Flash section will continue to run while the Application Flash section is updated, providing true Read-While-Write operation. By combining an 8-bit RISC CPU with In-System Self-Programmable Flash on a monolithic chip, the Atmel ATmega329P/3290P is a powerful microcontroller that provides a highly flexible and cost effective solution to many embedded con- trol applications. The ATmega329P/3290P AVR is supported with a full suite of program and system develop- ment tools including: C Compilers, Macro Assemblers, Program Debugger/Simulators, In-Circuit Emulators, and Evaluation kits. 2.2 Comparison between ATmega329P, and ATmega3290P. The ATmega329P, and ATmega3290P differ only in pin count and pinout. Table 2-1 on page 5 summarizes the different configurations for the four devices. Table 2-1. Configuration Summary LCD General Purpose Device Flash EEPROM RAM Segments I/O Pins ATmega329P 32Kbytes 1Kbytes 2Kbytes 4 x 25 54 ATmega3290P 32Kbytes 1Kbytes 2Kbytes 4 x 40 69 5 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 2.3 Pin Descriptions The following section describes the I/O-pin special functions. 2.3.1 V CC Digital supply voltage. 2.3.2 GND Ground. 2.3.3 Port A (PA7...PA0) Port A is an 8-bit bi-directional I/O port with internal pull-up resistors (selected for each bit). The Port A output buffers have symmetrical drive characteristics with both high sink and source capability. As inputs, Port A pins that are externally pulled low will source current if the pull-up resistors are activated. The Port A pins are tri-stated when a reset condition becomes active, even if the clock is not running. Port A also serves the functions of various special features of the ATmega329P/3290P as listed on page 71. 2.3.4 Port B (PB7...PB0) Port B is an 8-bit bi-directional I/O port with internal pull-up resistors (selected for each bit). The Port B output buffers have symmetrical drive characteristics with both high sink and source capability. As inputs, Port B pins that are externally pulled low will source current if the pull-up resistors are activated. The Port B pins are tri-stated when a reset condition becomes active, even if the clock is not running. Port B has better driving capabilities than the other ports. Port B also serves the functions of various special features of the ATmega329P/3290P as listed on page 72. 2.3.5 Port C (PC7...PC0) Port C is an 8-bit bi-directional I/O port with internal pull-up resistors (selected for each bit). The Port C output buffers have symmetrical drive characteristics with both high sink and source capability. As inputs, Port C pins that are externally pulled low will source current if the pull-up resistors are activated. The Port C pins are tri-stated when a reset condition becomes active, even if the clock is not running. Port C also serves the functions of special features of the ATmega329P/3290P as listed on page 75. 2.3.6 Port D (PD7...PD0) Port D is an 8-bit bi-directional I/O port with internal pull-up resistors (selected for each bit). The Port D output buffers have symmetrical drive characteristics with both high sink and source capability. As inputs, Port D pins that are externally pulled low will source current if the pull-up resistors are activated. The Port D pins are tri-stated when a reset condition becomes active, even if the clock is not running. Port D also serves the functions of various special features of the ATmega329P/3290P as listed on page 76. 6 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 2.3.7 Port E (PE7...PE0) Port E is an 8-bit bi-directional I/O port with internal pull-up resistors (selected for each bit). The Port E output buffers have symmetrical drive characteristics with both high sink and source capability. As inputs, Port E pins that are externally pulled low will source current if the pull-up resistors are activated. The Port E pins are tri-stated when a reset condition becomes active, even if the clock is not running. Port E also serves the functions of various special features of the ATmega329P/3290P as listed on page 78. 2.3.8 Port F (PF7...PF0) Port F serves as the analog inputs to the A/D Converter. Port F also serves as an 8-bit bi-directional I/O port, if the A/D Converter is not used. Port pins can provide internal pull-up resistors (selected for each bit). The Port F output buffers have sym- metrical drive characteristics with both high sink and source capability. As inputs, Port F pins that are externally pulled low will source current if the pull-up resistors are activated. The Port F pins are tri-stated when a reset condition becomes active, even if the clock is not running. If the JTAG interface is enabled, the pull-up resistors on pins PF7(TDI), PF5(TMS), and PF4(TCK) will be activated even if a reset occurs. Port F also serves the functions of the JTAG interface. 2.3.9 Port G (PG5...PG0) Port G is a 6-bit bi-directional I/O port with internal pull-up resistors (selected for each bit). The Port G output buffers have symmetrical drive characteristics with both high sink and source capability. As inputs, Port G pins that are externally pulled low will source current if the pull-up resistors are activated. The Port G pins are tri-stated when a reset condition becomes active, even if the clock is not running. Port G also serves the functions of various special features of the ATmega329P/3290P as listed on page 82. 2.3.10 Port H (PH7...PH0) Port H is a 8-bit bi-directional I/O port with internal pull-up resistors (selected for each bit). The Port H output buffers have symmetrical drive characteristics with both high sink and source capability. As inputs, Port H pins that are externally pulled low will source current if the pull-up resistors are activated. The Port H pins are tri-stated when a reset condition becomes active, even if the clock is not running. Port H also serves the functions of various special features of the ATmega3290P as listed on page 84. 2.3.11 Port J (PJ6...PJ0) Port J is a 7-bit bi-directional I/O port with internal pull-up resistors (selected for each bit). The Port J output buffers have symmetrical drive characteristics with both high sink and source capa- bility. As inputs, Port J pins that are externally pulled low will source current if the pull-up resistors are activated. The Port J pins are tri-stated when a reset condition becomes active, even if the clock is not running. Port J also serves the functions of various special features of the ATmega3290P as listed on page 87. 7 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 2.3.12 RESET Reset input. A low level on this pin for longer than the minimum pulse length will generate a reset, even if the clock is not running. The minimum pulse length is given in ”System and Reset Characteristics” on page 336. Shorter pulses are not guaranteed to generate a reset. 2.3.13 XTAL1 Input to the inverting Oscillator amplifier and input to the internal clock operating circuit. 2.3.14 XTAL2 Output from the inverting Oscillator amplifier. 2.3.15 AVCC AVCC is the supply voltage pin for Port F and the A/D Converter. It should be externally con- nected to V , even if the ADC is not used. If the ADC is used, it should be connected to V CC CC through a low-pass filter. 2.3.16 AREF This is the analog reference pin for the A/D Converter. 2.3.17 LCDCAP An external capacitor (typical > 470nF) must be connected to the LCDCAP pin as shown in Fig- ure 23-2, if the LCD module is enabled and configured to use internal power. This capacitor acts as a reservoir for LCD power (V ). A large capacitance reduces ripple on V but increases LCD LCD the time until V reaches its target value. LCD 8 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 3. Resources A comprehensive set of development tools, application notes and datasheets are available for download on http://www.atmel.com/avr. Note: 1. 4. Data Retention Reliability Qualification results show that the projected data retention failure rate is much less than 1 PPM over 20 years at 85°C or 100 years at 25°C. 5. About Code Examples This documentation contains simple code examples that briefly show how to use various parts of the device. These code examples assume that the part specific header file is included before compilation. Be aware that not all C compiler vendors include bit definitions in the header files and interrupt handling in C is compiler dependent. Please confirm with the C compiler documen- tation for more details. For I/O Registers located in extended I/O map, “IN”, “OUT”, “SBIS”, “SBIC”, “CBI”, and “SBI” instructions must be replaced with instructions that allow access to extended I/O. Typically “LDS” and “STS” combined with “SBRS”, “SBRC”, “SBR”, and “CBR”. 9 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 6. AVR CPU Core 6.1 Overview This section discusses the Atmel®AVR® core architecture in general. The main function of the CPU core is to ensure correct program execution. The CPU must therefore be able to access memories, perform calculations, control peripherals, and handle interrupts. 6.2 Architectural Overview Figure 6-1. Block Diagram of the AVR Architecture Data Bus 8-bit Program Status Flash Counter and Control Program Memory Interrupt 32 x 8 Unit Instruction General Register Purpose SPI Registrers Unit Instruction Watchdog Decoder Timer g g n ssin essi ALU Analog Control Lines dre ddr Comparator d A ct A ect Dire Indir I/O Module1 Data I/O Module 2 SRAM I/O Module n EEPROM I/O Lines In order to maximize performance and parallelism, the AVR uses a Harvard architecture – with separate memories and buses for program and data. Instructions in the program memory are executed with a single level pipelining. While one instruction is being executed, the next instruc- tion is pre-fetched from the program memory. This concept enables instructions to be executed in every clock cycle. The program memory is In-System Reprogrammable Flash memory. The fast-access Register File contains 32 x 8-bit general purpose working registers with a single clock cycle access time. This allows single-cycle Arithmetic Logic Unit (ALU) operation. In a typ- 10 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P ical ALU operation, two operands are output from the Register File, the operation is executed, and the result is stored back in the Register File – in one clock cycle. Six of the 32 registers can be used as three 16-bit indirect address register pointers for Data Space addressing – enabling efficient address calculations. One of the these address pointers can also be used as an address pointer for look up tables in Flash program memory. These added function registers are the 16-bit X-, Y-, and Z-register, described later in this section. The ALU supports arithmetic and logic operations between registers or between a constant and a register. Single register operations can also be executed in the ALU. After an arithmetic opera- tion, the Status Register is updated to reflect information about the result of the operation. Program flow is provided by conditional and unconditional jump and call instructions, able to directly address the whole address space. Most AVR instructions have a single 16-bit word for- mat. Every program memory address contains a 16- or 32-bit instruction. Program Flash memory space is divided in two sections, the Boot Program section and the Application Program section. Both sections have dedicated Lock bits for write and read/write protection. The SPM instruction that writes into the Application Flash memory section must reside in the Boot Program section. During interrupts and subroutine calls, the return address Program Counter (PC) is stored on the Stack. The Stack is effectively allocated in the general data SRAM, and consequently the Stack size is only limited by the total SRAM size and the usage of the SRAM. All user programs must initialize the SP in the Reset routine (before subroutines or interrupts are executed). The Stack Pointer (SP) is read/write accessible in the I/O space. The data SRAM can easily be accessed through the five different addressing modes supported in the AVR architecture. The memory spaces in the AVR architecture are all linear and regular memory maps. A flexible interrupt module has its control registers in the I/O space with an additional Global Interrupt Enable bit in the Status Register. All interrupts have a separate Interrupt Vector in the Interrupt Vector table. The interrupts have priority in accordance with their Interrupt Vector posi- tion. The lower the Interrupt Vector address, the higher the priority. The I/O memory space contains 64 addresses for CPU peripheral functions as Control Regis- ters, SPI, and other I/O functions. The I/O Memory can be accessed directly, or as the Data Space locations following those of the Register File, 0x20 - 0x5F. In addition, the ATmega329P/3290P has Extended I/O space from 0x60 - 0xFF in SRAM where only the ST/STS/STD and LD/LDS/LDD instructions can be used. 6.3 ALU – Arithmetic Logic Unit The high-performance AVR ALU operates in direct connection with all the 32 general purpose working registers. Within a single clock cycle, arithmetic operations between general purpose registers or between a register and an immediate are executed. The ALU operations are divided into three main categories – arithmetic, logical, and bit-functions. Some implementations of the architecture also provide a powerful multiplier supporting both signed/unsigned multiplication and fractional format. See the “Instruction Set” section for a detailed description. 6.4 AVR Status Register The Status Register contains information about the result of the most recently executed arithme- tic instruction. This information can be used for altering program flow in order to perform conditional operations. Note that the Status Register is updated after all ALU operations, as 11 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P specified in the Instruction Set Reference. This will in many cases remove the need for using the dedicated compare instructions, resulting in faster and more compact code. The Status Register is not automatically stored when entering an interrupt routine and restored when returning from an interrupt. This must be handled by software. 6.4.1 SREG – AVR Status Register The Atmel®AVR® Status Register – SREG – is defined as: Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0x3F (0x5F) I T H S V N Z C SREG Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 • Bit 7 – I: Global Interrupt Enable The Global Interrupt Enable bit must be set for the interrupts to be enabled. The individual inter- rupt enable control is then performed in separate control registers. If the Global Interrupt Enable Register is cleared, none of the interrupts are enabled independent of the individual interrupt enable settings. The I-bit is cleared by hardware after an interrupt has occurred, and is set by the RETI instruction to enable subsequent interrupts. The I-bit can also be set and cleared by the application with the SEI and CLI instructions, as described in the instruction set reference. • Bit 6 – T: Bit Copy Storage The Bit Copy instructions BLD (Bit LoaD) and BST (Bit STore) use the T-bit as source or desti- nation for the operated bit. A bit from a register in the Register File can be copied into T by the BST instruction, and a bit in T can be copied into a bit in a register in the Register File by the BLD instruction. • Bit 5 – H: Half Carry Flag The Half Carry Flag H indicates a Half Carry in some arithmetic operations. Half Carry Is useful in BCD arithmetic. See the “Instruction Set Description” for detailed information. • Bit 4 – S: Sign Bit, S = N V The S-bit is always an exclusive or between the Negative Flag N and the Two’s Complement Overflow Flag V. See the “Instruction Set Description” for detailed information. • Bit 3 – V: Two’s Complement Overflow Flag The Two’s Complement Overflow Flag V supports two’s complement arithmetics. See the “Instruction Set Description” for detailed information. • Bit 2 – N: Negative Flag The Negative Flag N indicates a negative result in an arithmetic or logic operation. See the “Instruction Set Description” for detailed information. • Bit 1 – Z: Zero Flag The Zero Flag Z indicates a zero result in an arithmetic or logic operation. See the “Instruction Set Description” for detailed information. • Bit 0 – C: Carry Flag The Carry Flag C indicates a carry in an arithmetic or logic operation. See the “Instruction Set Description” for detailed information. 12 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 6.5 General Purpose Register File The Register File is optimized for the Atmel®AVR® Enhanced RISC instruction set. In order to achieve the required performance and flexibility, the following input/output schemes are sup- ported by the Register File: • One 8-bit output operand and one 8-bit result input • Two 8-bit output operands and one 8-bit result input • Two 8-bit output operands and one 16-bit result input • One 16-bit output operand and one 16-bit result input Figure 6-2 shows the structure of the 32 general purpose working registers in the CPU. Figure 6-2. AVR CPU General Purpose Working Registers 7 0 Addr. R0 0x00 R1 0x01 R2 0x02 … R13 0x0D General R14 0x0E Purpose R15 0x0F Working R16 0x10 Registers R17 0x11 … R26 0x1A X-register Low Byte R27 0x1B X-register High Byte R28 0x1C Y-register Low Byte R29 0x1D Y-register High Byte R30 0x1E Z-register Low Byte R31 0x1F Z-register High Byte Most of the instructions operating on the Register File have direct access to all registers, and most of them are single cycle instructions. As shown in Figure 6-2, each register is also assigned a data memory address, mapping them directly into the first 32 locations of the user Data Space. Although not being physically imple- mented as SRAM locations, this memory organization provides great flexibility in access of the registers, as the X-, Y- and Z-pointer registers can be set to index any register in the file. 13 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 6.5.1 The X-register, Y-register, and Z-register The registers R26...R31 have some added functions to their general purpose usage. These reg- isters are 16-bit address pointers for indirect addressing of the data space. The three indirect address registers X, Y, and Z are defined as described in Figure 6-3. Figure 6-3. The X-, Y-, and Z-registers 15 XH XL 0 X-register 7 0 7 0 R27 (0x1B) R26 (0x1A) 15 YH YL 0 Y-register 7 0 7 0 R29 (0x1D) R28 (0x1C) 15 ZH ZL 0 Z-register 7 0 7 0 R31 (0x1F) R30 (0x1E) In the different addressing modes these address registers have functions as fixed displacement, automatic increment, and automatic decrement (see the instruction set reference for details). 6.6 Stack Pointer The Stack is mainly used for storing temporary data, for storing local variables and for storing return addresses after interrupts and subroutine calls. Note that the Stack is implemented as growing from higher to lower memory locations. The Stack Pointer Register always points to the top of the Stack. The Stack Pointer points to the data SRAM Stack area where the Subroutine and Interrupt Stacks are located. A Stack PUSH command will decrease the Stack Pointer. The Stack in the data SRAM must be defined by the program before any subroutine calls are executed or interrupts are enabled. Initial Stack Pointer value equals the last address of the internal SRAM and the Stack Pointer must be set to point above start of the SRAM, see Figure 7-2 on page 19. See Table 6-1 for Stack Pointer details. Table 6-1. Stack Pointer instructions Instruction Stack pointer Description PUSH Decremented by 1 Data is pushed onto the stack CALL Return address is pushed onto the stack with a subroutine call or ICALL Decremented by 2 interrupt RCALL POP Incremented by 1 Data is popped from the stack RET Incremented by 2 Return address is popped from the stack with return from RETI subroutine or return from interrupt The AVR Stack Pointer is implemented as two 8-bit registers in the I/O space. The number of bits actually used is implementation dependent. Note that the data space in some implementa- tions of the AVR architecture is so small that only SPL is needed. In this case, the SPH Register will not be present. 14 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 6.6.1 SPH and SPL – Stack pointer High and Stack Pointer Low Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 0x3E (0x5E) SP15 SP14 SP13 SP12 SP11 SP10 SP9 SP8 SPH 0x3D (0x5D) SP7 SP6 SP5 SP4 SP3 SP2 SP1 SP0 SPL 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 6.7 Instruction Execution Timing This section describes the general access timing concepts for instruction execution. The Atmel®AVR® CPU is driven by the CPU clock clk , directly generated from the selected clock CPU source for the chip. No internal clock division is used. Figure 6-4 shows the parallel instruction fetches and instruction executions enabled by the Har- vard architecture and the fast-access Register File concept. This is the basic pipelining concept to obtain up to 1 MIPS per MHz with the corresponding unique results for functions per cost, functions per clocks, and functions per power-unit. Figure 6-4. The Parallel Instruction Fetches and Instruction Executions T1 T2 T3 T4 clk CPU 1st Instruction Fetch 1st Instruction Execute 2nd Instruction Fetch 2nd Instruction Execute 3rd Instruction Fetch 3rd Instruction Execute 4th Instruction Fetch Figure 6-5 shows the internal timing concept for the Register File. In a single clock cycle an ALU operation using two register operands is executed, and the result is stored back to the destina- tion register. 15 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Figure 6-5. Single Cycle ALU Operation T1 T2 T3 T4 clk CPU Total Execution Time Register Operands Fetch ALU Operation Execute Result Write Back 6.8 Reset and Interrupt Handling The Atmel®AVR® provides several different interrupt sources. These interrupts and the separate Reset Vector each have a separate program vector in the program memory space. All interrupts are assigned individual enable bits which must be written logic one together with the Global Interrupt Enable bit in the Status Register in order to enable the interrupt. Depending on the Pro- gram Counter value, interrupts may be automatically disabled when Boot Lock bits BLB02 or BLB12 are programmed. This feature improves software security. See the section ”Memory Pro- gramming” on page 296 for details. The lowest addresses in the program memory space are by default defined as the Reset and Interrupt Vectors. The complete list of vectors is shown in ”Interrupts” on page 53. The list also determines the priority levels of the different interrupts. The lower the address the higher is the priority level. RESET has the highest priority, and next is INT0 – the External Interrupt Request 0. The Interrupt Vectors can be moved to the start of the Boot Flash section by setting the IVSEL bit in the MCU Control Register (MCUCR). Refer to ”Interrupts” on page 53 for more information. The Reset Vector can also be moved to the start of the Boot Flash section by programming the BOOTRST Fuse, see ”Boot Loader Support – Read-While-Write Self-Programming” on page 281. When an interrupt occurs, the Global Interrupt Enable I-bit is cleared and all interrupts are dis- abled. The user software can write logic one to the I-bit to enable nested interrupts. All enabled interrupts can then interrupt the current interrupt routine. The I-bit is automatically set when a Return from Interrupt instruction – RETI – is executed. There are basically two types of interrupts. The first type is triggered by an event that sets the Interrupt Flag. For these interrupts, the Program Counter is vectored to the actual Interrupt Vec- tor in order to execute the interrupt handling routine, and hardware clears the corresponding Interrupt Flag. Interrupt Flags can also be cleared by writing a logic one to the flag bit position(s) to be cleared. If an interrupt condition occurs while the corresponding interrupt enable bit is cleared, the Interrupt Flag will be set and remembered until the interrupt is enabled, or the flag is cleared by software. Similarly, if one or more interrupt conditions occur while the Global Interrupt Enable bit is cleared, the corresponding Interrupt Flag(s) will be set and remembered until the Global Interrupt Enable bit is set, and will then be executed by order of priority. The second type of interrupts will trigger as long as the interrupt condition is present. These interrupts do not necessarily have Interrupt Flags. If the interrupt condition disappears before the interrupt is enabled, the interrupt will not be triggered. When the AVR exits from an interrupt, it will always return to the main program and execute one more instruction before any pending interrupt is served. 16 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Note that the Status Register is not automatically stored when entering an interrupt routine, nor restored when returning from an interrupt routine. This must be handled by software. When using the CLI instruction to disable interrupts, the interrupts will be immediately disabled. No interrupt will be executed after the CLI instruction, even if it occurs simultaneously with the CLI instruction. The following example shows how this can be used to avoid interrupts during the timed EEPROM write sequence. Assembly Code Example in r16, SREG ; store SREG value cli ; disable interrupts during timed sequence sbiEECR, EEMWE ; start EEPROM write sbiEECR, EEWE outSREG, r16 ; restore SREG value (I-bit) C Code Example char cSREG; cSREG = SREG;/* store SREG value */ /* disable interrupts during timed sequence */ __disable_interrupt(); EECR |= (1<<EEMWE); /* start EEPROM write */ EECR |= (1<<EEWE); SREG = cSREG; /* restore SREG value (I-bit) */ When using the SEI instruction to enable interrupts, the instruction following SEI will be exe- cuted before any pending interrupts, as shown in this example. Assembly Code Example sei ; set Global Interrupt Enable sleep; enter sleep, waiting for interrupt ; note: will enter sleep before any pending ; interrupt(s) C Code Example __enable_interrupt(); /* set Global Interrupt Enable */ __sleep(); /* enter sleep, waiting for interrupt */ /* note: will enter sleep before any pending interrupt(s) */ 6.8.1 Interrupt Response Time The interrupt execution response for all the enabled AVR interrupts is four clock cycles mini- mum. After four clock cycles the program vector address for the actual interrupt handling routine is executed. During this four clock cycle period, the Program Counter is pushed onto the Stack. The vector is normally a jump to the interrupt routine, and this jump takes three clock cycles. If an interrupt occurs during execution of a multi-cycle instruction, this instruction is completed before the interrupt is served. If an interrupt occurs when the MCU is in sleep mode, the interrupt execution response time is increased by four clock cycles. This increase comes in addition to the start-up time from the selected sleep mode. A return from an interrupt handling routine takes four clock cycles. During these four clock cycles, the Program Counter (two bytes) is popped back from the Stack, the Stack Pointer is incremented by two, and the I-bit in SREG is set. 17 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 7. AVR Memories 7.1 Overview This section describes the different memories in the ATmega329P/3290P. The Atmel®AVR® architecture has two main memory spaces, the Data Memory and the Program Memory space. In addition, the ATmega329P/3290P features an EEPROM Memory for data storage. All three memory spaces are linear. 7.2 In-System Reprogrammable Flash Program Memory The ATmega329P/3290P contains 132Kbytes On-chip In-System Reprogrammable Flash mem- ory for program storage. Since all AVR instructions are 16 or 32 bits wide, the Flash is organized as 16K x 16 (ATmega329P/3290P). For software security, the Flash Program memory space is divided into two sections, Boot Program section and Application Program section. The Flash memory has an endurance of at least 10,000 write/erase cycles. The ATmega329P/3290P Program Counter (PC) is 14 bits wide, thus addressing the 16K program memory locations. The operation of Boot Program section and associated Boot Lock bits for software protection are described in detail in ”Boot Loader Support – Read-While-Write Self-Pro- gramming” on page 281. ”Memory Programming” on page 296 contains a detailed description on Flash data serial downloading using the SPI pins or the JTAG interface. Constant tables can be allocated within the entire program memory address space (see the LPM – Load Program Memory instruction description). Timing diagrams for instruction fetch and execution are presented in ”Instruction Execution Tim- ing” on page 15. Figure 7-1. Program Memory Map Program Memory 0x0000 Application Flash Section Boot Flash Section 0x3FFF 7.3 SRAM Data Memory Figure 7-2 shows how the SRAM Memory is organized. 18 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P The Atmel®AVR® ATmega329P/3290P is a complex microcontroller with more peripheral units than can be supported within the 64 locations reserved in the Opcode for the IN and OUT instructions. For the Extended I/O space from 0x60 - 0xFF in SRAM, only the ST/STS/STD and LD/LDS/LDD instructions can be used. The lower 2304 data memory locations address both the Register File, the I/O memory, Extended I/O memory, and the internal data SRAM. The first 32 locations address the Register File, the next 64 location the standard I/O memory, then 160 locations of Extended I/O memory, and the next 2048/locations address the internal data SRAM. The five different addressing modes for the data memory cover: Direct, Indirect with Displace- ment, Indirect, Indirect with Pre-decrement, and Indirect with Post-increment. In the Register File, registers R26 to R31 feature the indirect addressing pointer registers. The direct addressing reaches the entire data space. The Indirect with Displacement mode reaches 63 address locations from the base address given by the Y- or Z-register. When using register indirect addressing modes with automatic pre-decrement and post-incre- ment, the address registers X, Y, and Z are decremented or incremented. The 32 general purpose working registers, 64 I/O Registers, 160 Extended I/O Registers, and the 2,048bytes of internal data SRAM in the ATmega329P/3290P are all accessible through all these addressing modes. The Register File is described in ”General Purpose Register File” on page 13. Figure 7-2. Data Memory Map Data Memory 32 Registers 0x0000 - 0x001F 64 I/O Registers 0x0020 - 0x005F 160 Ext I/O Reg. 0x0060 - 0x00FF 0x0100 Internal SRAM (2048 x 8) 0x08FF 7.3.1 Data Memory Access Times This section describes the general access timing concepts for internal memory access. The internal data SRAM access is performed in two clk cycles as described in Figure 7-3. CPU 19 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Figure 7-3. On-chip Data SRAM Access Cycles T1 T2 T3 clk CPU Address Compute Address Address valid Data e Writ WR Data d a e R RD Memory Access Instruction Next Instruction 7.4 EEPROM Data Memory The ATmega329P/3290P contains 1Kbytes of data EEPROM memory. It is organized as a sep- arate data space, in which single bytes can be read and written. The EEPROM has an endurance of at least 100,000 write/erase cycles. The access between the EEPROM and the CPU is described in the following, specifying the EEPROM Address Registers, the EEPROM Data Register, and the EEPROM Control Register. For a detailed description of SPI, JTAG and Parallel data downloading to the EEPROM, see page 311, page 317, and page 299 respectively. 7.4.1 EEPROM Write During Power-down Sleep Mode When entering Power-down sleep mode while an EEPROM write operation is active, the EEPROM write operation will continue, and will complete before the Write Access time has passed. However, when the write operation is completed, the clock continues running, and as a consequence, the device does not enter Power-down entirely. It is therefore recommended to verify that the EEPROM write operation is completed before entering Power-down. 7.4.2 Preventing EEPROM Corruption During periods of low V the EEPROM data can be corrupted because the supply voltage is CC, too low for the CPU and the EEPROM to operate properly. These issues are the same as for board level systems using EEPROM, and the same design solutions should be applied. An EEPROM data corruption can be caused by two situations when the voltage is too low. First, a regular write sequence to the EEPROM requires a minimum voltage to operate correctly. Sec- ondly, the CPU itself can execute instructions incorrectly, if the supply voltage is too low. EEPROM data corruption can easily be avoided by following this design recommendation: Keep the AVR RESET active (low) during periods of insufficient power supply voltage. This can be done by enabling the internal Brown-out Detector (BOD). If the detection level of the internal BOD does not match the needed detection level, an external low V reset Protection circuit can CC 20 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P be used. If a reset occurs while a write operation is in progress, the write operation will be com- pleted provided that the power supply voltage is sufficient. 7.5 I/O Memory The I/O space definition of the ATmega329P/3290P is shown in ”Register Summary” on page 403. All ATmega329P/3290P I/Os and peripherals are placed in the I/O space. All I/O locations may be accessed by the LD/LDS/LDD and ST/STS/STD instructions, transferring data between the 32 general purpose working registers and the I/O space. I/O Registers within the address range 0x00 - 0x1F are directly bit-accessible using the SBI and CBI instructions. In these registers, the value of single bits can be checked by using the SBIS and SBIC instructions. Refer to the instruction set section for more details. When using the I/O specific commands IN and OUT, the I/O addresses 0x00 - 0x3F must be used. When addressing I/O Registers as data space using LD and ST instructions, 0x20 must be added to these addresses. The ATmega329P/3290P is a complex microcontroller with more peripheral units than can be supported within the 64 location reserved in Opcode for the IN and OUT instructions. For the Extended I/O space from 0x60 - 0xFF in SRAM, only the ST/STS/STD and LD/LDS/LDD instructions can be used. For compatibility with future devices, reserved bits should be written to zero if accessed. Reserved I/O memory addresses should never be written. Some of the Status Flags are cleared by writing a logical one to them. Note that, unlike most other AVRs, the CBI and SBI instructions will only operate on the specified bit, and can therefore be used on registers containing such Status Flags. The CBI and SBI instructions work with reg- isters 0x00 to 0x1F only. The I/O and peripherals control registers are explained in later sections. The ATmega329P/3290P contains three General Purpose I/O Registers. These registers can be used for storing any information, and they are particularly useful for storing global variables and Status Flags. General Purpose I/O Registers within the address range 0x00 - 0x1F are directly bit-accessible using the SBI, CBI, SBIS, and SBIC instructions. 21 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 7.6 Register Description 7.6.1 EEPROM Read/Write Access The EEPROM Access Registers are accessible in the I/O space. The write access time for the EEPROM is given in Table 7-1. A self-timing function, however, lets the user software detect when the next byte can be written. If the user code contains instruc- tions that write the EEPROM, some precautions must be taken. In heavily filtered power supplies, V is likely to rise or fall slowly on power-up/down. This causes the device for some CC period of time to run at a voltage lower than specified as minimum for the clock frequency used. See Section “7.4.2” on page 20. for details on how to avoid problems in these situations. In order to prevent unintentional EEPROM writes, a specific write procedure must be followed. Refer to the description of the EEPROM Control Register for details on this. When the EEPROM is read, the CPU is halted for four clock cycles before the next instruction is executed. When the EEPROM is written, the CPU is halted for two clock cycles before the next instruction is executed. 7.6.2 EEARH and EEARL – EEPROM Address Register ATmega329P/3290P Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 0x22 (0x42) – – – – – – EEAR9 EEAR8 EEARH 0x21 (0x41) EEAR7 EEAR6 EEAR5 EEAR4 EEAR3 EEAR2 EEAR1 EEAR0 EEARL 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Read/Write R R R R R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 X X X X X X X X X X X • Bits 15:10 – Reserved These bits are reserved and will always read as zero. • Bits 9:0 – EEAR[9:0]: EEPROM Address The EEPROM Address Registers – EEARH and EEARL specify the EEPROM address in the 1byte EEPROM space. The EEPROM data bytes are addressed linearly between 0 and 1023. The initial value of EEAR is undefined. A proper value must be written before the EEPROM may be accessed. 7.6.3 EEDR – EEPROM Data Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0x20 (0x40) MSB LSB EEDR Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 • Bits 7:0 – EEDR7:0: EEPROM Data For the EEPROM write operation, the EEDR Register contains the data to be written to the EEPROM in the address given by the EEAR Register. For the EEPROM read operation, the EEDR contains the data read out from the EEPROM at the address given by EEAR. 22 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 7.6.4 EECR – EEPROM Control Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0x1F (0x3F) – – – – EERIE EEMWE EEWE EERE EECR Read/Write R R R R R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 X 0 • Bits 7:4 – Reserved These bits are reserved bits and will always read as zero. • Bit 3 – EERIE: EEPROM Ready Interrupt Enable Writing EERIE to one enables the EEPROM Ready Interrupt if the I bit in SREG is set. Writing EERIE to zero disables the interrupt. The EEPROM Ready interrupt generates a constant inter- rupt when EEWE is cleared. • Bit 2 – EEMWE: EEPROM Master Write Enable The EEMWE bit determines whether setting EEWE to one causes the EEPROM to be written. When EEMWE is set, setting EEWE within four clock cycles will write data to the EEPROM at the selected address If EEMWE is zero, setting EEWE will have no effect. When EEMWE has been written to one by software, hardware clears the bit to zero after four clock cycles. See the description of the EEWE bit for an EEPROM write procedure. • Bit 1 – EEWE: EEPROM Write Enable The EEPROM Write Enable Signal EEWE is the write strobe to the EEPROM. When address and data are correctly set up, the EEWE bit must be written to one to write the value into the EEPROM. The EEMWE bit must be written to one before a logical one is written to EEWE, oth- erwise no EEPROM write takes place. The following procedure should be followed when writing the EEPROM (the order of steps 3 and 4 is not essential): 1. Wait until EEWE becomes zero. 2. Wait until SPMEN in SPMCSR becomes zero. 3. Write new EEPROM address to EEAR (optional). 4. Write new EEPROM data to EEDR (optional). 5. Write a logical one to the EEMWE bit while writing a zero to EEWE in EECR. 6. Within four clock cycles after setting EEMWE, write a logical one to EEWE. The EEPROM can not be programmed during a CPU write to the Flash memory. The software must check that the Flash programming is completed before initiating a new EEPROM write. Step 2 is only relevant if the software contains a Boot Loader allowing the CPU to program the Flash. If the Flash is never being updated by the CPU, step 2 can be omitted. See ”Boot Loader Support – Read-While-Write Self-Programming” on page 281 for details about Boot programming. Caution: An interrupt between step 5 and step 6 will make the write cycle fail, since the EEPROM Master Write Enable will time-out. If an interrupt routine accessing the EEPROM is interrupting another EEPROM access, the EEAR or EEDR Register will be modified, causing the interrupted EEPROM access to fail. It is recommended to have the Global Interrupt Flag cleared during all the steps to avoid these problems. When the write access time has elapsed, the EEWE bit is cleared by hardware. The user soft- ware can poll this bit and wait for a zero before writing the next byte. When EEWE has been set, the CPU is halted for two cycles before the next instruction is executed. 23 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P • Bit 0 – EERE: EEPROM Read Enable The EEPROM Read Enable Signal EERE is the read strobe to the EEPROM. When the correct address is set up in the EEAR Register, the EERE bit must be written to a logic one to trigger the EEPROM read. The EEPROM read access takes one instruction, and the requested data is available immediately. When the EEPROM is read, the CPU is halted for four cycles before the next instruction is executed. The user should poll the EEWE bit before starting the read operation. If a write operation is in progress, it is neither possible to read the EEPROM, nor to change the EEAR Register. The calibrated Oscillator is used to time the EEPROM accesses. Table 7-1 lists the typical pro- gramming time for EEPROM access from the CPU. Table 7-1. EEPROM Programming Time Number of Calibrated Symbol RC Oscillator Cycles Typical Programming Time EEPROM write (from CPU) 27,072 3.4ms The following code examples show one assembly and one C function for writing to the EEPROM. The examples assume that interrupts are controlled (e.g. by disabling interrupts glob- ally) so that no interrupts will occur during execution of these functions. The examples also assume that no Flash Boot Loader is present in the software. If such code is present, the EEPROM write function must also wait for any ongoing SPM command to finish. 24 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Assembly Code Example EEPROM_write: ; Wait for completion of previous write sbic EECR,EEWE rjmp EEPROM_write ; Set up address (r18:r17) in address register out EEARH, r18 out EEARL, r17 ; Write data (r16) to Data Register out EEDR,r16 ; Write logical one to EEMWE sbi EECR,EEMWE ; Start eeprom write by setting EEWE sbi EECR,EEWE ret C Code Example void EEPROM_write(unsigned int uiAddress, unsigned char ucData) { /* Wait for completion of previous write */ while(EECR & (1<<EEWE)) ; /* Set up address and Data Registers */ EEAR = uiAddress; EEDR = ucData; /* Write logical one to EEMWE */ EECR |= (1<<EEMWE); /* Start eeprom write by setting EEWE */ EECR |= (1<<EEWE); } The next code examples show assembly and C functions for reading the EEPROM. The exam- ples assume that interrupts are controlled so that no interrupts will occur during execution of these functions. 25 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Assembly Code Example EEPROM_read: ; Wait for completion of previous write sbic EECR,EEWE rjmp EEPROM_read ; Set up address (r18:r17) in address register out EEARH, r18 out EEARL, r17 ; Start eeprom read by writing EERE sbi EECR,EERE ; Read data from Data Register in r16,EEDR ret C Code Example unsigned char EEPROM_read(unsigned int uiAddress) { /* Wait for completion of previous write */ while(EECR & (1<<EEWE)) ; /* Set up address register */ EEAR = uiAddress; /* Start eeprom read by writing EERE */ EECR |= (1<<EERE); /* Return data from Data Register */ return EEDR; } 7.6.5 GPIOR2 – General Purpose I/O Register 2 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0x2B (0x4B) MSB LSB GPIOR2 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 7.6.6 GPIOR1 – General Purpose I/O Register 1 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0x2A (0x4A) MSB LSB GPIOR1 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 7.6.7 GPIOR0 – General Purpose I/O Register 0 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0x1E (0x3E) MSB LSB GPIOR0 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 26 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 8. System Clock and Clock Options 8.1 Clock Systems and their Distribution Figure 8-1 presents the principal clock systems in the Atmel®AVR® and their distribution. All of the clocks need not be active at a given time. In order to reduce power consumption, the clocks to modules not being used can be halted by using different sleep modes, as described in ”Power Management and Sleep Modes” on page 37. The clock systems are detailed below. Figure 8-1. Clock Distribution Asynchronous General I/O Flash and LCD Controller Timer/Counter Modules CPU Core RAM EEPROM clkI/O AVR Clock clkCPU Control Unit clk clk ASY FLASH Reset Logic Watchdog Timer Source clock Watchdog clock Clock Watchdog Multiplexer Oscillator Timer/Counter Crystal Low-frequency Calibrated RC External Clock Oscillator Oscillator Crystal Oscillator Oscillator 8.1.1 CPU Clock – clk CPU The CPU clock is routed to parts of the system concerned with operation of the AVR core. Examples of such modules are the General Purpose Register File, the Status Register and the data memory holding the Stack Pointer. Halting the CPU clock inhibits the core from performing general operations and calculations. 8.1.2 I/O Clock – clk I/O The I/O clock is used by the majority of the I/O modules, like Timer/Counters, SPI, and USART. The I/O clock is also used by the External Interrupt module, but note that some external inter- rupts are detected by asynchronous logic, allowing such interrupts to be detected even if the I/O clock is halted. Also note that start condition detection in the USI module is carried out asynchro- nously when clk is halted, enabling USI start condition detection in all sleep modes. I/O 8.1.3 Flash Clock – clk FLASH The Flash clock controls operation of the Flash interface. The Flash clock is usually active simul- taneously with the CPU clock. 27 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 8.1.4 Asynchronous Timer Clock – clk ASY The Asynchronous Timer clock allows the Asynchronous Timer/Counter and the LCD controller to be clocked directly from an external clock or an external 32kHz clock crystal. The dedicated clock domain allows using this Timer/Counter as a real-time counter even when the device is in sleep mode. It also allows the LCD controller output to continue while the rest of the device is in sleep mode. 8.1.5 ADC Clock – clk ADC The ADC is provided with a dedicated clock domain. This allows halting the CPU and I/O clocks in order to reduce noise generated by digital circuitry. This gives more accurate ADC conversion results. 8.2 Clock Sources The device has the following clock source options, selectable by Flash Fuse bits as shown below. The clock from the selected source is input to the AVR clock generator, and routed to the appropriate modules. Table 8-1. Device Clocking Options Select(1) Device Clocking Option CKSEL3..0 External Crystal/Ceramic Resonator 1111 - 1000 External Low-frequency Crystal 0111 - 0110 Calibrated Internal RC Oscillator 0010 External Clock 0000 Reserved 0011, 0001, 0101, 0100 Note: 1. For all fuses “1” means unprogrammed while “0” means programmed. The various choices for each clocking option is given in the following sections. When the CPU wakes up from Power-down or Power-save, the selected clock source is used to time the start- up, ensuring stable Oscillator operation before instruction execution starts. When the CPU starts from reset, there is an additional delay allowing the power to reach a stable level before com- mencing normal operation. The Watchdog Oscillator is used for timing this real-time part of the start-up time. The number of WDT Oscillator cycles used for each time-out is shown in Table 8- 2. The frequency of the Watchdog Oscillator is voltage dependent as shown in ”Typical Charac- teristics” on page 342. Table 8-2. Number of Watchdog Oscillator Cycles Typ Time-out (V = 5.0V) Typ Time-out (V = 3.0V) Number of Cycles CC CC 4.1ms 4.3ms 4K (4,096) 65ms 69ms 64K (65,536) 8.3 Default Clock Source The device is shipped with CKSEL = “0010”, SUT = “10”, and CKDIV8 programmed. The default clock source setting is the Internal RC Oscillator with longest start-up time and an initial system clock prescaling of 8. This default setting ensures that all users can make their desired clock source setting using an In-System or Parallel programmer. 28 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 8.4 Crystal Oscillator XTAL1 and XTAL2 are input and output, respectively, of an inverting amplifier which can be con- figured for use as an On-chip Oscillator, as shown in Figure 8-2. Either a quartz crystal or a ceramic resonator may be used. C1 and C2 should always be equal for both crystals and resonators. The optimal value of the capacitors depends on the crystal or resonator in use, the amount of stray capacitance, and the electromagnetic noise of the environment. Some initial guidelines for choosing capacitors for use with crystals are given in Table 8-3. For ceramic resonators, the capacitor values given by the manufacturer should be used. Figure 8-2. Crystal Oscillator Connections C2 XTAL2 C1 XTAL1 GND The Oscillator can operate in three different modes, each optimized for a specific frequency range. The operating mode is selected by the fuses CKSEL3..1 as shown in Table 8-3. Table 8-3. Crystal Oscillator Operating Modes Frequency Range Recommended Range for Capacitors C1 and CKSEL3..1 (MHz) C2 for Use with Crystals (pF) 100(1) 0.4 - 0.9 – 101 0.9 - 3.0 12 - 22 110 3.0 - 8.0 12 - 22 111 8.0 - 12 - 22 Note: 1. This option should not be used with crystals, only with ceramic resonators. The CKSEL0 Fuse together with the SUT1...0 Fuses select the start-up times as shown in Table 8-4. Table 8-4. Start-up Times for the Crystal Oscillator Clock Selection Start-up Time from Additional Delay Power-down and from Reset CKSEL0 SUT1..0 Power-save (V = 5.0V) Recommended Usage CC Ceramic resonator, fast 0 00 258 CK(1) 14CK + 4.1ms rising power Ceramic resonator, 0 01 258 CK(1) 14CK + 65ms slowly rising power Ceramic resonator, 0 10 1K CK(2) 14CK BOD enabled 29 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Table 8-4. Start-up Times for the Crystal Oscillator Clock Selection (Continued) Start-up Time from Additional Delay Power-down and from Reset CKSEL0 SUT1..0 Power-save (V = 5.0V) Recommended Usage CC 0 11 1K CK(2) 14CK + 4.1ms Ceramic resonator, fast rising power 1 00 1K CK(2) 14CK + 65ms Ceramic resonator, slowly rising power 01 16K CK 14CK Crystal Oscillator, BOD 1 enabled 10 16K CK 14CK + 4.1ms Crystal Oscillator, fast 1 rising power 11 16K CK 14CK + 65ms Crystal Oscillator, slowly 1 rising power Notes: 1. These options should only be used when not operating close to the maximum frequency of the device, and only if frequency stability at start-up is not important for the application. These options are not suitable for crystals. 2. These options are intended for use with ceramic resonators and will ensure frequency stability at start-up. They can also be used with crystals when not operating close to the maximum fre- quency of the device, and if frequency stability at start-up is not important for the application. 8.5 Low-frequency Crystal Oscillator The Low-frequency Crystal Oscillator is optimized for use with a 32.768kHz watch crystal. When selecting crystals, load capacitance and crystal’s Equivalent Series Resistance, ESR must be taken into consideration. Both values are specified by the crystal vendor. ATmega329P/3290P oscillator is optimized for very low power consumption, and thus when selecting crystals, see Table 8-5 for maximum ESR recommendations on 6.5pF, 9.0pF and 12.5pF crystals. Table 8-5. Maximum ESR Recommendation for 32.768kHz Watch Crystal ATmega329P/3290P Crystal CL (pF) Max ESR [k](1) 6.5 75 9.0 65 12.5 30 Note: 1. Maximum ESR is typical value based on characterization The Low-frequency Crystal Oscillator provides an internal load capacitance, seeTable 8-6 on page 30 at each TOSC pin. Table 8-6. Capacitance for Low-frequency Oscillator Device 32kHz Osc. Type Cap(Xtal1/Tosc1) Cap(Xtal2/Tosc2) ATmega329P/3290P System Osc. 16pF 6pF Timer Osc. 16pF 6pF 30 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P The capacitance (Ce + Ci) needed at each TOSC pin can be calculated by using: Ce+Ci = 2CL–C s where Ce - is optional external capacitors as described in Figure 8-2 on page 29 Ci - is the pin capacitance in Table 8-7 on page 31 CL - is the load capacitance for a 32.768kHz crystal specified by the crystal vendor. C - is the total stray capacitance for one TOSC pin. S Crystals specifying load capacitance (CL) higher than the ones given in the Table 8-6 on page 30, require external capacitors applied as described in Figure 8-2 on page 29. To find suitable load capacitance for a 32.768kHz crystal, please consult the crystal datasheet. The Low-frequency Crystal Oscillator must be selected by setting the CKSEL Fuses to “0110” or “0111” as shown in Table 8-8. Start-up times are determined by the SUT Fuses as shown in Table 8-7. Table 8-7. Start-up Times for the Low-frequency Crystal Oscillator Clock Selection SUT1..0 Additional Delay from Reset (V = 5.0V) Recommended Usage CC 00 4 CK Fast rising power or BOD enabled 01 4 CK + 4.1ms Slowly rising power 10 4 CK + 65ms Stable frequency at start-up 11 Reserved Table 8-8. Start-up Times for the Low-frequency Crystal Oscillator Clock Selection CKSEL3... Start-up Time from 0 Power-down and Power-save Recommended Usage 0110(1) 1K CK 0111 32K CK Stable frequency at start-up Note: 1. This option should only be used if frequency stability at start-up is not important for the application 8.6 Calibrated Internal RC Oscillator By default, the Internal RC Oscillator provides an approximate 8MHz clock. Though voltage and temperature dependent, this clock can be very accurately calibrated by the user. The device is shipped with the CKDIV8 Fuse programmed. See ”System Clock Prescaler” on page 33 for more details. This clock may be selected as the system clock by programming the CKSEL Fuses as shown in Table 8-9 on page 32. If selected, it will operate with no external components. During reset, hardware loads the pre-programmed calibration value into the OSCCAL Register and thereby automatically calibrates the RC Oscillator. The accuracy of this calibration is shown as Factory calibration in Table 28-4 on page 335. By changing the OSCCAL register from SW, see ”OSCCAL – Oscillator Calibration Register” on page 35, it is possible to get a higher calibration accuracy than by using the factory calibration. The accuracy of this calibration is shown as User calibration in Table 28-4 on page 335. 31 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P When this Oscillator is used as the chip clock, the Watchdog Oscillator will still be used for the Watchdog Timer and for the Reset Time-out. For more information on the pre-programmed cali- bration value, see the section ”Calibration Byte” on page 299. Table 8-9. Internal Calibrated RC Oscillator Operating Modes(1)(3) Frequency Range(2) (MHz) CKSEL3...0 7.3 - 8.1 0010 Notes: 1. The device is shipped with this option selected. 2. The frequency ranges are preliminary values. 3. If 8MHz frequency exceeds the specification of the device (depends on V ), the CKDIV8 CC Fuse can be programmed in order to divide the internal frequency by 8. When this Oscillator is selected, start-up times are determined by the SUT Fuses as shown in Table 8-10 on page 32. Table 8-10. Start-up times for the internal calibrated RC Oscillator clock selection Start-up Time from Power- Additional Delay from Power Conditions down and Power-save Reset (V = 5.0V) SUT1...0 CC BOD enabled 6 CK 14CK 00 Fast rising power 6 CK 14CK + 4.1 ms 01 Slowly rising power 6 CK 14CK + 65 ms(1) 10 Reserved 11 Note: 1. The device is shipped with this option selected. 8.7 External Clock To drive the device from an external clock source, XTAL1 should be driven as shown in Figure 8-3 on page 32. To run the device on an external clock, the CKSEL Fuses must be programmed to “0000”. Figure 8-3. External Clock Drive Configuration NC XTAL2 EXTERNAL CLOCK XTAL1 SIGNAL GND When this clock source is selected, start-up times are determined by the SUT Fuses as shown in Table 8-12 on page 33. Table 8-11. Crystal Oscillator Clock Frequency CKSEL3...0 Frequency Range ATmega329P/3290P 0000 0 - 20MHz 32 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Table 8-12. Start-up Times for the External Clock Selection Start-up Time from Power- Additional Delay from SUT1..0 down and Power-save Reset (V = 5.0V) Recommended Usage CC 00 6 CK 14CK BOD enabled 01 6 CK 14CK + 4.1ms Fast rising power 10 6 CK 14CK + 65ms Slowly rising power 11 Reserved When applying an external clock, it is required to avoid sudden changes in the applied clock fre- quency to ensure stable operation of the MCU. A variation in frequency of more than 2% from one clock cycle to the next can lead to unpredictable behavior. It is required to ensure that the MCU is kept in Reset during such changes in the clock frequency. Note that the System Clock Prescaler can be used to implement run-time changes of the internal clock frequency while still ensuring stable operation. Refer to ”System Clock Prescaler” on page 33 for details. 8.8 Clock Output Buffer When the CKOUT Fuse is programmed, the system Clock will be output on CLKO. This mode is suitable when the chip clock is used to drive other circuits on the system. The clock will be out- put also during reset and the normal operation of I/O pin will be overridden when the fuse is programmed. Any clock source, including internal RC Oscillator, can be selected when CLKO serves as clock output. If the System Clock Prescaler is used, it is the divided system clock that is output when the CKOUT Fuse is programmed. 8.9 Timer/Counter Oscillator ATmega329P/3290P uses the same crystal oscillator for Low-frequency Oscillator and Timer/Counter Oscillator. See ”Low-frequency Crystal Oscillator” on page 30 for details on the oscillator and crystal requirements. ATmega329P/3290P share the Timer/Counter Oscillator Pins (TOSC1 and TOSC2) with XTAL1 and XTAL2. When using the Timer/Counter Oscillator, the system clock needs to be four times the oscillator frequency. Due to this and the pin sharing, the Timer/Counter Oscillator can only be used when the Calibrated Internal RC Oscillator is selected as system clock source. Applying an external clock source to TOSC1 can be done if EXTCLK in the ASSR Register is written to logic one. See ”Asynchronous Operation of Timer/Counter2” on page 152 for further description on selecting external clock as input instead of a 32.768kHz watch crystal. 8.10 System Clock Prescaler The ATmega329P/3290P system clock can be divided by setting the Clock Prescale Register – CLKPR. This feature can be used to decrease power consumption when the requirement for processing power is low. This can be used with all clock source options, and it will affect the clock frequency of the CPU and all synchronous peripherals. clk , clk , clk , and clk I/O ADC CPU FLASH are divided by a factor as shown in Table 8-13 on page 36. 33 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 8.10.1 Switching Time When switching between prescaler settings, the System Clock Prescaler ensures that no glitches occur in the clock system and that no intermediate frequency is higher than neither the clock frequency corresponding to the previous setting, nor the clock frequency corresponding to the new setting. The ripple counter that implements the prescaler runs at the frequency of the undivided clock, which may be faster than the CPU’s clock frequency. Hence, it is not possible to determine the state of the prescaler – even if it were readable, and the exact time it takes to switch from one clock division to another cannot be exactly predicted. From the time the CLKPS values are written, it takes between T1 + T2 and T1 + 2*T2 before the new clock frequency is active. In this interval, 2 active clock edges are produced. Here, T1 is the previous clock period, and T2 is the period corresponding to the new prescaler setting. 34 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 8.11 Register Description 8.11.1 OSCCAL – Oscillator Calibration Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 (0x66) CAL7 CAL6 CAL5 CAL4 CAL3 CAL2 CAL1 CAL0 OSCCAL Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value Device Specific Calibration Value • Bits 7:0 – CAL7:0: Oscillator Calibration Value The Oscillator Calibration Register is used to trim the Calibrated Internal RC Oscillator to remove process variations from the oscillator frequency. A pre-programmed calibration value is automatically written to this register during chip reset, giving the Factory calibrated frequency as specified in Table 28-4 on page 335. The application software can write this register to change the oscillator frequency. The oscillator can be calibrated to frequencies as specified in Table 28- 4 on page 335. Calibration outside that range is not guaranteed. Note that this oscillator is used to time EEPROM and Flash write accesses, and these write times will be affected accordingly. If the EEPROM or Flash are written, do not calibrate to more than 8.8MHz. Otherwise, the EEPROM or Flash write may fail. The CAL7 bit determines the range of operation for the oscillator. Setting this bit to 0 gives the lowest frequency range, setting this bit to 1 gives the highest frequency range. The two fre- quency ranges are overlapping, in other words a setting of OSCCAL = 0x7F gives a higher frequency than OSCCAL = 0x80. The CAL6...0 bits are used to tune the frequency within the selected range. A setting of 0x00 gives the lowest frequency in that range, and a setting of 0x7F gives the highest frequency in the range. 8.11.2 CLKPR – Clock Prescale Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 (0x61) CLKPCE – – – CLKPS3 CLKPS2 CLKPS1 CLKPS0 CLKPR Read/Write R/W R R R R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 See Bit Description • Bit 7 – CLKPCE: Clock Prescaler Change Enable The CLKPCE bit must be written to logic one to enable change of the CLKPS bits. The CLKPCE bit is only updated when the other bits in CLKPR are simultaneously written to zero. CLKPCE is cleared by hardware four cycles after it is written or when CLKPS bits are written. Rewriting the CLKPCE bit within this time-out period does neither extend the time-out period, nor clear the CLKPCE bit. • Bits 3:0 – CLKPS3:0: Clock Prescaler Select Bits 3:0 These bits define the division factor between the selected clock source and the internal system clock. These bits can be written run-time to vary the clock frequency to suit the application requirements. As the divider divides the master clock input to the MCU, the speed of all synchro- nous peripherals is reduced when a division factor is used. The division factors are given in Table 8-13 on page 36. To avoid unintentional changes of clock frequency, a special write procedure must be followed to change the CLKPS bits: 35 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 1. Write the Clock Prescaler Change Enable (CLKPCE) bit to one and all other bits in CLKPR to zero. 2. Within four cycles, write the desired value to CLKPS while writing a zero to CLKPCE. Interrupts must be disabled when changing prescaler setting to make sure the write procedure is not interrupted. The CKDIV8 Fuse determines the initial value of the CLKPS bits. If CKDIV8 is unprogrammed, the CLKPS bits will be reset to “0000”. If CKDIV8 is programmed, CLKPS bits are reset to “0011”, giving a division factor of 8 at start up. This feature should be used if the selected clock source has a higher frequency than the maximum frequency of the device at the present operat- ing conditions. Note that any value can be written to the CLKPS bits regardless of the CKDIV8 Fuse setting. The Application software must ensure that a sufficient division factor is chosen if the selected clock source has a higher frequency than the maximum frequency of the device at the present operating conditions. The device is shipped with the CKDIV8 Fuse programmed. Table 8-13. Clock Prescaler Select CLKPS3 CLKPS2 CLKPS1 CLKPS0 Clock Division Factor 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 2 0 0 1 0 4 0 0 1 1 8 0 1 0 0 16 0 1 0 1 32 0 1 1 0 64 0 1 1 1 128 1 0 0 0 256 1 0 0 1 Reserved 1 0 1 0 Reserved 1 0 1 1 Reserved 1 1 0 0 Reserved 1 1 0 1 Reserved 1 1 1 0 Reserved 1 1 1 1 Reserved 36 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 9. Power Management and Sleep Modes 9.1 Overview Sleep modes enable the application to shut down unused modules in the MCU, thereby saving- power. The AVR provides various sleep modes allowing the user to tailor the power consumption to the application’s requirements. When enabled, the Brown-out Detector (BOD) actively monitors the power supply voltage during the sleep periods. To further save power, it is possible to disable the BOD in some sleep modes. See ”BOD Disable” on page 38 for more details. 9.2 Sleep Modes Figure 8-1 on page 27 presents the different clock systems in the ATmega329P/3290P, and their distribution. The figure is helpful in selecting an appropriate sleep mode. Table 9-1 shows the different sleep modes, their wake up sources and BOD disable ability. Table 9-1. Active Clock Domains and Wake-up Sources in the Different Sleep Modes. Active Clock Domains Oscillators Wake-up Sources y d Sleep Mode clkCPU clkFLASH clkIO clkADC clkASY Main ClockSource Enabled Timer Osc Enabled INT2:0 and Pin Change TWI Address Match Timer2 SPM/EEPROM Rea ADC WDT Interrupt Other I/O SoftwareBOD Disdable Idle X X X X X(2) X X X X X X X ADCNRM X X X X(2) X(3) X X(2) X X X Power-down X(3) X X X Power-save X X(2) X(3) X X X X Standby(1) X X(3) X X X Notes: 1. Only recommended with external crystal or resonator selected as clock source. 2. If either LCD controller or Timer/Counter2 is running in asynchronous mode. 3. For INT0, only level interrupt. To enter any of the sleep modes, the SE bit in SMCR must be written to logic one and a SLEEP instruction must be executed. The SM2, SM1, and SM0 bits in the SMCR Register select which sleep mode will be activated by the SLEEP instruction. See Table 9-2 on page 42 for a summary. If an enabled interrupt occurs while the MCU is in a sleep mode, the MCU wakes up. The MCU is then halted for four cycles in addition to the start-up time, executes the interrupt routine, and resumes execution from the instruction following SLEEP. The contents of the Register File and SRAM are unaltered when the device wakes up from sleep. If a reset occurs during sleep mode, the MCU wakes up and executes from the Reset Vector. 37 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 9.3 BOD Disable When the Brown-out Detector (BOD) is enabled by BODLEVEL fuses, Table 27-3 on page 297, the BOD is actively monitoring the power supply voltage during a sleep period. To save power, it is possible to disable the BOD by software for some of the sleep modes, see Table 9-1 on page 37. The sleep mode power consumption will then be at the same level as when BOD is globally disabled by fuses. If BOD is disabled in software, the BOD function is turned off immediately after entering the sleep mode. Upon wake-up from sleep, BOD is automatically enabled again. This ensures safe operation in case the V level has dropped during the sleep period. CC When the BOD has been disabled, the wake-up time from sleep mode will be approximately 60 µs to ensure that the BOD is working correctly before the MCU continues executing code. BOD disable is controlled by bit 6, BODS (BOD Sleep) in the control register MCUCR, see ”MCUCR – MCU Control Register” on page 42. Writing this bit to one turns off the BOD in rele- vant sleep modes, while a zero in this bit keeps BOD active. Default setting keeps BOD active, i.e. BODS set to zero. Writing to the BODS bit is controlled by a timed sequence and an enable bit, see ”MCUCR – MCU Control Register” on page 42. 9.4 Idle Mode When the SM2:0 bits are written to 000, the SLEEP instruction makes the MCU enter Idle mode, stopping the CPU but allowing LCD controller, the SPI, USART, Analog Comparator, ADC, USI, Timer/Counters, Watchdog, and the interrupt system to continue operating. This sleep mode basically halts clk and clk , while allowing the other clocks to run. CPU FLASH Idle mode enables the MCU to wake up from external triggered interrupts as well as internal ones like the Timer Overflow and USART Transmit Complete interrupts. If wake-up from the Analog Comparator interrupt is not required, the Analog Comparator can be powered down by setting the ACD bit in the Analog Comparator Control and Status Register – ACSR. This will reduce power consumption in Idle mode. If the ADC is enabled, a conversion starts automati- cally when this mode is entered. 9.5 ADC Noise Reduction Mode When the SM2:0 bits are written to 001, the SLEEP instruction makes the MCU enter ADC Noise Reduction mode, stopping the CPU but allowing the ADC, the external interrupts, the USI start condition detection, Timer/Counter2, LCD Controller, and the Watchdog to continue operat- ing (if enabled). This sleep mode basically halts clk , clk , and clk , while allowing the I/O CPU FLASH other clocks to run. This improves the noise environment for the ADC, enabling higher resolution measurements. If the ADC is enabled, a conversion starts automatically when this mode is entered. Apart form the ADC Conversion Complete interrupt, only an External Reset, a Watchdog Reset, a Brown-out Reset, an LCD controller interrupt, USI start condition interrupt, a Timer/Counter2 interrupt, an SPM/EEPROM ready interrupt, an external level interrupt on INT0 or a pin change interrupt can wake up the MCU from ADC Noise Reduction mode. 9.6 Power-down Mode When the SM2:0 bits are written to 010, the SLEEP instruction makes the MCU enter Power- down mode. In this mode, the external Oscillator is stopped, while the external interrupts, the 38 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P USI start condition detection, and the Watchdog continue operating (if enabled). Only an Exter- nal Reset, a Watchdog Reset, a Brown-out Reset, USI start condition interrupt, an external level interrupt on INT0, or a pin change interrupt can wake up the MCU. This sleep mode basically halts all generated clocks, allowing operation of asynchronous modules only. Note that if a level triggered interrupt is used for wake-up from Power-down mode, the changed level must be held for some time to wake up the MCU. Refer to ”External Interrupts” on page 58 for details. When waking up from Power-down mode, there is a delay from the wake-up condition occurs until the wake-up becomes effective. This allows the clock to restart and become stable after having been stopped. The wake-up period is defined by the same CKSEL Fuses that define the Reset Time-out period, as described in ”Clock Sources” on page 28. 9.7 Power-save Mode When the SM2:0 bits are written to 011, the SLEEP instruction makes the MCU enter Power- save mode. This mode is identical to Power-down, with one exception: If Timer/Counter2 and/or the LCD controller are enabled, they will keep running during sleep. The device can wake up from either Timer Overflow or Output Compare event from Timer/Counter2 if the corresponding Timer/Counter2 interrupt enable bits are set in TIMSK2, and the Global Interrupt Enable bit in SREG is set. It can also wake up from an LCD controller interrupt. If neither Timer/Counter2 nor the LCD controller is running, Power-down mode is recommended instead of Power-save mode. The LCD controller and Timer/Counter2 can be clocked both synchronously and asynchronously in Power-save mode. The clock source for the two modules can be selected independent of each other. If neither the LCD controller nor the Timer/Counter2 is using the asynchronous clock, the Timer/Counter Oscillator is stopped during sleep. If neither the LCD controller nor the Timer/Counter2 is using the synchronous clock, the clock source is stopped during sleep. Note that even if the synchronous clock is running in Power-save, this clock is only available for the LCD controller and Timer/Counter2. 9.8 Standby Mode When the SM2:0 bits are 110 and an external crystal/resonator clock option is selected, the SLEEP instruction makes the MCU enter Standby mode. This mode is identical to Power-down with the exception that the Oscillator is kept running. From Standby mode, the device wakes up in six clock cycles. 9.9 Power Reduction Register The Power Reduction Register (PRR), ”PRR – Power Reduction Register” on page 43, provides a method to stop the clock to individual peripherals to reduce power consumption. The current state of the peripheral is frozen and the I/O registers can not be read or written. Resources used by the peripheral when stopping the clock will remain occupied, hence the peripheral should in most cases be disabled before stopping the clock. Waking up a module, which is done by clear- ing the bit in PRR, puts the module in the same state as before shutdown. Module shutdown can be used in Idle mode and Active mode to significantly reduce the overall power consumption. In all other sleep modes, the clock is already stopped. Module shutdown can be used in IDLE 39 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P mode and active mode to reduce the overall power consumption. In all other sleep modes, the clock is already stopped. 9.10 Minimizing Power Consumption There are several possibilities to consider when trying to minimize the power consumption in an AVR controlled system. In general, sleep modes should be used as much as possible, and the sleep mode should be selected so that as few as possible of the device’s functions are operat- ing. All functions not needed should be disabled. In particular, the following modules may need special consideration when trying to achieve the lowest possible power consumption. 9.10.1 Analog to Digital Converter If enabled, the ADC will be enabled in all sleep modes. To save power, the ADC should be dis- abled before entering any sleep mode. When the ADC is turned off and on again, the next conversion will be an extended conversion. Refer to ”Analog to Digital Converter” on page 213 for details on ADC operation. 9.10.2 Analog Comparator When entering Idle mode, the Analog Comparator should be disabled if not used. When entering ADC Noise Reduction mode, the Analog Comparator should be disabled. In other sleep modes, the Analog Comparator is automatically disabled. However, if the Analog Comparator is set up to use the Internal Voltage Reference as input, the Analog Comparator should be disabled in all sleep modes. Otherwise, the Internal Voltage Reference will be enabled, independent of sleep mode. Refer to ”Analog Comparator” on page 210 for details on how to configure the Analog Comparator. 9.10.3 Brown-out Detector If the Brown-out Detector is not needed by the application, this module should be turned off. If the Brown-out Detector is enabled by the BODLEVEL Fuses, it will be enabled in all sleep modes, and hence, always consume power. In the deeper sleep modes, this will contribute sig- nificantly to the total current consumption. Refer to ”Brown-out Detection” on page 47 for details on how to configure the Brown-out Detector. 9.10.4 Internal Voltage Reference The Internal Voltage Reference will be enabled when needed by the Brown-out Detection, the Analog Comparator or the ADC. If these modules are disabled as described in the sections above, the internal voltage reference will be disabled and it will not be consuming power. When turned on again, the user must allow the reference to start up before the output is used. If the reference is kept on in sleep mode, the output can be used immediately. Refer to ”Internal Volt- age Reference” on page 48 for details on the start-up time. 9.10.5 Watchdog Timer If the Watchdog Timer is not needed in the application, the module should be turned off. If the Watchdog Timer is enabled, it will be enabled in all sleep modes, and hence, always consume power. In the deeper sleep modes, this will contribute significantly to the total current consump- tion. Refer to ”Watchdog Timer” on page 48 for details on how to configure the Watchdog Timer. 40 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 9.10.6 Port Pins When entering a sleep mode, all port pins should be configured to use minimum power. The most important is then to ensure that no pins drive resistive loads. In sleep modes where both the I/O clock (clk ) and the ADC clock (clk ) are stopped, the input buffers of the device will I/O ADC be disabled. This ensures that no power is consumed by the input logic when not needed. In some cases, the input logic is needed for detecting wake-up conditions, and it will then be enabled. Refer to the section ”Digital Input Enable and Sleep Modes” on page 67 for details on which pins are enabled. If the input buffer is enabled and the input signal is left floating or have an analog signal level close to V /2, the input buffer will use excessive power. CC For analog input pins, the digital input buffer should be disabled at all times. An analog signal level close to V /2 on an input pin can cause significant current even in active mode. Digital CC input buffers can be disabled by writing to the Digital Input Disable Registers (DIDR1 and DIDR0). Refer to ”DIDR1 – Digital Input Disable Register 1” on page 212 and ”DIDR0 – Digital Input Disable Register 0” on page 229 for details. 9.10.7 JTAG Interface and On-chip Debug System If the On-chip debug system is enabled by the OCDEN Fuse and the chip enter Power down or Power save sleep mode, the main clock source remains enabled. In these sleep modes, this will contribute significantly to the total current consumption. There are three alternative ways to avoid this: • Disable OCDEN Fuse. • Disable JTAGEN Fuse. • Write one to the JTD bit in MCUCR. The TDO pin is left floating when the JTAG interface is enabled while the JTAG TAP controller is not shifting data. If the hardware connected to the TDO pin does not pull up the logic level, power consumption will increase. Note that the TDI pin for the next device in the scan chain con- tains a pull-up that avoids this problem. Writing the JTD bit in the MCUCR register to one or leaving the JTAG fuse unprogrammed disables the JTAG interface. 41 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 9.11 Register Description 9.11.1 SMCR – Sleep Mode Control Register The Sleep Mode Control Register contains control bits for power management. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0x33 (0x53) – – – – SM2 SM1 SM0 SE SMCR Read/Write R R R R R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 • Bits 3, 2, 1 – SM2:0: Sleep Mode Select Bits 2, 1, and 0 These bits select between the five available sleep modes as shown in Table 9-2. Table 9-2. Sleep Mode Select SM2 SM1 SM0 Sleep Mode 0 0 0 Idle 0 0 1 ADC Noise Reduction 0 1 0 Power-down 0 1 1 Power-save 1 0 0 Reserved 1 0 1 Reserved 1 1 0 Standby(1) 1 1 1 Reserved Note: 1. Standby mode is only recommended for use with external crystals or resonators. • Bit 1 – SE: Sleep Enable The SE bit must be written to logic one to make the MCU enter the sleep mode when the SLEEP instruction is executed. To avoid the MCU entering the sleep mode unless it is the programmer’s purpose, it is recommended to write the Sleep Enable (SE) bit to one just before the execution of the SLEEP instruction and to clear it immediately after waking up. 9.11.2 MCUCR – MCU Control Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0x35 (0x55) JTD BODS BODSE PUD – – IVSEL IVCE MCUCR Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R R R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 • Bit 6 – BODS: BOD Sleep The BODS bit must be written to logic one in order to turn off BOD during sleep, see Table 9-1 on page 37. Writing to the BODS bit is controlled by a timed sequence and an enable bit, BODSE in MCUCR. To disable BOD in relevant sleep modes, both BODS and BODSE must first be set to one. Then, to set the BODS bit, BODS must be set to one and BODSE must be set to zero within four clock cycles. The BODS bit is active three clock cycles after it is set. A sleep instruction must be executed while BODS is active in order to turn off the BOD for the actual sleep mode. The BODS bit is automatically cleared after three clock cycles. 42 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P • Bit 5 – BODSE: BOD Sleep Enable BODSE enables setting of BODS control bit, as explained in BODS bit description. BOD disable is controlled by a timed sequence. 9.11.3 PRR – Power Reduction Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 (0x64) – – – PRLCD PRTIM1 PRSPI PRUSART0 PRADC PRR Read/Write R R R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 • Bits 7:5 – Reserved These bits are reserved and will always read as zero. • Bit 4 – PRLCD: Power Reduction LCD Writing logic one to this bit shuts down the LCD controller. The LCD controller must be disabled and the display discharged before shut down. See "Disabling the LCD" on page 217 for details on how to disable the LCD controller. • Bit 3 – PRTIM1: Power Reduction Timer/Counter1 Writing logic one to this bit shuts down the Timer/Counter1 module. When Timer/Counter1 is enabled, operation will continue like before the shutdown. • Bit 2 – PRSPI: Power Reduction Serial Peripheral Interface Writing logic one to this bit shuts down the Serial Peripheral Interface by stopping the clock to the module. When waking up the SPI again, the SPI should be re-initialized to ensure proper operation. • Bit 1 – PRUSART: Power Reduction USART Writing logic one to this bit shuts down the USART by stopping the clock to the module. When waking up the USART again, the USART should be re-initialized to ensure proper operation. • Bit 0 – PRADC: Power Reduction ADC Writing logic one to this bit shuts down the ADC. The ADC must be disabled before shut down. The analog comparator cannot use the ADC input MUX when the ADC is shut down. Note: The Analog Comparator is disabled using the ACD-bit in the ”ACSR – Analog Comparator Control and Status Register” on page 211. 43 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 10. System Control and Reset 10.1 Resetting the AVR During reset, all I/O Registers are set to their initial values, and the program starts execution from the Reset Vector. The instruction placed at the Reset Vector must be a JMP – Absolute Jump – instruction to the reset handling routine. If the program never enables an interrupt source, the Interrupt Vectors are not used, and regular program code can be placed at these locations. This is also the case if the Reset Vector is in the Application section while the Interrupt Vectors are in the Boot section or vice versa. The circuit diagram in ”Reset Logic” on page 45 shows the reset logic. ”System and Reset Characteristics” on page 336 defines the electrical parameters of the reset circuitry. The I/O ports of the AVR are immediately reset to their initial state when a reset source goes active. This does not require any clock source to be running. After all reset sources have gone inactive, a delay counter is invoked, stretching the internal reset. This allows the power to reach a stable level before normal operation starts. The time-out period of the delay counter is defined by the user through the SUT and CKSEL Fuses. The dif- ferent selections for the delay period are presented in ”Clock Sources” on page 28. 10.2 Reset Sources The ATmega329P/3290P has five sources of reset: • Power-on Reset. The MCU is reset when the supply voltage is below the Power-on Reset threshold (V ). POT • External Reset. The MCU is reset when a low level is present on the RESET pin for longer than the minimum pulse length. • Watchdog Reset. The MCU is reset when the Watchdog Timer period expires and the Watchdog is enabled. • Brown-out Reset. The MCU is reset when the supply voltage V is below the Brown-out Reset CC threshold (V ) and the Brown-out Detector is enabled. BOT • JTAG AVR Reset. The MCU is reset as long as there is a logic one in the Reset Register, one of the scan chains of the JTAG system. Refer to the section ”IEEE 1149.1 (JTAG) Boundary- scan” on page 254 for details. 44 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Figure 10-1. Reset Logic DATA BUS MCU Status Register (MCUSR) FFFFF RRRRR OOTDT Power-on Reset PBEXWJ Circuit Brown-out BODLEVEL [1..0] Reset Circuit Pull-up Resistor SPIKE FILTER JTAG Reset Register Watchdog Oscillator Clock CK Delay Counters Generator TIMEOUT CKSEL[3:0] SUT[1:0] 10.2.1 Power-on Reset A Power-on Reset (POR) pulse is generated by an On-chip detection circuit. The detection level is defined in ”System and Reset Characteristics” on page 336. The POR is activated whenever V is below the detection level. The POR circuit can be used to trigger the start-up Reset, as CC well as to detect a failure in supply voltage. A Power-on Reset (POR) circuit ensures that the device is reset from Power-on. Reaching the Power-on Reset threshold voltage invokes the delay counter, which determines how long the device is kept in RESET after V rise. The RESET signal is activated again, without any delay, CC when V decreases below the detection level. CC 45 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Figure 10-2. MCU Start-up, RESET Tied to V CC V V POT CC V RESET RST t TIME-OUT TOUT INTERNAL RESET Figure 10-3. MCU Start-up, RESET Extended Externally V POT V CC V RESET RST t TIME-OUT TOUT INTERNAL RESET 10.2.2 External Reset An External Reset is generated by a low level on the RESET pin. Reset pulses longer than the minimum pulse width (see ”System and Reset Characteristics” on page 336) will generate a reset, even if the clock is not running. Shorter pulses are not guaranteed to generate a reset. When the applied signal reaches the Reset Threshold Voltage – V – on its positive edge, the RST delay counter starts the MCU after the Time-out period – t –has expired. TOUT Figure 10-4. External Reset During Operation CC 46 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 10.2.3 Brown-out Detection ATmega329P/3290P has an On-chip Brown-out Detection (BOD) circuit for monitoring the V CC level during operation by comparing it to a fixed trigger level. The trigger level for the BOD can be selected by the BODLEVEL Fuses. The trigger level has a hysteresis to ensure spike free Brown-out Detection. The hysteresis on the detection level should be interpreted as V = BOT+ V + V /2 and V = V - V /2.When the BOD is enabled, and V decreases to a BOT HYST BOT- BOT HYST CC value below the trigger level (V in Figure 10-5), the Brown-out Reset is immediately acti- BOT- vated. When V increases above the trigger level (V in Figure 10-5), the delay counter CC BOT+ starts the MCU after the Time-out period t has expired. TOUT The BOD circuit will only detect a drop in V if the voltage stays below the trigger level for lon- CC ger than t given in ”System and Reset Characteristics” on page 336. BOD Figure 10-5. Brown-out Reset During Operation VCC V VBOT+ BOT- RESET TIME-OUT tTOUT INTERNAL RESET 10.2.4 Watchdog Reset When the Watchdog times out, it will generate a short reset pulse of one CK cycle duration. On the falling edge of this pulse, the delay timer starts counting the Time-out period t . Refer to TOUT page 48 for details on operation of the Watchdog Timer. Figure 10-6. Watchdog Reset During Operation CC CK 47 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 10.3 Internal Voltage Reference ATmega329P/3290P features an internal bandgap reference. This reference is used for Brown- out Detection, and it can be used as an input to the Analog Comparator or the ADC. 10.3.1 Voltage Reference Enable Signals and Start-up Time The voltage reference has a start-up time that may influence the way it should be used. The start-up time is given in ”System and Reset Characteristics” on page 336. To save power, the reference is not always turned on. The reference is on during the following situations: 1. When the BOD is enabled (by programming the BODLEVEL [1:0] Fuse). 2. When the bandgap reference is connected to the Analog Comparator (by setting the ACBG bit in ACSR). 3. When the ADC is enabled. Thus, when the BOD is not enabled, after setting the ACBG bit or enabling the ADC, the user must always allow the reference to start up before the output from the Analog Comparator or ADC is used. To reduce power consumption in Power-down mode, the user can avoid the three conditions above to ensure that the reference is turned off before entering Power-down mode. 10.4 Watchdog Timer The Watchdog Timer is clocked from a separate On-chip Oscillator which runs at 1MHz. This is the typical value at V = 5V. See characterization data for typical values at other V levels. By CC CC controlling the Watchdog Timer prescaler, the Watchdog Reset interval can be adjusted as shown in Table 10-2 on page 51. The WDR – Watchdog Reset – instruction resets the Watch- dog Timer. The Watchdog Timer is also reset when it is disabled and when a Chip Reset occurs. Eight different clock cycle periods can be selected to determine the reset period. If the reset period expires without another Watchdog Reset, the ATmega329P/3290P resets and executes from the Reset Vector. For timing details on the Watchdog Reset, refer to Table 10-2 on page 51. To prevent unintentional disabling of the Watchdog or unintentional change of time-out period, two different safety levels are selected by the fuse WDTON as shown in Table 10-1. Refer to ”Timed Sequences for Changing the Configuration of the Watchdog Timer” on page 49 for details. Table 10-1. WDT Configuration as a Function of the Fuse Settings of WDTON Safety WDT Initial How to Disable the How to Change Time- WDTON Level State WDT out Unprogrammed 1 Disabled Timed sequence Timed sequence Programmed 2 Enabled Always enabled Timed sequence 48 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Figure 10-7. Watchdog Timer WATCHDOG OSCILLATOR 10.4.1 Timed Sequences for Changing the Configuration of the Watchdog Timer The sequence for changing configuration differs slightly between the two safety levels. Separate procedures are described for each level. 10.4.2 Safety Level 1 In this mode, the Watchdog Timer is initially disabled, but can be enabled by writing the WDE bit to 1 without any restriction. A timed sequence is needed when changing the Watchdog Time-out period or disabling an enabled Watchdog Timer. To disable an enabled Watchdog Timer, and/or changing the Watchdog Time-out, the following procedure must be followed: 1. In the same operation, write a logic one to WDCE and WDE. A logic one must be written to WDE regardless of the previous value of the WDE bit. 2. Within the next four clock cycles, in the same operation, write the WDE and WDP bits as desired, but with the WDCE bit cleared. 10.4.3 Safety Level 2 In this mode, the Watchdog Timer is always enabled, and the WDE bit will always read as one. A timed sequence is needed when changing the Watchdog Time-out period. To change the Watchdog Time-out, the following procedure must be followed: 1. In the same operation, write a logical one to WDCE and WDE. Even though the WDE always is set, the WDE must be written to one to start the timed sequence. Within the next four clock cycles, in the same operation, write the WDP bits as desired, but with the WDCE bit cleared. The value written to the WDE bit is irrelevant. 49 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 10.5 Register Description 10.5.1 MCUSR – MCU Status Register The MCU Status Register provides information on which reset source caused an MCU reset. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0x35 (0x55) – – – JTRF WDRF BORF EXTRF PORF MCUSR Read/Write R R R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 See Bit Description • Bit 4 – JTRF: JTAG Reset Flag This bit is set if a reset is being caused by a logic one in the JTAG Reset Register selected by the JTAG instruction AVR_RESET. This bit is reset by a Power-on Reset, or by writing a logic zero to the flag. • Bit 3 – WDRF: Watchdog Reset Flag This bit is set if a Watchdog Reset occurs. The bit is reset by a Power-on Reset, or by writing a logic zero to the flag. • Bit 2 – BORF: Brown-out Reset Flag This bit is set if a Brown-out Reset occurs. The bit is reset by a Power-on Reset, or by writing a logic zero to the flag. • Bit 1 – EXTRF: External Reset Flag This bit is set if an External Reset occurs. The bit is reset by a Power-on Reset, or by writing a logic zero to the flag. • Bit 0 – PORF: Power-on Reset Flag This bit is set if a Power-on Reset occurs. The bit is reset only by writing a logic zero to the flag. To make use of the Reset Flags to identify a reset condition, the user should read and then Reset the MCUSR as early as possible in the program. If the register is cleared before another reset occurs, the source of the reset can be found by examining the Reset Flags. 10.5.2 WDTCR – Watchdog Timer Control Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 (0x60) – – – WDCE WDE WDP2 WDP1 WDP0 WDTCR Read/Write R R R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 • Bits 7:5 – Res: Reserved Bits These bits are reserved bits in the ATmega329P/3290P and will always read as zero. • Bit 4 – WDCE: Watchdog Change Enable This bit must be set when the WDE bit is written to logic zero. Otherwise, the Watchdog will not be disabled. Once written to one, hardware will clear this bit after four clock cycles. Refer to the description of the WDE bit for a Watchdog disable procedure. This bit must also be set when changing the prescaler bits. See Section “10.4.1” on page 49. 50 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P • Bit 3 – WDE: Watchdog Enable When the WDE is written to logic one, the Watchdog Timer is enabled, and if the WDE is written to logic zero, the Watchdog Timer function is disabled. WDE can only be cleared if the WDCE bit has logic level one. To disable an enabled Watchdog Timer, the following procedure must be followed: 1. In the same operation, write a logic one to WDCE and WDE. A logic one must be written to WDE even though it is set to one before the disable operation starts. 2. Within the next four clock cycles, write a logic 0 to WDE. This disables the Watchdog. In safety level 2, it is not possible to disable the Watchdog Timer, even with the algorithm described above. ”Timed Sequences for Changing the Configuration of the Watchdog Timer” on page 49. • Bits 2:0 – WDP2, WDP1, WDP0: Watchdog Timer Prescaler 2, 1, and 0 The WDP2, WDP1, and WDP0 bits determine the Watchdog Timer prescaling when the Watch- dog Timer is enabled. The different prescaling values and their corresponding Time-out Periods are shown in Table 10-2 on page 51. Table 10-2. Watchdog Timer Prescale Select Number of WDT Typical Time-out at Typical Time-out at WDP2 WDP1 WDP0 Oscillator Cycles V = 3.0V V = 5.0V CC CC 0 0 0 16K cycles 17.1ms 16.3ms 0 0 1 32K cycles 34.3ms 32.5ms 0 1 0 64K cycles 68.5ms 65ms 0 1 1 128K cycles 0.14s 0.13s 1 0 0 256K cycles 0.27s 0.26s 1 0 1 512K cycles 0.55s 0.52 1 1 0 1,024K cycles 1.1s 1.0s 1 1 1 2,048K cycles 2.2s 2.1s 51 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P The following code example shows one assembly and one C function for turning off the WDT. The example assumes that interrupts are controlled (e.g. by disabling interrupts globally) so that no interrupts will occur during execution of these functions. Assembly Code Example(1) WDT_off: ; Reset WDT wdr ; Write logical one to WDCE and WDE in r16, WDTCR ori r16, (1<<WDCE)|(1<<WDE) out WDTCR, r16 ; Turn off WDT ldi r16, (0<<WDE) out WDTCR, r16 ret C Code Example(1) void WDT_off(void) { /* Reset WDT */ __watchdog_reset(); /* Write logical one to WDCE and WDE */ WDTCR |= (1<<WDCE) | (1<<WDE); /* Turn off WDT */ WDTCR = 0x00; } Note: 1. See Section “5.” on page 9. 52 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 11. Interrupts 11.1 Overview This section describes the specifics of the interrupt handling as performed in Atmel®AVR® ATmega329P/3290P. For a general explanation of the AVR interrupt handling, refer to ”Reset and Interrupt Handling” on page 16. 11.2 Interrupt Vectors Table 11-1. Reset and Interrupt Vectors Vector Program No. Address(2) Source Interrupt Definition External Pin, Power-on Reset, Brown-out Reset, 1 0x0000(1) RESET Watchdog Reset, and JTAG AVR Reset 2 0x0002 INT0 External Interrupt Request 0 3 0x0004 PCINT0 Pin Change Interrupt Request 0 4 0x0006 PCINT1 Pin Change Interrupt Request 1 5 0x0008 TIMER2 COMP Timer/Counter2 Compare Match 6 0x000A TIMER2 OVF Timer/Counter2 Overflow 7 0x000C TIMER1 CAPT Timer/Counter1 Capture Event 8 0x000E TIMER1 COMPA Timer/Counter1 Compare Match A 9 0x0010 TIMER1 COMPB Timer/Counter1 Compare Match B 10 0x0012 TIMER1 OVF Timer/Counter1 Overflow 11 0x0014 TIMER0 COMP Timer/Counter0 Compare Match 12 0x0016 TIMER0 OVF Timer/Counter0 Overflow 13 0x0018 SPI, STC SPI Serial Transfer Complete 14 0x001A USART, RX USART0, Rx Complete 15 0x001C USART, UDRE USART0 Data Register Empty 16 0x001E USART, TX USART0, Tx Complete 17 0x0020 USI START USI Start Condition 18 0x0022 USI OVERFLOW USI Overflow 19 0x0024 ANALOG COMP Analog Comparator 20 0x0026 ADC ADC Conversion Complete 21 0x0028 EE READY EEPROM Ready 22 0x002A SPM READY Store Program Memory Ready 23 0x002C LCD LCD Start of Frame 24(3) 0x002E PCINT2 Pin Change Interrupt Request 2 25(3) 0x0030 PCINT3 Pin Change Interrupt Request 3 Notes: 1. When the BOOTRST Fuse is programmed, the device will jump to the Boot Loader address at reset, see ”Boot Loader Support – Read-While-Write Self-Programming” on page 281. 53 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 2. When the IVSEL bit in MCUCR is set, Interrupt Vectors will be moved to the start of the Boot Flash Section. The address of each Interrupt Vector will then be the address in this table added to the start address of the Boot Flash Section. 3. PCINT2 and PCINT3 are only present in ATmega3290P. Table 11-2 shows reset and Interrupt Vectors placement for the various combinations of BOOTRST and IVSEL settings. If the program never enables an interrupt source, the Interrupt Vectors are not used, and regular program code can be placed at these locations. This is also the case if the Reset Vector is in the Application section while the Interrupt Vectors are in the Boot section or vice versa. Table 11-2. Reset and Interrupt Vectors Placement(1) BOOTRST IVSEL Reset Address Interrupt Vectors Start Address 1 0 0x0000 0x0002 1 1 0x0000 Boot Reset Address + 0x0002 0 0 Boot Reset Address 0x0002 0 1 Boot Reset Address Boot Reset Address + 0x0002 Note: 1. The Boot Reset Address is shown in Table 26-6 on page 292. For the BOOTRST Fuse “1” means unprogrammed while “0” means programmed. The most typical and general program setup for the Reset and Interrupt Vector Addresses in ATmega329P/3290P is: Address Labels Code Comments 0x0000 jmp RESET ; Reset Handler 0x0002 jmp EXT_INT0 ; IRQ0 Handler 0x0004 jmp PCINT0 ; PCINT0 Handler 0x0006 jmp PCINT1 ; PCINT1 Handler 0x0008 jmp TIM2_COMP ; Timer2 Compare Handler 0x000A jmp TIM2_OVF ; Timer2 Overflow Handler 0x000C jmp TIM1_CAPT ; Timer1 Capture Handler 0x000E jmp TIM1_COMPA ; Timer1 CompareA Handler 0x0010 jmp TIM1_COMPB ; Timer1 CompareB Handler 0x0012 jmp TIM1_OVF ; Timer1 Overflow Handler 0x0014 jmp TIM0_COMP ; Timer0 Compare Handler 0x0016 jmp TIM0_OVF ; Timer0 Overflow Handler 0X0018 jmp SPI_STC ; SPI Transfer Complete Handler 0x001A jmp USART_RXC ; USART0 RX Complete Handler 0x001C jmp USART_UDRE ; USART0,UDR0 Empty Handler 0x001E jmp USART_TXC ; USART0 TX Complete Handler 0x0020 jmp USI_STRT ; USI Start Condition Handler 0x0022 jmp USI_OVF ; USI Overflow Handler 0x0024 jmp ANA_COMP ; Analog Comparator Handler 0x0026 jmp ADC ; ADC Conversion Complete Handler 0x0028 jmp EE_RDY ; EEPROM Ready Handler 0x002A jmp SPM_RDY ; SPM Ready Handler 0x002C jmp LCD_SOF ; LCD Start of Frame Handler 0x002E jmp PCINT2 ; PCINT2 Handler 0x0030 jmp PCINT3 ; PCINT3 Handler ; 0x0032 RESET: ldi r16, high(RAMEND) ; Main program start 0x0033 out SPH,r16 ; Set Stack Pointer to top of RAM 54 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 0x0034 ldi r16, low(RAMEND) 0x0035 out SPL,r16 0x0036 sei ; Enable interrupts 0x0037 <inst xxx r> ... ... ... When the BOOTRST Fuse is unprogrammed, the Boot section size set to 4Kbytes and the IVSEL bit in the MCUCR Register is set before any interrupts are enabled, the most typical and general program setup for the Reset and Interrupt Vector Addresses is: Address Labels Code Comments 0x0000 RESET: ldi r16,high(RAMEND); Main program start 0x0001 out SPH,r16 ; Set Stack Pointer to top of RAM 0x0002 ldi r16,low(RAMEND) 0x0003 out SPL,r16 0x0004 sei ; Enable interrupts 0x0005 <instr> xxx ; .org 0x3802/0x7802 0x3804/0x7804 jmp EXT_INT0 ; IRQ0 Handler 0x3806/0x7806 jmp PCINT0 ; PCINT0 Handler ... ... ... ; 0x1C2C jmp SPM_RDY ; Store Program Memory Ready Handler When the BOOTRST Fuse is programmed and the Boot section size set to 4Kbytes, the most typical and general program setup for the Reset and Interrupt Vector Addresses is: Address Labels Code Comments .org 0x0002 0x0002 jmp EXT_INT0 ; IRQ0 Handler 0x0004 jmp PCINT0 ; PCINT0 Handler ... ... ... ; 0x002C jmp SPM_RDY ; Store Program Memory Ready Handler ; .org 0x3800/0x7800 0x3800/0x7801RESET:ldir16,high(RAMEND); Main program start 0x3801/0x7801 out SPH,r16 ; Set Stack Pointer to top of RAM 0x3802/0x7802 ldi r16,low(RAMEND) 0x3803/0x7803 out SPL,r16 0x3804/0x7804 sei ; Enable interrupts 0x3805/0x7805 <instr> xxx When the BOOTRST Fuse is programmed, the Boot section size set to 4Kbytes and the IVSEL bit in the MCUCR Register is set before any interrupts are enabled, the most typical and general program setup for the Reset and Interrupt Vector Addresses is: Address Labels Code Comments ; .org 0x3800/0x7800 0x3800/0x7800 jmp RESET ; Reset handler 0x3802/0x7802 jmp EXT_INT0 ; IRQ0 Handler 55 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 0x3804/0x7804 jmp PCINT0 ; PCINT0 Handler ... ... ... ; 0x382C/0x782C jmp SPM_RDY ; Store Program Memory Ready Handler ; 0x382E/0x782ERESET:ldir16,high(RAMEND); Main program start 0x382F/0x782F out SPH,r16 ; Set Stack Pointer to top of RAM 0x3830/0x7830 ldi r16,low(RAMEND) 0x3831/0x7831 out SPL,r16 0x3832/0x7832 sei ; Enable interrupts 0x3833/0x7833 <instr> xxx 11.2.1 Moving Interrupts Between Application and Boot Space The General Interrupt Control Register controls the placement of the Interrupt Vector table. See ”MCUCR – MCU Control Register” on page 57. To avoid unintentional changes of Interrupt Vector tables, a special write procedure must be fol- lowed to change the IVSEL bit: 1. Write the Interrupt Vector Change Enable (IVCE) bit to one. 2. Within four cycles, write the desired value to IVSEL while writing a zero to IVCE. Interrupts will automatically be disabled while this sequence is executed. Interrupts are disabled in the cycle IVCE is set, and they remain disabled until after the instruction following the write to IVSEL. If IVSEL is not written, interrupts remain disabled for four cycles. The I-bit in the Status Register is unaffected by the automatic disabling. Note: If Interrupt Vectors are placed in the Boot Loader section and Boot Lock bit BLB02 is pro- grammed, interrupts are disabled while executing from the Application section. If Interrupt Vectors are placed in the Application section and Boot Lock bit BLB12 is programed, interrupts are dis- abled while executing from the Boot Loader section. Refer to the section ”Boot Loader Support – Read-While-Write Self-Programming” on page 281 for details on Boot Lock bits. The following example shows how interrupts are moved. 56 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Assembly Code Example Move_interrupts: ;Get MCUCR in r16, MCUCR mov r17, r16 ; Enable change of Interrupt Vectors ori r16, (1<<IVCE) out MCUCR, r16 ; Move interrupts to Boot Flash section ori r17, (1<<IVSEL) out MCUCR, r17 ret C Code Example void Move_interrupts(void) { /* Enable change of Interrupt Vectors */ MCUCR |= (1<<IVCE); /* Move interrupts to Boot Flash section */ MCUCR |= (1<<IVSEL); } 11.3 Register Description 11.3.1 MCUCR – MCU Control Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0x35 (0x55) JTD BODS BODSE PUD – – IVSEL IVCE MCUCR Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R R R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 • Bit 1 – IVSEL: Interrupt Vector Select When the IVSEL bit is cleared (zero), the Interrupt Vectors are placed at the start of the Flash memory. When this bit is set (one), the Interrupt Vectors are moved to the beginning of the Boot Loader section of the Flash. The actual address of the start of the Boot Flash Section is deter- mined by the BOOTSZ Fuses. Refer to the section ”Boot Loader Support – Read-While-Write Self-Programming” on page 281 for details. • Bit 0 – IVCE: Interrupt Vector Change Enable The IVCE bit must be written to logic one to enable change of the IVSEL bit. IVCE is cleared by hardware four cycles after it is written or when IVSEL is written. Setting the IVCE bit will disable interrupts, as explained in the IVSEL description above. See Code Example below. 57 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 12. External Interrupts 12.1 Overview The External Interrupts are triggered by the INT0 pin or any of the PCINT30:0 pins(2). Observe that, if enabled, the interrupts will trigger even if the INT0 or PCINT30:0 pins are configured as outputs. This feature provides a way of generating a software interrupt. The pin change interrupt PCI1 will trigger if any enabled PCINT15:8 pin toggles. Pin change interrupts PCI0 will trigger if any enabled PCINT7:0 pin toggles. The PCMSK3(1), PCMSK2(1), PCMSK1, and PCMSK0 Reg- isters control which pins contribute to the pin change interrupts. Pin change interrupts on PCINT30:0 are detected asynchronously. This implies that these interrupts can be used for wak- ing the part also from sleep modes other than Idle mode. The INT0 interrupts can be triggered by a falling or rising edge or a low level. This is set up as indicated in the specification for the ”EICRA – External Interrupt Control Register A” on page 59. When the INT0 interrupt is enabled and is configured as level triggered, the interrupt will trigger as long as the pin is held low. Note that recognition of falling or rising edge interrupts on INT0 requires the presence of an I/O clock, described in ”Clock Systems and their Distribution” on page 27. Low level interrupt on INT0 is detected asynchronously. This implies that this interrupt can be used for waking the part also from sleep modes other than Idle mode. The I/O clock is halted in all sleep modes except Idle mode. Note that if a level triggered interrupt is used for wake-up from Power-down, the required level must be held long enough for the MCU to complete the wake-up to trigger the level interrupt. If the level disappears before the end of the Start-up Time, the MCU will still wake up, but no inter- rupt will be generated. The start-up time is defined by the SUT and CKSEL Fuses as described in ”System Clock and Clock Options” on page 27. Notes: 1. PCMSK3 and PCMSK2 are only present in ATmega3290P. 2. PCINT30:16 are only present in ATmega3290P. Only PCINT15:0 are present in ATmega329P. See ”Pin Configurations” on page 2 and ”Register Description” on page 59 for details. 58 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 12.2 Pin Change Interrupt Timing An example of timing of a pin change interrupt is shown in Figure 12-1. Figure 12-1. Pin Change Interrupt PCINT(0) pin_latD Q pcint_in_(0)0 pcint_syn pcint_setflag LE pin_sync x PCIF clk PCINT(0) in PCMSK(x) clk clk PCINT(n) pin_lat pin_sync pcint_in_(n) pcint_syn pcint_setflag PCIF 12.3 Register Description 12.3.1 EICRA – External Interrupt Control Register A The External Interrupt Control Register A contains control bits for interrupt sense control. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 (0x69) – – – – – – ISC01 ISC00 EICRA Read/Write R R R R R R R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 • Bit 1, 0 – ISC01, ISC00: Interrupt Sense Control 0 Bit 1 and Bit 0 The External Interrupt 0 is activated by the external pin INT0 if the SREG I-flag and the corre- sponding interrupt mask are set. The level and edges on the external INT0 pin that activate the interrupt are defined in Table 12-1 on page 60. The value on the INT0 pin is sampled before detecting edges. If edge or toggle interrupt is selected, pulses that last longer than one clock period will generate an interrupt. Shorter pulses are not guaranteed to generate an interrupt. If low level interrupt is selected, the low level must be held until the completion of the currently executing instruction to generate an interrupt. 59 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Table 12-1. Interrupt 0 Sense Control ISC01 ISC00 Description 0 0 The low level of INT0 generates an interrupt request. 0 1 Any logical change on INT0 generates an interrupt request. 1 0 The falling edge of INT0 generates an interrupt request. 1 1 The rising edge of INT0 generates an interrupt request. 12.3.2 EIMSK – External Interrupt Mask Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0x1D (0x3D) PCIE3(1) PCIE2(1) PCIE1 PCIE0 – – – INT0 EIMSK Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R R R R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 • Bit 7 – PCIE3: Pin Change Interrupt Enable 3 When the PCIE3 bit is set (one) and the I-bit in the Status Register (SREG) is set (one), pin change interrupt 3 is enabled. Any change on any enabled PCINT30:24 pin will cause an inter- rupt. The corresponding interrupt of Pin Change Interrupt Request is executed from the PCINT3 Interrupt Vector. PCINT30:24 pins are enabled individually by the PCMSK3 Register. Note: 1. This bit is a reserved bit in ATmega329P and should always be written to zero. • Bit 6 – PCIE2: Pin Change Interrupt Enable 2 When the PCIE2 bit is set (one) and the I-bit in the Status Register (SREG) is set (one), pin change interrupt 2 is enabled. Any change on any enabled PCINT23:16 pin will cause an inter- rupt. The corresponding interrupt of Pin Change Interrupt Request is executed from the PCINT2 Interrupt Vector. PCINT23:16 pins are enabled individually by the PCMSK2 Register. Note: 1. This bit is a reserved bit in ATmega329P and should always be written to zero. • Bit 5 – PCIE1: Pin Change Interrupt Enable 1 When the PCIE1 bit is set (one) and the I-bit in the Status Register (SREG) is set (one), pin change interrupt 1 is enabled. Any change on any enabled PCINT15:8 pin will cause an inter- rupt. The corresponding interrupt of Pin Change Interrupt Request is executed from the PCINT1 Interrupt Vector. PCINT15:8 pins are enabled individually by the PCMSK1 Register. • Bit 4 – PCIE0: Pin Change Interrupt Enable 0 When the PCIE0 bit is set (one) and the I-bit in the Status Register (SREG) is set (one), pin change interrupt 0 is enabled. Any change on any enabled PCINT7:0 pin will cause an interrupt. The corresponding interrupt of Pin Change Interrupt Request is executed from the PCINT0 Inter- rupt Vector. PCINT7:0 pins are enabled individually by the PCMSK0 Register. • Bit 0 – INT0: External Interrupt Request 0 Enable When the INT0 bit is set (one) and the I-bit in the Status Register (SREG) is set (one), the exter- nal pin interrupt is enabled. The Interrupt Sense Control0 bits 1/0 (ISC01 and ISC00) in the External Interrupt Control Register A (EICRA) define whether the external interrupt is activated on rising and/or falling edge of the INT0 pin or level sensed. Activity on the pin will cause an interrupt request even if INT0 is configured as an output. The corresponding interrupt of External Interrupt Request 0 is executed from the INT0 Interrupt Vector. 60 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 12.3.3 EIFR – External Interrupt Flag Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0x1C (0x3C) PCIF3(1) PCIF2(1) PCIF1 PCIF0 – – – INTF0 EIFR Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R R R R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 • Bit 7 – PCIF3: Pin Change Interrupt Flag 3 When a logic change on any PCINT30:24 pin triggers an interrupt request, PCIF3 becomes set (one). If the I-bit in SREG and the PCIE3 bit in EIMSK are set (one), the MCU will jump to the corresponding Interrupt Vector. The flag is cleared when the interrupt routine is executed. Alter- natively, the flag can be cleared by writing a logical one to it. Note: 1. This bit is reserved bit in ATmega329P and will always be read as zero. • Bit 6 – PCIF2: Pin Change Interrupt Flag 2 When a logic change on any PCINT24:16 pin triggers an interrupt request, PCIF2 becomes set (one). If the I-bit in SREG and the PCIE2 bit in EIMSK are set (one), the MCU will jump to the corresponding Interrupt Vector. The flag is cleared when the interrupt routine is executed. Alter- natively, the flag can be cleared by writing a logical one to it. Note: 1. This bit is reserved bit in ATmega329P and will always be read as zero. • Bit 5 – PCIF1: Pin Change Interrupt Flag 1 When a logic change on any PCINT15:8 pin triggers an interrupt request, PCIF1 becomes set (one). If the I-bit in SREG and the PCIE1 bit in EIMSK are set (one), the MCU will jump to the corresponding Interrupt Vector. The flag is cleared when the interrupt routine is executed. Alter- natively, the flag can be cleared by writing a logical one to it. • Bit 4 – PCIF0: Pin Change Interrupt Flag 0 When a logic change on any PCINT7:0 pin triggers an interrupt request, PCIF0 becomes set (one). If the I-bit in SREG and the PCIE0 bit in EIMSK are set (one), the MCU will jump to the corresponding Interrupt Vector. The flag is cleared when the interrupt routine is executed. Alter- natively, the flag can be cleared by writing a logical one to it. • Bit 0 – INTF0: External Interrupt Flag 0 When an edge or logic change on the INT0 pin triggers an interrupt request, INTF0 becomes set (one). If the I-bit in SREG and the INT0 bit in EIMSK are set (one), the MCU will jump to the cor- responding Interrupt Vector. The flag is cleared when the interrupt routine is executed. Alternatively, the flag can be cleared by writing a logical one to it. This flag is always cleared when INT0 is configured as a level interrupt. 61 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 12.3.4 PCMSK3 – Pin Change Mask Register 3(1) Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 (0x73) – PCINT30 PCINT29 PCINT28 PCINT27 PCINT26 PCINT25 PCINT24 PCMSK3 Read/Write R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 • Bit 6:0 – PCINT30:24: Pin Change Enable Mask 30...24 Each PCINT30:24-bit selects whether pin change interrupt is enabled on the corresponding I/O pin. If PCINT30:24 is set and the PCIE3 bit in EIMSK is set, pin change interrupt is enabled on the corresponding I/O pin. If PCINT30:24 is cleared, pin change interrupt on the corresponding I/O pin is disabled. 12.3.5 PCMSK2 – Pin Change Mask Register 2(1) Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 (0x6D) PCINT23 PCINT22 PCINT21 PCINT20 PCINT19 PCINT18 PCINT17 PCINT16 PCMSK2 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 • Bit 7:0 – PCINT23:16: Pin Change Enable Mask 23:16 Each PCINT23:16 bit selects whether pin change interrupt is enabled on the corresponding I/O pin. If PCINT23:16 is set and the PCIE2 bit in EIMSK is set, pin change interrupt is enabled on the corresponding I/O pin. If PCINT23:16 is cleared, pin change interrupt on the corresponding I/O pin is disabled. Note: 1. PCMSK3 and PCMSK2 are only present in ATmega3290P. 12.3.6 PCMSK1 – Pin Change Mask Register 1 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 (0x6C) PCINT15 PCINT14 PCINT13 PCINT12 PCINT11 PCINT10 PCINT9 PCINT8 PCMSK1 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 • Bit 7:0 – PCINT15:8: Pin Change Enable Mask 15:8 Each PCINT15:8-bit selects whether pin change interrupt is enabled on the corresponding I/O pin. If PCINT15:8 is set and the PCIE1 bit in EIMSK is set, pin change interrupt is enabled on the corresponding I/O pin. If PCINT15:8 is cleared, pin change interrupt on the corresponding I/O pin is disabled. 12.3.7 PCMSK0 – Pin Change Mask Register 0 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 (0x6B) PCINT7 PCINT6 PCINT5 PCINT4 PCINT3 PCINT2 PCINT1 PCINT0 PCMSK0 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 • Bit 7:0 – PCINT7:0: Pin Change Enable Mask 7:0 Each PCINT7:0 bit selects whether pin change interrupt is enabled on the corresponding I/O pin. If PCINT7:0 is set and the PCIE0 bit in EIMSK is set, pin change interrupt is enabled on the cor- responding I/O pin. If PCINT7:0 is cleared, pin change interrupt on the corresponding I/O pin is disabled. 62 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 13. I/O-Ports 13.1 Overview All AVR ports have true Read-Modify-Write functionality when used as general digital I/O ports. This means that the direction of one port pin can be changed without unintentionally changing the direction of any other pin with the SBI and CBI instructions. The same applies when chang- ing drive value (if configured as output) or enabling/disabling of pull-up resistors (if configured as input). Each output buffer has symmetrical drive characteristics with both high sink and source capability. Port B has a higher pin driver strength than the other ports, but all the pin drivers are strong enough to drive LED displays directly. All port pins have individually selectable pull-up resistors with a supply-voltage invariant resistance. All I/O pins have protection diodes to both V and Ground as indicated in Figure 13-1. Refer to ”Electrical Characteristics” on page 330 for CC a complete list of parameters. If exceeding the pin voltage “Absolute Maximum Ratings”, result- ing currents can harm the device if not limited accordingly. For segment pins used as general I/O, the same situation can also influence the LCD voltage level. Figure 13-1. I/O Pin Equivalent Schematic R pu Pxn Logic C pin See Figure "General Digital I/O" for Details All registers and bit references in this section are written in general form. A lower case “x” repre- sents the numbering letter for the port, and a lower case “n” represents the bit number. However, when using the register or bit defines in a program, the precise form must be used. For example, PORTB3 for bit no. 3 in Port B, here documented generally as PORTxn. The physical I/O Regis- ters and bit locations are listed in ”Register Description” on page 90. Three I/O memory address locations are allocated for each port, one each for the Data Register – PORTx, Data Direction Register – DDRx, and the Port Input Pins – PINx. The Port Input Pins I/O location is read only, while the Data Register and the Data Direction Register are read/write. However, writing a logic one to a bit in the PINx Register, will result in a toggle in the correspond- ing bit in the Data Register. In addition, the Pull-up Disable – PUD bit in MCUCR disables the pull-up function for all pins in all ports when set. Using the I/O port as General Digital I/O is described in ”Ports as General Digital I/O” on page 64. Most port pins are multiplexed with alternate functions for the peripheral features on the device. How each alternate function interferes with the port pin is described in ”Alternate Port 63 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Functions” on page 69. Refer to the individual module sections for a full description of the alter- nate functions. Note that enabling the alternate function of some of the port pins does not affect the use of the other pins in the port as general digital I/O. 13.2 Ports as General Digital I/O The ports are bi-directional I/O ports with optional internal pull-ups. Figure 13-2 shows a func- tional description of one I/O-port pin, here generically called Pxn. Figure 13-2. General Digital I/O(1) PUD Q D DDxn QCLR WDx RESET RDx S U 1 B Pxn PQORTxDn 0 TA QCLR DA RESET WPx SLEEP RRx WRx SYNCHRONIZER RPx D Q D Q PINxn L Q Q clk I/O WDx: WRITE DDRx PUD: PULLUP DISABLE RDx: READ DDRx SLEEP: SLEEP CONTROL WRx: WRITE PORTx clk : I/O CLOCK RRx: READ PORTx REGISTER I/O RPx: READ PORTx PIN WPx: WRITE PINx REGISTER Note: 1. WRx, WPx, WDx, RRx, RPx, and RDx are common to all pins within the same port. clk , I/O SLEEP, and PUD are common to all ports. 13.2.1 Configuring the Pin Each port pin consists of three register bits: DDxn, PORTxn, and PINxn. As shown in ”Register Description” on page 90, the DDxn bits are accessed at the DDRx I/O address, the PORTxn bits at the PORTx I/O address, and the PINxn bits at the PINx I/O address. The DDxn bit in the DDRx Register selects the direction of this pin. If DDxn is written logic one, Pxn is configured as an output pin. If DDxn is written logic zero, Pxn is configured as an input pin. If PORTxn is written logic one when the pin is configured as an input pin, the pull-up resistor is activated. To switch the pull-up resistor off, PORTxn has to be written logic zero or the pin has to 64 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P be configured as an output pin. The port pins are tri-stated when reset condition becomes active, even if no clocks are running. If PORTxn is written logic one when the pin is configured as an output pin, the port pin is driven high (one). If PORTxn is written logic zero when the pin is configured as an output pin, the port pin is driven low (zero). 13.2.2 Toggling the Pin Writing a logic one to PINxn toggles the value of PORTxn, independent on the value of DDRxn. Note that the SBI instruction can be used to toggle one single bit in a port. 13.2.3 Switching Between Input and Output When switching between tri-state ({DDxn, PORTxn} = 0b00) and output high ({DDxn, PORTxn} = 0b11), an intermediate state with either pull-up enabled {DDxn, PORTxn} = 0b01) or output low ({DDxn, PORTxn} = 0b10) must occur. Normally, the pull-up enabled state is fully accept- able, as a high-impedant environment will not notice the difference between a strong high driver and a pull-up. If this is not the case, the PUD bit in the MCUCR Register can be set to disable all pull-ups in all ports. Switching between input with pull-up and output low generates the same problem. The user must use either the tri-state ({DDxn, PORTxn} = 0b00) or the output high state ({DDxn, PORTxn} = 0b11) as an intermediate step. Table 13-1 summarizes the control signals for the pin value. Table 13-1. Port Pin Configurations PUD DDxn PORTxn (in MCUCR) I/O Pull-up Comment 0 0 X Input No Tri-state (Hi-Z) 0 1 0 Input Yes Pxn will source current if ext. pulled low. 0 1 1 Input No Tri-state (Hi-Z) 1 0 X Output No Output Low (Sink) 1 1 X Output No Output High (Source) 13.2.4 Reading the Pin Value Independent of the setting of Data Direction bit DDxn, the port pin can be read through the PINxn Register bit. As shown in Figure 13-2, the PINxn Register bit and the preceding latch con- stitute a synchronizer. This is needed to avoid metastability if the physical pin changes value near the edge of the internal clock, but it also introduces a delay. Figure 13-3 shows a timing dia- gram of the synchronization when reading an externally applied pin value. The maximum and minimum propagation delays are denoted t and t respectively. pd,max pd,min 65 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Figure 13-3. Synchronization when Reading an Externally Applied Pin value SYSTEM CLK INSTRUCTIONS XXX XXX in r17, PINx SYNC LATCH PINxn r17 0x00 0xFF t pd, max tpd, min Consider the clock period starting shortly after the first falling edge of the system clock. The latch is closed when the clock is low, and goes transparent when the clock is high, as indicated by the shaded region of the “SYNC LATCH” signal. The signal value is latched when the system clock goes low. It is clocked into the PINxn Register at the succeeding positive clock edge. As indi- cated by the two arrows tpd,max and tpd,min, a single signal transition on the pin will be delayed between ½ and 1½ system clock period depending upon the time of assertion. When reading back a software assigned pin value, a nop instruction must be inserted as indi- cated in Figure 13-4. The out instruction sets the “SYNC LATCH” signal at the positive edge of the clock. In this case, the delay tpd through the synchronizer is 1 system clock period. Figure 13-4. Synchronization when Reading a Software Assigned Pin Value SYSTEM CLK r16 0xFF INSTRUCTIONS out PORTx, r16 nop in r17, PINx SYNC LATCH PINxn r17 0x00 0xFF t pd The following code example shows how to set port B pins 0 and 1 high, 2 and 3 low, and define the port pins from 4 to 7 as input with pull-ups assigned to port pins 6 and 7. The resulting pin values are read back again, but as previously discussed, a nop instruction is included to be able to read back the value recently assigned to some of the pins. 66 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Assembly Code Example(1) ... ; Define pull-ups and set outputs high ; Define directions for port pins ldi r16,(1<<PB7)|(1<<PB6)|(1<<PB1)|(1<<PB0) ldi r17,(1<<DDB3)|(1<<DDB2)|(1<<DDB1)|(1<<DDB0) out PORTB,r16 out DDRB,r17 ; Insert nop for synchronization nop ; Read port pins in r16,PINB ... C Code Example unsigned char i; ... /* Define pull-ups and set outputs high */ /* Define directions for port pins */ PORTB = (1<<PB7)|(1<<PB6)|(1<<PB1)|(1<<PB0); DDRB = (1<<DDB3)|(1<<DDB2)|(1<<DDB1)|(1<<DDB0); /* Insert nop for synchronization*/ __no_operation(); /* Read port pins */ i = PINB; ... Note: 1. For the assembly program, two temporary registers are used to minimize the time from pull- ups are set on pins 0, 1, 6, and 7, until the direction bits are correctly set, defining bit 2 and 3 as low and redefining bits 0 and 1 as strong high drivers. 13.2.5 Digital Input Enable and Sleep Modes As shown in Figure 13-2, the digital input signal can be clamped to ground at the input of the Schmitt-trigger. The signal denoted SLEEP in the figure, is set by the MCU Sleep Controller in Power-down mode, Power-save mode, and Standby mode to avoid high power consumption if some input signals are left floating, or have an analog signal level close to V /2. CC SLEEP is overridden for port pins enabled as external interrupt pins. If the external interrupt request is not enabled, SLEEP is active also for these pins. SLEEP is also overridden by various other alternate functions as described in ”Alternate Port Functions” on page 69. If a logic high level (“one”) is present on an asynchronous external interrupt pin configured as “Interrupt on Rising Edge, Falling Edge, or Any Logic Change on Pin” while the external interrupt is not enabled, the corresponding External Interrupt Flag will be set when resuming from the above mentioned Sleep mode, as the clamping in these sleep mode produces the requested logic change. 67 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 13.2.6 Unconnected Pins If some pins are unused, it is recommended to ensure that these pins have a defined level. Even though most of the digital inputs are disabled in the deep sleep modes as described above, float- ing inputs should be avoided to reduce current consumption in all other modes where the digital inputs are enabled (Reset, Active mode and Idle mode). The simplest method to ensure a defined level of an unused pin, is to enable the internal pull-up. In this case, the pull-up will be disabled during reset. If low power consumption during reset is important, it is recommended to use an external pull-up or pull-down. Connecting unused pins directly to V or GND is not recommended, since this may cause excessive currents if the pin is CC accidentally configured as an output. 68 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 13.3 Alternate Port Functions Most port pins have alternate functions in addition to being general digital I/Os. Figure 13-5 shows how the port pin control signals from the simplified Figure 13-2 can be overridden by alternate functions. The overriding signals may not be present in all port pins, but the figure serves as a generic description applicable to all port pins in the AVR microcontroller family. Figure 13-5. Alternate Port Functions(1) PUOExn PUOVxn 1 PUD 0 DDOExn DDOVxn 1 0 Q D DDxn QCLR WDx PVOExn RESET RDx PVOVxn S 1 1 U Pxn B 0 Q D 0 A PORTxn PTOExn T DIEOExn QCLR DA WPx DIEOVxn RESET 1 WRx RRx 0 SLEEP SYNCHRONIZER RPx DSETQ D Q PINxn LCLRQ CLRQ clkI/O DIxn AIOxn PUOExn: Pxn PULL-UP OVERRIDE ENABLE PUD: PULLUP DISABLE PUOVxn: Pxn PULL-UP OVERRIDE VALUE WDx: WRITE DDRx DDOExn: Pxn DATA DIRECTION OVERRIDE ENABLE RDx: READ DDRx DDOVxn: Pxn DATA DIRECTION OVERRIDE VALUE RRx: READ PORTx REGISTER PVOExn: Pxn PORT VALUE OVERRIDE ENABLE WRx: WRITE PORTx PVOVxn: Pxn PORT VALUE OVERRIDE VALUE RPx: READ PORTx PIN DIEOExn: Pxn DIGITAL INPUT-ENABLE OVERRIDE ENABLE WPx: WRITE PINx DIEOVxn: Pxn DIGITAL INPUT-ENABLE OVERRIDE VALUE clk : I/O CLOCK SLEEP: SLEEP CONTROL DIxI/nO: DIGITAL INPUT PIN n ON PORTx PTOExn: Pxn, PORT TOGGLE OVERRIDE ENABLE AIOxn: ANALOG INPUT/OUTPUT PIN n ON PORTx Note: 1. WRx, WPx, WDx, RRx, RPx, and RDx are common to all pins within the same port. clk , I/O SLEEP, and PUD are common to all ports. All other signals are unique for each pin. Table 13-2 summarizes the function of the overriding signals. The pin and port indexes from Fig- ure 13-5 are not shown in the succeeding tables. The overriding signals are generated internally in the modules having the alternate function. 69 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Table 13-2. Generic Description of Overriding Signals for Alternate Functions Signal Name Full Name Description If this signal is set, the pull-up enable is controlled by the PUOV Pull-up Override PUOE signal. If this signal is cleared, the pull-up is enabled when Enable {DDxn, PORTxn, PUD} = 0b010. If PUOE is set, the pull-up is enabled/disabled when PUOV is Pull-up Override PUOV set/cleared, regardless of the setting of the DDxn, PORTxn, Value and PUD Register bits. If this signal is set, the Output Driver Enable is controlled by the Data Direction DDOE DDOV signal. If this signal is cleared, the Output driver is Override Enable enabled by the DDxn Register bit. If DDOE is set, the Output Driver is enabled/disabled when Data Direction DDOV DDOV is set/cleared, regardless of the setting of the DDxn Override Value Register bit. If this signal is set and the Output Driver is enabled, the port Port Value value is controlled by the PVOV signal. If PVOE is cleared, and PVOE Override Enable the Output Driver is enabled, the port Value is controlled by the PORTxn Register bit. Port Value If PVOE is set, the port value is set to PVOV, regardless of the PVOV Override Value setting of the PORTxn Register bit. Port Toggle PTOE If PTOE is set, the PORTxn Register bit is inverted. Override Enable Digital Input If this bit is set, the Digital Input Enable is controlled by the DIEOE Enable Override DIEOV signal. If this signal is cleared, the Digital Input Enable Enable is determined by MCU state (Normal mode, sleep mode). Digital Input If DIEOE is set, the Digital Input is enabled/disabled when DIEOV Enable Override DIEOV is set/cleared, regardless of the MCU state (Normal Value mode, sleep mode). This is the Digital Input to alternate functions. In the figure, the signal is connected to the output of the schmitt trigger but DI Digital Input before the synchronizer. Unless the Digital Input is used as a clock source, the module with the alternate function will use its own synchronizer. This is the Analog Input/output to/from alternate functions. The Analog AIO signal is connected directly to the pad, and can be used bi- Input/Output directionally. The following subsections shortly describe the alternate functions for each port, and relate the overriding signals to the alternate function. Refer to the alternate function description for further details. Some pins are connected to different LCD segments on ATmega329P and ATmega3290P. See pinout ”MLF/ Pinout ATmega329P” on page 2 and ”TQFP / Pinout ATmega3290P” on page 3. 70 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 13.3.1 Alternate Functions of Port A The Port A has an alternate function as COM0:3 and SEG0:3 for the LCD Controller. Table 13-3. Port A Pins Alternate Functions Port Pin Alternate Function PA7 SEG (LCD Front Plane 3) PA6 SEG (LCD Front Plane 2) PA5 SEG (LCD Front Plane 1) PA4 SEG (LCD Front Plane 0) PA3 COM (LCD Back Plane 3) PA2 COM (LCD Back Plane 2) PA1 COM (LCD Back Plane 1) PA0 COM (LCD Back Plane 0) Table 13-4 and Table 13-5 relates the alternate functions of Port A to the overriding signals shown in Figure 13-5 on page 69. Table 13-4. Overriding Signals for Alternate Functions in PA7:PA4 Signal Name PA7/SEG3 PA6/SEG2 PA5/SEG1 PA4/SEG0 PUOE LCDEN LCDEN LCDEN LCDEN PUOV 0 0 0 0 DDOE LCDEN LCDEN LCDEN LCDEN DDOV 0 0 0 0 PVOE 0 0 0 0 PVOV 0 0 0 0 PTOE – – – – DIEOE LCDEN LCDEN LCDEN LCDEN DIEOV 0 0 0 0 DI – – – – AIO LCDSEG LCDSEG LCDSEG LCDSEG 71 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Table 13-5. Overriding Signals for Alternate Functions in PA3:PA0 Signal Name PA3/COM3 PA2/COM2 PA1/COM1 PA0/COM0 LCDEN • LCDEN • LCDEN • PUOE LCDEN (LCDMUX) (LCDMUX) (LCDMUX) PUOV 0 0 0 0 LCDEN • LCDEN • LCDEN • DDOE LCDEN (LCDMUX) (LCDMUX) (LCDMUX) DDOV 0 0 0 0 PVOE 0 0 0 0 PVOV 0 0 0 0 PTOE – – – – LCDEN • LCDEN • LCDEN • DIEOE LCDEN (LCDMUX) (LCDMUX) (LCDMUX) DIEOV 0 0 0 0 DI – – – – AIO COM3 COM2 COM1 COM0 13.3.2 Alternate Functions of Port B The Port B pins with alternate functions are shown in Table 13-6. Table 13-6. Port B Pins Alternate Functions Port Pin Alternate Functions OC2A/PCINT15 (Output Compare and PWM Output A for Timer/Counter2 or Pin PB7 Change Interrupt15). OC1B/PCINT14 (Output Compare and PWM Output B for Timer/Counter1 or Pin PB6 Change Interrupt14). OC1A/PCINT13 (Output Compare and PWM Output A for Timer/Counter1 or Pin PB5 Change Interrupt13). OC0A/PCINT12 (Output Compare and PWM Output A for Timer/Counter0 or Pin PB4 Change Interrupt12). PB3 MISO/PCINT11 (SPI Bus Master Input/Slave Output or Pin Change Interrupt11). PB2 MOSI/PCINT10 (SPI Bus Master Output/Slave Input or Pin Change Interrupt10). PB1 SCK/PCINT9 (SPI Bus Serial Clock or Pin Change Interrupt9). PB0 SS/PCINT8 (SPI Slave Select input or Pin Change Interrupt8). The alternate pin configuration is as follows: • OC2A/PCINT15, Bit 7 OC2, Output Compare Match A output: The PB7 pin can serve as an external output for the Timer/Counter2 Output Compare A. The pin has to be configured as an output (DDB7 set (one)) to serve this function. The OC2A pin is also the output pin for the PWM mode timer function. PCINT15, Pin Change Interrupt source 15: The PB7 pin can serve as an external interrupt source. 72 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P • OC1B/PCINT14, Bit 6 OC1B, Output Compare Match B output: The PB6 pin can serve as an external output for the Timer/Counter1 Output Compare B. The pin has to be configured as an output (DDB6 set (one)) to serve this function. The OC1B pin is also the output pin for the PWM mode timer function. PCINT14, Pin Change Interrupt Source 14: The PB6 pin can serve as an external interrupt source. • OC1A/PCINT13, Bit 5 OC1A, Output Compare Match A output: The PB5 pin can serve as an external output for the Timer/Counter1 Output Compare A. The pin has to be configured as an output (DDB5 set (one)) to serve this function. The OC1A pin is also the output pin for the PWM mode timer function. PCINT13, Pin Change Interrupt Source 13: The PB5 pin can serve as an external interrupt source. • OC0A/PCINT12, Bit 4 OC0A, Output Compare Match A output: The PB4 pin can serve as an external output for the Timer/Counter0 Output Compare A. The pin has to be configured as an output (DDB4 set (one)) to serve this function. The OC0A pin is also the output pin for the PWM mode timer function. PCINT12, Pin Change Interrupt Source 12: The PB4 pin can serve as an external interrupt source. • MISO/PCINT11 – Port B, Bit 3 MISO: Master Data input, Slave Data output pin for SPI. When the SPI is enabled as a Master, this pin is configured as an input regardless of the setting of DDB3. When the SPI is enabled as a Slave, the data direction of this pin is controlled by DDB3. When the pin is forced to be an input, the pull-up can still be controlled by the PORTB3 bit. PCINT11, Pin Change Interrupt Source 11: The PB3 pin can serve as an external interrupt source. • MOSI/PCINT10 – Port B, Bit 2 MOSI: SPI Master Data output, Slave Data input for SPI. When the SPI is enabled as a Slave, this pin is configured as an input regardless of the setting of DDB2. When the SPI is enabled as a Master, the data direction of this pin is controlled by DDB2. When the pin is forced to be an input, the pull-up can still be controlled by the PORTB2 bit. PCINT10, Pin Change Interrupt Source 10: The PB2 pin can serve as an external interrupt source. • SCK/PCINT9 – Port B, Bit 1 SCK: Master Clock output, Slave Clock input pin for SPI. When the SPI is enabled as a Slave, this pin is configured as an input regardless of the setting of DDB1. When the SPI is enabled as a Master, the data direction of this pin is controlled by DDB1. When the pin is forced to be an input, the pull-up can still be controlled by the PORTB1 bit. PCINT9, Pin Change Interrupt Source 9: The PB1 pin can serve as an external interrupt source. • SS/PCINT8 – Port B, Bit 0 SS: Slave Port Select input. When the SPI is enabled as a Slave, this pin is configured as an input regardless of the setting of DDB0. As a Slave, the SPI is activated when this pin is driven 73 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P low. When the SPI is enabled as a Master, the data direction of this pin is controlled by DDB0. When the pin is forced to be an input, the pull-up can still be controlled by the PORTB0 bit PCINT8, Pin Change Interrupt Source 8: The PB0 pin can serve as an external interrupt source. Table 13-7 and Table 13-8 relate the alternate functions of Port B to the overriding signals shown in Figure 13-5 on page 69. SPI MSTR INPUT and SPI SLAVE OUTPUT constitute the MISO signal, while MOSI is divided into SPI MSTR OUTPUT and SPI SLAVE INPUT. Table 13-7. Overriding Signals for Alternate Functions in PB7:PB4 PB7/OC2A/ PB6/OC1B/ PB5/OC1A/ PB4/OC0A/ Signal Name PCINT15 PCINT14 PCINT13 PCINT12 PUOE 0 0 0 0 PUOV 0 0 0 0 DDOE 0 0 0 0 DDOV 0 0 0 0 PVOE OC2A ENABLE OC1B ENABLE OC1A ENABLE OC0A ENABLE PVOV OC2A OC1B OC1A OC0A PTOE – – – – DIEOE PCINT15 • PCIE1 PCINT14 • PCIE1 PCINT13 • PCIE1 PCINT12 • PCIE1 DIEOV 1 1 1 1 DI PCINT15 INPUT PCINT14 INPUT PCINT13 INPUT PCINT12 INPUT AIO – – – – Table 13-8. Overriding Signals for Alternate Functions in PB3:PB0 PB3/MISO/ PB2/MOSI/ PB1/SCK/ PB0/SS/ Signal Name PCINT11 PCINT10 PCINT9 PCINT8 PUOE SPE • MSTR SPE • MSTR SPE • MSTR SPE • MSTR PUOV PORTB3 • PUD PORTB2 • PUD PORTB1 • PUD PORTB0 • PUD DDOE SPE • MSTR SPE • MSTR SPE • MSTR SPE • MSTR DDOV 0 0 0 0 PVOE SPE • MSTR SPE • MSTR SPE • MSTR 0 SPI SLAVE SPI MSTR PVOV SCK OUTPUT 0 OUTPUT OUTPUT PTOE – – – – DIEOE PCINT11 • PCIE1 PCINT10 • PCIE1 PCINT9 • PCIE1 PCINT8 • PCIE1 DIEOV 1 1 1 1 PCINT11 INPUT PCINT10 INPUT PCINT9 INPUT PCINT8 INPUT DI SPI MSTR INPUT SPI SLAVE INPUT SCK INPUT SPI SS AIO – – – – 74 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 13.3.3 Alternate Functions of Port C The Port C has an alternate function as SEG for the LCD Controller. Table 13-9. Port C Pins Alternate Functions (SEG refers to 100-pin/64-pin pinout) Port Pin Alternate Function PC7 SEG (LCD Front Plane 5/5) PC6 SEG (LCD Front Plane 6/6) PC5 SEG (LCD Front Plane 11/7) PC4 SEG (LCD Front Plane 12/8) PC3 SEG (LCD Front Plane 13/9) PC2 SEG (LCD Front Plane14/10) PC1 SEG (LCD Front Plane 15/11) PC0 SEG (LCD Front Plane 16/12) The alternate pin configuration is as follows: • SEG – Port D, Bit 7:0 SEG, LCD front plane 5/5, 6/6, 11/7-16/12. Table 13-10 and Table 13-11 relate the alternate functions of Port C to the overriding signals shown in Figure 13-5 on page 69. Table 13-10. Overriding Signals for Alternate Functions in PC7:PC4 Signal Name PC7/SEG5 PC6/SEG6 PC5/SEG(11/7) PC4/SEG(12/8) PUOE LCDEN LCDEN LCDEN LCDEN PUOV 0 0 0 0 DDOE LCDEN LCDEN LCDEN LCDEN DDOV 0 0 0 0 PVOE 0 0 0 0 PVOV 0 0 0 0 PTOE – – – – DIEOE LCDEN LCDEN LCDEN LCDEN DIEOV 0 0 0 0 DI – – – – AIO LCDSEG LCDSEG LCDSEG LCDSEG 75 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Table 13-11. Overriding Signals for Alternate Functions in PC3:PC0 Signal Name PC3/SEG(13/9) PC2/SEG(14/10) PC1/SEG(15/11) PC0/SEG(16/12) PUOE LCDEN LCDEN LCDEN LCDEN PUOV 0 0 0 0 DDOE LCDEN LCDEN LCDEN LCDEN DDOV 0 0 0 0 PVOE 0 0 0 0 PVOV 0 0 0 0 PTOE – – – – DIEOE LCDEN LCDEN LCDEN LCDEN DIEOV 0 0 0 0 DI – – – – AIO LCDSEG LCDSEG LCDSEG LCDSEG 13.3.4 Alternate Functions of Port D The Port D pins with alternate functions are shown in Table 13-12. Table 13-12. Port D Pins Alternate Functions (SEG refers to 100-pin/64-pin pinout) Port Pin Alternate Function PD7 SEG (LCD front plane 19/15) PD6 SEG (LCD front plane 20/16) PD5 SEG (LCD front plane 21/17) PD4 SEG (LCD front plane 22/18) PD3 SEG (LCD front plane 23/19) PD2 SEG (LCD front plane 24/20) PD1 INT0/SEG (External Interrupt0 Input or LCD front plane 25/21) PD0 ICP1/SEG (Timer/Counter1 Input Capture pin or LCD front plane 26/22) The alternate pin configuration is as follows: • SEG – Port D, Bit 7:2 SEG, LCD front plane 19/15-24/20. • INT0/SEG – Port D, Bit 1 INT0, External Interrupt Source 0. The PD1 pin can serve as an external interrupt source to the MCU. SEG, LCD front plane 25/21. • ICP1/SEG – Port D, Bit 0 ICP1 – Input Capture pin1: The PD0 pin can act as an Input Capture pin for Timer/Counter1. SEG, LCD front plane 26/22 76 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Table 13-13 and Table 13-14 relates the alternate functions of Port D to the overriding signals shown in Figure 13-5 on page 69. Table 13-13. Overriding Signals for Alternate Functions PD7:PD4 Signal Name PD7/SEG(19/15) PD6/SEG(20/16) PD5/SEG(21/17) PD4/SEG(22/18) PUOE LCDEN • (LCDPM) LCDEN • (LCDPM) LCDEN • (LCDPM) LCDEN • (LCDPM) PUOV 0 0 0 0 DDOE LCDEN • (LCDPM) LCDEN • (LCDPM) LCDEN • (LCDPM) LCDEN • (LCDPM) DDOV 0 0 0 0 PVOE 0 0 0 0 PVOV 0 0 0 0 PTOE – – – – DIEOE LCDEN • (LCDPM) LCDEN • (LCDPM) LCDEN • (LCDPM) LCDEN • (LCDPM) DIEOV 0 0 0 0 DI – – – – AIO – – – – AIO LCDSEG LCDSEG LCDSEG LCDSEG Table 13-14. Overriding Signals for Alternate Functions in PD3:PD0 PD1/INT0/ PD0/ICP1/ Signal Name PD3/SEG(23/19) PD2/SEG(24/20) SEG(25/21) SEG(26/22) PUOE LCDEN • (LCDPM) LCDEN • (LCDPM) LCDEN • (LCDPM) LCDEN • (LCDPM) PUOV 0 0 0 0 DDOE LCDEN • (LCDPM) LCDEN • (LCDPM) LCDEN • (LCDPM) LCDEN • (LCDPM) DDOV 0 0 0 0 PVOE 0 0 0 0 PVOV 0 0 0 0 PTOE – – – – LCDEN + DIEOE LCDEN • (LCDPM) LCDEN • (LCDPM) LCDEN • (LCDPM) (INT0 ENABLE) LCDEN • DIEOV 0 0 0 (INT0 ENABLE) DI – – INT0 INPUT ICP1 INPUT AIO LCDSEG LCDSEG LCDSEG LCDSEG 77 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 13.3.5 Alternate Functions of Port E The Port E pins with alternate functions are shown in Table 13-15. Table 13-15. Port E Pins Alternate Functions Port Pin Alternate Function PCINT7 (Pin Change Interrupt7) PE7 CLKO (Divided System Clock) PE6 DO/PCINT6 (USI Data Output or Pin Change Interrupt6) PE5 DI/SDA/PCINT5 (USI Data Input or TWI Serial DAta or Pin Change Interrupt5) USCK/SCL/PCINT4 (USART0 External Clock Input/Output or TWI Serial Clock or Pin PE4 Change Interrupt4) PE3 AIN1/PCINT3 (Analog Comparator Negative Input or Pin Change Interrupt3) XCK/AIN0/ PCINT2 (USART0 External Clock or Analog Comparator Positive Input or PE2 Pin Change Interrupt2) PE1 TXD/PCINT1 (USART0 Transmit Pin or Pin Change Interrupt1) PE0 RXD/PCINT0 (USART0 Receive Pin or Pin Change Interrupt0) • PCINT7 – Port E, Bit 7 PCINT7, Pin Change Interrupt Source 7: The PE7 pin can serve as an external interrupt source. CLKO, Divided System Clock: The divided system clock can be output on the PE7 pin. The divided system clock will be output if the CKOUT Fuse is programmed, regardless of the PORTE7 and DDE7 settings. It will also be output during reset. • DO/PCINT6 – Port E, Bit 6 DO, Universal Serial Interface Data output. PCINT6, Pin Change Interrupt Source 6: The PE6 pin can serve as an external interrupt source. • DI/SDA/PCINT5 – Port E, Bit 5 DI, Universal Serial Interface Data input. SDA, Two-wire Serial Interface Data: PCINT5, Pin Change Interrupt Source 5: The PE5 pin can serve as an external interrupt source. • USCK/SCL/PCINT4 – Port E, Bit 4 USCK, Universal Serial Interface Clock. SCL, Two-wire Serial Interface Clock. PCINT4, Pin Change Interrupt Source 4: The PE4 pin can serve as an external interrupt source. • AIN1/PCINT3 – Port E, Bit 3 AIN1 – Analog Comparator Negative input. This pin is directly connected to the negative input of the Analog Comparator. PCINT3, Pin Change Interrupt Source 3: The PE3 pin can serve as an external interrupt source. 78 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P • XCK/AIN0/PCINT2 – Port E, Bit 2 XCK, USART0 External Clock. The Data Direction Register (DDE2) controls whether the clock is output (DDE2 set) or input (DDE2 cleared). The XCK pin is active only when the USART0 oper- ates in synchronous mode. AIN0 – Analog Comparator Positive input. This pin is directly connected to the positive input of the Analog Comparator. PCINT2, Pin Change Interrupt Source 2: The PE2 pin can serve as an external interrupt source. • TXD/PCINT1 – Port E, Bit 1 TXD0, UART0 Transmit pin. PCINT1, Pin Change Interrupt Source 1: The PE1 pin can serve as an external interrupt source. • RXD/PCINT0 – Port E, Bit 0 RXD, USART0 Receive pin. Receive Data (Data input pin for the USART0). When the USART0 Receiver is enabled this pin is configured as an input regardless of the value of DDE0. When the USART0 forces this pin to be an input, a logical one in PORTE0 will turn on the internal pull-up. PCINT0, Pin Change Interrupt Source 0: The PE0 pin can serve as an external interrupt source. Table 13-16 and Table 13-17 relates the alternate functions of Port E to the overriding signals shown in Figure 13-5 on page 69. Table 13-16. Overriding Signals for Alternate Functions PE7:PE4 PE6/DO/ PE5/DI/SDA/ PE4/USCK/SCL/ Signal Name PE7/PCINT7 PCINT6 PCINT5 PCINT4 PUOE 0 0 USI_TWO-WIRE USI_TWO-WIRE PUOV 0 0 0 0 DDOE CKOUT(1) 0 USI_TWO-WIRE USI_TWO-WIRE (USI_SCL_HOLD (SDA + PORTE5) • DDOV 1 0 + PORTE4) • DDE5 DDE4 USI_THREE- USI_TWO-WIRE • USI_TWO-WIRE • PVOE CKOUT(1) WIRE DDE5 DDE4 PVOV clk DO 0 0 I/O PTOE – – 0 USITC (PCINT5 • PCIE0) (PCINT4 • PCIE0) DIEOE PCINT7 • PCIE0 PCINT6 • PCIE0 + USISIE + USISIE DIEOV 1 1 1 1 USCKL/SCL DI/SDA INPUT DI PCINT7 INPUT PCINT6 INPUT INPUT PCINT5 INPUT PCINT4 INPUT AIO – – – – Note: 1. CKOUT is one if the CKOUT Fuse is programmed 79 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Table 13-17. Overriding Signals for Alternate Functions in PE3:PE0 PE3/AIN1/ PE2/XCK/AIN0/ PE1/TXD/ PE0/RXD/ Signal Name PCINT3 PCINT2 PCINT1 PCINT0 XCK OUTPUT PUOE 0 TXEN RXEN ENABLE PUOV 0 XCK 0 PORTE0 • PUD DDOE 0 0 TXEN RXEN DDOV 0 0 1 0 PVOE 0 0 TXEN 0 PVOV 0 0 TXD 0 PTOE – – – – (PCINT3 • PCIE0) (PCINT2 • PCIE0) DIEOE PCINT1 • PCIE0 PCINT0 • PCIE0 + AIN1D(1) + AIN0D(1) DIEOV PCINT3 • PCIE0 PCINT2 • PCIE0 1 1 XCK/PCINT2 RXD/PCINT0 DI PCINT3 INPUT PCINT1 INPUT INPUT INPUT AIO AIN1 INPUT AIN0 INPUT – – Note: 1. AIN0D and AIN1D is described in ”DIDR1 – Digital Input Disable Register 1” on page 212. 13.3.6 Alternate Functions of Port F The Port F has an alternate function as analog input for the ADC as shown in Table 13-18. If some Port F pins are configured as outputs, it is essential that these do not switch when a con- version is in progress. This might corrupt the result of the conversion. If the JTAG interface is enabled, the pull-up resistors on pins PF7(TDI), PF5(TMS) and PF4(TCK) will be activated even if a reset occurs. Table 13-18. Port F Pins Alternate Functions Port Pin Alternate Function PF7 ADC7/TDI (ADC input channel 7 or JTAG Test Data Input) PF6 ADC6/TDO (ADC input channel 6 or JTAG Test Data Output) PF5 ADC5/TMS (ADC input channel 5 or JTAG Test mode Select) PF4 ADC4/TCK (ADC input channel 4 or JTAG Test ClocK) PF3 ADC3 (ADC input channel 3) PF2 ADC2 (ADC input channel 2) PF1 ADC1 (ADC input channel 1) PF0 ADC0 (ADC input channel 0) • TDI, ADC7 – Port F, Bit 7 ADC7, Analog to Digital Converter, Channel 7. TDI, JTAG Test Data In: Serial input data to be shifted in to the Instruction Register or Data Reg- ister (scan chains). When the JTAG interface is enabled, this pin can not be used as an I/O pin. 80 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P • TDO, ADC6 – Port F, Bit 6 ADC6, Analog to Digital Converter, Channel 6. TDO, JTAG Test Data Out: Serial output data from Instruction Register or Data Register. When the JTAG interface is enabled, this pin can not be used as an I/O pin. In TAP states that shift out data, the TDO pin drives actively. In other states the pin is pulled high. • TMS, ADC5 – Port F, Bit 5 ADC5, Analog to Digital Converter, Channel 5. TMS, JTAG Test mode Select: This pin is used for navigating through the TAP-controller state machine. When the JTAG interface is enabled, this pin can not be used as an I/O pin. • TCK, ADC4 – Port F, Bit 4 ADC4, Analog to Digital Converter, Channel 4. TCK, JTAG Test Clock: JTAG operation is synchronous to TCK. When the JTAG interface is enabled, this pin can not be used as an I/O pin. • ADC3 - ADC0 – Port F, Bit 3:0 Analog to Digital Converter, Channel 3:0. Table 13-19. Overriding Signals for Alternate Functions in PF7:PF4 Signal Name PF7/ADC7/TDI PF6/ADC6/TDO PF5/ADC5/TMS PF4/ADC4/TCK PUOE JTAGEN JTAGEN JTAGEN JTAGEN PUOV 1 1 1 1 DDOE JTAGEN JTAGEN JTAGEN JTAGEN SHIFT_IR + DDOV 0 0 0 SHIFT_DR PVOE 0 JTAGEN 0 0 PVOV 0 TDO 0 0 PTOE – – – – DIEOE JTAGEN JTAGEN JTAGEN JTAGEN DIEOV 0 0 0 0 DI – – – – TDI TMS TCK AIO ADC6 INPUT ADC7 INPUT ADC5 INPUT ADC4 INPUT 81 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Table 13-20. Overriding Signals for Alternate Functions in PF3:PF0 Signal Name PF3/ADC3 PF2/ADC2 PF1/ADC1 PF0/ADC0 PUOE 0 0 0 0 PUOV 0 0 0 0 DDOE 0 0 0 0 DDOV 0 0 0 0 PVOE 0 0 0 0 PVOV 0 0 0 0 PTOE – – – – DIEOE 0 0 0 0 DIEOV 0 0 0 0 DI – – – – AIO ADC3 INPUT ADC2 INPUT ADC1 INPUT ADC0 INPUT 13.3.7 Alternate Functions of Port G The alternate pin configuration is as follows: Table 13-21. Port G Pins Alternate Functions (SEG refers to 100-pin/64-pin pinout) Port Pin Alternate Function PG5 RESET(1) PG4 T0/SEG (Timer/Counter0 Clock Input or LCD Front Plane 32/23) PG3 T1/SEG (Timer/Counter1 Clock Input or LCD Front Plane 33/24) PG2 SEG (LCD Front Plane 4/4) PG1 SEG (LCD Front Plane 17/13) PG0 SEG (LCD Front Plane 18/14) Note: 1. Port G, PG5 is input only. Pull-up is always on. See Table 27-3 on page 297 for RSTDISBL fuse. The alternate pin configuration is as follows: • RESET – Port G, Bit 5 RESET: External Reset input. When the RSTDISBL Fuse is programmed (‘0’), PG5 will function as input with pull-up always on. • T0/SEG – Port G, Bit 4 T0, Timer/Counter0 Counter Source. SEG, LCD front plane 32/23. • T1/SEG24 – Port G, Bit 3 T1, Timer/Counter1 Counter Source. SEG, LCD front plane 33/24. 82 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P • SEG – Port G, Bit 2 SEG, LCD front plane 4/4. • SEG – Port G, Bit 1 SEG, Segment driver 17/13. • SEG – Port G, Bit 0 SEG, LCD front plane 18/14. Table 13-21 and Table 13-22 relates the alternate functions of Port G to the overriding signals shown in Figure 13-5 on page 69. Table 13-22. Overriding Signals for Alternate Functions in PG4 PG4/T0/ Signal Name SEG(32/23) PUOE LCDEN PUOV 0 DDOE LCDEN DDOV 1 PVOE 0 PVOV 0 PTOE – DIEOE LCDEN • (LCDPM) DIEOV 0 DI T0 INPUT AIO – AIO LCDSEG 83 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Table 13-23. Overriding Signals for Alternate Functions in PG3:0 PG3/T1/ Signal Name SEG(33/24) PG2/SEG(4/4) PG1/SEG(17/13) PG0/SEG(1814) PUOE LCDEN LCDEN LCDEN LCDEN PUOV 0 0 0 0 DDOE LCDEN LCDEN LCDEN LCDEN DDOV 0 0 0 0 PVOE 0 0 0 0 PVOV 0 0 0 0 PTOE – – – – DIEOE LCDEN • (LCDPM) LCDEN LCDEN • (LCDPM) LCDEN • (LCDPM) DIEOV 0 0 0 0 DI T1 INPUT – – – AIO – – – – AIO LCDSEG LCDSEG LCDSEG LCDSEG 13.3.8 Alternate Functions of Port H Port H is only present in ATmega3290P. The alternate pin configuration is as follows: Table 13-24. Port H Pins Alternate Functions Port Pin Alternate Function PH7 PCINT23/SEG (Pin Change Interrupt23 or LCD Front Plane 36) PH6 PCINT22/SEG (Pin Change Interrupt22 or LCD Front Plane 37) PH5 PCINT21/SEG (Pin Change Interrupt21 or LCD Front Plane 38) PH4 PCINT20/SEG (Pin Change Interrupt20 or LCD Front Plane 39) PH3 PCINT19/SEG (Pin Change Interrupt19 or LCD Front Plane 7) PH2 PCINT18/SEG (Pin Change Interrupt18 or LCD Front Plane 8) PH1 PCINT17/SEG (Pin Change Interrupt17 or LCD Front Plane 9) PH0 PCINT16/SEG (Pin Change Interrupt16 or LCD Front Plane 10) The alternate pin configuration is as follows: • PCINT23/SEG – Port H, Bit 7 PCINT23, Pin Change Interrupt Source 23: The PH7 pin can serve as an external interrupt source. SEG, LCD front plane 36. 84 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P • PCINT22/SEG – Port H, Bit 6 PCINT22, Pin Change Interrupt Source 22: The PH6 pin can serve as an external interrupt source. SEG, LCD front plane 37. • PCINT21/SEG – Port H, Bit 5 PCINT21, Pin Change Interrupt Source 21: The PH5 pin can serve as an external interrupt source. SEG, LCD front plane 38. • PCINT20/SEG – Port H, Bit 4 PCINT20, Pin Change Interrupt Source 20: The PH4 pin can serve as an external interrupt source. SEG, LCD front plane 39. • PCINT19/SEG – Port H, Bit 3 PCINT19, Pin Change Interrupt Source 19: The PH3 pin can serve as an external interrupt source. SEG, LCD front plane 7. • PCINT18/SEG – Port H, Bit 2 PCINT18, Pin Change Interrupt Source 18: The PH2 pin can serve as an external interrupt source. SEG, LCD front plane 8. • PCINT17/SEG – Port H, Bit 1 PCINT17, Pin Change Interrupt Source 17: The P1 pin can serve as an external interrupt source. SEG, LCD front plane 9. • PCINT16/SEG – Port H, Bit 0 PCINT16, Pin Change Interrupt Source 16: The PH0 pin can serve as an external interrupt source. SEG, LCD front plane 10. 85 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Table 13-25 and Table 13-26 relates the alternate functions of Port H to the overriding signals shown in Figure 13-5 on page 69. Table 13-25. Overriding Signals for Alternate Functions in PH7:4 PH7/PCINT23/ PH6/PCINT22/ PH5/PCINT21/ PH4/PCINT20/ Signal Name SEG36 SEG37 SEG38 SEG39 PUOE LCDEN LCDEN LCDEN LCDEN PUOV 0 0 0 0 DDOE LCDEN LCDEN LCDEN LCDEN DDOV 0 0 0 0 PVOE 0 0 0 0 PVOV 0 0 0 0 PTOE – – – – PCINT23 • PCIE0 PCINT22 • PCIE0 PCINT21 • PCIE0 PCINT20 • PCIE0 DIEOE •LCDEN • LCDPM •LCDEN • LCDPM •LCDEN • LCDPM •LCDEN • LCDPM DIEOV DI PCINT23 INPUT PCINT22 INPUT PCINT21 INPUT PCINT20 INPUT AIO – – – – AIO LCDSEG LCDSEG LCDSEG LCDSEG Table 13-26. Overriding Signals for Alternate Functions in PH3:0 (ATmega329P/3290P) PH3/PCINT19/ PH2/PCINT18/ PH1/PCINT17/ PH0/PCINT16/ Signal Name SEG7 SEG8 SEG9 SEG10 PUOE LCDEN LCDEN LCDEN LCDEN PUOV 0 0 0 0 DDOE LCDEN LCDEN LCDEN LCDEN DDOV 0 0 0 0 PVOE 0 0 0 0 PVOV 0 0 0 0 PTOE – – – – PCINT19 • PCIE0 PCINT18 • PCIE0 PCINT17 • PCIE0 PCINT16 • PCIE0 DIEOE •LCDEN • LCDPM •LCDEN • LCDPM •LCDEN • LCDPM •LCDEN • LCDPM DIEOV DI PCINT19 INPUT PCINT18 INPUT PCINT17 INPUT PCINT16 INPUT AIO LCDSEG LCDSEG LCDSEG LCDSEG 86 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 13.3.9 Alternate Functions of Port J Port J is only present in ATmega3290P. The alternate pin configuration is as follows: Table 13-27. Port J Pins Alternate Functions Port Pin Alternate Function PJ6 PCINT30/SEG (Pin Change Interrupt30 or LCD Front Plane 27) PJ5 PCINT29/SEG (Pin Change Interrupt29 or LCD Front Plane 28) PJ4 PCINT28/SEG (Pin Change Interrupt28 or LCD Front Plane 29) PJ3 PCINT27/SEG (Pin Change Interrupt27 or LCD Front Plane 30) PJ2 PCINT26/SEG(Pin Change Interrupt26 or LCD Front Plane 31) PJ1 PCINT25/SEG(Pin Change Interrupt25 or LCD Front Plane 34) PJ0 PCINT24/SEG (Pin Change Interrupt26 or LCD Front Plane 35) The alternate pin configuration is as follows: • PCINT30/SEG – Port J, Bit 6 PCINT30, Pin Change Interrupt Source 30: The PE30 pin can serve as an external interrupt source. SEG, LCD front plane 27. • PCINT29/SEG – Port J, Bit 5 PCINT29, Pin Change Interrupt Source 29: The PE29 pin can serve as an external interrupt source. SEG, LCD front plane28. 87 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P • PCINT28/SEG – Port J, Bit 4 PCINT28, Pin Change Interrupt Source 28: The PE28 pin can serve as an external interrupt source. SEG, LCD front plane 29. • PCINT27/SEG – Port J, Bit 3 PCINT27, Pin Change Interrupt Source 27: The PE27 pin can serve as an external interrupt source. SEG, LCD front plane 30. • PCINT26/SEG – Port J, Bit 2 PCINT26, Pin Change Interrupt Source 26: The PE26 pin can serve as an external interrupt source. SEG, LCD front plane 31. • PCINT25/SEG – Port J, Bit 1 PCINT25, Pin Change Interrupt Source 25: The PE25 pin can serve as an external interrupt source. SEG, LCD front plane 34. • PCINT24/SEG – Port J, Bit 0 PCINT24, Pin Change Interrupt Source 24: The PE24 pin can serve as an external interrupt source. SEG, LCD front plane 35. Table 13-28 on page 88 and Table 13-29 on page 89 relates the alternate functions of Port J to the overriding signals shown in Figure 13-5 on page 69. Table 13-28. Overriding Signals for Alternate Functions in PJ7:4 (ATmega329P/3290P) PJ6/PCINT30/ PJ5/PCINT29/ PJ4/PCINT28/ Signal Name PJ7 SEG27 SEG28 SEG29 PUOE 0 LCDEN LCDEN LCDEN PUOV 0 0 0 0 DDOE 0 LCDEN LCDEN LCDEN DDOV 0 0 0 0 PVOE 0 0 0 0 PVOV 0 0 0 0 PTOE – – – – PCINT30 • PCIE0 PCINT29 • PCIE0 PCINT28 • PCIE0 DIEOE 0 •LCDEN • LCDPM •LCDEN • LCDPM •LCDEN • LCDPM DIEOV 0 0 0 0 DI – – – – AIO – LCDSEG LCDSEG LCDSEG 88 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Table 13-29. Overriding Signals for Alternate Functions in PH3:0 (ATmega329P/3290P) PJ3/PCINT27/ PJ2/PCINT26/ PJ1/PCINT25/ PJ0/PCINT24/ Signal Name SEG30 SEG31 SEG34 SEG35 PUOE LCDEN LCDEN LCDEN LCDEN PUOV 0 0 0 0 DDOE LCDEN LCDEN LCDEN LCDEN DDOV 0 0 0 0 PVOE 0 0 0 0 PVOV 0 0 0 0 PTOE – – – – PCINT27 • PCIE0 PCINT26 • PCIE0 PCINT25 • PCIE0 PCINT24 • PCIE0 DIEOE •LCDEN • LCDPM •LCDEN • LCDPM •LCDEN • LCDPM •LCDEN • LCDPM DIEOV DI AIO LCDSEG LCDSEG LCDSEG LCDSEG 89 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 13.4 Register Description 13.4.1 MCUCR – MCU Control Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0x35 (0x55) JTD BODS BODSE PUD – – IVSEL IVCE MCUCR Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R R R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 • Bit 4 – PUD: Pull-up Disable When this bit is written to one, the pull-ups in the I/O ports are disabled even if the DDxn and PORTxn Registers are configured to enable the pull-ups ({DDxn, PORTxn} = 0b01). See ”Con- figuring the Pin” on page 64 for more details about this feature. 13.4.2 PORTA – Port A Data Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0x02 (0x22) PORTA7 PORTA6 PORTA5 PORTA4 PORTA3 PORTA2 PORTA1 PORTA0 PORTA Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 13.4.3 DDRA – Port A Data Direction Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0x01 (0x21) DDA7 DDA6 DDA5 DDA4 DDA3 DDA2 DDA1 DDA0 DDRA Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 13.4.4 PINA – Port A Input Pins Address Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0x00 (0x20) PINA7 PINA6 PINA5 PINA4 PINA3 PINA2 PINA1 PINA0 PINA Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 13.4.5 PORTB – Port B Data Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0x05 (0x25) PORTB7 PORTB6 PORTB5 PORTB4 PORTB3 PORTB2 PORTB1 PORTB0 PORTB Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 13.4.6 DDRB – Port B Data Direction Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0x04 (0x24) DDB7 DDB6 DDB5 DDB4 DDB3 DDB2 DDB1 DDB0 DDRB Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 13.4.7 PINB – Port B Input Pins Address Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0x03 (0x23) PINB7 PINB6 PINB5 PINB4 PINB3 PINB2 PINB1 PINB0 PINB Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 90 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 13.4.8 PORTC – Port C Data Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0x08 (0x28) PORTC7 PORTC6 PORTC5 PORTC4 PORTC3 PORTC2 PORTC1 PORTC0 PORTC Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 13.4.9 DDRC – Port C Data Direction Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0x07 (0x27) DDC7 DDC6 DDC5 DDC4 DDC3 DDC2 DDC1 DDC0 DDRC Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 13.4.10 PINC – Port C Input Pins Address Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0x06 (0x26) PINC7 PINC6 PINC5 PINC4 PINC3 PINC2 PINC1 PINC0 PINC Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 13.4.11 PORTD – Port D Data Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0x0B (0x2B) PORTD7 PORTD6 PORTD5 PORTD4 PORTD3 PORTD2 PORTD1 PORTD0 PORTD Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 13.4.12 DDRD – Port D Data Direction Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0x0A (0x2A) DDD7 DDD6 DDD5 DDD4 DDD3 DDD2 DDD1 DDD0 DDRD Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 13.4.13 PIND – Port D Input Pins Address Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0x09 (0x29) PIND7 PIND6 PIND5 PIND4 PIND3 PIND2 PIND1 PIND0 PIND Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 13.4.14 PORTE – Port E Data Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0x0E (0x2E) PORTE7 PORTE6 PORTE5 PORTE4 PORTE3 PORTE2 PORTE1 PORTE0 PORTE Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 13.4.15 DDRE – Port E Data Direction Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0x0D (0x2D) DDE7 DDE6 DDE5 DDE4 DDE3 DDE2 DDE1 DDE0 DDRE Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 91 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 13.4.16 PINE – Port E Input Pins Address Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0x0C (0x2C) PINE7 PINE6 PINE5 PINE4 PINE3 PINE2 PINE1 PINE0 PINE Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 13.4.17 PORTF – Port F Data Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0x11 (0x31) PORTF7 PORTF6 PORTF5 PORTF4 PORTF3 PORTF2 PORTF1 PORTF0 PORTF Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 13.4.18 DDRF – Port F Data Direction Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0x10 (0x30) DDF7 DDF6 DDF5 DDF4 DDF3 DDF2 DDF1 DDF0 DDRF Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 13.4.19 PINF – Port F Input Pins Address Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0x0F (0x2F) PINF7 PINF6 PINF5 PINF4 PINF3 PINF2 PINF1 PINF0 PINF Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 13.4.20 PORTG – Port G Data Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0x14 (0x34) – – – PORTG4 PORTG3 PORTG2 PORTG1 PORTG0 PORTG Read/Write R R R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 13.4.21 DDRG – Port G Data Direction Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0x13 (0x33) – – – DDG4 DDG3 DDG2 DDG1 DDG0 DDRG Read/Write R R R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 13.4.22 PING – Port G Input Pins Address Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0x12 (0x32) – – PING5 PING4 PING3 PING2 PING1 PING0 PING Read/Write R R R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 13.4.23 PORTH – Port H Data Register(1) Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 (0xDA) PORTH7 PORTH6 PORTH5 PORTH4 PORTH3 PORTH2 PORTH1 PORTH0 PORTH Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 92 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 13.4.24 DDRH – Port H Data Direction Register(1) Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 (0xD9) DDH7 DDH6 DDH5 DDH4 DDH3 DDH2 DDH1 DDH0 DDRH Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 13.4.25 PINH – Port H Input Pins Address(1) Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 (0xD8) PINH7 PINH6 PINH5 PINH4 PINH3 PINH2 PINH1 PINH0 PINH Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 13.4.26 PORTJ – Port J Data Register(1) Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 (0xDD) – PORTJ6 PORTJ5 PORTJ4 PORTJ3 PORTJ2 PORTJ1 PORTJ0 PORTJ Read/Write R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 13.4.27 DDRJ – Port J Data Direction Register(1) Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 (0xDC) – DDJ6 DDJ5 DDJ4 DDJ3 DDJ2 DDJ1 DDJ0 DDRJ Read/Write R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 13.4.28 PINJ – Port J Input Pins Address(1) Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 (0xDB) – PINJ6 PINJ5 PINJ4 PINJ3 PINJ2 PINJ1 PINJ0 PINJ Read/Write R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Note: 1. Register only available in ATmega3290P. 93 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 14. 8-bit Timer/Counter0 with PWM 14.1 Features • Single Compare Unit Counter • Clear Timer on Compare Match (Auto Reload) • Glitch-free, Phase Correct Pulse Width Modulator (PWM) • Frequency Generator • External Event Counter • 10-bit Clock Prescaler • Overflow and Compare Match Interrupt Sources (TOV0 and OCF0A) 14.2 Overview Timer/Counter0 is a general purpose, single compare unit, 8-bit Timer/Counter module. A simpli- fied block diagram of the 8-bit Timer/Counter is shown in Figure 14-1. For the actual placement of I/O pins, refer to ”MLF/ Pinout ATmega329P” on page 2 and ”TQFP / Pinout ATmega3290P” on page 3. CPU accessible I/O Registers, including I/O bits and I/O pins, are shown in bold. The device-specific I/O Register and bit locations are listed in the ”Register Description” on page 155. Figure 14-1. 8-bit Timer/Counter Block Diagram TCCRn count TOVn clear (Int.Req.) Control Logic direction clkTn Clock Select Edge Tn Detector BOTTOM TOP S ( From Prescaler ) U Timer/Counter B TCNTn A = 0 = 0xFF T OCn A (Int.Req.) D = Waveform OCn Generation OCRn 14.2.1 Registers The Timer/Counter (TCNT0) and Output Compare Register (OCR0A) are 8-bit registers. Inter- rupt request (abbreviated to Int.Req. in the figure) signals are all visible in the Timer Interrupt Flag Register (TIFR0). All interrupts are individually masked with the Timer Interrupt Mask Reg- ister (TIMSK0). TIFR0 and TIMSK0 are not shown in the figure. The Timer/Counter can be clocked internally, via the prescaler, or by an external clock source on the T0 pin. The Clock Select logic block controls which clock source and edge the Timer/Counter uses to increment (or decrement) its value. The Timer/Counter is inactive when no clock source is selected. The output from the Clock Select logic is referred to as the timer clock (clk ). T0 94 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P The double buffered Output Compare Register (OCR0A) is compared with the Timer/Counter value at all times. The result of the compare can be used by the Waveform Generator to gener- ate a PWM or variable frequency output on the Output Compare pin (OC0A). See ”Output Compare Unit” on page 97 for details. The compare match event will also set the Compare Flag (OCF0A) which can be used to generate an Output Compare interrupt request. 14.2.2 Definitions Many register and bit references in this section are written in general form. A lower case “n” replaces the Timer/Counter number, in this case 0. A lower case “x” replaces the Output Com- pare unit number, in this case unit A. However, when using the register or bit defines in a program, the precise form must be used, i.e., TCNT0 for accessing Timer/Counter0 counter value and so on. The definitions in Table 14-1 are also used extensively throughout the document. Table 14-1. Definitions of Timer/Counter values. BOTTOM The counter reaches the BOTTOM when it becomes 0x00. MAX The counter reaches its MAXimum when it becomes 0xFF (decimal 255). TOP The counter reaches the TOP when it becomes equal to the highest value in the count sequence. The TOP value can be assigned to be the fixed value 0xFF (MAX) or the value stored in the OCR0A Register. The assignment is depen- dent on the mode of operation. 14.3 Timer/Counter Clock Sources The Timer/Counter can be clocked by an internal or an external clock source. The clock source is selected by the Clock Select logic which is controlled by the Clock Select (CS02:0) bits located in the Timer/Counter Control Register (TCCR0A). For details, see ”System Clock Pres- caler” on page 33. 14.4 Counter Unit The main part of the 8-bit Timer/Counter is the programmable bi-directional counter unit. Figure 14-2 shows a block diagram of the counter and its surroundings. Figure 14-2. Counter Unit Block Diagram TOVn DATA BUS (Int.Req.) Clock Select count Edge Tn TCNTn clear Control Logic clkTn Detector direction ( From Prescaler ) bottom top Signal description (internal signals): count Increment or decrement TCNT0 by 1. direction Select between increment and decrement. clear Clear TCNT0 (set all bits to zero). 95 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P clk Timer/Counter clock, referred to as clk in the following. Tn T0 top Signalize that TCNT0 has reached maximum value. bottom Signalize that TCNT0 has reached minimum value (zero). Depending of the mode of operation used, the counter is cleared, incremented, or decremented at each timer clock (clk ). clk can be generated from an external or internal clock source, T0 T0 selected by the Clock Select bits (CS02:0). When no clock source is selected (CS02:0 = 0) the timer is stopped. However, the TCNT0 value can be accessed by the CPU, regardless of whether clk is present or not. A CPU write overrides (has priority over) all counter clear or T0 count operations. The counting sequence is determined by the setting of the WGM01 and WGM00 bits located in the Timer/Counter Control Register (TCCR0A). There are close connections between how the counter behaves (counts) and how waveforms are generated on the Output Compare output OC0A. For more details about advanced counting sequences and waveform generation, see ”Modes of Operation” on page 99. The Timer/Counter Overflow Flag (TOV0) is set according to the mode of operation selected by the WGM01:0 bits. TOV0 can be used for generating a CPU interrupt. 96 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 14.5 Output Compare Unit The 8-bit comparator continuously compares TCNT0 with the Output Compare Register (OCR0A). Whenever TCNT0 equals OCR0A, the comparator signals a match. A match will set the Output Compare Flag (OCF0A) at the next timer clock cycle. If enabled (OCIE0A = 1 and Global Interrupt Flag in SREG is set), the Output Compare Flag generates an Output Compare interrupt. The OCF0A Flag is automatically cleared when the interrupt is executed. Alternatively, the OCF0A Flag can be cleared by software by writing a logical one to its I/O bit location. The Waveform Generator uses the match signal to generate an output according to operating mode set by the WGM01:0 bits and Compare Output mode (COM0A1:0) bits. The max and bottom sig- nals are used by the Waveform Generator for handling the special cases of the extreme values in some modes of operation (See ”Modes of Operation” on page 99). Figure 14-3 shows a block diagram of the Output Compare unit. Figure 14-3. Output Compare Unit, Block Diagram DATA BUS OCRnx TCNTn = (8-bit Comparator ) OCFnx (Int.Req.) top bottom Waveform Generator OCnx FOCn WGMn1:0 COMnX1:0 The OCR0A Register is double buffered when using any of the Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) modes. For the normal and Clear Timer on Compare (CTC) modes of operation, the double buff- ering is disabled. The double buffering synchronizes the update of the OCR0 Compare Register to either top or bottom of the counting sequence. The synchronization prevents the occurrence of odd-length, non-symmetrical PWM pulses, thereby making the output glitch-free. The OCR0A Register access may seem complex, but this is not case. When the double buffer- ing is enabled, the CPU has access to the OCR0A Buffer Register, and if double buffering is disabled the CPU will access the OCR0A directly. 97 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 14.5.1 Force Output Compare In non-PWM waveform generation modes, the match output of the comparator can be forced by writing a one to the Force Output Compare (FOC0A) bit. Forcing compare match will not set the OCF0A Flag or reload/clear the timer, but the OC0A pin will be updated as if a real compare match had occurred (the COM0A1:0 bits settings define whether the OC0A pin is set, cleared or toggled). 14.5.2 Compare Match Blocking by TCNT0 Write All CPU write operations to the TCNT0 Register will block any compare match that occur in the next timer clock cycle, even when the timer is stopped. This feature allows OCR0A to be initial- ized to the same value as TCNT0 without triggering an interrupt when the Timer/Counter clock is enabled. 14.5.3 Using the Output Compare Unit Since writing TCNT0 in any mode of operation will block all compare matches for one timer clock cycle, there are risks involved when changing TCNT0 when using the Output Compare unit, independently of whether the Timer/Counter is running or not. If the value written to TCNT0 equals the OCR0A value, the compare match will be missed, resulting in incorrect waveform generation. Similarly, do not write the TCNT0 value equal to BOTTOM when the counter is counting down. The setup of the OC0A should be performed before setting the Data Direction Register for the port pin to output. The easiest way of setting the OC0A value is to use the Force Output Com- pare (FOC0A) strobe bits in Normal mode. The OC0A Register keeps its value even when changing between Waveform Generation modes. Be aware that the COM0A1:0 bits are not double buffered together with the compare value. Changing the COM0A1:0 bits will take effect immediately. 14.6 Compare Match Output Unit The Compare Output mode (COM0A1:0) bits have two functions. The Waveform Generator uses the COM0A1:0 bits for defining the Output Compare (OC0A) state at the next compare match. Also, the COM0A1:0 bits control the OC0A pin output source. Figure 14-4 shows a sim- plified schematic of the logic affected by the COM0A1:0 bit setting. The I/O Registers, I/O bits, and I/O pins in the figure are shown in bold. Only the parts of the general I/O port control regis- ters (DDR and PORT) that are affected by the COM0A1:0 bits are shown. When referring to the OC0A state, the reference is for the internal OC0A Register, not the OC0A pin. If a System Reset occur, the OC0A Register is reset to “0”. 98 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Figure 14-4. Compare Match Output Unit, Schematic COMnx1 COMnx0 Waveform D Q FOCn Generator 1 OCn OCnx Pin 0 D Q S U B PORT A T A D D Q DDR clk I/O The general I/O port function is overridden by the Output Compare (OC0A) from the Waveform Generator if either of the COM0A1:0 bits are set. However, the OC0A pin direction (input or out- put) is still controlled by the Data Direction Register (DDR) for the port pin. The Data Direction Register bit for the OC0A pin (DDR_OC0A) must be set as output before the OC0A value is vis- ible on the pin. The port override function is independent of the Waveform Generation mode. The design of the Output Compare pin logic allows initialization of the OC0A state before the output is enabled. Note that some COM0A1:0 bit settings are reserved for certain modes of operation. See ”Register Description” on page 155. 14.6.1 Compare Output Mode and Waveform Generation The Waveform Generator uses the COM0A1:0 bits differently in Normal, CTC, and PWM modes. For all modes, setting the COM0A1:0 = 0 tells the Waveform Generator that no action on the OC0A Register is to be performed on the next compare match. For compare output actions in the non-PWM modes refer to Table 17-3 on page 156. For fast PWM mode, refer to Table 17- 4 on page 156, and for phase correct PWM refer to Table 17-5 on page 156. A change of the COM0A1:0 bits state will have effect at the first compare match after the bits are written. For non-PWM modes, the action can be forced to have immediate effect by using the FOC0A strobe bits. 14.7 Modes of Operation The mode of operation, i.e., the behavior of the Timer/Counter and the Output Compare pins, is defined by the combination of the Waveform Generation mode (WGM01:0) and Compare Output mode (COM0A1:0) bits. The Compare Output mode bits do not affect the counting sequence, while the Waveform Generation mode bits do. The COM0A1:0 bits control whether the PWM output generated should be inverted or not (inverted or non-inverted PWM). For non-PWM modes the COM0A1:0 bits control whether the output should be set, cleared, or toggled at a compare match (See ”Compare Match Output Unit” on page 98). For detailed timing information refer to Figure 1, Figure 2, Figure 3 and Figure 4 in ”Timer/Coun- ter Timing Diagrams” on page 104. 99 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 14.7.1 Normal Mode The simplest mode of operation is the Normal mode (WGM01:0 = 0). In this mode the counting direction is always up (incrementing), and no counter clear is performed. The counter simply overruns when it passes its maximum 8-bit value (TOP = 0xFF) and then restarts from the bot- tom (0x00). In normal operation the Timer/Counter Overflow Flag (TOV0) will be set in the same timer clock cycle as the TCNT0 becomes zero. The TOV0 Flag in this case behaves like a ninth bit, except that it is only set, not cleared. However, combined with the timer overflow interrupt that automatically clears the TOV0 Flag, the timer resolution can be increased by software. There are no special cases to consider in the Normal mode, a new counter value can be written anytime. The Output Compare unit can be used to generate interrupts at some given time. Using the Out- put Compare to generate waveforms in Normal mode is not recommended, since this will occupy too much of the CPU time. 14.7.2 Clear Timer on Compare Match (CTC) Mode In Clear Timer on Compare or CTC mode (WGM01:0 = 2), the OCR0A Register is used to manipulate the counter resolution. In CTC mode the counter is cleared to zero when the counter value (TCNT0) matches the OCR0A. The OCR0A defines the top value for the counter, hence also its resolution. This mode allows greater control of the compare match output frequency. It also simplifies the operation of counting external events. The timing diagram for the CTC mode is shown in Figure 14-5. The counter value (TCNT0) increases until a compare match occurs between TCNT0 and OCR0A, and then counter (TCNT0) is cleared. Figure 14-5. CTC Mode, Timing Diagram OCnx Interrupt Flag Set TCNTn OCn (COMnx1:0 = 1) (Toggle) Period 1 2 3 4 An interrupt can be generated each time the counter value reaches the TOP value by using the OCF0A Flag. If the interrupt is enabled, the interrupt handler routine can be used for updating the TOP value. However, changing TOP to a value close to BOTTOM when the counter is run- ning with none or a low prescaler value must be done with care since the CTC mode does not have the double buffering feature. If the new value written to OCR0A is lower than the current value of TCNT0, the counter will miss the compare match. The counter will then have to count to its maximum value (0xFF) and wrap around starting at 0x00 before the compare match can occur. For generating a waveform output in CTC mode, the OC0A output can be set to toggle its logical level on each compare match by setting the Compare Output mode bits to toggle mode (COM0A1:0 = 1). The OC0A value will not be visible on the port pin unless the data direction for 100 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P the pin is set to output. The waveform generated will have a maximum frequency of f = OC0 f /2 when OCR0A is set to zero (0x00). The waveform frequency is defined by the following clk_I/O equation: f clk_I/O f = -------------------------------------------------- OCnx 2N1+OCRnx The N variable represents the prescale factor (1, 8, 64, 256, or 1024). As for the Normal mode of operation, the TOV0 Flag is set in the same timer clock cycle that the counter counts from MAX to 0x00. 14.7.3 Fast PWM Mode The fast Pulse Width Modulation or fast PWM mode (WGM01:0 = 3) provides a high frequency PWM waveform generation option. The fast PWM differs from the other PWM option by its sin- gle-slope operation. The counter counts from BOTTOM to MAX then restarts from BOTTOM. In non-inverting Compare Output mode, the Output Compare (OC0A) is cleared on the compare match between TCNT0 and OCR0A, and set at BOTTOM. In inverting Compare Output mode, the output is set on compare match and cleared at BOTTOM. Due to the single-slope operation, the operating frequency of the fast PWM mode can be twice as high as the phase correct PWM mode that use dual-slope operation. This high frequency makes the fast PWM mode well suited for power regulation, rectification, and DAC applications. High frequency allows physically small sized external components (coils, capacitors), and therefore reduces total system cost. In fast PWM mode, the counter is incremented until the counter value matches the MAX value. The counter is then cleared at the following timer clock cycle. The timing diagram for the fast PWM mode is shown in Figure 14-6. The TCNT0 value is in the timing diagram shown as a his- togram for illustrating the single-slope operation. The diagram includes non-inverted and inverted PWM outputs. The small horizontal line marks on the TCNT0 slopes represent compare matches between OCR0A and TCNT0. Figure 14-6. Fast PWM Mode, Timing Diagram OCRnx Interrupt Flag Set OCRnx Update and TOVn Interrupt Flag Set TCNTn OCn (COMnx1:0 = 2) OCn (COMnx1:0 = 3) Period 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 The Timer/Counter Overflow Flag (TOV0) is set each time the counter reaches MAX. If the inter- rupt is enabled, the interrupt handler routine can be used for updating the compare value. 101 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P In fast PWM mode, the compare unit allows generation of PWM waveforms on the OC0A pin. Setting the COM0A1:0 bits to two will produce a non-inverted PWM and an inverted PWM output can be generated by setting the COM0A1:0 to three (See Table 17-4 on page 156). The actual OC0A value will only be visible on the port pin if the data direction for the port pin is set as out- put. The PWM waveform is generated by setting (or clearing) the OC0A Register at the compare match between OCR0A and TCNT0, and clearing (or setting) the OC0A Register at the timer clock cycle the counter is cleared (changes from MAX to BOTTOM). The PWM frequency for the output can be calculated by the following equation: f clk_I/O f = ------------------ OCnxPWM N256 The N variable represents the prescale factor (1, 8, 64, 256, or 1024). The extreme values for the OCR0A Register represents special cases when generating a PWM waveform output in the fast PWM mode. If the OCR0A is set equal to BOTTOM, the output will be a narrow spike for each MAX+1 timer clock cycle. Setting the OCR0A equal to MAX will result in a constantly high or low output (depending on the polarity of the output set by the COM0A1:0 bits.) A frequency (with 50% duty cycle) waveform output in fast PWM mode can be achieved by set- ting OC0A to toggle its logical level on each compare match (COM0A1:0 = 1). The waveform generated will have a maximum frequency of f = f /2 when OCR0A is set to zero. This OC0 clk_I/O feature is similar to the OC0A toggle in CTC mode, except the double buffer feature of the Out- put Compare unit is enabled in the fast PWM mode. 14.7.4 Phase Correct PWM Mode The phase correct PWM mode (WGM01:0 = 1) provides a high resolution phase correct PWM waveform generation option. The phase correct PWM mode is based on a dual-slope operation. The counter counts repeatedly from BOTTOM to MAX and then from MAX to BOTTOM. In non- inverting Compare Output mode, the Output Compare (OC0A) is cleared on the compare match between TCNT0 and OCR0A while counting up, and set on the compare match while counting down. In inverting Output Compare mode, the operation is inverted. The dual-slope operation has lower maximum operation frequency than single slope operation. However, due to the sym- metric feature of the dual-slope PWM modes, these modes are preferred for motor control applications. The PWM resolution for the phase correct PWM mode is fixed to eight bits. In phase correct PWM mode the counter is incremented until the counter value matches MAX. When the counter reaches MAX, it changes the count direction. The TCNT0 value will be equal to MAX for one timer clock cycle. The timing diagram for the phase correct PWM mode is shown on Figure 14-7. The TCNT0 value is in the timing diagram shown as a histogram for illustrating the dual-slope operation. The diagram includes non-inverted and inverted PWM outputs. The small horizontal line marks on the TCNT0 slopes represent compare matches between OCR0A and TCNT0. 102 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Figure 14-7. Phase Correct PWM Mode, Timing Diagram OCnx Interrupt Flag Set OCRnx Update TOVn Interrupt Flag Set TCNTn OCn (COMnx1:0 = 2) OCn (COMnx1:0 = 3) Period 1 2 3 The Timer/Counter Overflow Flag (TOV0) is set each time the counter reaches BOTTOM. The Interrupt Flag can be used to generate an interrupt each time the counter reaches the BOTTOM value. In phase correct PWM mode, the compare unit allows generation of PWM waveforms on the OC0A pin. Setting the COM0A1:0 bits to two will produce a non-inverted PWM. An inverted PWM output can be generated by setting the COM0A1:0 to three (See Table 17-5 on page 156). The actual OC0A value will only be visible on the port pin if the data direction for the port pin is set as output. The PWM waveform is generated by clearing (or setting) the OC0A Register at the compare match between OCR0A and TCNT0 when the counter increments, and setting (or clearing) the OC0A Register at compare match between OCR0A and TCNT0 when the counter decrements. The PWM frequency for the output when using phase correct PWM can be calcu- lated by the following equation: f clk_I/O f = ------------------ OCnxPCPWM N510 The N variable represents the prescale factor (1, 8, 64, 256, or 1024). The extreme values for the OCR0A Register represent special cases when generating a PWM waveform output in the phase correct PWM mode. If the OCR0A is set equal to BOTTOM, the output will be continuously low and if set equal to MAX the output will be continuously high for non-inverted PWM mode. For inverted PWM the output will have the opposite logic values. At the very start of period 2 in Figure 14-7 OCn has a transition from high to low even though there is no Compare Match. The point of this transition is to guarantee symmetry around BOT- TOM. There are two cases that give a transition without Compare Match. • OCR0A changes its value from MAX, like in Figure 14-7. When the OCR0A value is MAX the OCn pin value is the same as the result of a down-counting Compare Match. To ensure 103 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P symmetry around BOTTOM the OCn value at MAX must correspond to the result of an up- counting Compare Match. • The timer starts counting from a value higher than the one in OCR0A, and for that reason misses the Compare Match and hence the OCn change that would have happened on the way up. 14.8 Timer/Counter Timing Diagrams The Timer/Counter is a synchronous design and the timer clock (clk ) is therefore shown as a T0 clock enable signal in the following figures. The figures include information on when Interrupt Flags are set. Figure 1 contains timing data for basic Timer/Counter operation. The figure shows the count sequence close to the MAX value in all modes other than phase correct PWM mode. Figure 1. Timer/Counter Timing Diagram, no Prescaling clk I/O clk Tn (clk /1) I/O TCNTn MAX - 1 MAX BOTTOM BOTTOM + 1 TOVn Figure 2 shows the same timing data, but with the prescaler enabled. Figure 2. Timer/Counter Timing Diagram, with Prescaler (f /8) clk_I/O clk I/O clk Tn (clk /8) I/O TCNTn MAX - 1 MAX BOTTOM BOTTOM + 1 TOVn Figure 3 shows the setting of OCF0A in all modes except CTC mode. Figure 3. Timer/Counter Timing Diagram, Setting of OCF0A, with Prescaler (f /8) clk_I/O clk I/O clk Tn (clk /8) I/O TCNTn OCRnx - 1 OCRnx OCRnx + 1 OCRnx + 2 OCRnx OCRnx Value OCFnx 104 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Figure 4 shows the setting of OCF0A and the clearing of TCNT0 in CTC mode. Figure 4. Timer/Counter Timing Diagram, Clear Timer on Compare Match mode, with Prescaler (f /8) clk_I/O clk I/O clk Tn (clk /8) I/O TCNTn TOP - 1 TOP BOTTOM BOTTOM + 1 (CTC) OCRnx TOP OCFnx 105 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 15. 16-bit Timer/Counter1 15.1 Features • True 16-bit Design (i.e., Allows 16-bit PWM) • Two independent Output Compare Units • Double Buffered Output Compare Registers • One Input Capture Unit • Input Capture Noise Canceler • Clear Timer on Compare Match (Auto Reload) • Glitch-free, Phase Correct Pulse Width Modulator (PWM) • Variable PWM Period • Frequency Generator • External Event Counter • Four independent interrupt Sources (TOV1, OCF1A, OCF1B, and ICF1) 15.2 Overview The 16-bit Timer/Counter unit allows accurate program execution timing (event management), wave generation, and signal timing measurement. Most register and bit references in this section are written in general form. A lower case “n” replaces the Timer/Counter number, and a lower case “x” replaces the Output Compare unit. However, when using the register or bit defines in a program, the precise form must be used, i.e., TCNT1 for accessing Timer/Counter1 counter value and so on. A simplified block diagram of the 16-bit Timer/Counter is shown in Figure 15-1. For the actual placement of I/O pins, refer to ”MLF/ Pinout ATmega329P” on page 2 and ”TQFP / Pinout ATmega3290P” on page 3. CPU accessible I/O Registers, including I/O bits and I/O pins, are shown in bold. The device-specific I/O Register and bit locations are listed in the ”Register Description” on page 127. The PRTIM1 bit in ”Power Reduction Register” on page 39 must be written to zero to enable the Timer/Counter1 module. 106 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Figure 15-1. 16-bit Timer/Counter Block Diagram(1) Count TOVn Clear (Int.Req.) Control Logic Direction clk Clock Select Tn Edge Tn Detector TOP BOTTOM ( From Prescaler ) Timer/Counter TCNTn = = 0 OCnA (Int.Req.) = Waveform OCnA Generation OCRnA Fixed OCnB TOP (Int.Req.) S U Values B = Waveform OCnB A Generation T A D OCRnB ( From Analog Comparator Ouput ) ICFn (Int.Req.) Edge Noise ICRn Detector Canceler ICPn TCCRnA TCCRnB Note: 1. Refer to Figure 1-2 on page 3, Table 13-5 on page 72, and Table 13-11 on page 76 for Timer/Counter1 pin placement and description. 15.2.1 Registers The Timer/Counter (TCNT1), Output Compare Registers (OCR1A/B), and Input Capture Regis- ter (ICR1) are all 16-bit registers. Special procedures must be followed when accessing the 16- bit registers. These procedures are described in the section ”Accessing 16-bit Registers” on page 109. The Timer/Counter Control Registers (TCCR1A/B) are 8-bit registers and have no CPU access restrictions. Interrupt requests (abbreviated to Int.Req. in the figure) signals are all visible in the Timer Interrupt Flag Register (TIFR1). All interrupts are individually masked with the Timer Interrupt Mask Register (TIMSK1). TIFR1 and TIMSK1 are not shown in the figure. The Timer/Counter can be clocked internally, via the prescaler, or by an external clock source on the T1 pin. The Clock Select logic block controls which clock source and edge the Timer/Counter uses to increment (or decrement) its value. The Timer/Counter is inactive when no clock source is selected. The output from the Clock Select logic is referred to as the timer clock (clk ). T1 The double buffered Output Compare Registers (OCR1A/B) are compared with the Timer/Coun- ter value at all time. The result of the compare can be used by the Waveform Generator to generate a PWM or variable frequency output on the Output Compare pin (OC1A/B). See ”Out- 107 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P put Compare Units” on page 115. The compare match event will also set the Compare Match Flag (OCF1A/B) which can be used to generate an Output Compare interrupt request. The Input Capture Register can capture the Timer/Counter value at a given external (edge trig- gered) event on either the Input Capture pin (ICP1) or on the Analog Comparator pins (See ”Analog Comparator” on page 210) The Input Capture unit includes a digital filtering unit (Noise Canceler) for reducing the chance of capturing noise spikes. The TOP value, or maximum Timer/Counter value, can in some modes of operation be defined by either the OCR1A Register, the ICR1 Register, or by a set of fixed values. When using OCR1A as TOP value in a PWM mode, the OCR1A Register can not be used for generating a PWM output. However, the TOP value will in this case be double buffered allowing the TOP value to be changed in run time. If a fixed TOP value is required, the ICR1 Register can be used as an alternative, freeing the OCR1A to be used as PWM output. 15.2.2 Definitions The following definitions are used extensively throughout the section: Table 15-1. Definitions of Timer/Counter values. BOTTOM The counter reaches the BOTTOM when it becomes 0x0000. MAX The counter reaches its MAXimum when it becomes 0xFFFF (decimal 65535). The counter reaches the TOP when it becomes equal to the highest value in the count sequence. The TOP value can be assigned to be one of the fixed values: 0x00FF, 0x01FF, TOP or 0x03FF, or to the value stored in the OCR1A or ICR1 Register. The assignment is dependent of the mode of operation. 15.2.3 Compatibility The 16-bit Timer/Counter has been updated and improved from previous versions of the 16-bit AVR Timer/Counter. This 16-bit Timer/Counter is fully compatible with the earlier version regarding: • All 16-bit Timer/Counter related I/O Register address locations, including Timer Interrupt Registers. • Bit locations inside all 16-bit Timer/Counter Registers, including Timer Interrupt Registers. • Interrupt Vectors. The following control bits have changed name, but have same functionality and register location: • PWM10 is changed to WGM10. • PWM11 is changed to WGM11. • CTC1 is changed to WGM12. The following bits are added to the 16-bit Timer/Counter Control Registers: • FOC1A and FOC1B are added to TCCR1C. • WGM13 is added to TCCR1B. The 16-bit Timer/Counter has improvements that will affect the compatibility in some special cases. 108 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 15.3 Accessing 16-bit Registers The TCNT1, OCR1A/B, and ICR1 are 16-bit registers that can be accessed by the AVR CPU via the 8-bit data bus. The 16-bit register must be byte accessed using two read or write operations. Each 16-bit timer has a single 8-bit register for temporary storing of the high byte of the 16-bit access. The same temporary register is shared between all 16-bit registers within each 16-bit timer. Accessing the low byte triggers the 16-bit read or write operation. When the low byte of a 16-bit register is written by the CPU, the high byte stored in the temporary register, and the low byte written are both copied into the 16-bit register in the same clock cycle. When the low byte of a 16-bit register is read by the CPU, the high byte of the 16-bit register is copied into the tempo- rary register in the same clock cycle as the low byte is read. Not all 16-bit accesses uses the temporary register for the high byte. Reading the OCR1A/B 16- bit registers does not involve using the temporary register. To do a 16-bit write, the high byte must be written before the low byte. For a 16-bit read, the low byte must be read before the high byte. The following code examples show how to access the 16-bit Timer Registers assuming that no interrupts updates the temporary register. The same principle can be used directly for accessing the OCR1A/B and ICR1 Registers. Note that when using “C”, the compiler handles the 16-bit access. Assembly Code Examples(1) ... ; Set TCNT1 to 0x01FF ldir17,0x01 ldir16,0xFF outTCNT1H,r17 outTCNT1L,r16 ; Read TCNT1 into r17:r16 in r16,TCNT1L in r17,TCNT1H ... C Code Examples(1) unsigned int i; ... /* Set TCNT1 to 0x01FF */ TCNT1 = 0x1FF; /* Read TCNT1 into i */ i = TCNT1; ... Note: 1. See ”About Code Examples” on page 9 The assembly code example returns the TCNT1 value in the r17:r16 register pair. It is important to notice that accessing 16-bit registers are atomic operations. If an interrupt occurs between the two instructions accessing the 16-bit register, and the interrupt code updates the temporary register by accessing the same or any other of the 16-bit Timer Regis- ters, then the result of the access outside the interrupt will be corrupted. Therefore, when both 109 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P the main code and the interrupt code update the temporary register, the main code must disable the interrupts during the 16-bit access. The following code examples show how to do an atomic read of the TCNT1 Register contents. Reading any of the OCR1A/B or ICR1 Registers can be done by using the same principle. Assembly Code Example(1) TIM16_ReadTCNT1: ; Save global interrupt flag in r18,SREG ; Disable interrupts cli ; Read TCNT1 into r17:r16 in r16,TCNT1L in r17,TCNT1H ; Restore global interrupt flag outSREG,r18 ret C Code Example(1) unsigned int TIM16_ReadTCNT1(void) { unsigned char sreg; unsigned int i; /* Save global interrupt flag */ sreg = SREG; /* Disable interrupts */ __disable_interrupt(); /* Read TCNT1 into i */ i = TCNT1; /* Restore global interrupt flag */ SREG = sreg; return i; } Note: 1. See ”About Code Examples” on page 9 The assembly code example returns the TCNT1 value in the r17:r16 register pair. 110 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P The following code examples show how to do an atomic write of the TCNT1 Register contents. Writing any of the OCR1A/B or ICR1 Registers can be done by using the same principle. Assembly Code Example(1) TIM16_WriteTCNT1: ; Save global interrupt flag in r18,SREG ; Disable interrupts cli ; Set TCNT1 to r17:r16 outTCNT1H,r17 outTCNT1L,r16 ; Restore global interrupt flag outSREG,r18 ret C Code Example(1) void TIM16_WriteTCNT1( unsigned int i ) { unsigned char sreg; unsigned int i; /* Save global interrupt flag */ sreg = SREG; /* Disable interrupts */ __disable_interrupt(); /* Set TCNT1 to i */ TCNT1 = i; /* Restore global interrupt flag */ SREG = sreg; } Note: 1. See ”About Code Examples” on page 9 The assembly code example requires that the r17:r16 register pair contains the value to be writ- ten to TCNT1. 15.3.1 Reusing the Temporary High Byte Register If writing to more than one 16-bit register where the high byte is the same for all registers written, then the high byte only needs to be written once. However, note that the same rule of atomic operation described previously also applies in this case. 15.4 Timer/Counter Clock Sources The Timer/Counter can be clocked by an internal or an external clock source. The clock source is selected by the Clock Select logic which is controlled by the Clock Select (CS12:0) bits located in the Timer/Counter control Register B (TCCR1B). For details on clock sources and prescaler, see ”System Clock Prescaler” on page 33. 111 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 15.5 Counter Unit The main part of the 16-bit Timer/Counter is the programmable 16-bit bi-directional counter unit. Figure 15-2 shows a block diagram of the counter and its surroundings. Figure 15-2. Counter Unit Block Diagram DATA BUS (8-bit) TOVn (Int.Req.) TEMP (8-bit) Clock Select Count Edge Tn TCNTnH (8-bit) TCNTnL (8-bit) Clear clk Detector Control Logic Tn Direction TCNTn (16-bit Counter) ( From Prescaler ) TOP BOTTOM Signal description (internal signals): Count Increment or decrement TCNT1 by 1. Direction Select between increment and decrement. Clear Clear TCNT1 (set all bits to zero). clk Timer/Counter clock. T1 TOP Signalize that TCNT1 has reached maximum value. BOTTOM Signalize that TCNT1 has reached minimum value (zero). The 16-bit counter is mapped into two 8-bit I/O memory locations: Counter High (TCNT1H) con- taining the upper eight bits of the counter, and Counter Low (TCNT1L) containing the lower eight bits. The TCNT1H Register can only be indirectly accessed by the CPU. When the CPU does an access to the TCNT1H I/O location, the CPU accesses the high byte temporary register (TEMP). The temporary register is updated with the TCNT1H value when the TCNT1L is read, and TCNT1H is updated with the temporary register value when TCNT1L is written. This allows the CPU to read or write the entire 16-bit counter value within one clock cycle via the 8-bit data bus. It is important to notice that there are special cases of writing to the TCNT1 Register when the counter is counting that will give unpredictable results. The special cases are described in the sections where they are of importance. Depending on the mode of operation used, the counter is cleared, incremented, or decremented at each timer clock (clk ). The clk can be generated from an external or internal clock source, T1 T1 selected by the Clock Select bits (CS12:0). When no clock source is selected (CS12:0 = 0) the timer is stopped. However, the TCNT1 value can be accessed by the CPU, independent of whether clk is present or not. A CPU write overrides (has priority over) all counter clear or T1 count operations. The counting sequence is determined by the setting of the Waveform Generation mode bits (WGM13:0) located in the Timer/Counter Control Registers A and B (TCCR1A and TCCR1B). There are close connections between how the counter behaves (counts) and how waveforms are generated on the Output Compare outputs OC1x. For more details about advanced counting sequences and waveform generation, see ”Modes of Operation” on page 118. 112 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P The Timer/Counter Overflow Flag (TOV1) is set according to the mode of operation selected by the WGM13:0 bits. TOV1 can be used for generating a CPU interrupt. 15.6 Input Capture Unit The Timer/Counter incorporates an Input Capture unit that can capture external events and give them a time-stamp indicating time of occurrence. The external signal indicating an event, or mul- tiple events, can be applied via the ICP1 pin or alternatively, via the analog-comparator unit. The time-stamps can then be used to calculate frequency, duty-cycle, and other features of the sig- nal applied. Alternatively the time-stamps can be used for creating a log of the events. The Input Capture unit is illustrated by the block diagram shown in Figure 15-3. The elements of the block diagram that are not directly a part of the Input Capture unit are gray shaded. The small “n” in register and bit names indicates the Timer/Counter number. Figure 15-3. Input Capture Unit Block Diagram DATA BUS (8-bit) TEMP (8-bit) ICRnH (8-bit) ICRnL (8-bit) TCNTnH (8-bit) TCNTnL (8-bit) WRITE ICRn (16-bit Register) TCNTn (16-bit Counter) ACO* ACIC* ICNC ICES Analog Comparator Noise Edge ICFn (Int.Req.) Canceler Detector ICPn When a change of the logic level (an event) occurs on the Input Capture pin (ICP1), alternatively on the Analog Comparator output (ACO), and this change confirms to the setting of the edge detector, a capture will be triggered. When a capture is triggered, the 16-bit value of the counter (TCNT1) is written to the Input Capture Register (ICR1). The Input Capture Flag (ICF1) is set at the same system clock as the TCNT1 value is copied into ICR1 Register. If enabled (ICIE1 = 1), the Input Capture Flag generates an Input Capture interrupt. The ICF1 Flag is automatically cleared when the interrupt is executed. Alternatively the ICF1 Flag can be cleared by software by writing a logical one to its I/O bit location. Reading the 16-bit value in the Input Capture Register (ICR1) is done by first reading the low byte (ICR1L) and then the high byte (ICR1H). When the low byte is read the high byte is copied into the high byte temporary register (TEMP). When the CPU reads the ICR1H I/O location it will access the TEMP Register. The ICR1 Register can only be written when using a Waveform Generation mode that utilizes the ICR1 Register for defining the counter’s TOP value. In these cases the Waveform Genera- 113 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P tion mode (WGM13:0) bits must be set before the TOP value can be written to the ICR1 Register. When writing the ICR1 Register the high byte must be written to the ICR1H I/O location before the low byte is written to ICR1L. For more information on how to access the 16-bit registers refer to ”Accessing 16-bit Registers” on page 109. 15.6.1 Input Capture Trigger Source The main trigger source for the Input Capture unit is the Input Capture pin (ICP1). Timer/Counter1 can alternatively use the Analog Comparator output as trigger source for the Input Capture unit. The Analog Comparator is selected as trigger source by setting the Analog Comparator Input Capture (ACIC) bit in the Analog Comparator Control and Status Register (ACSR). Be aware that changing trigger source can trigger a capture. The Input Capture Flag must therefore be cleared after the change. Both the Input Capture pin (ICP1) and the Analog Comparator output (ACO) inputs are sampled using the same technique as for the T1 pin (Figure 16-1 on page 134). The edge detector is also identical. However, when the noise canceler is enabled, additional logic is inserted before the edge detector, which increases the delay by four system clock cycles. Note that the input of the noise canceler and edge detector is always enabled unless the Timer/Counter is set in a Wave- form Generation mode that uses ICR1 to define TOP. An Input Capture can be triggered by software by controlling the port of the ICP1 pin. 15.6.2 Noise Canceler The noise canceler improves noise immunity by using a simple digital filtering scheme. The noise canceler input is monitored over four samples, and all four must be equal for changing the output that in turn is used by the edge detector. The noise canceler is enabled by setting the Input Capture Noise Canceler (ICNC1) bit in Timer/Counter Control Register B (TCCR1B). When enabled the noise canceler introduces addi- tional four system clock cycles of delay from a change applied to the input, to the update of the ICR1 Register. The noise canceler uses the system clock and is therefore not affected by the prescaler. 15.6.3 Using the Input Capture Unit The main challenge when using the Input Capture unit is to assign enough processor capacity for handling the incoming events. The time between two events is critical. If the processor has not read the captured value in the ICR1 Register before the next event occurs, the ICR1 will be overwritten with a new value. In this case the result of the capture will be incorrect. When using the Input Capture interrupt, the ICR1 Register should be read as early in the inter- rupt handler routine as possible. Even though the Input Capture interrupt has relatively high priority, the maximum interrupt response time is dependent on the maximum number of clock cycles it takes to handle any of the other interrupt requests. Using the Input Capture unit in any mode of operation when the TOP value (resolution) is actively changed during operation, is not recommended. Measurement of an external signal’s duty cycle requires that the trigger edge is changed after each capture. Changing the edge sensing must be done as early as possible after the ICR1 Register has been read. After a change of the edge, the Input Capture Flag (ICF1) must be 114 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P cleared by software (writing a logical one to the I/O bit location). For measuring frequency only, the clearing of the ICF1 Flag is not required (if an interrupt handler is used). 15.7 Output Compare Units The 16-bit comparator continuously compares TCNT1 with the Output Compare Register (OCR1x). If TCNT equals OCR1x the comparator signals a match. A match will set the Output Compare Flag (OCF1x) at the next timer clock cycle. If enabled (OCIE1x = 1), the Output Com- pare Flag generates an Output Compare interrupt. The OCF1x Flag is automatically cleared when the interrupt is executed. Alternatively the OCF1x Flag can be cleared by software by writ- ing a logical one to its I/O bit location. The Waveform Generator uses the match signal to generate an output according to operating mode set by the Waveform Generation mode (WGM13:0) bits and Compare Output mode (COM1x1:0) bits. The TOP and BOTTOM signals are used by the Waveform Generator for handling the special cases of the extreme values in some modes of operation (See Section “15.9” on page 118.) A special feature of Output Compare unit A allows it to define the Timer/Counter TOP value (i.e., counter resolution). In addition to the counter resolution, the TOP value defines the period time for waveforms generated by the Waveform Generator. Figure 15-4 shows a block diagram of the Output Compare unit. The small “n” in the register and bit names indicates the device number (n = 1 for Timer/Counter 1), and the “x” indicates Output Compare unit (A/B). The elements of the block diagram that are not directly a part of the Output Compare unit are gray shaded. Figure 15-4. Output Compare Unit, Block Diagram DATA BUS (8-bit) TEMP (8-bit) OCRnxH Buf. (8-bit) OCRnxL Buf. (8-bit) TCNTnH (8-bit) TCNTnL (8-bit) OCRnx Buffer (16-bit Register) TCNTn (16-bit Counter) OCRnxH (8-bit) OCRnxL (8-bit) OCRnx (16-bit Register) = (16-bit Comparator ) OCFnx (Int.Req.) TOP Waveform Generator OCnx BOTTOM WGMn3:0 COMnx1:0 The OCR1x Register is double buffered when using any of the twelve Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) modes. For the Normal and Clear Timer on Compare (CTC) modes of operation, the double buffering is disabled. The double buffering synchronizes the update of the OCR1x Com- pare Register to either TOP or BOTTOM of the counting sequence. The synchronization 115 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P prevents the occurrence of odd-length, non-symmetrical PWM pulses, thereby making the out- put glitch-free. The OCR1x Register access may seem complex, but this is not case. When the double buffering is enabled, the CPU has access to the OCR1x Buffer Register, and if double buffering is dis- abled the CPU will access the OCR1x directly. The content of the OCR1x (Buffer or Compare) Register is only changed by a write operation (the Timer/Counter does not update this register automatically as the TCNT1 and ICR1 Register). Therefore OCR1x is not read via the high byte temporary register (TEMP). However, it is a good practice to read the low byte first as when accessing other 16-bit registers. Writing the OCR1x Registers must be done via the TEMP Reg- ister since the compare of all 16 bits is done continuously. The high byte (OCR1xH) has to be written first. When the high byte I/O location is written by the CPU, the TEMP Register will be updated by the value written. Then when the low byte (OCR1xL) is written to the lower eight bits, the high byte will be copied into the upper 8-bits of either the OCR1x buffer or OCR1x Compare Register in the same system clock cycle. For more information of how to access the 16-bit registers refer to ”Accessing 16-bit Registers” on page 109. 15.7.1 Force Output Compare In non-PWM Waveform Generation modes, the match output of the comparator can be forced by writing a one to the Force Output Compare (FOC1x) bit. Forcing compare match will not set the OCF1x Flag or reload/clear the timer, but the OC1x pin will be updated as if a real compare match had occurred (the COM11:0 bits settings define whether the OC1x pin is set, cleared or toggled). 15.7.2 Compare Match Blocking by TCNT1 Write All CPU writes to the TCNT1 Register will block any compare match that occurs in the next timer clock cycle, even when the timer is stopped. This feature allows OCR1x to be initialized to the same value as TCNT1 without triggering an interrupt when the Timer/Counter clock is enabled. 15.7.3 Using the Output Compare Unit Since writing TCNT1 in any mode of operation will block all compare matches for one timer clock cycle, there are risks involved when changing TCNT1 when using any of the Output Compare units, independent of whether the Timer/Counter is running or not. If the value written to TCNT1 equals the OCR1x value, the compare match will be missed, resulting in incorrect waveform generation. Do not write the TCNT1 equal to TOP in PWM modes with variable TOP values. The compare match for the TOP will be ignored and the counter will continue to 0xFFFF. Similarly, do not write the TCNT1 value equal to BOTTOM when the counter is counting down. The setup of the OC1x should be performed before setting the Data Direction Register for the port pin to output. The easiest way of setting the OC1x value is to use the Force Output Com- pare (FOC1x) strobe bits in Normal mode. The OC1x Register keeps its value even when changing between Waveform Generation modes. Be aware that the COM1x1:0 bits are not double buffered together with the compare value. Changing the COM1x1:0 bits will take effect immediately. 116 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 15.8 Compare Match Output Unit The Compare Output mode (COM1x1:0) bits have two functions. The Waveform Generator uses the COM1x1:0 bits for defining the Output Compare (OC1x) state at the next compare match. Secondly the COM1x1:0 bits control the OC1x pin output source. Figure 15-5 shows a simplified schematic of the logic affected by the COM1x1:0 bit setting. The I/O Registers, I/O bits, and I/O pins in the figure are shown in bold. Only the parts of the general I/O Port Control Registers (DDR and PORT) that are affected by the COM1x1:0 bits are shown. When referring to the OC1x state, the reference is for the internal OC1x Register, not the OC1x pin. If a system reset occur, the OC1x Register is reset to “0”. Figure 15-5. Compare Match Output Unit, Schematic COMnx1 Waveform COMnx0 D Q Generator FOCnx 1 OCnx OCnx Pin 0 D Q S U B PORT A T A D D Q DDR clk I/O The general I/O port function is overridden by the Output Compare (OC1x) from the Waveform Generator if either of the COM1x1:0 bits are set. However, the OC1x pin direction (input or out- put) is still controlled by the Data Direction Register (DDR) for the port pin. The Data Direction Register bit for the OC1x pin (DDR_OC1x) must be set as output before the OC1x value is visi- ble on the pin. The port override function is generally independent of the Waveform Generation mode, but there are some exceptions. Refer to Table 15-2, Table 15-3 and Table 15-4 for details. The design of the Output Compare pin logic allows initialization of the OC1x state before the out- put is enabled. Note that some COM1x1:0 bit settings are reserved for certain modes of operation. See ”Register Description” on page 127 The COM1x1:0 bits have no effect on the Input Capture unit. 15.8.1 Compare Output Mode and Waveform Generation The Waveform Generator uses the COM1x1:0 bits differently in normal, CTC, and PWM modes. For all modes, setting the COM1x1:0 = 0 tells the Waveform Generator that no action on the 117 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P OC1x Register is to be performed on the next compare match. For compare output actions in the non-PWM modes refer to Table 15-2 on page 127. For fast PWM mode refer to Table 15-3 on page 128, and for phase correct and phase and frequency correct PWM refer to Table 15-4 on page 128. A change of the COM1x1:0 bits state will have effect at the first compare match after the bits are written. For non-PWM modes, the action can be forced to have immediate effect by using the FOC1x strobe bits. 15.9 Modes of Operation The mode of operation, i.e., the behavior of the Timer/Counter and the Output Compare pins, is defined by the combination of the Waveform Generation mode (WGM13:0) and Compare Output mode (COM1x1:0) bits. The Compare Output mode bits do not affect the counting sequence, while the Waveform Generation mode bits do. The COM1x1:0 bits control whether the PWM out- put generated should be inverted or not (inverted or non-inverted PWM). For non-PWM modes the COM1x1:0 bits control whether the output should be set, cleared or toggle at a compare match (See ”Compare Match Output Unit” on page 117) For detailed timing information refer to ”Timer/Counter Timing Diagrams” on page 125. 15.9.1 Normal Mode The simplest mode of operation is the Normal mode (WGM13:0 = 0). In this mode the counting direction is always up (incrementing), and no counter clear is performed. The counter simply overruns when it passes its maximum 16-bit value (MAX = 0xFFFF) and then restarts from the BOTTOM (0x0000). In normal operation the Timer/Counter Overflow Flag (TOV1) will be set in the same timer clock cycle as the TCNT1 becomes zero. The TOV1 Flag in this case behaves like a 17th bit, except that it is only set, not cleared. However, combined with the timer overflow interrupt that automatically clears the TOV1 Flag, the timer resolution can be increased by soft- ware. There are no special cases to consider in the Normal mode, a new counter value can be written anytime. The Input Capture unit is easy to use in Normal mode. However, observe that the maximum interval between the external events must not exceed the resolution of the counter. If the interval between events are too long, the timer overflow interrupt or the prescaler must be used to extend the resolution for the capture unit. The Output Compare units can be used to generate interrupts at some given time. Using the Output Compare to generate waveforms in Normal mode is not recommended, since this will occupy too much of the CPU time. 15.9.2 Clear Timer on Compare Match (CTC) Mode In Clear Timer on Compare or CTC mode (WGM13:0 = 4 or 12), the OCR1A or ICR1 Register are used to manipulate the counter resolution. In CTC mode the counter is cleared to zero when the counter value (TCNT1) matches either the OCR1A (WGM13:0 = 4) or the ICR1 (WGM13:0 = 12). The OCR1A or ICR1 define the top value for the counter, hence also its resolution. This mode allows greater control of the compare match output frequency. It also simplifies the opera- tion of counting external events. The timing diagram for the CTC mode is shown in Figure 15-6. The counter value (TCNT1) increases until a compare match occurs with either OCR1A or ICR1, and then counter (TCNT1) is cleared. 118 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Figure 15-6. CTC Mode, Timing Diagram OCnA Interrupt Flag Set or ICFn Interrupt Flag Set (Interrupt on TOP) TCNTn OCnA (COMnA1:0 = 1) (Toggle) Period 1 2 3 4 An interrupt can be generated at each time the counter value reaches the TOP value by either using the OCF1A or ICF1 Flag according to the register used to define the TOP value. If the interrupt is enabled, the interrupt handler routine can be used for updating the TOP value. How- ever, changing the TOP to a value close to BOTTOM when the counter is running with none or a low prescaler value must be done with care since the CTC mode does not have the double buff- ering feature. If the new value written to OCR1A or ICR1 is lower than the current value of TCNT1, the counter will miss the compare match. The counter will then have to count to its max- imum value (0xFFFF) and wrap around starting at 0x0000 before the compare match can occur. In many cases this feature is not desirable. An alternative will then be to use the fast PWM mode using OCR1A for defining TOP (WGM13:0 = 15) since the OCR1A then will be double buffered. For generating a waveform output in CTC mode, the OC1A output can be set to toggle its logical level on each compare match by setting the Compare Output mode bits to toggle mode (COM1A1:0 = 1). The OC1A value will not be visible on the port pin unless the data direction for the pin is set to output (DDR_OC1A = 1). The waveform generated will have a maximum fre- quency of f = f /2 when OCR1A is set to zero (0x0000). The waveform frequency is OC1A clk_I/O defined by the following equation: f clk_I/O f = --------------------------------------------------- OCnA 2N1+OCRnA The N variable represents the prescaler factor (1, 8, 64, 256, or 1024). As for the Normal mode of operation, the TOV1 Flag is set in the same timer clock cycle that the counter counts from MAX to 0x0000. 15.9.3 Fast PWM Mode The fast Pulse Width Modulation or fast PWM mode (WGM13:0 = 5, 6, 7, 14, or 15) provides a high frequency PWM waveform generation option. The fast PWM differs from the other PWM options by its single-slope operation. The counter counts from BOTTOM to TOP then restarts from BOTTOM. In non-inverting Compare Output mode, the Output Compare (OC1x) is cleared on the compare match between TCNT1 and OCR1x, and set at BOTTOM. In inverting Compare Output mode output is set on compare match and cleared at BOTTOM. Due to the single-slope operation, the operating frequency of the fast PWM mode can be twice as high as the phase cor- rect and phase and frequency correct PWM modes that use dual-slope operation. This high frequency makes the fast PWM mode well suited for power regulation, rectification, and DAC applications. High frequency allows physically small sized external components (coils, capaci- tors), hence reduces total system cost. 119 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P The PWM resolution for fast PWM can be fixed to 8-, 9-, or 10-bit, or defined by either ICR1 or OCR1A. The minimum resolution allowed is 2-bit (ICR1 or OCR1A set to 0x0003), and the max- imum resolution is 16-bit (ICR1 or OCR1A set to MAX). The PWM resolution in bits can be calculated by using the following equation: logTOP+1 R = ----------------------------------- FPWM log2 In fast PWM mode the counter is incremented until the counter value matches either one of the fixed values 0x00FF, 0x01FF, or 0x03FF (WGM13:0 = 5, 6, or 7), the value in ICR1 (WGM13:0 = 14), or the value in OCR1A (WGM13:0 = 15). The counter is then cleared at the following timer clock cycle. The timing diagram for the fast PWM mode is shown in Figure 15-7. The figure shows fast PWM mode when OCR1A or ICR1 is used to define TOP. The TCNT1 value is in the timing diagram shown as a histogram for illustrating the single-slope operation. The diagram includes non-inverted and inverted PWM outputs. The small horizontal line marks on the TCNT1 slopes represent compare matches between OCR1x and TCNT1. The OC1x Interrupt Flag will be set when a compare match occurs. Figure 15-7. Fast PWM Mode, Timing Diagram OCRnx / TOP Update and TOVn Interrupt Flag Set and OCnA Interrupt Flag Set or ICFn Interrupt Flag Set (Interrupt on TOP) TCNTn OCnx (COMnx1:0 = 2) OCnx (COMnx1:0 = 3) Period 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 The Timer/Counter Overflow Flag (TOV1) is set each time the counter reaches TOP. In addition the OC1A or ICF1 Flag is set at the same timer clock cycle as TOV1 is set when either OCR1A or ICR1 is used for defining the TOP value. If one of the interrupts are enabled, the interrupt han- dler routine can be used for updating the TOP and compare values. When changing the TOP value the program must ensure that the new TOP value is higher or equal to the value of all of the Compare Registers. If the TOP value is lower than any of the Compare Registers, a compare match will never occur between the TCNT1 and the OCR1x. Note that when using fixed TOP values the unused bits are masked to zero when any of the OCR1x Registers are written. The procedure for updating ICR1 differs from updating OCR1A when used for defining the TOP value. The ICR1 Register is not double buffered. This means that if ICR1 is changed to a low value when the counter is running with none or a low prescaler value, there is a risk that the new ICR1 value written is lower than the current value of TCNT1. The result will then be that the counter will miss the compare match at the TOP value. The counter will then have to count to the MAX value (0xFFFF) and wrap around starting at 0x0000 before the compare match can occur. The OCR1A Register however, is double buffered. This feature allows the OCR1A I/O location 120 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P to be written anytime. When the OCR1A I/O location is written the value written will be put into the OCR1A Buffer Register. The OCR1A Compare Register will then be updated with the value in the Buffer Register at the next timer clock cycle the TCNT1 matches TOP. The update is done at the same timer clock cycle as the TCNT1 is cleared and the TOV1 Flag is set. Using the ICR1 Register for defining TOP works well when using fixed TOP values. By using ICR1, the OCR1A Register is free to be used for generating a PWM output on OC1A. However, if the base PWM frequency is actively changed (by changing the TOP value), using the OCR1A as TOP is clearly a better choice due to its double buffer feature. In fast PWM mode, the compare units allow generation of PWM waveforms on the OC1x pins. Setting the COM1x1:0 bits to two will produce a non-inverted PWM and an inverted PWM output can be generated by setting the COM1x1:0 to three (see Table 15-3 on page 128). The actual OC1x value will only be visible on the port pin if the data direction for the port pin is set as output (DDR_OC1x). The PWM waveform is generated by setting (or clearing) the OC1x Register at the compare match between OCR1x and TCNT1, and clearing (or setting) the OC1x Register at the timer clock cycle the counter is cleared (changes from TOP to BOTTOM). The PWM frequency for the output can be calculated by the following equation: f clk_I/O f = ----------------------------------- OCnxPWM N1+TOP The N variable represents the prescaler divider (1, 8, 64, 256, or 1024). The extreme values for the OCR1x Register represents special cases when generating a PWM waveform output in the fast PWM mode. If the OCR1x is set equal to BOTTOM (0x0000) the out- put will be a narrow spike for each TOP+1 timer clock cycle. Setting the OCR1x equal to TOP will result in a constant high or low output (depending on the polarity of the output set by the COM1x1:0 bits.) A frequency (with 50% duty cycle) waveform output in fast PWM mode can be achieved by set- ting OC1A to toggle its logical level on each compare match (COM1A1:0 = 1). This applies only if OCR1A is used to define the TOP value (WGM13:0 = 15). The waveform generated will have a maximum frequency of f = f /2 when OCR1A is set to zero (0x0000). This feature is OC1A clk_I/O similar to the OC1A toggle in CTC mode, except the double buffer feature of the Output Com- pare unit is enabled in the fast PWM mode. 15.9.4 Phase Correct PWM Mode The phase correct Pulse Width Modulation or phase correct PWM mode (WGM13:0=1, 2, 3, 10, or 11) provides a high resolution phase correct PWM waveform generation option. The phase correct PWM mode is, like the phase and frequency correct PWM mode, based on a dual- slope operation. The counter counts repeatedly from BOTTOM (0x0000) to TOP and then from TOP to BOTTOM. In non-inverting Compare Output mode, the Output Compare (OC1x) is cleared on the compare match between TCNT1 and OCR1x while counting up, and set on the compare match while counting down. In inverting Output Compare mode, the operation is inverted. The dual-slope operation has lower maximum operation frequency than single slope operation. However, due to the symmetric feature of the dual-slope PWM modes, these modes are preferred for motor control applications. The PWM resolution for the phase correct PWM mode can be fixed to 8-, 9-, or 10-bit, or defined by either ICR1 or OCR1A. The minimum resolution allowed is 2-bit (ICR1 or OCR1A set to 121 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 0x0003), and the maximum resolution is 16-bit (ICR1 or OCR1A set to MAX). The PWM resolu- tion in bits can be calculated by using the following equation: logTOP+1 R = ----------------------------------- PCPWM log2 In phase correct PWM mode the counter is incremented until the counter value matches either one of the fixed values 0x00FF, 0x01FF, or 0x03FF (WGM13:0 = 1, 2, or 3), the value in ICR1 (WGM13:0 = 10), or the value in OCR1A (WGM13:0 = 11). The counter has then reached the TOP and changes the count direction. The TCNT1 value will be equal to TOP for one timer clock cycle. The timing diagram for the phase correct PWM mode is shown on Figure 15-8. The figure shows phase correct PWM mode when OCR1A or ICR1 is used to define TOP. The TCNT1 value is in the timing diagram shown as a histogram for illustrating the dual-slope operation. The diagram includes non-inverted and inverted PWM outputs. The small horizontal line marks on the TCNT1 slopes represent compare matches between OCR1x and TCNT1. The OC1x Inter- rupt Flag will be set when a compare match occurs. Figure 15-8. Phase Correct PWM Mode, Timing Diagram OCRnx/TOP Update and OCnA Interrupt Flag Set or ICFn Interrupt Flag Set (Interrupt on TOP) TOVn Interrupt Flag Set (Interrupt on Bottom) TCNTn OCnx (COMnx1:0 = 2) OCnx (COMnx1:0 = 3) Period 1 2 3 4 The Timer/Counter Overflow Flag (TOV1) is set each time the counter reaches BOTTOM. When either OCR1A or ICR1 is used for defining the TOP value, the OC1A or ICF1 Flag is set accord- ingly at the same timer clock cycle as the OCR1x Registers are updated with the double buffer value (at TOP). The Interrupt Flags can be used to generate an interrupt each time the counter reaches the TOP or BOTTOM value. When changing the TOP value the program must ensure that the new TOP value is higher or equal to the value of all of the Compare Registers. If the TOP value is lower than any of the Compare Registers, a compare match will never occur between the TCNT1 and the OCR1x. Note that when using fixed TOP values, the unused bits are masked to zero when any of the OCR1x Registers are written. As the third period shown in Figure 15-8 illustrates, changing the TOP actively while the Timer/Counter is running in the phase correct mode can result in an unsymmetrical output. The reason for this can be found in the time of update of the OCR1x Reg- 122 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P ister. Since the OCR1x update occurs at TOP, the PWM period starts and ends at TOP. This implies that the length of the falling slope is determined by the previous TOP value, while the length of the rising slope is determined by the new TOP value. When these two values differ the two slopes of the period will differ in length. The difference in length gives the unsymmetrical result on the output. It is recommended to use the phase and frequency correct mode instead of the phase correct mode when changing the TOP value while the Timer/Counter is running. When using a static TOP value there are practically no differences between the two modes of operation. In phase correct PWM mode, the compare units allow generation of PWM waveforms on the OC1x pins. Setting the COM1x1:0 bits to two will produce a non-inverted PWM and an inverted PWM output can be generated by setting the COM1x1:0 to three (See Table 1 on page 128). The actual OC1x value will only be visible on the port pin if the data direction for the port pin is set as output (DDR_OC1x). The PWM waveform is generated by setting (or clearing) the OC1x Register at the compare match between OCR1x and TCNT1 when the counter increments, and clearing (or setting) the OC1x Register at compare match between OCR1x and TCNT1 when the counter decrements. The PWM frequency for the output when using phase correct PWM can be calculated by the following equation: f clk_I/O f = ---------------------------- OCnxPCPWM 2NTOP The N variable represents the prescaler divider (1, 8, 64, 256, or 1024). The extreme values for the OCR1x Register represent special cases when generating a PWM waveform output in the phase correct PWM mode. If the OCR1x is set equal to BOTTOM the output will be continuously low and if set equal to TOP the output will be continuously high for non-inverted PWM mode. For inverted PWM the output will have the opposite logic values. If OCR1A is used to define the TOP value (WGM13:0 = 11) and COM1A1:0 = 1, the OC1A output will toggle with a 50% duty cycle. 15.9.5 Phase and Frequency Correct PWM Mode The phase and frequency correct Pulse Width Modulation, or phase and frequency correct PWM mode (WGM13:0 = 8 or 9) provides a high resolution phase and frequency correct PWM wave- form generation option. The phase and frequency correct PWM mode is, like the phase correct PWM mode, based on a dual-slope operation. The counter counts repeatedly from BOTTOM (0x0000) to TOP and then from TOP to BOTTOM. In non-inverting Compare Output mode, the Output Compare (OC1x) is cleared on the compare match between TCNT1 and OCR1x while counting up, and set on the compare match while counting down. In inverting Compare Output mode, the operation is inverted. The dual-slope operation gives a lower maximum operation fre- quency compared to the single-slope operation. However, due to the symmetric feature of the dual-slope PWM modes, these modes are preferred for motor control applications. The main difference between the phase correct, and the phase and frequency correct PWM mode is the time the OCR1x Register is updated by the OCR1x Buffer Register, (see Figure 15- 8 and Figure 15-9). The PWM resolution for the phase and frequency correct PWM mode can be defined by either ICR1 or OCR1A. The minimum resolution allowed is 2-bit (ICR1 or OCR1A set to 0x0003), and the maximum resolution is 16-bit (ICR1 or OCR1A set to MAX). The PWM resolution in bits can be calculated using the following equation: 123 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P logTOP+1 R = ----------------------------------- PFCPWM log2 In phase and frequency correct PWM mode the counter is incremented until the counter value matches either the value in ICR1 (WGM13:0 = 8), or the value in OCR1A (WGM13:0 = 9). The counter has then reached the TOP and changes the count direction. The TCNT1 value will be equal to TOP for one timer clock cycle. The timing diagram for the phase correct and frequency correct PWM mode is shown on Figure 15-9. The figure shows phase and frequency correct PWM mode when OCR1A or ICR1 is used to define TOP. The TCNT1 value is in the timing dia- gram shown as a histogram for illustrating the dual-slope operation. The diagram includes non- inverted and inverted PWM outputs. The small horizontal line marks on the TCNT1 slopes repre- sent compare matches between OCR1x and TCNT1. The OC1x Interrupt Flag will be set when a compare match occurs. Figure 15-9. Phase and Frequency Correct PWM Mode, Timing Diagram OCnA Interrupt Flag Set or ICFn Interrupt Flag Set (Interrupt on TOP) OCRnx/TOP Updateand TOVn Interrupt Flag Set (Interrupt on Bottom) TCNTn OCnx (COMnx1:0 = 2) OCnx (COMnx1:0 = 3) Period 1 2 3 4 The Timer/Counter Overflow Flag (TOV1) is set at the same timer clock cycle as the OCR1x Registers are updated with the double buffer value (at BOTTOM). When either OCR1A or ICR1 is used for defining the TOP value, the OC1A or ICF1 Flag set when TCNT1 has reached TOP. The Interrupt Flags can then be used to generate an interrupt each time the counter reaches the TOP or BOTTOM value. When changing the TOP value the program must ensure that the new TOP value is higher or equal to the value of all of the Compare Registers. If the TOP value is lower than any of the Compare Registers, a compare match will never occur between the TCNT1 and the OCR1x. As Figure 15-9 shows the output generated is, in contrast to the phase correct mode, symmetri- cal in all periods. Since the OCR1x Registers are updated at BOTTOM, the length of the rising and the falling slopes will always be equal. This gives symmetrical output pulses and is therefore frequency correct. Using the ICR1 Register for defining TOP works well when using fixed TOP values. By using ICR1, the OCR1A Register is free to be used for generating a PWM output on OC1A. However, 124 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P if the base PWM frequency is actively changed by changing the TOP value, using the OCR1A as TOP is clearly a better choice due to its double buffer feature. In phase and frequency correct PWM mode, the compare units allow generation of PWM wave- forms on the OC1x pins. Setting the COM1x1:0 bits to two will produce a non-inverted PWM and an inverted PWM output can be generated by setting the COM1x1:0 to three (See Table 1 on page 128). The actual OC1x value will only be visible on the port pin if the data direction for the port pin is set as output (DDR_OC1x). The PWM waveform is generated by setting (or clearing) the OC1x Register at the compare match between OCR1x and TCNT1 when the counter incre- ments, and clearing (or setting) the OC1x Register at compare match between OCR1x and TCNT1 when the counter decrements. The PWM frequency for the output when using phase and frequency correct PWM can be calculated by the following equation: f clk_I/O f = ---------------------------- OCnxPFCPWM 2NTOP The N variable represents the prescaler divider (1, 8, 64, 256, or 1024). The extreme values for the OCR1x Register represents special cases when generating a PWM waveform output in the phase correct PWM mode. If the OCR1x is set equal to BOTTOM the output will be continuously low and if set equal to TOP the output will be set to high for non- inverted PWM mode. For inverted PWM the output will have the opposite logic values. If OCR1A is used to define the TOP value (WGM13:0 = 9) and COM1A1:0 = 1, the OC1A output will toggle with a 50% duty cycle. 15.10 Timer/Counter Timing Diagrams The Timer/Counter is a synchronous design and the timer clock (clk ) is therefore shown as a T1 clock enable signal in the following figures. The figures include information on when Interrupt Flags are set, and when the OCR1x Register is updated with the OCR1x buffer value (only for modes utilizing double buffering). Figure 15-10 shows a timing diagram for the setting of OCF1x. Figure 15-10. Timer/Counter Timing Diagram, Setting of OCF1x, no Prescaling clk I/O clk Tn (clk /1) I/O TCNTn OCRnx - 1 OCRnx OCRnx + 1 OCRnx + 2 OCRnx OCRnx Value OCFnx Figure 15-11 shows the same timing data, but with the prescaler enabled. 125 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Figure 15-11. Timer/Counter Timing Diagram, Setting of OCF1x, with Prescaler (f /8) clk_I/O clk I/O clk Tn (clk /8) I/O TCNTn OCRnx - 1 OCRnx OCRnx + 1 OCRnx + 2 OCRnx OCRnx Value OCFnx Figure 15-12 shows the count sequence close to TOP in various modes. When using phase and frequency correct PWM mode the OCR1x Register is updated at BOTTOM. The timing diagrams will be the same, but TOP should be replaced by BOTTOM, TOP-1 by BOTTOM+1 and so on. The same renaming applies for modes that set the TOV1 Flag at BOTTOM. Figure 15-12. Timer/Counter Timing Diagram, no Prescaling clk I/O clk Tn (clk /1) I/O TCNTn TOP - 1 TOP BOTTOM BOTTOM + 1 (CTC and FPWM) TCNTn TOP - 1 TOP TOP - 1 TOP - 2 (PC and PFC PWM) TOVn (FPWM) and ICFn (if used as TOP) OCRnx Old OCRnx Value New OCRnx Value (Update at TOP) Figure 15-13 shows the same timing data, but with the prescaler enabled. 126 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Figure 15-13. Timer/Counter Timing Diagram, with Prescaler (f /8) clk_I/O clk I/O clk Tn (clk/8) I/O TCNTn TOP - 1 TOP BOTTOM BOTTOM + 1 (CTC and FPWM) TCNTn TOP - 1 TOP TOP - 1 TOP - 2 (PC and PFC PWM) TOVn (FPWM) and ICFn (if used as TOP) OCRnx Old OCRnx Value New OCRnx Value (Update at TOP) 15.11 Register Description 15.11.1 TCCR1A – Timer/Counter1 Control Register A Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 (0x80) COM1A1 COM1A0 COM1B1 COM1B0 – – WGM11 WGM10 TCCR1A Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R R R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 • Bit 7:6 – COM1A1:0: Compare Output Mode for Unit A • Bit 5:4 – COM1B1:0: Compare Output Mode for Unit B The COM1A1:0 and COM1B1:0 control the Output Compare pins (OC1A and OC1B respec- tively) behavior. If one or both of the COM1A1:0 bits are written to one, the OC1A output overrides the normal port functionality of the I/O pin it is connected to. If one or both of the COM1B1:0 bit are written to one, the OC1B output overrides the normal port functionality of the I/O pin it is connected to. However, note that the Data Direction Register (DDR) bit correspond- ing to the OC1A or OC1B pin must be set in order to enable the output driver. When the OC1A or OC1B is connected to the pin, the function of the COM1x1:0 bits is depen- dent of the WGM13:0 bits setting. Table 15-2 shows the COM1x1:0 bit functionality when the WGM13:0 bits are set to a Normal or a CTC mode (non-PWM). Table 15-2. Compare Output Mode, non-PWM COM1A1/COM1B1 COM1A0/COM1B0 Description 0 0 Normal port operation, OC1A/OC1B disconnected. 0 1 Toggle OC1A/OC1B on Compare Match. Clear OC1A/OC1B on Compare Match (Set output to 1 0 low level). Set OC1A/OC1B on Compare Match (Set output to 1 1 high level). 127 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Table 15-3 shows the COM1x1:0 bit functionality when the WGM13:0 bits are set to the fast PWM mode. Table 15-3. Compare Output Mode, Fast PWM(1) COM1A1/COM1B1 COM1A0/COM1B0 Description 0 0 Normal port operation, OC1A/OC1B disconnected. WGM13:0 = 14 or 15: Toggle OC1A on Compare Match, OC1B disconnected (normal port operation). 0 1 For all other WGM1 settings, normal port operation, OC1A/OC1B disconnected. Clear OC1A/OC1B on Compare Match, set 1 0 OC1A/OC1B at BOTTOM (non-inverting mode) Set OC1A/OC1B on Compare Match, clear 1 1 OC1A/OC1B at BOTTOM (inverting mode) Note: 1. A special case occurs when OCR1A/OCR1B equals TOP and COM1A1/COM1B1 is set. In this case the compare match is ignored, but the set or clear is done at BOTTOM. See Section “15.9.3” on page 119. for more details. Table 15-4 shows the COM1x1:0 bit functionality when the WGM13:0 bits are set to the phase correct or the phase and frequency correct, PWM mode. Table 15-4. Compare Output Mode, Phase Correct and Phase and Frequency Correct PWM(1) COM1A1/COM1B1 COM1A0/COM1B0 Description 0 0 Normal port operation, OC1A/OC1B disconnected. WGM13:0 = 9 or 11: Toggle OC1A on Compare Match, OC1B disconnected (normal port operation). 0 1 For all other WGM1 settings, normal port operation, OC1A/OC1B disconnected. Clear OC1A/OC1B on Compare Match when up- 1 0 counting. Set OC1A/OC1B on Compare Match when counting down. Set OC1A/OC1B on Compare Match when up- 1 1 counting. Clear OC1A/OC1B on Compare Match when counting down. Note: 1. A special case occurs when OCR1A/OCR1B equals TOP and COM1A1/COM1B1 is set. See ”Phase Correct PWM Mode” on page 121 for more details. • Bit 1:0 – WGM11:0: Waveform Generation Mode Combined with the WGM13:2 bits found in the TCCR1B Register, these bits control the counting sequence of the counter, the source for maximum (TOP) counter value, and what type of wave- form generation to be used, see Table 15-5 on page 129. Modes of operation supported by the Timer/Counter unit are: Normal mode (counter), Clear Timer on Compare match (CTC) mode, and three types of Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) modes. (See ”Modes of Operation” on page 118). 128 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Table 15-5. Waveform Generation Mode Bit Description(1) WGM12 WGM11 WGM10 Timer/Counter Mode of Update of TOV1 Flag Mode WGM13 (CTC1) (PWM11) (PWM10) Operation TOP OCR1x at Set on 0 0 0 0 0 Normal 0xFFFF Immediate MAX 1 0 0 0 1 PWM, Phase Correct, 8-bit 0x00FF TOP BOTTOM 2 0 0 1 0 PWM, Phase Correct, 9-bit 0x01FF TOP BOTTOM 3 0 0 1 1 PWM, Phase Correct, 10-bit 0x03FF TOP BOTTOM 4 0 1 0 0 CTC OCR1A Immediate MAX 5 0 1 0 1 Fast PWM, 8-bit 0x00FF BOTTOM TOP 6 0 1 1 0 Fast PWM, 9-bit 0x01FF BOTTOM TOP 7 0 1 1 1 Fast PWM, 10-bit 0x03FF BOTTOM TOP PWM, Phase and Frequency 8 1 0 0 0 ICR1 BOTTOM BOTTOM Correct PWM, Phase and Frequency 9 1 0 0 1 OCR1A BOTTOM BOTTOM Correct 10 1 0 1 0 PWM, Phase Correct ICR1 TOP BOTTOM 11 1 0 1 1 PWM, Phase Correct OCR1A TOP BOTTOM 12 1 1 0 0 CTC ICR1 Immediate MAX 13 1 1 0 1 (Reserved) – – – 14 1 1 1 0 Fast PWM ICR1 BOTTOM TOP 15 1 1 1 1 Fast PWM OCR1A BOTTOM TOP Note: 1. The CTC1 and PWM11:0 bit definition names are obsolete. Use the WGM12:0 definitions. However, the functionality and location of these bits are compatible with previous versions of the timer. 15.11.2 TCCR1B – Timer/Counter1 Control Register B Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 (0x81) ICNC1 ICES1 – WGM13 WGM12 CS12 CS11 CS10 TCCR1B Read/Write R/W R/W R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 • Bit 7 – ICNC1: Input Capture Noise Canceler Setting this bit (to one) activates the Input Capture Noise Canceler. When the noise canceler is activated, the input from the Input Capture pin (ICP1) is filtered. The filter function requires four successive equal valued samples of the ICP1 pin for changing its output. The Input Capture is therefore delayed by four Oscillator cycles when the noise canceler is enabled. • Bit 6 – ICES1: Input Capture Edge Select This bit selects which edge on the Input Capture pin (ICP1) that is used to trigger a capture event. When the ICES1 bit is written to zero, a falling (negative) edge is used as trigger, and when the ICES1 bit is written to one, a rising (positive) edge will trigger the capture. When a capture is triggered according to the ICES1 setting, the counter value is copied into the Input Capture Register (ICR1). The event will also set the Input Capture Flag (ICF1), and this can be used to cause an Input Capture Interrupt, if this interrupt is enabled. 129 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P When the ICR1 is used as TOP value (see description of the WGM13:0 bits located in the TCCR1A and the TCCR1B Register), the ICP1 is disconnected and consequently the Input Cap- ture function is disabled. • Bit 5 – Reserved Bit This bit is reserved for future use. For ensuring compatibility with future devices, this bit must be written to zero when TCCR1B is written. • Bit 4:3 – WGM13:2: Waveform Generation Mode See TCCR1A Register description. • Bit 2:0 – CS12:0: Clock Select The three Clock Select bits select the clock source to be used by the Timer/Counter, see Figure 15-10 and Figure 15-11. Figure 15-14. Clock Select Bit Description CS12 CS11 CS10 Description 0 0 0 No clock source (Timer/Counter stopped). 0 0 1 clk /1 (No prescaling) I/O 0 1 0 clk /8 (From prescaler) I/O 0 1 1 clk /64 (From prescaler) I/O 1 0 0 clk /256 (From prescaler) I/O 1 0 1 clk /1024 (From prescaler) I/O 1 1 0 External clock source on T1 pin. Clock on falling edge. 1 1 1 External clock source on T1 pin. Clock on rising edge. If external pin modes are used for the Timer/Counter1, transitions on the T1 pin will clock the counter even if the pin is configured as an output. This feature allows software control of the counting. 15.11.3 TCCR1C – Timer/Counter1 Control Register C Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 (0x82) FOC1A FOC1B – – – – – – TCCR1C Read/Write R/W R/W R R R R R R Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 • Bit 7 – FOC1A: Force Output Compare for Unit A • Bit 6 – FOC1B: Force Output Compare for Unit B The FOC1A/FOC1B bits are only active when the WGM13:0 bits specifies a non-PWM mode. However, for ensuring compatibility with future devices, these bits must be set to zero when TCCR1A is written when operating in a PWM mode. When writing a logical one to the FOC1A/FOC1B bit, an immediate compare match is forced on the Waveform Generation unit. The OC1A/OC1B output is changed according to its COM1x1:0 bits setting. Note that the FOC1A/FOC1B bits are implemented as strobes. Therefore it is the value present in the COM1x1:0 bits that determine the effect of the forced compare. 130 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P A FOC1A/FOC1B strobe will not generate any interrupt nor will it clear the timer in Clear Timer on Compare match (CTC) mode using OCR1A as TOP. The FOC1A/FOC1B bits are always read as zero. 15.11.4 TCNT1H and TCNT1L – Timer/Counter1 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 (0x85) TCNT1[15:8] TCNT1H (0x84) TCNT1[7:0] TCNT1L Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 The two Timer/Counter I/O locations (TCNT1H and TCNT1L, combined TCNT1) give direct access, both for read and for write operations, to the Timer/Counter unit 16-bit counter. To ensure that both the high and low bytes are read and written simultaneously when the CPU accesses these registers, the access is performed using an 8-bit temporary High Byte Register (TEMP). This temporary register is shared by all the other 16-bit registers. See Section “15.3” on page 109. Modifying the counter (TCNT1) while the counter is running introduces a risk of missing a com- pare match between TCNT1 and one of the OCR1x Registers. Writing to the TCNT1 Register blocks (removes) the compare match on the following timer clock for all compare units. 15.11.5 OCR1AH and OCR1AL – Output Compare Register 1 A Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 (0x89) OCR1A[15:8] OCR1AH (0x88) OCR1A[7:0] OCR1AL Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15.11.6 OCR1BH and OCR1BL – Output Compare Register 1 B Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 (0x8B) OCR1B[15:8] OCR1BH (0x8A) OCR1B[7:0] OCR1BL Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 The Output Compare Registers contain a 16-bit value that is continuously compared with the counter value (TCNT1). A match can be used to generate an Output Compare interrupt, or to generate a waveform output on the OC1x pin. The Output Compare Registers are 16-bit in size. To ensure that both the high and low bytes are written simultaneously when the CPU writes to these registers, the access is performed using an 8-bit temporary High Byte Register (TEMP). This temporary register is shared by all the other 16-bit registers. See Section “15.3” on page 109. 131 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 15.11.7 ICR1H and ICR1L – Input Capture Register 1 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 (0x87) ICR1[15:8] ICR1H (0x86) ICR1[7:0] ICR1L Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 The Input Capture is updated with the counter (TCNT1) value each time an event occurs on the ICP1 pin (or optionally on the Analog Comparator output for Timer/Counter1). The Input Capture can be used for defining the counter TOP value. The Input Capture Register is 16-bit in size. To ensure that both the high and low bytes are read simultaneously when the CPU accesses these registers, the access is performed using an 8-bit temporary High Byte Register (TEMP). This temporary register is shared by all the other 16-bit registers. See Section “15.3” on page 109. 15.11.8 TIMSK1 – Timer/Counter1 Interrupt Mask Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 (0x6F) – – ICIE1 – – OCIE1B OCIE1A TOIE1 TIMSK1 Read/Write R R R/W R R R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 • Bit 5 – ICIE1: Timer/Counter1, Input Capture Interrupt Enable When this bit is written to one, and the I-flag in the Status Register is set (interrupts globally enabled), the Timer/Counter1 Input Capture interrupt is enabled. The corresponding Interrupt Vector (See Section “11.” on page 53.) is executed when the ICF1 Flag, located in TIFR1, is set. • Bit 2 – OCIE1B: Timer/Counter1, Output Compare B Match Interrupt Enable When this bit is written to one, and the I-flag in the Status Register is set (interrupts globally enabled), the Timer/Counter1 Output Compare B Match interrupt is enabled. The corresponding Interrupt Vector (See Section “11.” on page 53.) is executed when the OCF1B Flag, located in TIFR1, is set. • Bit 1 – OCIE1A: Timer/Counter1, Output Compare A Match Interrupt Enable When this bit is written to one, and the I-flag in the Status Register is set (interrupts globally enabled), the Timer/Counter1 Output Compare A Match interrupt is enabled. The corresponding Interrupt Vector (See Section “11.” on page 53.) is executed when the OCF1A Flag, located in TIFR1, is set. • Bit 0 – TOIE1: Timer/Counter1, Overflow Interrupt Enable When this bit is written to one, and the I-flag in the Status Register is set (interrupts globally enabled), the Timer/Counter1 Overflow interrupt is enabled. The corresponding Interrupt Vector (See Section “11.” on page 53.) is executed when the TOV1 Flag, located in TIFR1, is set. 132 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 15.11.9 TIFR1 – Timer/Counter1 Interrupt Flag Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0x16 (0x36) – – ICF1 – – OCF1B OCF1A TOV1 TIFR1 Read/Write R R R/W R R R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 • Bit 5 – ICF1: Timer/Counter1, Input Capture Flag This flag is set when a capture event occurs on the ICP1 pin. When the Input Capture Register (ICR1) is set by the WGM13:0 to be used as the TOP value, the ICF1 Flag is set when the coun- ter reaches the TOP value. ICF1 is automatically cleared when the Input Capture Interrupt Vector is executed. Alternatively, ICF1 can be cleared by writing a logic one to its bit location. • Bit 2 – OCF1B: Timer/Counter1, Output Compare B Match Flag This flag is set in the timer clock cycle after the counter (TCNT1) value matches the Output Compare Register B (OCR1B). Note that a Forced Output Compare (FOC1B) strobe will not set the OCF1B Flag. OCF1B is automatically cleared when the Output Compare Match B Interrupt Vector is exe- cuted. Alternatively, OCF1B can be cleared by writing a logic one to its bit location. • Bit 1 – OCF1A: Timer/Counter1, Output Compare A Match Flag This flag is set in the timer clock cycle after the counter (TCNT1) value matches the Output Compare Register A (OCR1A). Note that a Forced Output Compare (FOC1A) strobe will not set the OCF1A Flag. OCF1A is automatically cleared when the Output Compare Match A Interrupt Vector is exe- cuted. Alternatively, OCF1A can be cleared by writing a logic one to its bit location. • Bit 0 – TOV1: Timer/Counter1, Overflow Flag The setting of this flag is dependent of the WGM13:0 bits setting. In Normal and CTC modes, the TOV1 Flag is set when the timer overflows. Refer to Table 15-5 on page 129 for the TOV1 Flag behavior when using another WGM13:0 bit setting. TOV1 is automatically cleared when the Timer/Counter1 Overflow Interrupt Vector is executed. Alternatively, TOV1 can be cleared by writing a logic one to its bit location. 133 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 16. Timer/Counter0 and Timer/Counter1 Prescalers Timer/Counter1 and Timer/Counter0 share the same prescaler module, but the Timer/Counters can have different prescaler settings. The description below applies to both Timer/Counter1 and Timer/Counter0. 16.0.1 Internal Clock Source The Timer/Counter can be clocked directly by the system clock (by setting the CSn2:0 = 1). This provides the fastest operation, with a maximum Timer/Counter clock frequency equal to system clock frequency (f ). Alternatively, one of four taps from the prescaler can be used as a CLK_I/O clock source. The prescaled clock has a frequency of either f /8, f /64, f /256, or CLK_I/O CLK_I/O CLK_I/O f /1024. CLK_I/O 16.0.2 Prescaler Reset The prescaler is free running, i.e., operates independently of the Clock Select logic of the Timer/Counter, and it is shared by Timer/Counter1 and Timer/Counter0. Since the prescaler is not affected by the Timer/Counter’s clock select, the state of the prescaler will have implications for situations where a prescaled clock is used. One example of prescaling artifacts occurs when the timer is enabled and clocked by the prescaler (6 > CSn2:0 > 1). The number of system clock cycles from when the timer is enabled to the first count occurs can be from 1 to N+1 system clock cycles, where N equals the prescaler divisor (8, 64, 256, or 1024). It is possible to use the prescaler reset for synchronizing the Timer/Counter to program execu- tion. However, care must be taken if the other Timer/Counter that shares the same prescaler also uses prescaling. A prescaler reset will affect the prescaler period for all Timer/Counters it is connected to. 16.0.3 External Clock Source An external clock source applied to the T1/T0 pin can be used as Timer/Counter clock (clk /clk ). The T1/T0 pin is sampled once every system clock cycle by the pin synchronization T1 T0 logic. The synchronized (sampled) signal is then passed through the edge detector. Figure 16-1 shows a functional equivalent block diagram of the T1/T0 synchronization and edge detector logic. The registers are clocked at the positive edge of the internal system clock (clk ). The latch I/O is transparent in the high period of the internal system clock. The edge detector generates one clk /clk pulse for each positive (CSn2:0 = 7) or negative T1 T0 (CSn2:0 = 6) edge it detects. Figure 16-1. T1/T0 Pin Sampling Tn D Q D Q D Q Tn_sync (To Clock Select Logic) LE clk I/O Synchronization Edge Detector The synchronization and edge detector logic introduces a delay of 2.5 to 3.5 system clock cycles from an edge has been applied to the T1/T0 pin to the counter is updated. 134 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Enabling and disabling of the clock input must be done when T1/T0 has been stable for at least one system clock cycle, otherwise it is a risk that a false Timer/Counter clock pulse is generated. Each half period of the external clock applied must be longer than one system clock cycle to ensure correct sampling. The external clock must be guaranteed to have less than half the sys- tem clock frequency (f < f /2) given a 50/50% duty cycle. Since the edge detector uses ExtClk clk_I/O sampling, the maximum frequency of an external clock it can detect is half the sampling fre- quency (Nyquist sampling theorem). However, due to variation of the system clock frequency and duty cycle caused by Oscillator source (crystal, resonator, and capacitors) tolerances, it is recommended that maximum frequency of an external clock source is less than f /2.5. clk_I/O An external clock source can not be prescaled. Figure 16-2. Prescaler for Timer/Counter0 and Timer/Counter1(1) clk I/O Clear PSR10 T0 Synchronization T1 Synchronization clk clk T1 T0 Note: 1. The synchronization logic on the input pins (T1/T0) is shown in Figure 16-1. 135 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 16.1 Register Description 16.1.1 TCCR0A – Timer/Counter Control Register A Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0x24 (0x44) FOC0A WGM00 COM0A1 COM0A0 WGM01 CS02 CS01 CS00 TCCR0A Read/Write W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 • Bit 7 – FOC0A: Force Output Compare A The FOC0A bit is only active when the WGM00 bit specifies a non-PWM mode. However, for ensuring compatibility with future devices, this bit must be set to zero when TCCR0 is written when operating in PWM mode. When writing a logical one to the FOC0A bit, an immediate com- pare match is forced on the Waveform Generation unit. The OC0A output is changed according to its COM0A1:0 bits setting. Note that the FOC0A bit is implemented as a strobe. Therefore it is the value present in the COM0A1:0 bits that determines the effect of the forced compare. A FOC0A strobe will not generate any interrupt, nor will it clear the timer in CTC mode using OCR0A as TOP. The FOC0A bit is always read as zero. • Bit 6, 3 – WGM01:0: Waveform Generation Mode These bits control the counting sequence of the counter, the source for the maximum (TOP) counter value, and what type of waveform generation to be used. Modes of operation supported by the Timer/Counter unit are: Normal mode, Clear Timer on Compare match (CTC) mode, and two types of Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) modes. See Table 16-1 and ”Modes of Operation” on page 99. Table 16-1. Waveform Generation Mode Bit Description(1) WGM01 WGM00 Timer/Counter Mode Update of TOV0 Flag Set Mode (CTC0) (PWM0) of Operation TOP OCR0A at on 0 0 0 Normal 0xFF Immediate MAX 1 0 1 PWM, Phase Correct 0xFF TOP BOTTOM 2 1 0 CTC OCR0A Immediate MAX 3 1 1 Fast PWM 0xFF BOTTOM MAX Note: 1. The CTC0 and PWM0 bit definition names are now obsolete. Use the WGM01:0 definitions. However, the functionality and location of these bits are compatible with previous versions of the timer. • Bit 5:4 – COM0A1:0: Compare Match Output Mode These bits control the Output Compare pin (OC0A) behavior. If one or both of the COM0A1:0 bits are set, the OC0A output overrides the normal port functionality of the I/O pin it is connected to. However, note that the Data Direction Register (DDR) bit corresponding to the OC0A pin must be set in order to enable the output driver. When OC0A is connected to the pin, the function of the COM0A1:0 bits depends on the WGM01:0 bit setting. Table 16-2 on page 137 shows the COM0A1:0 bit functionality when the WGM01:0 bits are set to a normal or CTC mode (non-PWM). 136 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Table 16-2. Compare Output Mode, non-PWM Mode COM0A1 COM0A0 Description 0 0 Normal port operation, OC0A disconnected. 0 1 Toggle OC0A on compare match 1 0 Clear OC0A on compare match 1 1 Set OC0A on compare match Table 16-3 shows the COM0A1:0 bit functionality when the WGM01:0 bits are set to fast PWM mode. Table 16-3. Compare Output Mode, Fast PWM Mode(1) COM0A1 COM0A0 Description 0 0 Normal port operation, OC0A disconnected. 0 1 Reserved Clear OC0A on compare match, set OC0A at BOTTOM 1 0 (non-inverting mode) Set OC0A on compare match, clear OC0A at BOTTOM 1 1 (inverting mode) Note: 1. A special case occurs when OCR0A equals TOP and COM0A1 is set. In this case, the com- pare match is ignored, but the set or clear is done at BOTTOM. See ”Fast PWM Mode” on page 119 for more details. Table 16-4 shows the COM0A1:0 bit functionality when the WGM01:0 bits are set to phase cor- rect PWM mode. Table 16-4. Compare Output Mode, Phase Correct PWM Mode(1) COM0A1 COM0A0 Description 0 0 Normal port operation, OC0A disconnected. 0 1 Reserved Clear OC0A on compare match when up-counting. Set OC0A on 1 0 compare match when counting down. Set OC0A on compare match when up-counting. Clear OC0A on 1 1 compare match when counting down. Note: 1. A special case occurs when OCR0A equals TOP and COM0A1 is set. In this case, the com- pare match is ignored, but the set or clear is done at TOP. See ”Phase Correct PWM Mode” on page 121 for more details. 137 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P • Bit 2:0 – CS02:0: Clock Select The three Clock Select bits select the clock source to be used by the Timer/Counter. Table 16-5. Clock Select Bit Description CS02 CS01 CS00 Description 0 0 0 No clock source (Timer/Counter stopped) 0 0 1 clk /(No prescaling) I/O 0 1 0 clk /8 (From prescaler) I/O 0 1 1 clk /64 (From prescaler) I/O 1 0 0 clk /256 (From prescaler) I/O 1 0 1 clk /1024 (From prescaler) I/O 1 1 0 External clock source on T0 pin. Clock on falling edge. 1 1 1 External clock source on T0 pin. Clock on rising edge. If external pin modes are used for the Timer/Counter0, transitions on the T0 pin will clock the counter even if the pin is configured as an output. This feature allows software control of the counting. 16.1.2 TCNT0 – Timer/Counter Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0x26 (0x46) TCNT0[7:0] TCNT0 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 The Timer/Counter Register gives direct access, both for read and write operations, to the Timer/Counter unit 8-bit counter. Writing to the TCNT0 Register blocks (removes) the compare match on the following timer clock. Modifying the counter (TCNT0) while the counter is running, introduces a risk of missing a compare match between TCNT0 and the OCR0A Register. 16.1.3 OCR0A – Output Compare Register A Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0x27 (0x47) OCR0A[7:0] OCR0 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 The Output Compare Register A contains an 8-bit value that is continuously compared with the counter value (TCNT0). A match can be used to generate an Output Compare interrupt, or to generate a waveform output on the OC0A pin. 138 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 16.1.4 TIMSK0 – Timer/Counter 0 Interrupt Mask Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 (0x6E) – – – – – – OCIE0A TOIE0 TIMSK0 Read/Write R R R R R R R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 • Bit 1 – OCIE0A: Timer/Counter0 Output Compare Match A Interrupt Enable When the OCIE0A bit is written to one, and the I-bit in the Status Register is set (one), the Timer/Counter0 Compare Match A interrupt is enabled. The corresponding interrupt is executed if a compare match in Timer/Counter0 occurs, i.e., when the OCF0A bit is set in the Timer/Coun- ter 0 Interrupt Flag Register – TIFR0. • Bit 0 – TOIE0: Timer/Counter0 Overflow Interrupt Enable When the TOIE0 bit is written to one, and the I-bit in the Status Register is set (one), the Timer/Counter0 Overflow interrupt is enabled. The corresponding interrupt is executed if an overflow in Timer/Counter0 occurs, i.e., when the TOV0 bit is set in the Timer/Counter 0 Inter- rupt Flag Register – TIFR0. 16.1.5 TIFR0 – Timer/Counter 0 Interrupt Flag Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0x15 (0x35) – – – – – – OCF0A TOV0 TIFR0 Read/Write R R R R R R R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 • Bit 1 – OCF0A: Output Compare Flag 0 A The OCF0A bit is set (one) when a compare match occurs between the Timer/Counter0 and the data in OCR0A – Output Compare Register0. OCF0A is cleared by hardware when executing the corresponding interrupt handling vector. Alternatively, OCF0A is cleared by writing a logic one to the flag. When the I-bit in SREG, OCIE0A (Timer/Counter0 Compare match Interrupt Enable), and OCF0A are set (one), the Timer/Counter0 Compare match Interrupt is executed. • Bit 0 – TOV0: Timer/Counter0 Overflow Flag The bit TOV0 is set (one) when an overflow occurs in Timer/Counter0. TOV0 is cleared by hard- ware when executing the corresponding interrupt handling vector. Alternatively, TOV0 is cleared by writing a logic one to the flag. When the SREG I-bit, TOIE0 (Timer/Counter0 Overflow Inter- rupt Enable), and TOV0 are set (one), the Timer/Counter0 Overflow interrupt is executed. In phase correct PWM mode, this bit is set when Timer/Counter0 changes counting direction at 0x00. 139 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 16.1.6 GTCCR – General Timer/Counter Control Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0x23 (0x43) TSM – – – – – PSR2 PSR10 GTCCR Read/Write R/W R R R R R R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 • Bit 7 – TSM: Timer/Counter Synchronization Mode Writing the TSM bit to one activates the Timer/Counter Synchronization mode. In this mode, the value that is written to the PSR2 and PSR10 bits is kept, hence keeping the corresponding pres- caler reset signals asserted. This ensures that the corresponding Timer/Counters are halted and can be configured to the same value without the risk of one of them advancing during configura- tion. When the TSM bit is written to zero, the PSR2 and PSR10 bits are cleared by hardware, and the Timer/Counters start counting simultaneously. • Bit 0 – PSR10: Prescaler Reset Timer/Counter1 and Timer/Counter0 When this bit is one, Timer/Counter1 and Timer/Counter0 prescaler will be Reset. This bit is nor- mally cleared immediately by hardware, except if the TSM bit is set. Note that Timer/Counter1 and Timer/Counter0 share the same prescaler and a reset of this prescaler will affect both timers. 140 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 17. 8-bit Timer/Counter2 with PWM and Asynchronous Operation 17.1 Features • Single Compare Unit Counter • Clear Timer on Compare Match (Auto Reload) • Glitch-free, Phase Correct Pulse Width Modulator (PWM) • Frequency Generator • 10-bit Clock Prescaler • Overflow and Compare Match Interrupt Sources (TOV2 and OCF2A) • Allows Clocking from External 32kHz Watch Crystal Independent of the I/O Clock 17.2 Overview Timer/Counter2 is a general purpose, single compare unit, 8-bit Timer/Counter module. A simpli- fied block diagram of the 8-bit Timer/Counter is shown in Figure 17-1. For the actual placement of I/O pins, refer to ”MLF/ Pinout ATmega329P” on page 2 and ”TQFP / Pinout ATmega3290P” on page 3. CPU accessible I/O Registers, including I/O bits and I/O pins, are shown in bold. The device-specific I/O Register and bit locations are listed in the ”Register Description” on page 155. Figure 17-1. 8-bit Timer/Counter Block Diagram TCCRnx count TOVn clear (Int.Req.) Control Logic direction clkTn TOSC1 BOTTOM TOP T/C Prescaler Oscillator TOSC2 Timer/Counter TCNTn = 0 = 0xFF OCnx clkI/O (Int.Req.) = Waveform OCnx Generation OCRnx S U B A T A D clk Synchronized Status flags I/O Synchronization Unit clkASY Status flags ASSRn asynchronous mode select (ASn) 17.2.1 Registers The Timer/Counter (TCNT2) and Output Compare Register (OCR2A) are 8-bit registers. Inter- rupt request (shorten as Int.Req.) signals are all visible in the Timer Interrupt Flag Register 141 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P (TIFR2). All interrupts are individually masked with the Timer Interrupt Mask Register (TIMSK2). TIFR2 and TIMSK2 are not shown in the figure. The Timer/Counter can be clocked internally, via the prescaler, or asynchronously clocked from the TOSC1/2 pins, as detailed later in this section. The asynchronous operation is controlled by the Asynchronous Status Register (ASSR). The Clock Select logic block controls which clock source the Timer/Counter uses to increment (or decrement) its value. The Timer/Counter is inac- tive when no clock source is selected. The output from the Clock Select logic is referred to as the timer clock (clk ). T2 The double buffered Output Compare Register (OCR2A) is compared with the Timer/Counter value at all times. The result of the compare can be used by the Waveform Generator to gener- ate a PWM or variable frequency output on the Output Compare pin (OC2A). See ”Output Compare Unit” on page 143 for details. The compare match event will also set the Compare Flag (OCF2A) which can be used to generate an Output Compare interrupt request. 17.2.2 Definitions Many register and bit references in this document are written in general form. A lower case “n” replaces the Timer/Counter number, in this case 2. However, when using the register or bit defines in a program, the precise form must be used, i.e., TCNT2 for accessing Timer/Counter2 counter value and so on. The definitions in Table 17-1 are also used extensively throughout the section. Table 17-1. Definitions of Timer/Counter values. BOTTOM The counter reaches the BOTTOM when it becomes zero (0x00). MAX The counter reaches its MAXimum when it becomes 0xFF (decimal 255). TOP The counter reaches the TOP when it becomes equal to the highest value in the count sequence. The TOP value can be assigned to be the fixed value 0xFF (MAX) or the value stored in the OCR2A Register. The assignment is depen- dent on the mode of operation. 17.3 Timer/Counter Clock Sources The Timer/Counter can be clocked by an internal synchronous or an external asynchronous clock source. The clock source clk is by default equal to the MCU clock, clk . When the AS2 T2 I/O bit in the ASSR Register is written to logic one, the clock source is taken from the Timer/Counter Oscillator connected to TOSC1 and TOSC2. For details on asynchronous operation, see ”ASSR – Asynchronous Status Register” on page 157. For details on clock sources and prescaler, see ”Timer/Counter Prescaler” on page 154. 142 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 17.4 Counter Unit The main part of the 8-bit Timer/Counter is the programmable bi-directional counter unit. Figure 17-2 shows a block diagram of the counter and its surrounding environment. Figure 17-2. Counter Unit Block Diagram TOVn DATA BUS (Int.Req.) TOSC1 count T/C TCNTn clear Control Logic clkTn Prescaler Oscillator direction TOSC2 clk bottom top I/O Signal description (internal signals): count Increment or decrement TCNT2 by 1. direction Selects between increment and decrement. clear Clear TCNT2 (set all bits to zero). clk Timer/Counter clock. T2 top Signalizes that TCNT2 has reached maximum value. bottom Signalizes that TCNT2 has reached minimum value (zero). Depending on the mode of operation used, the counter is cleared, incremented, or decremented at each timer clock (clk ). clk can be generated from an external or internal clock source, T2 T2 selected by the Clock Select bits (CS22:0). When no clock source is selected (CS22:0 = 0) the timer is stopped. However, the TCNT2 value can be accessed by the CPU, regardless of whether clk is present or not. A CPU write overrides (has priority over) all counter clear or T2 count operations. The counting sequence is determined by the setting of the WGM21 and WGM20 bits located in the Timer/Counter Control Register (TCCR2A). There are close connections between how the counter behaves (counts) and how waveforms are generated on the Output Compare output OC2A. For more details about advanced counting sequences and waveform generation. See ”Modes of Operation” on page 146. The Timer/Counter Overflow Flag (TOV2) is set according to the mode of operation selected by the WGM21:0 bits. TOV2 can be used for generating a CPU interrupt. 17.5 Output Compare Unit The 8-bit comparator continuously compares TCNT2 with the Output Compare Register (OCR2A). Whenever TCNT2 equals OCR2A, the comparator signals a match. A match will set the Output Compare Flag (OCF2A) at the next timer clock cycle. If enabled (OCIE2A = 1), the Output Compare Flag generates an Output Compare interrupt. The OCF2A Flag is automatically cleared when the interrupt is executed. Alternatively, the OCF2A Flag can be cleared by soft- ware by writing a logical one to its I/O bit location. The Waveform Generator uses the match signal to generate an output according to operating mode set by the WGM21:0 bits and Com- pare Output mode (COM2A1:0) bits. The max and bottom signals are used by the Waveform 143 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Generator for handling the special cases of the extreme values in some modes of operation. See ”Modes of Operation” on page 146. Figure 17-3 shows a block diagram of the Output Compare unit. Figure 17-3. Output Compare Unit, Block Diagram DATA BUS OCRnx TCNTn = (8-bit Comparator ) OCFnx (Int.Req.) top bottom Waveform Generator OCnx FOCn WGMn1:0 COMnX1:0 The OCR2A Register is double buffered when using any of the Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) modes. For the Normal and Clear Timer on Compare (CTC) modes of operation, the double buffering is disabled. The double buffering synchronizes the update of the OCR2A Compare Register to either top or bottom of the counting sequence. The synchronization prevents the occurrence of odd-length, non-symmetrical PWM pulses, thereby making the output glitch-free. The OCR2A Register access may seem complex, but this is not case. When the double buffer- ing is enabled, the CPU has access to the OCR2A Buffer Register, and if double buffering is disabled the CPU will access the OCR2A directly. 17.5.1 Force Output Compare In non-PWM waveform generation modes, the match output of the comparator can be forced by writing a one to the Force Output Compare (FOC2A) bit. Forcing compare match will not set the OCF2A Flag or reload/clear the timer, but the OC2A pin will be updated as if a real compare match had occurred (the COM2A1:0 bits settings define whether the OC2A pin is set, cleared or toggled). 17.5.2 Compare Match Blocking by TCNT2 Write All CPU write operations to the TCNT2 Register will block any compare match that occurs in the next timer clock cycle, even when the timer is stopped. This feature allows OCR2A to be initial- ized to the same value as TCNT2 without triggering an interrupt when the Timer/Counter clock is enabled. 144 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 17.5.3 Using the Output Compare Unit Since writing TCNT2 in any mode of operation will block all compare matches for one timer clock cycle, there are risks involved when changing TCNT2 when using the Output Compare unit, independently of whether the Timer/Counter is running or not. If the value written to TCNT2 equals the OCR2A value, the compare match will be missed, resulting in incorrect waveform generation. Similarly, do not write the TCNT2 value equal to BOTTOM when the counter is counting down. The setup of the OC2A should be performed before setting the Data Direction Register for the port pin to output. The easiest way of setting the OC2A value is to use the Force Output Com- pare (FOC2A) strobe bit in Normal mode. The OC2A Register keeps its value even when changing between Waveform Generation modes. Be aware that the COM2A1:0 bits are not double buffered together with the compare value. Changing the COM2A1:0 bits will take effect immediately. 17.6 Compare Match Output Unit The Compare Output mode (COM2A1:0) bits have two functions. The Waveform Generator uses the COM2A1:0 bits for defining the Output Compare (OC2A) state at the next compare match. Also, the COM2A1:0 bits control the OC2A pin output source. Figure 17-4 shows a sim- plified schematic of the logic affected by the COM2A1:0 bit setting. The I/O Registers, I/O bits, and I/O pins in the figure are shown in bold. Only the parts of the general I/O Port Control Regis- ters (DDR and PORT) that are affected by the COM2A1:0 bits are shown. When referring to the OC2A state, the reference is for the internal OC2A Register, not the OC2A pin. Figure 17-4. Compare Match Output Unit, Schematic COMnx1 Waveform COMnx0 D Q Generator FOCnx 1 OCnx OCnx Pin 0 D Q S U B PORT A T A D D Q DDR clk I/O The general I/O port function is overridden by the Output Compare (OC2A) from the Waveform Generator if either of the COM2A1:0 bits are set. However, the OC2A pin direction (input or out- put) is still controlled by the Data Direction Register (DDR) for the port pin. The Data Direction 145 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Register bit for the OC2A pin (DDR_OC2A) must be set as output before the OC2A value is vis- ible on the pin. The port override function is independent of the Waveform Generation mode. The design of the Output Compare pin logic allows initialization of the OC2A state before the output is enabled. Note that some COM2A1:0 bit settings are reserved for certain modes of operation. See ”Register Description” on page 155. 17.6.1 Compare Output Mode and Waveform Generation The Waveform Generator uses the COM2A1:0 bits differently in normal, CTC, and PWM modes. For all modes, setting the COM2A1:0 = 0 tells the Waveform Generator that no action on the OC2A Register is to be performed on the next compare match. For compare output actions in the non-PWM modes refer to Table 17-3 on page 156. For fast PWM mode, refer to Table 17-4 on page 156, and for phase correct PWM refer to Table 17-5 on page 156. A change of the COM2A1:0 bits state will have effect at the first compare match after the bits are written. For non-PWM modes, the action can be forced to have immediate effect by using the FOC2A strobe bits. 17.7 Modes of Operation The mode of operation, i.e., the behavior of the Timer/Counter and the Output Compare pins, is defined by the combination of the Waveform Generation mode (WGM21:0) and Compare Output mode (COM2A1:0) bits. The Compare Output mode bits do not affect the counting sequence, while the Waveform Generation mode bits do. The COM2A1:0 bits control whether the PWM output generated should be inverted or not (inverted or non-inverted PWM). For non-PWM modes the COM2A1:0 bits control whether the output should be set, cleared, or toggled at a compare match. See ”Compare Match Output Unit” on page 145. For detailed timing information refer to ”Timer/Counter Timing Diagrams” on page 150. 17.7.1 Normal Mode The simplest mode of operation is the Normal mode (WGM21:0 = 0). In this mode the counting direction is always up (incrementing), and no counter clear is performed. The counter simply overruns when it passes its maximum 8-bit value (TOP = 0xFF) and then restarts from the bot- tom (0x00). In normal operation the Timer/Counter Overflow Flag (TOV2) will be set in the same timer clock cycle as the TCNT2 becomes zero. The TOV2 Flag in this case behaves like a ninth bit, except that it is only set, not cleared. However, combined with the timer overflow interrupt that automatically clears the TOV2 Flag, the timer resolution can be increased by software. There are no special cases to consider in the Normal mode, a new counter value can be written anytime. The Output Compare unit can be used to generate interrupts at some given time. Using the Out- put Compare to generate waveforms in Normal mode is not recommended, since this will occupy too much of the CPU time. 17.7.2 Clear Timer on Compare Match (CTC) Mode In Clear Timer on Compare or CTC mode (WGM21:0 = 2), the OCR2A Register is used to manipulate the counter resolution. In CTC mode the counter is cleared to zero when the counter value (TCNT2) matches the OCR2A. The OCR2A defines the top value for the counter, hence also its resolution. This mode allows greater control of the compare match output frequency. It also simplifies the operation of counting external events. 146 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P The timing diagram for the CTC mode is shown in Figure 17-5. The counter value (TCNT2) increases until a compare match occurs between TCNT2 and OCR2A, and then counter (TCNT2) is cleared. Figure 17-5. CTC Mode, Timing Diagram OCnx Interrupt Flag Set TCNTn OCnx (COMnx1:0 = 1) (Toggle) Period 1 2 3 4 An interrupt can be generated each time the counter value reaches the TOP value by using the OCF2A Flag. If the interrupt is enabled, the interrupt handler routine can be used for updating the TOP value. However, changing the TOP to a value close to BOTTOM when the counter is running with none or a low prescaler value must be done with care since the CTC mode does not have the double buffering feature. If the new value written to OCR2A is lower than the cur- rent value of TCNT2, the counter will miss the compare match. The counter will then have to count to its maximum value (0xFF) and wrap around starting at 0x00 before the compare match can occur. For generating a waveform output in CTC mode, the OC2A output can be set to toggle its logical level on each compare match by setting the Compare Output mode bits to toggle mode (COM2A1:0 = 1). The OC2A value will not be visible on the port pin unless the data direction for the pin is set to output. The waveform generated will have a maximum frequency of f = OC2A f /2 when OCR2A is set to zero (0x00). The waveform frequency is defined by the following clk_I/O equation: f clk_I/O f = -------------------------------------------------- OCnx 2N1+OCRnx The N variable represents the prescale factor (1, 8, 32, 64, 128, 256, or 1024). As for the Normal mode of operation, the TOV2 Flag is set in the same timer clock cycle that the counter counts from MAX to 0x00. 17.7.3 Fast PWM Mode The fast Pulse Width Modulation or fast PWM mode (WGM21:0 = 3) provides a high frequency PWM waveform generation option. The fast PWM differs from the other PWM option by its sin- gle-slope operation. The counter counts from BOTTOM to MAX then restarts from BOTTOM. In non-inverting Compare Output mode, the Output Compare (OC2A) is cleared on the compare match between TCNT2 and OCR2A, and set at BOTTOM. In inverting Compare Output mode, the output is set on compare match and cleared at BOTTOM. Due to the single-slope operation, the operating frequency of the fast PWM mode can be twice as high as the phase correct PWM mode that uses dual-slope operation. This high frequency makes the fast PWM mode well suited 147 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P for power regulation, rectification, and DAC applications. High frequency allows physically small sized external components (coils, capacitors), and therefore reduces total system cost. In fast PWM mode, the counter is incremented until the counter value matches the MAX value. The counter is then cleared at the following timer clock cycle. The timing diagram for the fast PWM mode is shown in Figure 17-6. The TCNT2 value is in the timing diagram shown as a his- togram for illustrating the single-slope operation. The diagram includes non-inverted and inverted PWM outputs. The small horizontal line marks on the TCNT2 slopes represent compare matches between OCR2A and TCNT2. Figure 17-6. Fast PWM Mode, Timing Diagram OCRnx Interrupt Flag Set OCRnx Update and TOVn Interrupt Flag Set TCNTn OCnx (COMnx1:0 = 2) OCnx (COMnx1:0 = 3) Period 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 The Timer/Counter Overflow Flag (TOV2) is set each time the counter reaches MAX. If the inter- rupt is enabled, the interrupt handler routine can be used for updating the compare value. In fast PWM mode, the compare unit allows generation of PWM waveforms on the OC2A pin. Setting the COM2A1:0 bits to two will produce a non-inverted PWM and an inverted PWM output can be generated by setting the COM2A1:0 to three (See Table 17-4 on page 156). The actual OC2A value will only be visible on the port pin if the data direction for the port pin is set as out- put. The PWM waveform is generated by setting (or clearing) the OC2A Register at the compare match between OCR2A and TCNT2, and clearing (or setting) the OC2A Register at the timer clock cycle the counter is cleared (changes from MAX to BOTTOM). The PWM frequency for the output can be calculated by the following equation: f clk_I/O f = ------------------ OCnxPWM N256 The N variable represents the prescale factor (1, 8, 32, 64, 128, 256, or 1024). The extreme values for the OCR2A Register represent special cases when generating a PWM waveform output in the fast PWM mode. If the OCR2A is set equal to BOTTOM, the output will be a narrow spike for each MAX+1 timer clock cycle. Setting the OCR2A equal to MAX will result in a constantly high or low output (depending on the polarity of the output set by the COM2A1:0 bits.) 148 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P A frequency (with 50% duty cycle) waveform output in fast PWM mode can be achieved by set- ting OC2A to toggle its logical level on each compare match (COM2A1:0 = 1). The waveform generated will have a maximum frequency of f = f /2 when OCR2A is set to zero. This fea- oc2 clk_I/O ture is similar to the OC2A toggle in CTC mode, except the double buffer feature of the Output Compare unit is enabled in the fast PWM mode. 17.7.4 Phase Correct PWM Mode The phase correct PWM mode (WGM21:0 = 1) provides a high resolution phase correct PWM waveform generation option. The phase correct PWM mode is based on a dual-slope operation. The counter counts repeatedly from BOTTOM to MAX and then from MAX to BOTTOM. In non- inverting Compare Output mode, the Output Compare (OC2A) is cleared on the compare match between TCNT2 and OCR2A while counting up, and set on the compare match while counting down. In inverting Output Compare mode, the operation is inverted. The dual-slope operation has lower maximum operation frequency than single slope operation. However, due to the sym- metric feature of the dual-slope PWM modes, these modes are preferred for motor control applications. The PWM resolution for the phase correct PWM mode is fixed to eight bits. In phase correct PWM mode the counter is incremented until the counter value matches MAX. When the counter reaches MAX, it changes the count direction. The TCNT2 value will be equal to MAX for one timer clock cycle. The timing diagram for the phase correct PWM mode is shown on Figure 17-7. The TCNT2 value is in the timing diagram shown as a histogram for illustrating the dual-slope operation. The diagram includes non-inverted and inverted PWM outputs. The small horizontal line marks on the TCNT2 slopes represent compare matches between OCR2A and TCNT2. Figure 17-7. Phase Correct PWM Mode, Timing Diagram OCnx Interrupt Flag Set OCRnx Update TOVn Interrupt Flag Set TCNTn OCnx (COMnx1:0 = 2) OCnx (COMnx1:0 = 3) Period 1 2 3 The Timer/Counter Overflow Flag (TOV2) is set each time the counter reaches BOTTOM. The Interrupt Flag can be used to generate an interrupt each time the counter reaches the BOTTOM value. 149 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P In phase correct PWM mode, the compare unit allows generation of PWM waveforms on the OC2A pin. Setting the COM2A1:0 bits to two will produce a non-inverted PWM. An inverted PWM output can be generated by setting the COM2A1:0 to three (See Table 17-5 on page 156). The actual OC2A value will only be visible on the port pin if the data direction for the port pin is set as output. The PWM waveform is generated by clearing (or setting) the OC2A Register at the compare match between OCR2A and TCNT2 when the counter increments, and setting (or clearing) the OC2A Register at compare match between OCR2A and TCNT2 when the counter decrements. The PWM frequency for the output when using phase correct PWM can be calcu- lated by the following equation: f clk_I/O f = ------------------ OCnxPCPWM N510 The N variable represents the prescale factor (1, 8, 32, 64, 128, 256, or 1024). The extreme values for the OCR2A Register represent special cases when generating a PWM waveform output in the phase correct PWM mode. If the OCR2A is set equal to BOTTOM, the output will be continuously low and if set equal to MAX the output will be continuously high for non-inverted PWM mode. For inverted PWM the output will have the opposite logic values. At the very start of period 2 in Figure 17-7 OCn has a transition from high to low even though there is no Compare Match. The point of this transition is to guarantee symmetry around BOT- TOM. There are two cases that give a transition without Compare Match. • OCR2A changes its value from MAX, like in Figure 17-7. When the OCR2A value is MAX the OCn pin value is the same as the result of a down-counting compare match. To ensure symmetry around BOTTOM the OCn value at MAX must correspond to the result of an up- counting Compare Match. • The timer starts counting from a value higher than the one in OCR2A, and for that reason misses the Compare Match and hence the OCn change that would have happened on the way up. 17.8 Timer/Counter Timing Diagrams The following figures show the Timer/Counter in synchronous mode, and the timer clock (clk ) T2 is therefore shown as a clock enable signal. In asynchronous mode, clk should be replaced by I/O the Timer/Counter Oscillator clock. The figures include information on when Interrupt Flags are set. Figure 17-8 contains timing data for basic Timer/Counter operation. The figure shows the count sequence close to the MAX value in all modes other than phase correct PWM mode. Figure 17-8. Timer/Counter Timing Diagram, no Prescaling clk I/O clk Tn (clk /1) I/O TCNTn MAX - 1 MAX BOTTOM BOTTOM + 1 TOVn 150 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Figure 17-9 shows the same timing data, but with the prescaler enabled. Figure 17-9. Timer/Counter Timing Diagram, with Prescaler (f /8) clk_I/O clk I/O clk Tn (clk /8) I/O TCNTn MAX - 1 MAX BOTTOM BOTTOM + 1 TOVn Figure 17-10 shows the setting of OCF2A in all modes except CTC mode. Figure 17-10. Timer/Counter Timing Diagram, Setting of OCF2A, with Prescaler (f /8) clk_I/O clk I/O clk Tn (clk /8) I/O TCNTn OCRnx - 1 OCRnx OCRnx + 1 OCRnx + 2 OCRnx OCRnx Value OCFnx Figure 17-11 shows the setting of OCF2A and the clearing of TCNT2 in CTC mode. 151 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Figure 17-11. Timer/Counter Timing Diagram, Clear Timer on Compare Match mode, with Pres- caler (f /8) clk_I/O clk I/O clk Tn (clk /8) I/O TCNTn TOP - 1 TOP BOTTOM BOTTOM + 1 (CTC) OCRnx TOP OCFnx 17.9 Asynchronous Operation of Timer/Counter2 When Timer/Counter2 operates asynchronously, some considerations must be taken. • Warning: When switching between asynchronous and synchronous clocking of Timer/Counter2, the Timer Registers TCNT2, OCR2A, and TCCR2A might be corrupted. A safe procedure for switching clock source is: 1. Disable the Timer/Counter2 interrupts by clearing OCIE2A and TOIE2. 2. Select clock source by setting AS2 as appropriate. 3. Write new values to TCNT2, OCR2A, and TCCR2A. 4. To switch to asynchronous operation: Wait for TCN2UB, OCR2UB, and TCR2UB. 5. Clear the Timer/Counter2 Interrupt Flags. 6. Enable interrupts, if needed. • The CPU main clock frequency must be more than four times the Oscillator frequency. • When writing to one of the registers TCNT2, OCR2A, or TCCR2A, the value is transferred to a temporary register, and latched after two positive edges on TOSC1. The user should not write a new value before the contents of the temporary register have been transferred to its destination. Each of the three mentioned registers have their individual temporary register, which means that e.g. writing to TCNT2 does not disturb an OCR2A write in progress. To detect that a transfer to the destination register has taken place, the Asynchronous Status Register – ASSR has been implemented. • When entering Power-save or ADC Noise Reduction mode after having written to TCNT2, OCR2A, or TCCR2A, the user must wait until the written register has been updated if Timer/Counter2 is used to wake up the device. Otherwise, the MCU will enter sleep mode before the changes are effective. This is particularly important if the Output Compare2 interrupt is used to wake up the device, since the Output Compare function is disabled during writing to OCR2A or TCNT2. If the write cycle is not finished, and the MCU enters sleep mode before the OCR2UB bit returns to zero, the device will never receive a compare match interrupt, and the MCU will not wake up. • If Timer/Counter2 is used to wake the device up from Power-save or ADC Noise Reduction mode, precautions must be taken if the user wants to re-enter one of these modes: The interrupt logic needs one TOSC1 cycle to be reset. If the time between wake-up and reentering sleep mode is less than one TOSC1 cycle, correct interrupt handling is not guaranteed. If the 152 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P user is in doubt whether the time before re-entering Power-save or ADC Noise Reduction mode is sufficient, the following algorithm can be used to ensure that one TOSC1 cycle has elapsed: 1. Write a value to TCCR2A, TCNT2, or OCR2A. 2. Wait until the corresponding Update Busy Flag in ASSR returns to zero. 3. Enter Power-save or ADC Noise Reduction mode. • When the asynchronous operation is selected, the 32.768kHz Oscillator for Timer/Counter2 is always running, except in Power-down and Standby modes. After a Power-up Reset or wake- up from Power-down or Standby mode, the user should be aware of the fact that this Oscillator might take as long as one second to stabilize. The user is advised to wait for at least one second before using Timer/Counter2 after power-up or wake-up from Power-down or Standby mode. The contents of all Timer/Counter2 Registers must be considered lost after a wake-up from Power-down or Standby mode due to unstable clock signal upon start-up, no matter whether the Oscillator is in use or a clock signal is applied to the TOSC1 pin. • Description of wake up from Power-save or ADC Noise Reduction mode when the timer is clocked asynchronously: When the interrupt condition is met, the wake up process is started on the following cycle of the timer clock, that is, the timer is always advanced by at least one before the processor can read the counter value. After wake-up, the MCU is halted for four cycles, it executes the interrupt routine, and resumes execution from the instruction following SLEEP. • Reading of the TCNT2 Register shortly after wake-up from Power-save may give an incorrect result. Since TCNT2 is clocked on the asynchronous TOSC clock, reading TCNT2 must be done through a register synchronized to the internal I/O clock domain. Synchronization takes place for every rising TOSC1 edge. When waking up from Power-save mode, and the I/O clock (clk ) again becomes active, TCNT2 will read as the previous value (before entering sleep) I/O until the next rising TOSC1 edge. The phase of the TOSC clock after waking up from Power- save mode is essentially unpredictable, as it depends on the wake-up time. The recommended procedure for reading TCNT2 is thus as follows: 1. Write any value to either of the registers OCR2A or TCCR2A. 2. Wait for the corresponding Update Busy Flag to be cleared. 3. Read TCNT2. • During asynchronous operation, the synchronization of the Interrupt Flags for the asynchronous timer takes 3processor cycles plus one timer cycle. The timer is therefore advanced by at least one before the processor can read the timer value causing the setting of the Interrupt Flag. The Output Compare pin is changed on the timer clock and is not synchronized to the processor clock. 153 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 17.9.1 Timer/Counter Prescaler Figure 17-12. Prescaler for Timer/Counter2 clk I/O clk T2S 10-BIT T/C PRESCALER Clear TOSC1 8 2 4 8 6 4 AS2 clk/T2S clk/3T2S clk/6T2S clk/12T2S clk/25T2S clk/102T2S PSR2 0 CS20 CS21 CS22 TIMER/COUNTER2 CLOCK SOURCE clk T2 The clock source for Timer/Counter2 is named clk . clk is by default connected to the main T2S T2S system I/O clock clk . By setting the AS2 bit in ASSR, Timer/Counter2 is asynchronously IO clocked from the TOSC1 pin. This enables use of Timer/Counter2 as a Real Time Counter (RTC). When AS2 is set, pins TOSC1 and TOSC2 are disconnected from Port C. A crystal can then be connected between the TOSC1 and TOSC2 pins to serve as an independent clock source for Timer/Counter2. The Oscillator is optimized for use with a 32.768kHz crystal. If apply- ing an external clock on TOSC1, the EXCLK bit in ASSR must be set. For Timer/Counter2, the possible prescaled selections are: clk /8, clk /32, clk /64, T2S T2S T2S clk /128, clk /256, and clk /1024. Additionally, clk as well as 0 (stop) may be selected. T2S T2S T2S T2S Setting the PSR2 bit in GTCCR resets the prescaler. This allows the user to operate with a pre- dictable prescaler. 154 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 17.10 Register Description 17.10.1 TCCR2A – Timer/Counter Control Register A Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 (0xB0) FOC2A WGM20 COM2A1 COM2A0 WGM21 CS22 CS21 CS20 TCCR2A Read/Write W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 • Bit 7 – FOC2A: Force Output Compare A The FOC2A bit is only active when the WGM bits specify a non-PWM mode. However, for ensur- ing compatibility with future devices, this bit must be set to zero when TCCR2A is written when operating in PWM mode. When writing a logical one to the FOC2A bit, an immediate compare match is forced on the Waveform Generation unit. The OC2A output is changed according to its COM2A1:0 bits setting. Note that the FOC2A bit is implemented as a strobe. Therefore it is the value present in the COM2A1:0 bits that determines the effect of the forced compare. A FOC2A strobe will not generate any interrupt, nor will it clear the timer in CTC mode using OCR2A as TOP. The FOC2A bit is always read as zero. • Bit 6, 3 – WGM21:0: Waveform Generation Mode These bits control the counting sequence of the counter, the source for the maximum (TOP) counter value, and what type of waveform generation to be used. Modes of operation supported by the Timer/Counter unit are: Normal mode, Clear Timer on Compare match (CTC) mode, and two types of Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) modes. See Table 17-2 and ”Modes of Operation” on page 146. Table 17-2. Waveform Generation Mode Bit Description(1) WGM21 WGM20 Timer/Counter Mode of Update of TOV2 Flag Mode (CTC2) (PWM2) Operation TOP OCR2A at Set on 0 0 0 Normal 0xFF Immediate MAX 1 0 1 PWM, Phase Correct 0xFF TOP BOTTOM 2 1 0 CTC OCR2A Immediate MAX 3 1 1 Fast PWM 0xFF BOTTOM MAX Note: 1. The CTC2 and PWM2 bit definition names are now obsolete. Use the WGM21:0 definitions. However, the functionality and location of these bits are compatible with previous versions of the timer. • Bit 5:4 – COM2A1:0: Compare Match Output Mode A These bits control the Output Compare pin (OC2A) behavior. If one or both of the COM2A1:0 bits are set, the OC2A output overrides the normal port functionality of the I/O pin it is connected to. However, note that the Data Direction Register (DDR) bit corresponding to OC2A pin must be set in order to enable the output driver. 155 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P When OC2A is connected to the pin, the function of the COM2A1:0 bits depends on the WGM21:0 bit setting. Table 17-3 shows the COM2A1:0 bit functionality when the WGM21:0 bits are set to a normal or CTC mode (non-PWM). Table 17-3. Compare Output Mode, non-PWM Mode COM2A1 COM2A0 Description 0 0 Normal port operation, OC2A disconnected. 0 1 Toggle OC2A on compare match. 1 0 Clear OC2A on compare match. 1 1 Set OC2A on compare match. Table 17-4 shows the COM2A1:0 bit functionality when the WGM21:0 bits are set to fast PWM mode. Table 17-4. Compare Output Mode, Fast PWM Mode(1) COM2A1 COM2A0 Description 0 0 Normal port operation, OC2A disconnected. 0 1 Reserved Clear OC2A on compare match, set OC2A at BOTTOM 1 0 (non-inverting mode) Set OC2A on compare match, clear OC2A at BOTTOM 1 1 (inverting mode). Note: 1. A special case occurs when OCR2A equals TOP and COM2A1 is set. In this case, the com- pare match is ignored, but the set or clear is done at BOTTOM. See ”Fast PWM Mode” on page 147 for more details. Table 17-5 shows the COM21:0 bit functionality when the WGM21:0 bits are set to phase cor- rect PWM mode. Table 17-5. Compare Output Mode, Phase Correct PWM Mode(1) COM2A1 COM2A0 Description 0 0 Normal port operation, OC2A disconnected. 0 1 Reserved Clear OC2A on compare match when up-counting. Set OC2A on 1 0 compare match when counting down. Set OC2A on compare match when up-counting. Clear OC2A on 1 1 compare match when counting down. Note: 1. A special case occurs when OCR2A equals TOP and COM2A1 is set. In this case, the com- pare match is ignored, but the set or clear is done at TOP. See ”Phase Correct PWM Mode” on page 149 for more details. • Bit 2:0 – CS22:0: Clock Select The three Clock Select bits select the clock source to be used by the Timer/Counter, see Table 17-6 on page 157. 156 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Table 17-6. Clock Select Bit Description CS22 CS21 CS20 Description 0 0 0 No clock source (Timer/Counter stopped). 0 0 1 clk /(No prescaling) T2S 0 1 0 clk /8 (From prescaler) T2S 0 1 1 clk /32 (From prescaler) T2S 1 0 0 clk /64 (From prescaler) T2S 1 0 1 clk /128 (From prescaler) T2S 1 1 0 clk /256 (From prescaler) T2S 1 1 1 clk /1024 (From prescaler) T2S 17.10.2 TCNT2 – Timer/Counter Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 (0xB2) TCNT2[7:0] TCNT2 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 The Timer/Counter Register gives direct access, both for read and write operations, to the Timer/Counter unit 8-bit counter. Writing to the TCNT2 Register blocks (removes) the compare match on the following timer clock. Modifying the counter (TCNT2) while the counter is running, introduces a risk of missing a compare match between TCNT2 and the OCR2A Register. 17.10.3 OCR2A – Output Compare Register A Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 (0xB3) OCR2A[7:0] OCR2A Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 The Output Compare Register A contains an 8-bit value that is continuously compared with the counter value (TCNT2). A match can be used to generate an Output Compare interrupt, or to generate a waveform output on the OC2A pin. 17.10.4 ASSR – Asynchronous Status Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 (0xB6) – – – EXCLK AS2 TCN2UB OCR2UB TCR2UB ASSR Read/Write R R R R/W R/W R R R Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 • Bit 4 – EXCLK: Enable External Clock Input When EXCLK is written to one, and asynchronous clock is selected, the external clock input buf- fer is enabled and an external clock can be input on Timer Oscillator 1 (TOSC1) pin instead of a 32kHz crystal. Writing to EXCLK should be done before asynchronous operation is selected. Note that the crystal Oscillator will only run when this bit is zero. 157 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P • Bit 3 – AS2: Asynchronous Timer/Counter2 When AS2 is written to zero, Timer/Counter2 is clocked from the I/O clock, clk . When AS2 is I/O written to one, Timer/Counter2 is clocked from a crystal Oscillator connected to the Timer Oscil- lator 1 (TOSC1) pin. When the value of AS2 is changed, the contents of TCNT2, OCR2A, and TCCR2A might be corrupted. • Bit 2 – TCN2UB: Timer/Counter2 Update Busy When Timer/Counter2 operates asynchronously and TCNT2 is written, this bit becomes set. When TCNT2 has been updated from the temporary storage register, this bit is cleared by hard- ware. A logical zero in this bit indicates that TCNT2 is ready to be updated with a new value. • Bit 1 – OCR2UB: Output Compare Register2 Update Busy When Timer/Counter2 operates asynchronously and OCR2A is written, this bit becomes set. When OCR2A has been updated from the temporary storage register, this bit is cleared by hard- ware. A logical zero in this bit indicates that OCR2A is ready to be updated with a new value. • Bit 0 – TCR2UB: Timer/Counter Control Register2 Update Busy When Timer/Counter2 operates asynchronously and TCCR2A is written, this bit becomes set. When TCCR2A has been updated from the temporary storage register, this bit is cleared by hardware. A logical zero in this bit indicates that TCCR2A is ready to be updated with a new value. If a write is performed to any of the three Timer/Counter2 Registers while its update busy flag is set, the updated value might get corrupted and cause an unintentional interrupt to occur. The mechanisms for reading TCNT2, OCR2A, and TCCR2A are different. When reading TCNT2, the actual timer value is read. When reading OCR2A or TCCR2A, the value in the tem- porary storage register is read. 17.10.5 TIMSK2 – Timer/Counter2 Interrupt Mask Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 (0x70) – – – – – – OCIE2A TOIE2 TIMSK2 Read/Write R R R R R R R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 • Bit 1 – OCIE2A: Timer/Counter2 Output Compare Match A Interrupt Enable When the OCIE2A bit is written to one and the I-bit in the Status Register is set (one), the Timer/Counter2 Compare Match A interrupt is enabled. The corresponding interrupt is executed if a compare match in Timer/Counter2 occurs, i.e., when the OCF2A bit is set in the Timer/Coun- ter 2 Interrupt Flag Register – TIFR2. • Bit 0 – TOIE2: Timer/Counter2 Overflow Interrupt Enable When the TOIE2 bit is written to one and the I-bit in the Status Register is set (one), the Timer/Counter2 Overflow interrupt is enabled. The corresponding interrupt is executed if an overflow in Timer/Counter2 occurs, i.e., when the TOV2 bit is set in the Timer/Counter2 Interrupt Flag Register – TIFR2. 158 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 17.10.6 TIFR2 – Timer/Counter2 Interrupt Flag Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0x17 (0x37) – – – – – – OCF2A TOV2 TIFR2 Read/Write R R R R R R R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 • Bit 1 – OCF2A: Output Compare Flag 2 A The OCF2A bit is set (one) when a compare match occurs between the Timer/Counter2 and the data in OCR2A – Output Compare Register2. OCF2A is cleared by hardware when executing the corresponding interrupt handling vector. Alternatively, OCF2A is cleared by writing a logic one to the flag. When the I-bit in SREG, OCIE2A (Timer/Counter2 Compare match Interrupt Enable), and OCF2A are set (one), the Timer/Counter2 Compare match Interrupt is executed. • Bit 0 – TOV2: Timer/Counter2 Overflow Flag The TOV2 bit is set (one) when an overflow occurs in Timer/Counter2. TOV2 is cleared by hard- ware when executing the corresponding interrupt handling vector. Alternatively, TOV2 is cleared by writing a logic one to the flag. When the SREG I-bit, TOIE2A (Timer/Counter2 Overflow Inter- rupt Enable), and TOV2 are set (one), the Timer/Counter2 Overflow interrupt is executed. In PWM mode, this bit is set when Timer/Counter2 changes counting direction at 0x00. 17.10.7 GTCCR – General Timer/Counter Control Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0x23 (0x43) TSM – – – – – PSR2 PSR10 GTCCR Read/Write R/W R R R R R R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 • Bit 1 – PSR2: Prescaler Reset Timer/Counter2 When this bit is one, the Timer/Counter2 prescaler will be reset. This bit is normally cleared immediately by hardware. If the bit is written when Timer/Counter2 is operating in asynchronous mode, the bit will remain one until the prescaler has been reset. The bit will not be cleared by hardware if the TSM bit is set. Refer to the description of the ”Bit 7 – TSM: Timer/Counter Syn- chronization Mode” on page 140 for a description of the Timer/Counter Synchronization mode. 159 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 18. SPI – Serial Peripheral Interface 18.1 Features • Full-duplex, Three-wire Synchronous Data Transfer • Master or Slave Operation • LSB First or MSB First Data Transfer • Seven Programmable Bit Rates • End of Transmission Interrupt Flag • Write Collision Flag Protection • Wake-up from Idle Mode • Double Speed (CK/2) Master SPI Mode 18.2 Overview The Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) allows high-speed synchronous data transfer between the ATmega329P/3290P and peripheral devices or between several AVR devices. A simplified block diagram of the Serial Peripheral Interface is shown in Figure 18-1. The PRSPI bit in ”Power Reduction Register” on page 39 must be written to zero to enable the SPI module. Figure 18-1. SPI Block Diagram(1) DIVIDER /2/4/8/16/32/64/128 X 2 PI S X 2 PI S Note: 1. Refer to Figure 1-2 on page 3, and Table 13-6 on page 72 for SPI pin placement. 160 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P The interconnection between Master and Slave CPUs with SPI is shown in Figure 18-2 on page 161. The system consists of two shift Registers, and a Master clock generator. The SPI Master initiates the communication cycle when pulling low the Slave Select SS pin of the desired Slave. Master and Slave prepare the data to be sent in their respective shift Registers, and the Master generates the required clock pulses on the SCK line to interchange data. Data is always shifted from Master to Slave on the Master Out – Slave In, MOSI, line, and from Slave to Master on the Master In – Slave Out, MISO, line. After each data packet, the Master will synchronize the Slave by pulling high the Slave Select, SS, line. When configured as a Master, the SPI interface has no automatic control of the SS line. This must be handled by user software before communication can start. When this is done, writing a byte to the SPI Data Register starts the SPI clock generator, and the hardware shifts the eight bits into the Slave. After shifting one byte, the SPI clock generator stops, setting the end of Transmission Flag (SPIF). If the SPI Interrupt Enable bit (SPIE) in the SPCR Register is set, an interrupt is requested. The Master may continue to shift the next byte by writing it into SPDR, or signal the end of packet by pulling high the Slave Select, SS line. The last incoming byte will be kept in the Buffer Register for later use. When configured as a Slave, the SPI interface will remain sleeping with MISO tri-stated as long as the SS pin is driven high. In this state, software may update the contents of the SPI Data Register, SPDR, but the data will not be shifted out by incoming clock pulses on the SCK pin until the SS pin is driven low. As one byte has been completely shifted, the end of Transmission Flag, SPIF is set. If the SPI Interrupt Enable bit, SPIE, in the SPCR Register is set, an interrupt is requested. The Slave may continue to place new data to be sent into SPDR before reading the incoming data. The last incoming byte will be kept in the Buffer Register for later use. Figure 18-2. SPI Master-slave Interconnection SHIFT ENABLE The system is single buffered in the transmit direction and double buffered in the receive direc- tion. This means that bytes to be transmitted cannot be written to the SPI Data Register before the entire shift cycle is completed. When receiving data, however, a received character must be read from the SPI Data Register before the next character has been completely shifted in. Oth- erwise, the first byte is lost. In SPI Slave mode, the control logic will sample the incoming signal of the SCK pin. To ensure correct sampling of the clock signal, the minimum low and high period should be: Low period: longer than 2 CPU clock cycles. High period: longer than 2 CPU clock cycles. 161 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P When the SPI is enabled, the data direction of the MOSI, MISO, SCK, and SS pins is overridden according to Table 18-1. For more details on automatic port overrides, refer to ”Alternate Port Functions” on page 69. Table 18-1. SPI Pin Overrides(1) Pin Direction, Master SPI Direction, Slave SPI MOSI User Defined Input MISO Input User Defined SCK User Defined Input SS User Defined Input Note: 1. See ”Alternate Functions of Port B” on page 72 for a detailed description of how to define the direction of the user defined SPI pins. 162 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P The following code examples show how to initialize the SPI as a Master and how to perform a simple transmission. DDR_SPI in the examples must be replaced by the actual Data Direction Register controlling the SPI pins. DD_MOSI, DD_MISO and DD_SCK must be replaced by the actual data direction bits for these pins. E.g. if MOSI is placed on pin PB5, replace DD_MOSI with DDB5 and DDR_SPI with DDRB. Assembly Code Example(1) SPI_MasterInit: ; Set MOSI and SCK output, all others input ldi r17,(1<<DD_MOSI)|(1<<DD_SCK) out DDR_SPI,r17 ; Enable SPI, Master, set clock rate fck/16 ldi r17,(1<<SPE)|(1<<MSTR)|(1<<SPR0) out SPCR,r17 ret SPI_MasterTransmit: ; Start transmission of data (r16) out SPDR,r16 Wait_Transmit: ; Wait for transmission complete sbis SPSR,SPIF rjmp Wait_Transmit ret C Code Example(1) void SPI_MasterInit(void) { /* Set MOSI and SCK output, all others input */ DDR_SPI = (1<<DD_MOSI)|(1<<DD_SCK); /* Enable SPI, Master, set clock rate fck/16 */ SPCR = (1<<SPE)|(1<<MSTR)|(1<<SPR0); } void SPI_MasterTransmit(char cData) { /* Start transmission */ SPDR = cData; /* Wait for transmission complete */ while(!(SPSR & (1<<SPIF))) ; } Note: 1. See Section “5.” on page 9. 163 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P The following code examples show how to initialize the SPI as a Slave and how to perform a simple reception. Assembly Code Example(1) SPI_SlaveInit: ; Set MISO output, all others input ldi r17,(1<<DD_MISO) out DDR_SPI,r17 ; Enable SPI ldi r17,(1<<SPE) out SPCR,r17 ret SPI_SlaveReceive: ; Wait for reception complete sbis SPSR,SPIF rjmp SPI_SlaveReceive ; Read received data and return in r16,SPDR ret C Code Example(1) void SPI_SlaveInit(void) { /* Set MISO output, all others input */ DDR_SPI = (1<<DD_MISO); /* Enable SPI */ SPCR = (1<<SPE); } char SPI_SlaveReceive(void) { /* Wait for reception complete */ while(!(SPSR & (1<<SPIF))) ; /* Return Data Register */ return SPDR; } Note: 1. See Section “5.” on page 9. 164 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 18.3 SS Pin Functionality 18.3.1 Slave Mode When the SPI is configured as a Slave, the Slave Select (SS) pin is always input. When SS is held low, the SPI is activated, and MISO becomes an output if configured so by the user. All other pins are inputs. When SS is driven high, all pins are inputs, and the SPI is passive, which means that it will not receive incoming data. Note that the SPI logic will be reset once the SS pin is driven high. The SS pin is useful for packet/byte synchronization to keep the slave bit counter synchronous with the master clock generator. When the SS pin is driven high, the SPI slave will immediately reset the send and receive logic, and drop any partially received data in the Shift Register. 18.3.2 Master Mode When the SPI is configured as a Master (MSTR in SPCR is set), the user can determine the direction of the SS pin. If SS is configured as an output, the pin is a general output pin which does not affect the SPI system. Typically, the pin will be driving the SS pin of the SPI Slave. If SS is configured as an input, it must be held high to ensure Master SPI operation. If the SS pin is driven low by peripheral circuitry when the SPI is configured as a Master with the SS pin defined as an input, the SPI system interprets this as another master selecting the SPI as a slave and starting to send data to it. To avoid bus contention, the SPI system takes the following actions: 1. The MSTR bit in SPCR is cleared and the SPI system becomes a Slave. As a result of the SPI becoming a Slave, the MOSI and SCK pins become inputs. 2. The SPIF Flag in SPSR is set, and if the SPI interrupt is enabled, and the I-bit in SREG is set, the interrupt routine will be executed. Thus, when interrupt-driven SPI transmission is used in Master mode, and there exists a possi- bility that SS is driven low, the interrupt should always check that the MSTR bit is still set. If the MSTR bit has been cleared by a slave select, it must be set by the user to re-enable SPI Master mode. 18.4 Data Modes There are four combinations of SCK phase and polarity with respect to serial data, which are determined by control bits CPHA and CPOL. The SPI data transfer formats are shown in Figure 18-3 on page 166 and Figure 18-4 on page 166. Data bits are shifted out and latched in on opposite edges of the SCK signal, ensuring sufficient time for data signals to stabilize. This is clearly seen by summarizing Table 18-3 on page 167 and Table 18-4 on page 167, as done in Table 18-2. Table 18-2. SPI Modes SPI Mode Conditions Leading Edge Trailing eDge 0 CPOL=0, CPHA=0 Sample (Rising) Setup (Falling) 1 CPOL=0, CPHA=1 Setup (Rising) Sample (Falling) 2 CPOL=1, CPHA=0 Sample (Falling) Setup (Rising) 3 CPOL=1, CPHA=1 Setup (Falling) Sample (Rising) 165 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Figure 18-3. SPI Transfer Format with CPHA = 0 SCK (CPOL = 0) mode 0 SCK (CPOL = 1) mode 2 SAMPLE I MOSI/MISO CHANGE 0 MOSI PIN CHANGE 0 MISO PIN SS MSB first (DORD = 0) MSB Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 LSB LSB first (DORD = 1) LSB Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 MSB Figure 18-4. SPI Transfer Format with CPHA = 1 SCK (CPOL = 0) mode 1 SCK (CPOL = 1) mode 3 SAMPLE I MOSI/MISO CHANGE 0 MOSI PIN CHANGE 0 MISO PIN SS MSB first (DORD = 0) MSB Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 LSB LSB first (DORD = 1) LSB Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 MSB 166 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 18.5 Register Description 18.5.1 SPCR – SPI Control Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0x2C (0x4C) SPIE SPE DORD MSTR CPOL CPHA SPR1 SPR0 SPCR Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 • Bit 7 – SPIE: SPI Interrupt Enable This bit causes the SPI interrupt to be executed if SPIF bit in the SPSR Register is set and the if the Global Interrupt Enable bit in SREG is set. • Bit 6 – SPE: SPI Enable When the SPE bit is written to one, the SPI is enabled. This bit must be set to enable any SPI operations. • Bit 5 – DORD: Data Order When the DORD bit is written to one, the LSB of the data word is transmitted first. When the DORD bit is written to zero, the MSB of the data word is transmitted first. • Bit 4 – MSTR: Master/Slave Select This bit selects Master SPI mode when written to one, and Slave SPI mode when written logic zero. If SS is configured as an input and is driven low while MSTR is set, MSTR will be cleared, and SPIF in SPSR will become set. The user will then have to set MSTR to re-enable SPI Mas- ter mode. • Bit 3 – CPOL: Clock Polarity When this bit is written to one, SCK is high when idle. When CPOL is written to zero, SCK is low when idle. Refer to Figure 18-3 and Figure 18-4 for an example. The CPOL functionality is sum- marized below: Table 18-3. CPOL Functionality CPOL Leading Edge Trailing Edge 0 Rising Falling 1 Falling Rising • Bit 2 – CPHA: Clock Phase The settings of the Clock Phase bit (CPHA) determine if data is sampled on the leading (first) or trailing (last) edge of SCK. Refer to Figure 18-3 on page 166 and Figure 18-4 on page 166 for an example. The CPOL functionality is summarized below: Table 18-4. CPHA Functionality CPHA Leading Edge Trailing Edge 0 Sample Setup 1 Setup Sample 167 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P • Bits 1, 0 – SPR1, SPR0: SPI Clock Rate Select 1 and 0 These two bits control the SCK rate of the device configured as a Master. SPR1 and SPR0 have no effect on the Slave. The relationship between SCK and the Oscillator Clock frequency f is osc shown in the following table: Table 18-5. Relationship Between SCK and the Oscillator Frequency SPI2X SPR1 SPR0 SCK Frequency 0 0 0 f /4 osc 0 0 1 f /16 osc 0 1 0 f /64 osc 0 1 1 f /128 osc 1 0 0 f /2 osc 1 0 1 f /8 osc 1 1 0 f /32 osc 1 1 1 f /64 osc 18.5.2 SPSR – SPI Status Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0x2D (0x4D) SPIF WCOL – – – – – SPI2X SPSR Read/Write R R R R R R R R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 • Bit 7 – SPIF: SPI Interrupt Flag When a serial transfer is complete, the SPIF Flag is set. An interrupt is generated if SPIE in SPCR is set and global interrupts are enabled. If SS is an input and is driven low when the SPI is in Master mode, this will also set the SPIF Flag. SPIF is cleared by hardware when executing the corresponding interrupt handling vector. Alternatively, the SPIF bit is cleared by first reading the SPI Status Register with SPIF set, then accessing the SPI Data Register (SPDR). • Bit 6 – WCOL: Write COLlision Flag The WCOL bit is set if the SPI Data Register (SPDR) is written during a data transfer. The WCOL bit (and the SPIF bit) are cleared by first reading the SPI Status Register with WCOL set, and then accessing the SPI Data Register. • Bit 5...1 – Res: Reserved Bits These bits are reserved bits in the ATmega329P/3290P and will always read as zero. • Bit 0 – SPI2X: Double SPI Speed Bit When this bit is written logic one the SPI speed (SCK Frequency) will be doubled when the SPI is in Master mode (see Table 18-5). This means that the minimum SCK period will be two CPU clock periods. When the SPI is configured as Slave, the SPI is only guaranteed to work at f /4 osc or lower. The SPI interface on the ATmega329P/3290P is also used for program memory and EEPROM downloading or uploading. See page 311 for serial programming and verification. 168 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 18.5.3 SPDR – SPI Data Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0x2E (0x4E) MSB LSB SPDR Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value X X X X X X X X Undefined The SPI Data Register is a read/write register used for data transfer between the Register File and the SPI Shift Register. Writing to the register initiates data transmission. Reading the regis- ter causes the Shift Register Receive buffer to be read. 169 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 19. USART0 19.1 Features • Full Duplex Operation (Independent Serial Receive and Transmit Registers) • Asynchronous or Synchronous Operation • Master or Slave Clocked Synchronous Operation • High Resolution Baud Rate Generator • Supports Serial Frames with 5, 6, 7, 8, or 9 Data Bits and 1 or 2 Stop Bits • Odd or Even Parity Generation and Parity Check Supported by Hardware • Data OverRun Detection • Framing Error Detection • Noise Filtering Includes False Start Bit Detection and Digital Low Pass Filter • Three Separate Interrupts on TX Complete, TX Data Register Empty and RX Complete • Multi-processor Communication Mode • Double Speed Asynchronous Communication Mode 19.2 Overview The Universal Synchronous and Asynchronous serial Receiver and Transmitter (USART) is a highly flexible serial communication device. A simplified block diagram of the USART Transmitter is shown in Figure 19-1. CPU accessible I/O Registers and I/O pins are shown in bold. The Power Reduction USART bit, PRUSART0, in ”PRR – Power Reduction Register” on page 43 must be written to zero to enable USART0 module. 170 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Figure 19-1. USART Block Diagram(1) Clock Generator UBRR[H:L] OSC BAUD RATE GENERATOR SYNC LOGIC PIN XCK CONTROL Transmitter TX UDR (Transmit) CONTROL PARITY S GENERATOR U PIN B TRANSMIT SHIFT REGISTER CONTROL TxD A T A D Receiver CLOCK RX RECOVERY CONTROL DATA PIN RECEIVE SHIFT REGISTER RxD RECOVERY CONTROL PARITY UDR (Receive) CHECKER UCSRA UCSRB UCSRC Note: 1. Refer to Figure 1-2 on page 3, Figure on page 3, and ”Alternate Functions of Port E” on page 78 for USART pin placement. The dashed boxes in the block diagram separate the three main parts of the USART (listed from the top): Clock Generator, Transmitter and Receiver. Control Registers are shared by all units. The Clock Generation logic consists of synchronization logic for external clock input used by synchronous slave operation, and the baud rate generator. The XCK (Transfer Clock) pin is only used by synchronous transfer mode. The Transmitter consists of a single write buffer, a serial Shift Register, Parity Generator and Control logic for handling different serial frame formats. The write buffer allows a continuous transfer of data without any delay between frames. The Receiver is the most complex part of the USART module due to its clock and data recovery units. The recovery units are used for asynchronous data reception. In addition to the recovery units, the Receiver includes a Parity Checker, Control logic, a Shift Register and a two level receive buffer (UDRn). The Receiver supports the same frame formats as the Transmitter, and can detect Frame Error, Data OverRun and Parity Errors. 171 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 19.2.1 AVR USART vs. AVR UART – Compatibility The USART is fully compatible with the AVR UART regarding: • Bit locations inside all USART Registers. • Baud Rate Generation. • Transmitter Operation. • Transmit Buffer Functionality. • Receiver Operation. However, the receive buffering has two improvements that will affect the compatibility in some special cases: • A second Buffer Register has been added. The two Buffer Registers operate as a circular FIFO buffer. Therefore the UDRn must only be read once for each incoming data! More important is the fact that the Error Flags (FEn and DORn) and the ninth data bit (RXB8n) are buffered with the data in the receive buffer. Therefore the status bits must always be read before the UDRn Register is read. Otherwise the error status will be lost since the buffer state is lost. • The Receiver Shift Register can now act as a third buffer level. This is done by allowing the received data to remain in the serial Shift Register (see Figure 19-1) if the Buffer Registers are full, until a new start bit is detected. The USART is therefore more resistant to Data OverRun (DORn) error conditions. The following control bits have changed name, but have same functionality and register location: • CHR9 is changed to UCSZn2. • OR is changed to DORn. 19.3 Clock Generation The Clock Generation logic generates the base clock for the Transmitter and Receiver. The USART supports four modes of clock operation: Normal asynchronous, Double Speed asyn- chronous, Master synchronous and Slave synchronous mode. The UMSELn bit in USART Control and Status Register C (UCSRnC) selects between asynchronous and synchronous operation. Double Speed (asynchronous mode only) is controlled by the U2Xn found in the UCSRnA Register. When using synchronous mode (UMSELn = 1), the Data Direction Register for the XCK pin (DDR_XCK) controls whether the clock source is internal (Master mode) or external (Slave mode). The XCK pin is only active when using synchronous mode. Figure 19-2 on page 173 shows a block diagram of the clock generation logic. 172 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Figure 19-2. .Clock Generation Logic, Block Diagram UBRR U2X fosc Prescaling UBRR+1 /2 /4 /2 Down-Counter 0 1 0 OSC txclk 1 DDR_XCK Sync Edge xcki Register Detector 0 XCK UMSEL xcko 1 Pin DDR_XCK UCPOL 1 rxclk 0 Signal description: txclk Transmitter clock (Internal Signal). rxclk Receiver base clock (Internal Signal). xcki Input from XCK pin (internal Signal). Used for synchronous slave operation. xcko Clock output to XCK pin (Internal Signal). Used for synchronous master operation. fosc XTAL pin frequency (System Clock). 19.3.1 Internal Clock Generation – The Baud Rate Generator Internal clock generation is used for the asynchronous and the synchronous master modes of operation. The description in this section refers to Figure 19-2. The USART Baud Rate Register (UBRRn) and the down-counter connected to it function as a programmable prescaler or baud rate generator. The down-counter, running at system clock (f ), is loaded with the UBRRn value each time the counter has counted down to zero or when osc the UBRRnL Register is written. A clock is generated each time the counter reaches zero. This clock is the baud rate generator clock output (= f /(UBRRn+1)). The Transmitter divides the osc baud rate generator clock output by 2, 8 or 16 depending on mode. The baud rate generator out- put is used directly by the Receiver’s clock and data recovery units. However, the recovery units use a state machine that uses 2, 8 or 16 states depending on mode set by the state of the UMSELn, U2Xn and DDR_XCK bits. Table 19-3 on page 174 contains equations for calculating the baud rate (in bits per second) and for calculating the UBRRn value for each mode of operation using an internally generated clock source. 173 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Figure 19-3. Equations for Calculating Baud Rate Register Setting Equation for Calculating Baud Equation for Calculating UBRRn Operating Mode Rate(1) Value Asynchronous Normal f f OSC OSC BAUD = ------------------------------------------ UBRRn = ------------------------–1 mode (U2Xn = 0) 16UBRRn+1 16BAUD Asynchronous Double f f OSC OSC Speed mode BAUD = --------------------------------------- UBRRn = --------------------–1 8UBRRn+1 8BAUD (U2Xn = 1) Synchronous Master f f OSC OSC BAUD = --------------------------------------- UBRRn = --------------------–1 mode 2UBRRn+1 2BAUD Note: 1. The baud rate is defined to be the transfer rate in bit per second (bps) BAUD Baud rate (in bits per second, bps) f System Oscillator clock frequency OSC UBRRn Contents of the UBRRnH and UBRRnL Registers, (0-4095) Some examples of UBRRn values for some system clock frequencies are found in Figure 19-3 on page 194. 19.3.2 Double Speed Operation (U2Xn) The transfer rate can be doubled by setting the U2Xn bit in UCSRnA. Setting this bit only has effect for the asynchronous operation. Set this bit to zero when using synchronous operation. Setting this bit will reduce the divisor of the baud rate divider from 16 to 8, effectively doubling the transfer rate for asynchronous communication. Note however that the Receiver will in this case only use half the number of samples (reduced from 16 to 8) for data sampling and clock recovery, and therefore a more accurate baud rate setting and system clock are required when this mode is used. For the Transmitter, there are no downsides. 19.3.3 External Clock External clocking is used by the synchronous slave modes of operation. The description in this section refers to Figure 19-2 on page 173 for details. External clock input from the XCK pin is sampled by a synchronization register to minimize the chance of meta-stability. The output from the synchronization register must then pass through an edge detector before it can be used by the Transmitter and Receiver. This process intro- duces a two CPU clock period delay and therefore the maximum external XCK clock frequency is limited by the following equation: f OSC f ----------- XCK 4 Note that f depends on the stability of the system clock source. It is therefore recommended to osc add some margin to avoid possible loss of data due to frequency variations. 174 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 19.3.4 Synchronous Clock Operation When synchronous mode is used (UMSELn = 1), the XCK pin will be used as either clock input (Slave) or clock output (Master). The dependency between the clock edges and data sampling or data change is the same. The basic principle is that data input (on RxD) is sampled at the opposite XCK clock edge of the edge the data output (TxD) is changed. Figure 19-4. Synchronous Mode XCK Timing. UCPOL = 1 XCK RxD / TxD Sample UCPOL = 0 XCK RxD / TxD Sample The UCPOLn bit UCRSC selects which XCK clock edge is used for data sampling and which is used for data change. As Figure 19-4 shows, when UCPOLn is zero the data will be changed at rising XCK edge and sampled at falling XCK edge. If UCPOLn is set, the data will be changed at falling XCK edge and sampled at rising XCK edge. 19.4 Frame Formats A serial frame is defined to be one character of data bits with synchronization bits (start and stop bits), and optionally a parity bit for error checking. The USART accepts all 30 combinations of the following as valid frame formats: • 1 start bit • 5, 6, 7, 8, or 9 data bits • no, even or odd parity bit • 1 or 2 stop bits A frame starts with the start bit followed by the least significant data bit. Then the next data bits, up to a total of nine, are succeeding, ending with the most significant bit. If enabled, the parity bit is inserted after the data bits, before the stop bits. When a complete frame is transmitted, it can be directly followed by a new frame, or the communication line can be set to an idle (high) state. Figure 19-5 illustrates the possible combinations of the frame formats. Bits inside brackets are optional. Figure 19-5. Frame Formats FRAME (IDLE) St 0 1 2 3 4 [5] [6] [7] [8] [P] Sp1 [Sp2] (St / IDLE) 175 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P St Start bit, always low. (n) Data bits (0 to 8). P Parity bit. Can be odd or even. Sp Stop bit, always high. IDLE No transfers on the communication line (RxD or TxD). An IDLE line must be high. The frame format used by the USART is set by the UCSZn2:0, UPMn1:0 and USBSn bits in UCSRnB and UCSRnC. The Receiver and Transmitter use the same setting. Note that changing the setting of any of these bits will corrupt all ongoing communication for both the Receiver and Transmitter. The USART Character SiZe (UCSZn2:0) bits select the number of data bits in the frame. The USART Parity mode (UPMn1:0) bits enable and set the type of parity bit. The selection between one or two stop bits is done by the USART Stop Bit Select (USBSn) bit. The Receiver ignores the second stop bit. An FEn (Frame Error) will therefore only be detected in the cases where the first stop bit is zero. 19.4.1 Parity Bit Calculation The parity bit is calculated by doing an exclusive-or of all the data bits. If odd parity is used, the result of the exclusive or is inverted. The relation between the parity bit and data bits is as follows: P = d d d d d 0 even n–1 3 2 1 0 P = d d d d d 1 odd n–1 3 2 1 0 P Parity bit using even parity even Podd Parity bit using odd parity d Data bit n of the character n If used, the parity bit is located between the last data bit and first stop bit of a serial frame. 19.5 USART Initialization The USART has to be initialized before any communication can take place. The initialization pro- cess normally consists of setting the baud rate, setting frame format and enabling the Transmitter or the Receiver depending on the usage. For interrupt driven USART operation, the Global Interrupt Flag should be cleared (and interrupts globally disabled) when doing the initialization. Before doing a re-initialization with changed baud rate or frame format, be sure that there are no ongoing transmissions during the period the registers are changed. The TXCn Flag can be used to check that the Transmitter has completed all transfers, and the RXCn Flag can be used to check that there are no unread data in the receive buffer. Note that the TXCn Flag must be cleared before each transmission (before UDRn is written) if it is used for this purpose. The following simple USART initialization code examples show one assembly and one C func- tion that are equal in functionality. The examples assume asynchronous operation using polling (no interrupts enabled) and a fixed frame format. The baud rate is given as a function parameter. 176 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P For the assembly code, the baud rate parameter is assumed to be stored in the r17:r16 Registers. Assembly Code Example(1) USART_Init: ; Set baud rate out UBRR0H, r17 out UBRR0L, r16 ; Enable receiver and transmitter ldi r16, (1<<RXEN0)|(1<<TXEN0) out UCSR0B,r16 ; Set frame format: 8data, 2stop bit ldi r16, (1<<USBS0)|(3<<UCSZ00) out UCSR0C,r16 ret C Code Example(1) #define FOSC 1843200 // Clock Speed #define BAUD 9600 #define MYUBRR FOSC/16/BAUD-1 void main( void ) { ... USART_Init(MYUBRR) ... } void USART_Init( unsigned int ubrr) { /* Set baud rate */ UBRR0H = (unsigned char)(ubrr>>8); UBRR0L = (unsigned char)ubrr; /* Enable receiver and transmitter */ UCSR0B = (1<<RXEN0)|(1<<TXEN0); /* Set frame format: 8data, 2stop bit */ UCSR0C = (1<<USBS0)|(3<<UCSZ00); } Note: 1. See ”About Code Examples” on page 9 More advanced initialization routines can be made that include frame format as parameters, dis- able interrupts and so on. However, many applications use a fixed setting of the baud and control registers, and for these types of applications the initialization code can be placed directly in the main routine, or be combined with initialization code for other I/O modules. 177 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 19.6 Data Transmission – The USART Transmitter The USART Transmitter is enabled by setting the Transmit Enable (TXENn) bit in the UCSRnB Register. When the Transmitter is enabled, the normal port operation of the TxD pin is overrid- den by the USART and given the function as the Transmitter’s serial output. The baud rate, mode of operation and frame format must be set up once before doing any transmissions. If syn- chronous operation is used, the clock on the XCK pin will be overridden and used as transmission clock. 19.6.1 Sending Frames with 5 to 8 Data Bit A data transmission is initiated by loading the transmit buffer with the data to be transmitted. The CPU can load the transmit buffer by writing to the UDRn I/O location. The buffered data in the transmit buffer will be moved to the Shift Register when the Shift Register is ready to send a new frame. The Shift Register is loaded with new data if it is in idle state (no ongoing transmission) or immediately after the last stop bit of the previous frame is transmitted. When the Shift Register is loaded with new data, it will transfer one complete frame at the rate given by the Baud Register, U2Xn bit or by XCK depending on mode of operation. The following code examples show a simple USART transmit function based on polling of the Data Register Empty (UDREn) Flag. When using frames with less than eight bits, the most sig- nificant bits written to the UDRn are ignored. The USART has to be initialized before the function can be used. For the assembly code, the data to be sent is assumed to be stored in Register R16. Assembly Code Example(1) USART_Transmit: ; Wait for empty transmit buffer sbis UCSR0A,UDRE0 rjmp USART_Transmit ; Put data (r16) into buffer, sends the data out UDR0,r16 ret C Code Example(1) void USART_Transmit( unsigned char data ) { /* Wait for empty transmit buffer */ while ( !( UCSR0A & (1<<UDRE0)) ) ; /* Put data into buffer, sends the data */ UDR0 = data; } Note: 1. See Section “5.” on page 9. The function simply waits for the transmit buffer to be empty by checking the UDREn Flag, before loading it with new data to be transmitted. If the Data Register Empty interrupt is utilized, the interrupt routine writes the data into the buffer. 178 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 19.6.2 Sending Frames with 9 Data Bit If 9-bit characters are used (UCSZ = 7), the ninth bit must be written to the TXB8n bit in UCS- RnB before the low byte of the character is written to UDRn. The following code examples show a transmit function that handles 9-bit characters. For the assembly code, the data to be sent is assumed to be stored in registers R17:R16. Assembly Code Example(1)(2) USART_Transmit: ; Wait for empty transmit buffer sbis UCSR0A,UDRE0 rjmp USART_Transmit ; Copy 9th bit from r17 to TXB80 cbi UCSR0B,TXB80 sbrc r17,0 sbi UCSR0B,TXB80 ; Put LSB data (r16) into buffer, sends the data out UDR0,r16 ret C Code Example(1)(2) void USART_Transmit( unsigned int data ) { /* Wait for empty transmit buffer */ while ( !( UCSR0A & (1<<UDRE0))) ) ; /* Copy 9th bit to TXB80 */ UCSR0B &= ~(1<<TXB80); if ( data & 0x0100 ) UCSR0B |= (1<<TXB80); /* Put data into buffer, sends the data */ UDR0 = data; } Notes: 1. These transmit functions are written to be general functions. They can be optimized if the con- tents of the UCSRnB is static. For example, only the TXB80 bit of the UCSRnB Register is used after initialization. 2. See Section “5.” on page 9. The ninth bit can be used for indicating an address frame when using multi processor communi- cation mode or for other protocol handling as for example synchronization. 19.6.3 Transmitter Flags and Interrupts The USART Transmitter has two flags that indicate its state: USART Data Register Empty (UDREn) and Transmit Complete (TXCn). Both flags can be used for generating interrupts. The Data Register Empty (UDREn) Flag indicates whether the transmit buffer is ready to receive new data. This bit is set when the transmit buffer is empty, and cleared when the transmit buffer 179 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P contains data to be transmitted that has not yet been moved into the Shift Register. For compat- ibility with future devices, always write this bit to zero when writing the UCSRnA Register. When the Data Register Empty Interrupt Enable (UDRIEn) bit in UCSRnB is written to one, the USART Data Register Empty Interrupt will be executed as long as UDREn is set (provided that global interrupts are enabled). UDREn is cleared by writing UDRn. When interrupt-driven data transmission is used, the Data Register Empty interrupt routine must either write new data to UDRn in order to clear UDREn or disable the Data Register Empty interrupt, otherwise a new interrupt will occur once the interrupt routine terminates. The Transmit Complete (TXCn) Flag bit is set one when the entire frame in the Transmit Shift Register has been shifted out and there are no new data currently present in the transmit buffer. The TXCn Flag bit is automatically cleared when a transmit complete interrupt is executed, or it can be cleared by writing a one to its bit location. The TXCn Flag is useful in half-duplex commu- nication interfaces (like the RS-485 standard), where a transmitting application must enter receive mode and free the communication bus immediately after completing the transmission. When the Transmit Compete Interrupt Enable (TXCIEn) bit in UCSRnB is set, the USART Transmit Complete Interrupt will be executed when the TXCn Flag becomes set (provided that global interrupts are enabled). When the transmit complete interrupt is used, the interrupt han- dling routine does not have to clear the TXCn Flag, this is done automatically when the interrupt is executed. 19.6.4 Parity Generator The Parity Generator calculates the parity bit for the serial frame data. When parity bit is enabled (UPMn1 = 1), the transmitter control logic inserts the parity bit between the last data bit and the first stop bit of the frame that is sent. 19.6.5 Disabling the Transmitter The disabling of the Transmitter (setting the TXENn to zero) will not become effective until ongo- ing and pending transmissions are completed, i.e., when the Transmit Shift Register and Transmit Buffer Register do not contain data to be transmitted. When disabled, the Transmitter will no longer override the TxD pin. 19.7 Data Reception – The USART Receiver The USART Receiver is enabled by writing the Receive Enable (RXENn) bit in the UCSRnB Register to one. When the Receiver is enabled, the normal pin operation of the RxD pin is over- ridden by the USART and given the function as the Receiver’s serial input. The baud rate, mode of operation and frame format must be set up once before any serial reception can be done. If synchronous operation is used, the clock on the XCK pin will be used as transfer clock. 19.7.1 Receiving Frames with 5 to 8 Data Bits The Receiver starts data reception when it detects a valid start bit. Each bit that follows the start bit will be sampled at the baud rate or XCK clock, and shifted into the Receive Shift Register until the first stop bit of a frame is received. A second stop bit will be ignored by the Receiver. When the first stop bit is received, i.e., a complete serial frame is present in the Receive Shift Register, the contents of the Shift Register will be moved into the receive buffer. The receive buffer can then be read by reading the UDRn I/O location. The following code example shows a simple USART receive function based on polling of the Receive Complete (RXCn) Flag. When using frames with less than eight bits the most significant 180 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P bits of the data read from the UDRn will be masked to zero. The USART has to be initialized before the function can be used. Assembly Code Example(1) USART_Receive: ; Wait for data to be received sbis UCSR0A, RXC0 rjmp USART_Receive ; Get and return received data from buffer in r16, UDR0 ret C Code Example(1) unsigned char USART_Receive( void ) { /* Wait for data to be received */ while ( !(UCSR0A & (1<<RXC0)) ) ; /* Get and return received data from buffer */ return UDR0; } Note: 1. See Section “5.” on page 9. The function simply waits for data to be present in the receive buffer by checking the RXCn Flag, before reading the buffer and returning the value. 19.7.2 Receiving Frames with 9 Data Bits If 9-bit characters are used (UCSZ=7), the ninth bit must be read from the RXB8n bit in UCSRnB before reading the low bits from the UDRn. This rule applies to the FEn, DORn and UPEn Status Flags as well. Read status from UCSRnA, then data from UDRn. Reading the UDRn I/O location will change the state of the receive buffer FIFO and consequently the TXB8n, FEn, DORn and UPEn bits, which all are stored in the FIFO, will change. 181 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P The following code example shows a simple USART receive function that handles both nine bit characters and the status bits. Assembly Code Example(1) USART_Receive: ; Wait for data to be received sbis UCSR0A, RXC0 rjmp USART_Receive ; Get status and 9th bit, then data from buffer in r18, UCSR0A in r17, UCSR0B in r16, UDRn ; If error, return -1 andi r18,(1<<FE0)|(1<<DOR0)|(1<<UPE0) breq USART_ReceiveNoError ldi r17, HIGH(-1) ldi r16, LOW(-1) USART_ReceiveNoError: ; Filter the 9th bit, then return lsr r17 andi r17, 0x01 ret C Code Example(1) unsigned int USART_Receive( void ) { unsigned char status, resh, resl; /* Wait for data to be received */ while ( !(UCSR0A & (1<<RXC0)) ) ; /* Get status and 9th bit, then data */ /* from buffer */ status = UCSR0A; resh = UCSR0B; resl = UDRn; /* If error, return -1 */ if ( status & (1<<FE0)|(1<<DOR0)|(1<<UPE0) ) return -1; /* Filter the 9th bit, then return */ resh = (resh >> 1) & 0x01; return ((resh << 8) | resl); } Note: 1. See ”About Code Examples” on page 9 The receive function example reads all the I/O Registers into the Register File before any com- putation is done. This gives an optimal receive buffer utilization since the buffer location read will be free to accept new data as early as possible. 182 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 19.7.3 Receive Compete Flag and Interrupt The USART Receiver has one flag that indicates the Receiver state. The Receive Complete (RXCn) Flag indicates if there are unread data present in the receive buf- fer. This flag is one when unread data exist in the receive buffer, and zero when the receive buffer is empty (i.e., does not contain any unread data). If the Receiver is disabled (RXENn = 0), the receive buffer will be flushed and consequently the RXCn bit will become zero. When the Receive Complete Interrupt Enable (RXCIEn) in UCSRnB is set, the USART Receive Complete interrupt will be executed as long as the RXCn Flag is set (provided that global inter- rupts are enabled). When interrupt-driven data reception is used, the receive complete routine must read the received data from UDRn in order to clear the RXCn Flag, otherwise a new inter- rupt will occur once the interrupt routine terminates. 19.7.4 Receiver Error Flags The USART Receiver has three Error Flags: Frame Error (FEn), Data OverRun (DORn) and Parity Error (UPEn). All can be accessed by reading UCSRnA. Common for the Error Flags is that they are located in the receive buffer together with the frame for which they indicate the error status. Due to the buffering of the Error Flags, the UCSRnA must be read before the receive buffer (UDRn), since reading the UDRn I/O location changes the buffer read location. Another equality for the Error Flags is that they can not be altered by software doing a write to the flag location. However, all flags must be set to zero when the UCSRnA is written for upward compatibility of future USART implementations. None of the Error Flags can generate interrupts. The Frame Error (FEn) Flag indicates the state of the first stop bit of the next readable frame stored in the receive buffer. The FEn Flag is zero when the stop bit was correctly read (as one), and the FEn Flag will be one when the stop bit was incorrect (zero). This flag can be used for detecting out-of-sync conditions, detecting break conditions and protocol handling. The FEn Flag is not affected by the setting of the USBSn bit in UCSRnC since the Receiver ignores all, except for the first, stop bits. For compatibility with future devices, always set this bit to zero when writing to UCSRnA. The Data OverRun (DORn) Flag indicates data loss due to a receiver buffer full condition. A Data OverRun occurs when the receive buffer is full (two characters), it is a new character wait- ing in the Receive Shift Register, and a new start bit is detected. If the DORn Flag is set there was one or more serial frame lost between the frame last read from UDRn, and the next frame read from UDRn. For compatibility with future devices, always write this bit to zero when writing to UCSRnA. The DORn Flag is cleared when the frame received was successfully moved from the Shift Register to the receive buffer. The Parity Error (UPEn) Flag indicates that the next frame in the receive buffer had a Parity Error when received. If Parity Check is not enabled the UPEn bit will always be read zero. For compatibility with future devices, always set this bit to zero when writing to UCSRnA. For more details see ”Parity Bit Calculation” on page 176 and ”Parity Checker” on page 183. 19.7.5 Parity Checker The Parity Checker is active when the high USART Parity mode (UPMn1) bit is set. Type of Par- ity Check to be performed (odd or even) is selected by the UPMn0 bit. When enabled, the Parity Checker calculates the parity of the data bits in incoming frames and compares the result with the parity bit from the serial frame. The result of the check is stored in the receive buffer together 183 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P with the received data and stop bits. The Parity Error (UPEn) Flag can then be read by software to check if the frame had a Parity Error. The UPEn bit is set if the next character that can be read from the receive buffer had a Parity Error when received and the Parity Checking was enabled at that point (UPMn1 = 1). This bit is valid until the receive buffer (UDRn) is read. 19.7.6 Disabling the Receiver In contrast to the Transmitter, disabling of the Receiver will be immediate. Data from ongoing receptions will therefore be lost. When disabled (i.e., the RXENn is set to zero) the Receiver will no longer override the normal function of the RxD port pin. The Receiver buffer FIFO will be flushed when the Receiver is disabled. Remaining data in the buffer will be lost 19.7.7 Flushing the Receive Buffer The receiver buffer FIFO will be flushed when the Receiver is disabled, i.e., the buffer will be emptied of its contents. Unread data will be lost. If the buffer has to be flushed during normal operation, due to for instance an error condition, read the UDRn I/O location until the RXCn Flag is cleared. The following code example shows how to flush the receive buffer. Assembly Code Example(1) USART_Flush: sbis UCSR0A, RXC0 ret in r16, UDR0 rjmp USART_Flush C Code Example(1) void USART_Flush( void ) { unsigned char dummy; while ( UCSR0A & (1<<RXC0) ) dummy = UDR0; } Note: 1. See ”About Code Examples” on page 9 19.8 Asynchronous Data Reception The USART includes a clock recovery and a data recovery unit for handling asynchronous data reception. The clock recovery logic is used for synchronizing the internally generated baud rate clock to the incoming asynchronous serial frames at the RxD pin. The data recovery logic sam- ples and low pass filters each incoming bit, thereby improving the noise immunity of the Receiver. The asynchronous reception operational range depends on the accuracy of the inter- nal baud rate clock, the rate of the incoming frames, and the frame size in number of bits. 19.8.1 Asynchronous Clock Recovery The clock recovery logic synchronizes internal clock to the incoming serial frames. Figure 19-6 illustrates the sampling process of the start bit of an incoming frame. The sample rate is 16 times the baud rate for Normal mode, and eight times the baud rate for Double Speed mode. The hor- izontal arrows illustrate the synchronization variation due to the sampling process. Note the 184 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P larger time variation when using the Double Speed mode (U2Xn = 1) of operation. Samples denoted zero are samples done when the RxD line is idle (i.e., no communication activity). Figure 19-6. Start Bit Sampling RxD IDLE START BIT 0 Sample (U2X = 0) 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 Sample (U2X = 1) 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 When the clock recovery logic detects a high (idle) to low (start) transition on the RxD line, the start bit detection sequence is initiated. Let sample 1 denote the first zero-sample as shown in the figure. The clock recovery logic then uses samples 8, 9, and 10 for Normal mode, and sam- ples 4, 5, and 6 for Double Speed mode (indicated with sample numbers inside boxes on the figure), to decide if a valid start bit is received. If two or more of these three samples have logical high levels (the majority wins), the start bit is rejected as a noise spike and the Receiver starts looking for the next high to low-transition. If however, a valid start bit is detected, the clock recov- ery logic is synchronized and the data recovery can begin. The synchronization process is repeated for each start bit. 19.8.2 Asynchronous Data Recovery When the receiver clock is synchronized to the start bit, the data recovery can begin. The data recovery unit uses a state machine that has 16 states for each bit in Normal mode and eight states for each bit in Double Speed mode. Figure 19-7 shows the sampling of the data bits and the parity bit. Each of the samples is given a number that is equal to the state of the recovery unit. Figure 19-7. Sampling of Data and Parity Bit RxD BIT n Sample (U2X = 0) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 Sample (U2X = 1) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 The decision of the logic level of the received bit is taken by doing a majority voting of the logic value to the three samples in the center of the received bit. The center samples are emphasized on the figure by having the sample number inside boxes. The majority voting process is done as follows: If two or all three samples have high levels, the received bit is registered to be a logic 1. If two or all three samples have low levels, the received bit is registered to be a logic 0. This majority voting process acts as a low pass filter for the incoming signal on the RxD pin. The recovery process is then repeated until a complete frame is received. Including the first stop bit. Note that the Receiver only uses the first stop bit of a frame. Figure 19-8 shows the sampling of the stop bit and the earliest possible beginning of the start bit of the next frame. 185 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Figure 19-8. Stop Bit Sampling and Next Start Bit Sampling RxD STOP 1 (A) (B) (C) Sample (U2X = 0) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 0/1 0/1 0/1 Sample (U2X = 1) 1 2 3 4 5 6 0/1 The same majority voting is done to the stop bit as done for the other bits in the frame. If the stop bit is registered to have a logic 0 value, the Frame Error (FEn) Flag will be set. A new high to low transition indicating the start bit of a new frame can come right after the last of the bits used for majority voting. For Normal Speed mode, the first low level sample can be at point marked (A) in Figure 19-8. For Double Speed mode the first low level must be delayed to (B). (C) marks a stop bit of full length. The early start bit detection influences the operational range of the Receiver. 19.8.3 Asynchronous Operational Range The operational range of the Receiver is dependent on the mismatch between the received bit rate and the internally generated baud rate. If the Transmitter is sending frames at too fast or too slow bit rates, or the internally generated baud rate of the Receiver does not have a similar (see Table 19-1) base frequency, the Receiver will not be able to synchronize the frames to the start bit. The following equations can be used to calculate the ratio of the incoming data rate and internal receiver baud rate. D+1S D+2S R = ------------------------------------------- R = ----------------------------------- slow S–1+DS+S fast D+1S+S F M D Sum of character size and parity size (D = 5 to 10 bit) S Samples per bit. S = 16 for Normal Speed mode and S = 8 for Double Speed mode. S First sample number used for majority voting. S = 8 for normal speed and S = 4 F F F for Double Speed mode. S Middle sample number used for majority voting. S = 9 for normal speed and M M S =5 for Double Speed mode. M R is the ratio of the slowest incoming data rate that can be accepted in relation to the slow receiver baud rate. R is the ratio of the fastest incoming data rate that can be fast accepted in relation to the receiver baud rate. Table 19-1 and Table 19-2 list the maximum receiver baud rate error that can be tolerated. Note that Normal Speed mode has higher toleration of baud rate variations. 186 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Table 19-1. Recommended Maximum Receiver Baud Rate Error for Normal Speed Mode (U2Xn = 0) D Recommended Max # (Data+Parity Bit) R (%) R (%) Max Total Error (%) Receiver Error (%) slow fast 5 93.20 106.67 +6.67/-6.8 ± 3.0 6 94.12 105.79 +5.79/-5.88 ± 2.5 7 94.81 105.11 +5.11/-5.19 ± 2.0 8 95.36 104.58 +4.58/-4.54 ± 2.0 9 95.81 104.14 +4.14/-4.19 ± 1.5 10 96.17 103.78 +3.78/-3.83 ± 1.5 Table 19-2. Recommended Maximum Receiver Baud Rate Error for Double Speed Mode (U2Xn = 1) D Recommended Max # (Data+Parity Bit) R (%) R (%) Max Total Error (%) Receiver Error (%) slow fast 5 94.12 105.66 +5.66/-5.88 ± 2.5 6 94.92 104.92 +4.92/-5.08 ± 2.0 7 95.52 104,35 +4.35/-4.48 ± 1.5 8 96.00 103.90 +3.90/-4.00 ± 1.5 9 96.39 103.53 +3.53/-3.61 ± 1.5 10 96.70 103.23 +3.23/-3.30 ± 1.0 The recommendations of the maximum receiver baud rate error was made under the assump- tion that the Receiver and Transmitter equally divides the maximum total error. There are two possible sources for the receivers baud rate error. The Receiver’s system clock (XTAL) will always have some minor instability over the supply voltage range and the tempera- ture range. When using a crystal to generate the system clock, this is rarely a problem, but for a resonator the system clock may differ more than 2% depending of the resonators tolerance. The second source for the error is more controllable. The baud rate generator can not always do an exact division of the system frequency to get the baud rate wanted. In this case an UBRRn value that gives an acceptable low error can be used if possible. 19.9 Multi-processor Communication Mode Setting the Multi-processor Communication mode (MPCMn) bit in UCSRnA enables a filtering function of incoming frames received by the USART Receiver. Frames that do not contain address information will be ignored and not put into the receive buffer. This effectively reduces the number of incoming frames that has to be handled by the CPU, in a system with multiple MCUs that communicate via the same serial bus. The Transmitter is unaffected by the MPCMn setting, but has to be used differently when it is a part of a system utilizing the Multi-processor Communication mode. If the Receiver is set up to receive frames that contain 5 to 8 data bits, then the first stop bit indi- cates if the frame contains data or address information. If the Receiver is set up for frames with 187 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P nine data bits, then the ninth bit (RXB8n) is used for identifying address and data frames. When the frame type bit (the first stop or the ninth bit) is one, the frame contains an address. When the frame type bit is zero the frame is a data frame. The Multi-processor Communication mode enables several slave MCUs to receive data from a master MCU. This is done by first decoding an address frame to find out which MCU has been addressed. If a particular slave MCU has been addressed, it will receive the following data frames as normal, while the other slave MCUs will ignore the received frames until another address frame is received. 19.9.1 Using MPCM For an MCU to act as a master MCU, it can use a 9-bit character frame format (UCSZ = 7). The ninth bit (TXB8n) must be set when an address frame (TXB8n = 1) or cleared when a data frame (TXB = 0) is being transmitted. The slave MCUs must in this case be set to use a 9-bit character frame format. The following procedure should be used to exchange data in Multi-processor Communication mode: 1. All Slave MCUs are in Multi-processor Communication mode (MPCMn in UCSRnA is set). 2. The Master MCU sends an address frame, and all slaves receive and read this frame. In the Slave MCUs, the RXCn Flag in UCSRnA will be set as normal. 3. Each Slave MCU reads the UDRn Register and determines if it has been selected. If so, it clears the MPCMn bit in UCSRnA, otherwise it waits for the next address byte and keeps the MPCMn setting. 4. The addressed MCU will receive all data frames until a new address frame is received. The other Slave MCUs, which still have the MPCMn bit set, will ignore the data frames. 5. When the last data frame is received by the addressed MCU, the addressed MCU sets the MPCMn bit and waits for a new address frame from master. The process then repeats from 2. Using any of the 5- to 8-bit character frame formats is possible, but impractical since the Receiver must change between using n and n+1 character frame formats. This makes full- duplex operation difficult since the Transmitter and Receiver uses the same character size set- ting. If 5- to 8-bit character frames are used, the Transmitter must be set to use two stop bit (USBSn = 1) since the first stop bit is used for indicating the frame type. Do not use Read-Modify-Write instructions (SBI and CBI) to set or clear the MPCMn bit. The MPCMn bit shares the same I/O location as the TXCn Flag and this might accidentally be cleared when using SBI or CBI instructions. 188 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 19.10 Register Description 19.10.1 UDRn – USART I/O Data Register n Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 RXBn[7:0] UDRn (Read) TXBn[7:0] UDRn (Write) Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 The USART Transmit Data Buffer Register and USART Receive Data Buffer Registers share the same I/O address referred to as USART Data Register or UDRn. The Transmit Data Buffer Reg- ister (TXB) will be the destination for data written to the UDRn Register location. Reading the UDRn Register location will return the contents of the Receive Data Buffer Register (RXB). For 5-, 6-, or 7-bit characters the upper unused bits will be ignored by the Transmitter and set to zero by the Receiver. The transmit buffer can only be written when the UDREn Flag in the UCSRnA Register is set. Data written to UDRn when the UDREn Flag is not set, will be ignored by the USART Transmit- ter. When data is written to the transmit buffer, and the Transmitter is enabled, the Transmitter will load the data into the Transmit Shift Register when the Shift Register is empty. Then the data will be serially transmitted on the TxD pin. The receive buffer consists of a two level FIFO. The FIFO will change its state whenever the receive buffer is accessed. Due to this behavior of the receive buffer, do not use Read-Modify- Write instructions (SBI and CBI) on this location. Be careful when using bit test instructions (SBIC and SBIS), since these also will change the state of the FIFO. 19.10.2 UCSRnA – USART Control and Status Register n A Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 RXCn TXCn UDREn FEn DORn UPEn U2Xn MPCMn UCSRnA Read/Write R R/W R R R R R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 • Bit 7 – RXCn: USART Receive Complete This flag bit is set when there are unread data in the receive buffer and cleared when the receive buffer is empty (i.e., does not contain any unread data). If the Receiver is disabled, the receive buffer will be flushed and consequently the RXCn bit will become zero. The RXCn Flag can be used to generate a Receive Complete interrupt (see description of the RXCIEn bit). • Bit 6 – TXCn: USART Transmit Complete This flag bit is set when the entire frame in the Transmit Shift Register has been shifted out and there are no new data currently present in the transmit buffer (UDRn). The TXCn Flag bit is auto- matically cleared when a transmit complete interrupt is executed, or it can be cleared by writing a one to its bit location. The TXCn Flag can generate a Transmit Complete interrupt (see description of the TXCIEn bit). 189 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P • Bit 5 – UDREn: USART Data Register Empty The UDREn Flag indicates if the transmit buffer (UDRn) is ready to receive new data. If UDREn is one, the buffer is empty, and therefore ready to be written. The UDREn Flag can generate a Data Register Empty interrupt (see description of the UDRIEn bit). UDREn is set after a reset to indicate that the Transmitter is ready. • Bit 4 – FEn: Frame Error This bit is set if the next character in the receive buffer had a Frame Error when received. I.e., when the first stop bit of the next character in the receive buffer is zero. This bit is valid until the receive buffer (UDRn) is read. The FEn bit is zero when the stop bit of received data is one. Always set this bit to zero when writing to UCSRnA. • Bit 3 – DORn: Data OverRun This bit is set if a Data OverRun condition is detected. A Data OverRun occurs when the receive buffer is full (two characters), it is a new character waiting in the Receive Shift Register, and a new start bit is detected. This bit is valid until the receive buffer (UDRn) is read. Always set this bit to zero when writing to UCSRnA. • Bit 2 – UPEn: USART Parity Error This bit is set if the next character in the receive buffer had a Parity Error when received and the Parity Checking was enabled at that point (UPMn1 = 1). This bit is valid until the receive buffer (UDRn) is read. Always set this bit to zero when writing to UCSRnA. • Bit 1 – U2Xn: Double the USART Transmission Speed This bit only has effect for the asynchronous operation. Write this bit to zero when using syn- chronous operation. Writing this bit to one will reduce the divisor of the baud rate divider from 16 to 8 effectively dou- bling the transfer rate for asynchronous communication. • Bit 0 – MPCMn: Multi-processor Communication Mode This bit enables the Multi-processor Communication mode. When the MPCMn bit is written to one, all the incoming frames received by the USART Receiver that do not contain address infor- mation will be ignored. The Transmitter is unaffected by the MPCMn setting. For more detailed information see ”Multi-processor Communication Mode” on page 187. 19.10.3 UCSRnB – USART Control and Status Register n B Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 RXCIEn TXCIEn UDRIEn RXENn TXENn UCSZn2 RXB8n TXB8n UCSRnB Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 • Bit 7 – RXCIEn: RX Complete Interrupt Enable Writing this bit to one enables interrupt on the RXCn Flag. A USART Receive Complete interrupt will be generated only if the RXCIEn bit is written to one, the Global Interrupt Flag in SREG is written to one and the RXCn bit in UCSRnA is set. 190 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P • Bit 6 – TXCIEn: TX Complete Interrupt Enable Writing this bit to one enables interrupt on the TXCn Flag. A USART Transmit Complete interrupt will be generated only if the TXCIEn bit is written to one, the Global Interrupt Flag in SREG is written to one and the TXCn bit in UCSRnA is set. • Bit 5 – UDRIEn: USART Data Register Empty Interrupt Enable Writing this bit to one enables interrupt on the UDREn Flag. A Data Register Empty interrupt will be generated only if the UDRIEn bit is written to one, the Global Interrupt Flag in SREG is written to one and the UDREn bit in UCSRnA is set. • Bit 4 – RXEN0: Receiver Enable Writing this bit to one enables the USART Receiver. The Receiver will override normal port oper- ation for the RxD pin when enabled. Disabling the Receiver will flush the receive buffer invalidating the FEn, DORn, and UPEn Flags. • Bit 3 – TXENn: Transmitter Enable Writing this bit to one enables the USART Transmitter. The Transmitter will override normal port operation for the TxD pin when enabled. The disabling of the Transmitter (writing TXENn to zero) will not become effective until ongoing and pending transmissions are completed, i.e., when the Transmit Shift Register and Transmit Buffer Register do not contain data to be trans- mitted. When disabled, the Transmitter will no longer override the TxD port. • Bit 2 – UCSZn2: Character Size The UCSZn2 bits combined with the UCSZn1:0 bit in UCSRnC sets the number of data bits (Character SiZe) in a frame the Receiver and Transmitter use. • Bit 1 – RXB8n: Receive Data Bit 8 RXB8n is the ninth data bit of the received character when operating with serial frames with nine data bits. Must be read before reading the low bits from UDRn. • Bit 0 – TXB8n: Transmit Data Bit 8 TXB8n is the ninth data bit in the character to be transmitted when operating with serial frames with nine data bits. Must be written before writing the low bits to UDRn. 19.10.4 UCSRnC – USART Control and Status Register n C Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 – UMSELn UPMn1 UPMn0 USBSn UCSZn1 UCSZn0 UCPOLn UCSRnC Read/Write R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 • Bit 6 – UMSELn: USART Mode Select This bit selects between asynchronous and synchronous mode of operation. Figure 19-9. UMSELn Bit Settings UMSELn Mode 0 Asynchronous Operation 1 Synchronous Operation 191 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P • Bit 5:4 – UPMn1:0: Parity Mode These bits enable and set type of parity generation and check. If enabled, the Transmitter will automatically generate and send the parity of the transmitted data bits within each frame. The Receiver will generate a parity value for the incoming data and compare it to the UPMn0 setting. If a mismatch is detected, the UPEn Flag in UCSRnA will be set. Figure 19-10. UPMn Bits Settings UPMn1 UPMn0 Parity Mode 0 0 Disabled 0 1 Reserved 1 0 Enabled, Even Parity 1 1 Enabled, Odd Parity • Bit 3 – USBSn: Stop Bit Select This bit selects the number of stop bits to be inserted by the Transmitter. The Receiver ignores this setting. Figure 19-11. USBSn Bit Settings USBSn Stop Bit(s) 0 1-bit 1 2-bit • Bit 2:1 – UCSZn1:0: Character Size The UCSZn1:0 bits combined with the UCSZn2 bit in UCSRnB sets the number of data bits (Character SiZe) in a frame the Receiver and Transmitter use. Figure 19-12. UCSZ Bits Settings UCSZn2 UCSZn1 UCSZn0 Character Size 0 0 0 5-bit 0 0 1 6-bit 0 1 0 7-bit 0 1 1 8-bit 1 0 0 Reserved 1 0 1 Reserved 1 1 0 Reserved 1 1 1 9-bit • Bit 0 – UCPOLn: Clock Polarity This bit is used for synchronous mode only. Write this bit to zero when asynchronous mode is used. The UCPOLn bit sets the relationship between data output change and data input sample, and the synchronous clock (XCK). 192 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Figure 19-13. UCPOLn Bit Settings Transmitted Data Changed (Output Received Data Sampled (Input UCPOLn of TxD Pin) on RxD Pin) 0 Rising XCK Edge Falling XCK Edge 1 Falling XCK Edge Rising XCK Edge 19.10.5 UBRRnL and UBRRnH – USART Baud Rate Registers n Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 – – – – UBRRn[11:8] UBRRnH UBRRn[7:0] UBRRnL 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Read/Write R R R R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 • Bit 15:12 – Reserved Bits These bits are reserved for future use. For compatibility with future devices, these bit must be written to zero when UBRRnH is written. • Bit 11:0 – UBRR11:0: USART Baud Rate Register This is a 12-bit register which contains the USART baud rate. The UBRRnH contains the four most significant bits, and the UBRRnL contains the eight least significant bits of the USART baud rate. Ongoing transmissions by the Transmitter and Receiver will be corrupted if the baud rate is changed. Writing UBRRnL will trigger an immediate update of the baud rate prescaler. 19.11 Examples of Baud Rate Setting For standard crystal and resonator frequencies, the most commonly used baud rates for asyn- chronous operation can be generated by using the UBRRn settings in Table 19-3. UBRRn values which yield an actual baud rate differing less than 0.5% from the target baud rate, are bold in the table. Higher error ratings are acceptable, but the Receiver will have less noise resis- tance when the error ratings are high, especially for large serial frames (see ”Asynchronous Operational Range” on page 186). The error values are calculated using the following equation: BaudRate  Closest Match  Error[%] = --------------------------------------------------------–1 100%  BaudRate  193 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Table 19-3. Examples of UBRRn Settings for Commonly Used Oscillator Frequencies f = 1.0000 MHz f = 1.8432MHz f = 2.0000MHz osc osc osc Baud U2Xn = 0 U2Xn = 1 U2Xn = 0 U2Xn = 1 U2Xn = 0 U2Xn = 1 Rate (bps) UBRRn Error UBRRn Error UBRRn Error UBRRn Error UBRRn Error UBRRn Error 2400 25 0.2% 51 0.2% 47 0.0% 95 0.0% 51 0.2% 103 0.2% 4800 12 0.2% 25 0.2% 23 0.0% 47 0.0% 25 0.2% 51 0.2% 9600 6 -7.0% 12 0.2% 11 0.0% 23 0.0% 12 0.2% 25 0.2% 14.4k 3 8.5% 8 -3.5% 7 0.0% 15 0.0% 8 -3.5% 16 2.1% 19.2k 2 8.5% 6 -7.0% 5 0.0% 11 0.0% 6 -7.0% 12 0.2% 28.8k 1 8.5% 3 8.5% 3 0.0% 7 0.0% 3 8.5% 8 -3.5% 38.4k 1 -18.6% 2 8.5% 2 0.0% 5 0.0% 2 8.5% 6 -7.0% 57.6k 0 8.5% 1 8.5% 1 0.0% 3 0.0% 1 8.5% 3 8.5% 76.8k – – 1 -18.6% 1 -25.0% 2 0.0% 1 -18.6% 2 8.5% 115.2k – – 0 8.5% 0 0.0% 1 0.0% 0 8.5% 1 8.5% 230.4k – – – – – – 0 0.0% – – – – 250k – – – – – – – – – – 0 0.0% Max. (1) 62.5kbps 125kbps 115.2kbps 230.4kbps 125kbps 250kbps 1. UBRR = 0, Error = 0.0% 194 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Table 19-4. Examples of UBRRn Settings for Commonly Used Oscillator Frequencies (Continued) f = 3.6864MHz f = 4.0000MHz f = 7.3728MHz osc osc osc Baud U2Xn = 0 U2Xn = 1 U2Xn = 0 U2Xn = 1 U2Xn = 0 U2Xn = 1 Rate (bps) UBRRn Error UBRRn Error UBRRn Error UBRRn Error UBRRn Error UBRRn Error 2400 95 0.0% 191 0.0% 103 0.2% 207 0.2% 191 0.0% 383 0.0% 4800 47 0.0% 95 0.0% 51 0.2% 103 0.2% 95 0.0% 191 0.0% 9600 23 0.0% 47 0.0% 25 0.2% 51 0.2% 47 0.0% 95 0.0% 14.4k 15 0.0% 31 0.0% 16 2.1% 34 -0.8% 31 0.0% 63 0.0% 19.2k 11 0.0% 23 0.0% 12 0.2% 25 0.2% 23 0.0% 47 0.0% 28.8k 7 0.0% 15 0.0% 8 -3.5% 16 2.1% 15 0.0% 31 0.0% 38.4k 5 0.0% 11 0.0% 6 -7.0% 12 0.2% 11 0.0% 23 0.0% 57.6k 3 0.0% 7 0.0% 3 8.5% 8 -3.5% 7 0.0% 15 0.0% 76.8k 2 0.0% 5 0.0% 2 8.5% 6 -7.0% 5 0.0% 11 0.0% 115.2k 1 0.0% 3 0.0% 1 8.5% 3 8.5% 3 0.0% 7 0.0% 230.4k 0 0.0% 1 0.0% 0 8.5% 1 8.5% 1 0.0% 3 0.0% 250k 0 -7.8% 1 -7.8% 0 0.0% 1 0.0% 1 -7.8% 3 -7.8% 0.5M – – 0 -7.8% – – 0 0.0% 0 -7.8% 1 -7.8% 1M – – – – – – – – – – 0 -7.8% Max. (1) 230.4kbps 460.8kbps 250kbps 0.5Mbps 460.8kbps 921.6kbps 1. UBRR = 0, Error = 0.0% 195 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Table 1. Examples of UBRRn Settings for Commonly Used Oscillator Frequencies (Continued) f = 8.0000MHz f = 11.0592MHz f = 14.7456MHz osc osc osc Baud U2Xn = 0 U2Xn = 1 U2Xn = 0 U2Xn = 1 U2Xn = 0 U2Xn = 1 Rate (bps) UBRRn Error UBRRn Error UBRRn Error UBRRn Error UBRRn Error UBRRn Error 2400 207 0.2% 416 -0.1% 287 0.0% 575 0.0% 383 0.0% 767 0.0% 4800 103 0.2% 207 0.2% 143 0.0% 287 0.0% 191 0.0% 383 0.0% 9600 51 0.2% 103 0.2% 71 0.0% 143 0.0% 95 0.0% 191 0.0% 14.4k 34 -0.8% 68 0.6% 47 0.0% 95 0.0% 63 0.0% 127 0.0% 19.2k 25 0.2% 51 0.2% 35 0.0% 71 0.0% 47 0.0% 95 0.0% 28.8k 16 2.1% 34 -0.8% 23 0.0% 47 0.0% 31 0.0% 63 0.0% 38.4k 12 0.2% 25 0.2% 17 0.0% 35 0.0% 23 0.0% 47 0.0% 57.6k 8 -3.5% 16 2.1% 11 0.0% 23 0.0% 15 0.0% 31 0.0% 76.8k 6 -7.0% 12 0.2% 8 0.0% 17 0.0% 11 0.0% 23 0.0% 115.2k 3 8.5% 8 -3.5% 5 0.0% 11 0.0% 7 0.0% 15 0.0% 230.4k 1 8.5% 3 8.5% 2 0.0% 5 0.0% 3 0.0% 7 0.0% 250k 1 0.0% 3 0.0% 2 -7.8% 5 -7.8% 3 -7.8% 6 5.3% 0.5M 0 0.0% 1 0.0% – – 2 -7.8% 1 -7.8% 3 -7.8% 1M – – 0 0.0% – – – – 0 -7.8% 1 -7.8% Max. (1) 0.5Mbps 1Mbps 691.2kbps 1.3824Mbps 921.6kbps 1.8432Mbps 1. UBRR = 0, Error = 0.0% 196 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Table 2. Examples of UBRRn Settings for Commonly Used Oscillator Frequencies (Continued) f = 16.0000MHz f = 18.4320MHz f = 20.0000MHz osc osc osc Baud U2Xn = 0 U2Xn = 1 U2Xn = 0 U2Xn = 1 U2Xn = 0 U2Xn = 1 Rate (bps) UBRRn Error UBRRn Error UBRRn Error UBRRn Error UBRRn Error UBRRn Error 2400 416 -0.1% 832 0.0% 479 0.0% 959 0.0% 520 0.0% 1041 0.0% 4800 207 0.2% 416 -0.1% 239 0.0% 479 0.0% 259 0.2% 520 0.0% 9600 103 0.2% 207 0.2% 119 0.0% 239 0.0% 129 0.2% 259 0.2% 14.4k 68 0.6% 138 -0.1% 79 0.0% 159 0.0% 86 -0.2% 173 -0.2% 19.2k 51 0.2% 103 0.2% 59 0.0% 119 0.0% 64 0.2% 129 0.2% 28.8k 34 -0.8% 68 0.6% 39 0.0% 79 0.0% 42 0.9% 86 -0.2% 38.4k 25 0.2% 51 0.2% 29 0.0% 59 0.0% 32 -1.4% 64 0.2% 57.6k 16 2.1% 34 -0.8% 19 0.0% 39 0.0% 21 -1.4% 42 0.9% 76.8k 12 0.2% 25 0.2% 14 0.0% 29 0.0% 15 1.7% 32 -1.4% 115.2k 8 -3.5% 16 2.1% 9 0.0% 19 0.0% 10 -1.4% 21 -1.4% 230.4k 3 8.5% 8 -3.5% 4 0.0% 9 0.0% 4 8.5% 10 -1.4% 250k 3 0.0% 7 0.0% 4 -7.8% 8 2.4% 4 0.0% 9 0.0% 0.5M 1 0.0% 3 0.0% – – 4 -7.8% – – 4 0.0% 1M 0 0.0% 1 0.0% – – – – – – – – Max.(1) 1Mbps 2Mbps 1.152Mbps 2.304Mbps 1.25Mbps 2.5Mbps Note: 1. UBRR = 0, Error = 0.0% 197 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 20. USI – Universal Serial Interface 20.1 Features • Two-wire Synchronous Data Transfer (Master or Slave) • Three-wire Synchronous Data Transfer (Master or Slave) • Data Received Interrupt • Wake up from Idle Mode • In Two-wire Mode: Wake-up from All Sleep Modes, Including Power-down Mode • Two-wire Start Condition Detector with Interrupt Capability 20.2 Overview The Universal Serial Interface, or USI, provides the basic hardware resources needed for serial communication. Combined with a minimum of control software, the USI allows significantly higher transfer rates and uses less code space than solutions based on software only. Interrupts are included to minimize the processor load. A simplified block diagram of the USI is shown on Figure 20-1. For the actual placement of I/O pins, refer to ”MLF/ Pinout ATmega329P” on page 2 and ”TQFP / Pinout ATmega3290P” on page 3 . CPU accessible I/O Registers, including I/O bits and I/O pins, are shown in bold. The device-specific I/O Register and bit locations are listed in the ”Register Description” on page 206. Figure 20-1. Universal Serial Interface, Block Diagram D Q DO (Output only) LE DI/SDA (Input/Open Drain) Bit7 Bit0 3 2 USIDR 1 TIM0 COMP 0 3 0 2 USCK/SCL (Input/Open Drain) US USISIF USIOIF USIPF USIDC 4-bit Counter 01 1 CHLOOLCDK B [1] A USISR Two-wire Clock T Control Unit A D 2 USISIE USIOIE USIWM1 USIWM0 USICS1 USICS0 USICLK USITC USICR The 8-bit Shift Register is directly accessible via the data bus and contains the incoming and outgoing data. The register has no buffering so the data must be read as quickly as possible to ensure that no data is lost. The most significant bit is connected to one of two output pins depending of the wire mode configuration. A transparent latch is inserted between the Serial Register Output and output pin, which delays the change of data output to the opposite clock edge of the data input sampling. The serial input is always sampled from the Data Input (DI) pin independent of the configuration. 198 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P The 4-bit counter can be both read and written via the data bus, and can generate an overflow interrupt. Both the Serial Register and the counter are clocked simultaneously by the same clock source. This allows the counter to count the number of bits received or transmitted and generate an interrupt when the transfer is complete. Note that when an external clock source is selected the counter counts both clock edges. In this case the counter counts the number of edges, and not the number of bits. The clock can be selected from three different sources: The USCK pin, Timer/Counter0 Compare Match or from software. The Two-wire clock control unit can generate an interrupt when a start condition is detected on the Two-wire bus. It can also generate wait states by holding the clock pin low after a start con- dition is detected, or after the counter overflows. 20.3 Functional Descriptions 20.3.1 Three-wire Mode The USI Three-wire mode is compliant to the Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) mode 0 and 1, but does not have the slave select (SS) pin functionality. However, this feature can be implemented in software if necessary. Pin names used by this mode are: DI, DO, and USCK. Figure 20-2. Three-wire Mode Operation, Simplified Diagram DO DI Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0 USCK SLAVE DO DI Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0 USCK PORTxn MASTER Figure 20-2 shows two USI units operating in Three-wire mode, one as Master and one as Slave. The two Shift Registers are interconnected in such way that after eight USCK clocks, the data in each register are interchanged. The same clock also increments the USI’s 4-bit counter. The Counter Overflow (interrupt) Flag, or USIOIF, can therefore be used to determine when a transfer is completed. The clock is generated by the Master device software by toggling the USCK pin via the PORT Register or by writing a one to the USITC bit in USICR. 199 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Figure 20-3. Three-wire Mode, Timing Diagram CYCLE ( Reference ) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 USCK USCK DO MSB 6 5 4 3 2 1 LSB DI MSB 6 5 4 3 2 1 LSB A B C D E The Three-wire mode timing is shown in Figure 20-3. At the top of the figure is a USCK cycle ref- erence. One bit is shifted into the USI Shift Register (USIDR) for each of these cycles. The USCK timing is shown for both external clock modes. In External Clock mode 0 (USICS0 = 0), DI is sampled at positive edges, and DO is changed (Data Register is shifted by one) at negative edges. External Clock mode 1 (USICS0 = 1) uses the opposite edges versus mode 0, i.e., sam- ples data at negative and changes the output at positive edges. The USI clock modes corresponds to the SPI data mode 0 and 1. Referring to the timing diagram (Figure 20-3), a bus transfer involves the following steps: 1. The Slave device and Master device sets up its data output and, depending on the proto- col used, enables its output driver (mark A and B). The output is set up by writing the data to be transmitted to the Serial Data Register. Enabling of the output is done by set- ting the corresponding bit in the port Data Direction Register. Note that point A and B does not have any specific order, but both must be at least one half USCK cycle before point C where the data is sampled. This must be done to ensure that the data setup requirement is satisfied. The 4-bit counter is reset to zero. 2. The Master generates a clock pulse by software toggling the USCK line twice (C and D). The bit value on the slave and master’s data input (DI) pin is sampled by the USI on the first edge (C), and the data output is changed on the opposite edge (D). The 4-bit counter will count both edges. 3. Step 2. is repeated eight times for a complete register (byte) transfer. 4. After eight clock pulses (i.e., 16 clock edges) the counter will overflow and indicate that the transfer is completed. The data bytes transferred must now be processed before a new transfer can be initiated. The overflow interrupt will wake up the processor if it is set to Idle mode. Depending of the protocol used the slave device can now set its output to high impedance. 20.3.2 SPI Master Operation Example The following code demonstrates how to use the USI module as a SPI Master: SPITransfer: sts USIDR,r16 ldi r16,(1<<USIOIF) sts USISR,r16 ldi r16,(1<<USIWM0)|(1<<USICS1)|(1<<USICLK)|(1<<USITC) SPITransfer_loop: sts USICR,r16 lds r16, USISR sbrs r16, USIOIF 200 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P rjmp SPITransfer_loop lds r16,USIDR ret The code is size optimized using only eight instructions (+ ret). The code example assumes that the DO and USCK pins are enabled as output in the DDRE Register. The value stored in register r16 prior to the function is called is transferred to the Slave device, and when the transfer is com- pleted the data received from the Slave is stored back into the r16 Register. The second and third instructions clears the USI Counter Overflow Flag and the USI counter value. The fourth and fifth instruction set Three-wire mode, positive edge Shift Register clock, count at USITC strobe, and toggle USCK. The loop is repeated 16 times. The following code demonstrates how to use the USI module as a SPI Master with maximum speed (fsck = f /4): ck SPITransfer_Fast: sts USIDR,r16 ldi r16,(1<<USIWM0)|(0<<USICS0)|(1<<USITC) ldi r17,(1<<USIWM0)|(0<<USICS0)|(1<<USITC)|(1<<USICLK) sts USICR,r16 ; MSB sts USICR,r17 sts USICR,r16 sts USICR,r17 sts USICR,r16 sts USICR,r17 sts USICR,r16 sts USICR,r17 sts USICR,r16 sts USICR,r17 sts USICR,r16 sts USICR,r17 sts USICR,r16 sts USICR,r17 sts USICR,r16 ; LSB sts USICR,r17 lds r16,USIDR ret 201 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 20.3.3 SPI Slave Operation Example The following code demonstrates how to use the USI module as a SPI Slave: init: ldi r16,(1<<USIWM0)|(1<<USICS1) sts USICR,r16 ... SlaveSPITransfer: sts USIDR,r16 ldi r16,(1<<USIOIF) sts USISR,r16 SlaveSPITransfer_loop: lds r16, USISR sbrs r16, USIOIF rjmp SlaveSPITransfer_loop lds r16,USIDR ret The code is size optimized using only eight instructions (+ ret). The code example assumes that the DO is configured as output and USCK pin is configured as input in the DDR Register. The value stored in register r16 prior to the function is called is transferred to the master device, and when the transfer is completed the data received from the Master is stored back into the r16 Register. Note that the first two instructions is for initialization only and needs only to be executed once.These instructions sets Three-wire mode and positive edge Shift Register clock. The loop is repeated until the USI Counter Overflow Flag is set. 202 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 20.3.4 Two-wire Mode The USI Two-wire mode is compliant to the Inter IC (TWI) bus protocol, but without slew rate lim- iting on outputs and input noise filtering. Pin names used by this mode are SCL and SDA. Figure 20-4. Two-wire Mode Operation, Simplified Diagram VCC SDA Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0 SCL HOLD SCL Two-wire Clock Control Unit SLAVE SDA Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0 SCL PORTxn MASTER Figure 20-4 shows two USI units operating in Two-wire mode, one as Master and one as Slave. It is only the physical layer that is shown since the system operation is highly dependent of the communication scheme used. The main differences between the Master and Slave operation at this level, is the serial clock generation which is always done by the Master, and only the Slave uses the clock control unit. Clock generation must be implemented in software, but the shift operation is done automatically by both devices. Note that only clocking on negative edge for shifting data is of practical use in this mode. The slave can insert wait states at start or end of transfer by forcing the SCL clock low. This means that the Master must always check if the SCL line was actually released after it has generated a positive edge. Since the clock also increments the counter, a counter overflow can be used to indicate that the transfer is completed. The clock is generated by the master by toggling the USCK pin via the PORT Register. The data direction is not given by the physical layer. A protocol, like the one used by the TWI- bus, must be implemented to control the data flow. 203 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Figure 20-5. Two-wire Mode, Typical Timing Diagram SDA SCL 1 - 7 8 9 1 - 8 9 1 - 8 9 S ADDRESS R/W ACK DATA ACK DATA ACK P A B C D E F Referring to the timing diagram (Figure 20-5.), a bus transfer involves the following steps: 1. The a start condition is generated by the Master by forcing the SDA low line while the SCL line is high (A). SDA can be forced low either by writing a zero to bit 7 of the Shift Register, or by setting the corresponding bit in the PORT Register to zero. Note that the Data Direction Register bit must be set to one for the output to be enabled. The slave device’s start detector logic (Figure 20-6.) detects the start condition and sets the USISIF Flag. The flag can generate an interrupt if necessary. 2. In addition, the start detector will hold the SCL line low after the Master has forced an negative edge on this line (B). This allows the Slave to wake up from sleep or complete its other tasks before setting up the Shift Register to receive the address. This is done by clearing the start condition flag and reset the counter. 3. The Master set the first bit to be transferred and releases the SCL line (C). The Slave samples the data and shift it into the Serial Register at the positive edge of the SCL clock. 4. After eight bits are transferred containing slave address and data direction (read or write), the Slave counter overflows and the SCL line is forced low (D). If the slave is not the one the Master has addressed, it releases the SCL line and waits for a new start condition. 5. If the Slave is addressed it holds the SDA line low during the acknowledgment cycle before holding the SCL line low again (i.e., the Counter Register must be set to 14 before releasing SCL at (D)). Depending of the R/W bit the Master or Slave enables its output. If the bit is set, a master read operation is in progress (i.e., the slave drives the SDA line) The slave can hold the SCL line low after the acknowledge (E). 6. Multiple bytes can now be transmitted, all in same direction, until a stop condition is given by the Master (F). Or a new start condition is given. If the Slave is not able to receive more data it does not acknowledge the data byte it has last received. When the Master does a read operation it must terminate the operation by force the acknowledge bit low after the last byte transmitted. Figure 20-6. Start Condition Detector, Logic Diagram USISIF CLOCK D Q D Q HOLD SDA CLR CLR SCL Write( USISIF) 204 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 20.3.5 Start Condition Detector The start condition detector is shown in Figure 20-6 The SDA line is delayed (in the range of 50 to 300 ns) to ensure valid sampling of the SCL line. The start condition detector is only enabled in Two-wire mode. The start condition detector is working asynchronously and can therefore wake up the processor from the Power-down sleep mode. However, the protocol used might have restrictions on the SCL hold time. Therefore, when using this feature in this case the Oscillator start-up time set by the CKSEL Fuses (see ”Clock Systems and their Distribution” on page 27) must also be taken into the consideration. Refer to the USISIF bit description on page 206 for further details. 20.3.6 Clock speed considerations. Maximum frequency for SCL and SCK is f /4. This is also the maximum data transmit and CK receive rate in both two- and three-wire mode. In two-wire slave mode the Two-wire Clock Con- trol Unit will hold the SCL low until the slave is ready to receive more data. This may reduce the actual data rate in two-wire mode. 20.4 Alternative USI Usage When the USI unit is not used for serial communication, it can be set up to do alternative tasks due to its flexible design. 20.4.1 Half-duplex Asynchronous Data Transfer By utilizing the Shift Register in Three-wire mode, it is possible to implement a more compact and higher performance UART than by software only. 20.4.2 4-bit Counter The 4-bit counter can be used as a stand-alone counter with overflow interrupt. Note that if the counter is clocked externally, both clock edges will generate an increment. 20.4.3 12-bit Timer/Counter Combining the USI 4-bit counter and Timer/Counter0 allows them to be used as a 12-bit counter. 20.4.4 Edge Triggered External Interrupt By setting the counter to maximum value (F) it can function as an additional external interrupt. The Overflow Flag and Interrupt Enable bit are then used for the external interrupt. This feature is selected by the USICS1 bit. 20.4.5 Software Interrupt The counter overflow interrupt can be used as a software interrupt triggered by a clock strobe. 205 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 20.5 Register Description 20.5.1 USIDR – USI Data Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 (0xBA) MSB LSB USIDR Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 The USI uses no buffering of the Serial Register, i.e., when accessing the Data Register (USIDR) the Serial Register is accessed directly. If a serial clock occurs at the same cycle the register is written, the register will contain the value written and no shift is performed. A (left) shift operation is performed depending of the USICS1...0 bits setting. The shift operation can be con- trolled by an external clock edge, by a Timer/Counter0 Compare Match, or directly by software using the USICLK strobe bit. Note that even when no wire mode is selected (USIWM1...0 = 0) both the external data input (DI/SDA) and the external clock input (USCK/SCL) can still be used by the Shift Register. The output pin in use, DO or SDA depending on the wire mode, is connected via the output latch to the most significant bit (bit 7) of the Data Register. The output latch is open (transparent) dur- ing the first half of a serial clock cycle when an external clock source is selected (USICS1 = 1), and constantly open when an internal clock source is used (USICS1 = 0). The output will be changed immediately when a new MSB written as long as the latch is open. The latch ensures that data input is sampled and data output is changed on opposite clock edges. Note that the corresponding Data Direction Register to the pin must be set to one for enabling data output from the Shift Register. 20.5.2 USISR – USI Status Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 (0xB9) USISIF USIOIF USIPF USIDC USICNT3 USICNT2 USICNT1 USICNT0 USISR Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 The Status Register contains Interrupt Flags, line Status Flags and the counter value. • Bit 7 – USISIF: Start Condition Interrupt Flag When Two-wire mode is selected, the USISIF Flag is set (to one) when a start condition is detected. When output disable mode or Three-wire mode is selected, the flag is set when the 4- bit counter is incremented. An interrupt will be generated when the flag is set while the USISIE bit in USICR and the Global Interrupt Enable Flag are set. The flag will only be cleared by writing a logical one to the USISIF bit. Clearing this bit will release the start detection hold of USCL in Two-wire mode. A start con- dition interrupt will wake up the processor from all sleep modes. • Bit 6 – USIOIF: Counter Overflow Interrupt Flag This flag is set (one) when the 4-bit counter overflows (i.e., at the transition from 15 to 0). An interrupt will be generated when the flag is set while the USIOIE bit in USICR and the Global Interrupt Enable Flag are set. The flag will only be cleared if a one is written to the USIOIF bit. Clearing this bit will release the counter overflow hold of SCL in Two-wire mode. A counter over- flow interrupt will wake up the processor from Idle sleep mode. 206 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P • Bit 5 – USIPF: Stop Condition Flag When Two-wire mode is selected, the USIPF Flag is set (one) when a stop condition is detected. The flag is cleared by writing a one to this bit. Note that this is not an Interrupt Flag. This signal is useful when implementing Two-wire bus master arbitration. • Bit 4 – USIDC: Data Output Collision This bit is logical one when bit 7 in the Shift Register differs from the physical pin value. The flag is only valid when Two-wire mode is used. This signal is useful when implementing Two-wire bus master arbitration. • Bits 3:0 – USICNT3:0: Counter Value These bits reflect the current 4-bit counter value. The 4-bit counter value can directly be read or written by the CPU. The 4-bit counter increments by one for each clock generated either by the external clock edge detector, by a Timer/Counter0 Compare Match, or by software using USICLK or USITC strobe bits. The clock source depends of the setting of the USICS1:0 bits. For external clock operation a special feature is added that allows the clock to be generated by writing to the USITC strobe bit. This feature is enabled by write a one to the USICLK bit while setting an external clock source (USICS1 = 1). Note that even when no wire mode is selected (USIWM1:0 = 0) the external clock input (USCK/SCL) are can still be used by the counter. 20.5.3 USICR – USI Control Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 (0xB8) USISIE USIOIE USIWM1 USIWM0 USICS1 USICS0 USICLK USITC USICR Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W W W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 The Control Register includes interrupt enable control, wire mode setting, Clock Select setting, and clock strobe. • Bit 7 – USISIE: Start Condition Interrupt Enable Setting this bit to one enables the Start Condition detector interrupt. If there is a pending inter- rupt when the USISIE and the Global Interrupt Enable Flag is set to one, this will immediately be executed. Refer to the USISIF bit description on page 206 for further details. • Bit 6 – USIOIE: Counter Overflow Interrupt Enable Setting this bit to one enables the Counter Overflow interrupt. If there is a pending interrupt when the USIOIE and the Global Interrupt Enable Flag is set to one, this will immediately be executed. Refer to the USIOIF bit description in ”USISR – USI Status Register” on page 206 for further details. • Bit 5:4 – USIWM1:0: Wire Mode These bits set the type of wire mode to be used. Basically only the function of the outputs are affected by these bits. Data and clock inputs are not affected by the mode selected and will always have the same function. The counter and Shift Register can therefore be clocked exter- nally, and data input sampled, even when outputs are disabled. The relations between USIWM1:0 and the USI operation is summarized in Table 20-1. 207 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Table 20-1. Relations between USIWM1:0 and the USI Operation USIWM1 USIWM0 Description Outputs, clock hold, and start detector disabled. Port pins operates as 0 0 normal. Three-wire mode. Uses DO, DI, and USCK pins. The Data Output (DO) pin overrides the corresponding bit in the PORT Register in this mode. However, the corresponding DDR bit still controls the data direction. When the port pin is set as input the pins pull-up is controlled 0 1 by the PORT bit. The Data Input (DI) and Serial Clock (USCK) pins do not affect the normal port operation. When operating as master, clock pulses are software generated by toggling the PORT Register, while the data direction is set to output. The USITC bit in the USICR Register can be used for this purpose. Two-wire mode. Uses SDA (DI) and SCL (USCK) pins(1). The Serial Data (SDA) and the Serial Clock (SCL) pins are bi-directional and uses open-collector output drives. The output drivers are enabled by setting the corresponding bit for SDA and SCL in the DDR Register. When the output driver is enabled for the SDA pin, the output driver will force the line SDA low if the output of the Shift Register or the corresponding bit in the PORT Register is zero. Otherwise the SDA line will not be driven (i.e., it is 1 0 released). When the SCL pin output driver is enabled the SCL line will be forced low if the corresponding bit in the PORT Register is zero, or by the start detector. Otherwise the SCL line will not be driven. The SCL line is held low when a start detector detects a start condition and the output is enabled. Clearing the Start Condition Flag (USISIF) releases the line. The SDA and SCL pin inputs is not affected by enabling this mode. Pull- ups on the SDA and SCL port pin are disabled in Two-wire mode. Two-wire mode. Uses SDA and SCL pins. Same operation as for the Two-wire mode described above, except that the 1 1 SCL line is also held low when a counter overflow occurs, and is held low until the Counter Overflow Flag (USIOIF) is cleared. Note: 1. The I and USCK pins are renamed to Serial Data (SDA) and Serial Clock (SCL) respectively to avoid confusion between the modes of operation. • Bit 3...2 – USICS1...0: Clock Source Select These bits set the clock source for the Shift Register and counter. The data output latch ensures that the output is changed at the opposite edge of the sampling of the data input (DI/SDA) when using external clock source (USCK/SCL). When software strobe or Timer/Counter0 Compare Match clock option is selected, the output latch is transparent and therefore the output is changed immediately. Clearing the USICS1:0 bits enables software strobe option. When using this option, writing a one to the USICLK bit clocks both the Shift Register and the counter. For external clock source (USICS1 = 1), the USICLK bit is no longer used as a strobe, but selects between external clocking and software clocking by the USITC strobe bit. 208 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Table 20-2 shows the relationship between the USICS1:0 and USICLK setting and clock source used for the Shift Register and the 4-bit counter. Table 20-2. Relations between the USICS1:0 and USICLK Setting USICS1 USICS0 USICLK Shift Register Clock Source 4-bit Counter Clock Source 0 0 0 No Clock No Clock Software clock strobe Software clock strobe 0 0 1 (USICLK) (USICLK) Timer/Counter0 Compare Timer/Counter0 Compare 0 1 X Match Match 1 0 0 External, positive edge External, both edges 1 1 0 External, negative edge External, both edges 1 0 1 External, positive edge Software clock strobe (USITC) 1 1 1 External, negative edge Software clock strobe (USITC) • Bit 1 – USICLK: Clock Strobe Writing a one to this bit location strobes the Shift Register to shift one step and the counter to increment by one, provided that the USICS1...0 bits are set to zero and by doing so the software clock strobe option is selected. The output will change immediately when the clock strobe is exe- cuted, i.e., in the same instruction cycle. The value shifted into the Shift Register is sampled the previous instruction cycle. The bit will be read as zero. When an external clock source is selected (USICS1 = 1), the USICLK function is changed from a clock strobe to a Clock Select Register. Setting the USICLK bit in this case will select the USITC strobe bit as clock source for the 4-bit counter (see Table 20-2). • Bit 0 – USITC: Toggle Clock Port Pin Writing a one to this bit location toggles the USCK/SCL value either from 0 to 1, or from 1 to 0. The toggling is independent of the setting in the Data Direction Register, but if the PORT value is to be shown on the pin the DDRE4 must be set as output (to one). This feature allows easy clock generation when implementing master devices. The bit will be read as zero. When an external clock source is selected (USICS1 = 1) and the USICLK bit is set to one, writ- ing to the USITC strobe bit will directly clock the 4-bit counter. This allows an early detection of when the transfer is done when operating as a master device. 209 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 21. Analog Comparator 21.1 Overview The Analog Comparator compares the input values on the positive pin AIN0 and negative pin AIN1. When the voltage on the positive pin AIN0 is higher than the voltage on the negative pin AIN1, the Analog Comparator output, ACO, is set. The comparator’s output can be set to trigger the Timer/Counter1 Input Capture function. In addition, the comparator can trigger a separate interrupt, exclusive to the Analog Comparator. The user can select Interrupt triggering on com- parator output rise, fall or toggle. A block diagram of the comparator and its surrounding logic is shown in Figure 21-1. The PRADC, in ”PRR – Power Reduction Register” on page 43 must be written to zero to use the ADC input MUX. Figure 21-1. Analog Comparator Block Diagram(2) BANDGAP REFERENCE ACBG ACME ADEN ADC MULTIPLEXER OUTPUT(1) Note: 1. See Table 21-1 on page 210. 2. Refer to Figure 1-2 on page 3 and Table 13-5 on page 72 for Analog Comparator pin placement. 21.2 Analog Comparator Multiplexed Input It is possible to select any of the ADC7:0 pins to replace the negative input to the Analog Com- parator. The ADC multiplexer is used to select this input, and consequently, the ADC must be switched off to utilize this feature. If the Analog Comparator Multiplexer Enable bit (ACME in ADCSRB) is set and the ADC is switched off (ADEN in ADCSRA is zero), MUX2:0 in ADMUX select the input pin to replace the negative input to the Analog Comparator, as shown in Table 21-1. If ACME is cleared or ADEN is set, AIN1 is applied to the negative input to the Analog Comparator. Table 21-1. Analog Comparator Multiplexed Input ACME ADEN MUX2..0 Analog Comparator Negative Input 0 x xxx AIN1 1 1 xxx AIN1 1 0 000 ADC0 210 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Table 21-1. Analog Comparator Multiplexed Input (Continued) ACME ADEN MUX2..0 Analog Comparator Negative Input 1 0 001 ADC1 1 0 010 ADC2 1 0 011 ADC3 1 0 100 ADC4 1 0 101 ADC5 1 0 110 ADC6 1 0 111 ADC7 21.3 Register Description 21.3.1 ADCSRB – ADC Control and Status Register B Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 (0x7B) – ACME – – – ADTS2 ADTS1 ADTS0 ADCSRB Read/Write R R/W R R R R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 • Bit 6 – ACME: Analog Comparator Multiplexer Enable When this bit is written logic one and the ADC is switched off (ADEN in ADCSRA is zero), the ADC multiplexer selects the negative input to the Analog Comparator. When this bit is written logic zero, AIN1 is applied to the negative input of the Analog Comparator. For a detailed description of this bit, see ”Analog Comparator Multiplexed Input” on page 210. 21.3.2 ACSR – Analog Comparator Control and Status Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0x30 (0x50) ACD ACBG ACO ACI ACIE ACIC ACIS1 ACIS0 ACSR Read/Write R/W R/W R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 N/A 0 0 0 0 0 • Bit 7 – ACD: Analog Comparator Disable When this bit is written logic one, the power to the Analog Comparator is switched off. This bit can be set at any time to turn off the Analog Comparator. This will reduce power consumption in Active and Idle mode. When changing the ACD bit, the Analog Comparator Interrupt must be disabled by clearing the ACIE bit in ACSR. Otherwise an interrupt can occur when the bit is changed. • Bit 6 – ACBG: Analog Comparator Bandgap Select When this bit is set, a fixed bandgap reference voltage replaces the positive input to the Analog Comparator. When this bit is cleared, AIN0 is applied to the positive input of the Analog Compar- ator. When the bandgap reference is used as input to the analog comparator, it will take a certain time for the voltage to stabilize. If not stabilized, the first conversion may give a wrong value. See ”Internal Voltage Reference” on page 48 • Bit 5 – ACO: Analog Comparator Output The output of the Analog Comparator is synchronized and then directly connected to ACO. The synchronization introduces a delay of 1 - 2 clock cycles. 211 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P • Bit 4 – ACI: Analog Comparator Interrupt Flag This bit is set by hardware when a comparator output event triggers the interrupt mode defined by ACIS1 and ACIS0. The Analog Comparator interrupt routine is executed if the ACIE bit is set and the I-bit in SREG is set. ACI is cleared by hardware when executing the corresponding inter- rupt handling vector. Alternatively, ACI is cleared by writing a logic one to the flag. • Bit 3 – ACIE: Analog Comparator Interrupt Enable When the ACIE bit is written logic one and the I-bit in the Status Register is set, the Analog Com- parator interrupt is activated. When written logic zero, the interrupt is disabled. • Bit 2 – ACIC: Analog Comparator Input Capture Enable When written logic one, this bit enables the Input Capture function in Timer/Counter1 to be trig- gered by the Analog Comparator. The comparator output is in this case directly connected to the Input Capture front-end logic, making the comparator utilize the noise canceler and edge select features of the Timer/Counter1 Input Capture interrupt. When written logic zero, no connection between the Analog Comparator and the Input Capture function exists. To make the comparator trigger the Timer/Counter1 Input Capture interrupt, the ICIE1 bit in the Timer Interrupt Mask Register (TIMSK1) must be set. • Bits 1, 0 – ACIS1, ACIS0: Analog Comparator Interrupt Mode Select These bits determine which comparator events that trigger the Analog Comparator interrupt. The different settings are shown in Table 21-2. Table 21-2. ACIS1/ACIS0 Settings ACIS1 ACIS0 Interrupt Mode 0 0 Comparator Interrupt on Output Toggle. 0 1 Reserved 1 0 Comparator Interrupt on Falling Output Edge. 1 1 Comparator Interrupt on Rising Output Edge. When changing the ACIS1/ACIS0 bits, the Analog Comparator Interrupt must be disabled by clearing its Interrupt Enable bit in the ACSR Register. Otherwise an interrupt can occur when the bits are changed. 21.3.3 DIDR1 – Digital Input Disable Register 1 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 (0x7F) – – – – – – AIN1D AIN0D DIDR1 Read/Write R R R R R R R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 • Bit 1, 0 – AIN1D, AIN0D: AIN1, AIN0 Digital Input Disable When this bit is written to logic one, the digital input buffer on the AIN1/0 pin disabled. The corre- sponding PIN Register bit will always read as zero when this bit is set. When an analog signal is applied to the AIN1/0 pin and the digital input from this pin is not needed, this bit should be writ- ten logic one to reduce power consumption in the digital input buffer. 212 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 22. Analog to DigiWhetn thais bit is wlritten logCic one, the odigital inpunt buffer ovn the AINe1/0 pin irs disabtled. eThe corrersponding PIN Register bit will always read as zero when this bit is set. When an analog signal is applied to the AIN1/0 pin and the digital input from this pin is not needed, this bit should be written logic one to reduce power consumption in the digital input buffer. 22.1 Features • 10-bit Resolution • 0.5LSB Integral Non-linearity • ± 2LSB Absolute Accuracy • 13 - 260µs Conversion Time (50kHz to 1MHz ADC clock) • Up to 76.9kSPS at Maximum Resolution (200kHz ADC clock) • Eight Multiplexed Single Ended Input Channels • Optional Left Adjustment for ADC Result Readout • 0 - V ADC Input Voltage Range CC • Selectable 1.1V ADC Reference Voltage • Free Running or Single Conversion Mode • ADC Start Conversion by Auto Triggering on Interrupt Sources • Interrupt on ADC Conversion Complete • Sleep Mode Noise Canceler 22.2 Overview The ATmega329P/3290P features a 10-bit successive approximation ADC. The ADC is con- nected to an 8-channel Analog Multiplexer which allows eight single-ended voltage inputs constructed from the pins of Port F. The single-ended voltage inputs refer to 0V (GND). The ADC contains a Sample and Hold circuit which ensures that the input voltage to the ADC is held at a constant level during conversion. A block diagram of the ADC is shown in Figure 22-1. The ADC has a separate analog supply voltage pin, AVCC. AV must not differ more than ± CC 0.3V from V . See the paragraph ”ADC Noise Canceler” on page 219 on how to connect this CC pin. Internal reference voltages of nominally 1.1V or AVCC are provided On-chip. The voltage refer- ence may be externally decoupled at the AREF pin by a capacitor for better noise performance. The PRADC, in ”PRR – Power Reduction Register” on page 43 must be written to zero to enable the ADC module. 213 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Figure 22-1. Analog to Digital Converter Block Schematic ADC CONVERSION COMPLETE IRQ INTERRUPT FLAGS ADTS[2:0] 8-BIT DATA BUS ADIF ADIE 15 0 ADC MULTIPLEXER ADC CTRL. & STATUS ADC DATA REGISTER SELECT (ADMUX) REGISTER (ADCSRA) (ADCH/ADCL) REFS1 REFS0 ADLAR MUX4 MUX3 MUX2 MUX1 MUX0 ADEN ADSC ADATE ADIF ADPS2 ADPS1 ADPS0 TSREIGLEGCETR ADC[9:0] MUX DECODER AVCC CHANNEL SELECTION PRCEOSNCVAELRESRION LOSGTIACRT INTERNAL REFERENCE SAMPLE & HOLD COMPARATOR AREF 10-BIT DAC - + GND BANDGAP REFERENCE ADC7 SINGLE ENDED / DIFFERENTIAL SELECTION ADC6 ADC5 INPOPUST. AODUCT PMUUTLTIPLEXER MUX ADC4 ADC3 DIFFERENTIAL AMPLIFIER + ADC2 - ADC1 ADC0 NEG. INPUT MUX 22.3 Operation The ADC converts an analog input voltage to a 10-bit digital value through successive approxi- mation. The minimum value represents GND and the maximum value represents the voltage on the AREF pin minus 1LSB. Optionally, AVCC or an internal 1.1V reference voltage may be con- nected to the AREF pin by writing to the REFSn bits in the ADMUX Register. The internal voltage reference may thus be decoupled by an external capacitor at the AREF pin to improve noise immunity. The analog input channel is selected by writing to the MUX bits in ADMUX. Any of the ADC input pins, as well as GND and a fixed bandgap voltage reference, can be selected as single ended inputs to the ADC. The ADC is enabled by setting the ADC Enable bit, ADEN in ADCSRA. Volt- age reference and input channel selections will not go into effect until ADEN is set. The ADC does not consume power when ADEN is cleared, so it is recommended to switch off the ADC before entering power saving sleep modes. The ADC generates a 10-bit result which is presented in the ADC Data Registers, ADCH and ADCL. By default, the result is presented right adjusted, but can optionally be presented left adjusted by setting the ADLAR bit in ADMUX. 214 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P If the result is left adjusted and no more than 8-bit precision is required, it is sufficient to read ADCH. Otherwise, ADCL must be read first, then ADCH, to ensure that the content of the Data Registers belongs to the same conversion. Once ADCL is read, ADC access to Data Registers is blocked. This means that if ADCL has been read, and a conversion completes before ADCH is read, neither register is updated and the result from the conversion is lost. When ADCH is read, ADC access to the ADCH and ADCL Registers is re-enabled. The ADC has its own interrupt which can be triggered when a conversion completes. When ADC access to the Data Registers is prohibited between reading of ADCH and ADCL, the interrupt will trigger even if the result is lost. 22.4 Starting a Conversion A single conversion is started by writing a logical one to the ADC Start Conversion bit, ADSC. This bit stays high as long as the conversion is in progress and will be cleared by hardware when the conversion is completed. If a different data channel is selected while a conversion is in progress, the ADC will finish the current conversion before performing the channel change. Alternatively, a conversion can be triggered automatically by various sources. Auto Triggering is enabled by setting the ADC Auto Trigger Enable bit, ADATE in ADCSRA. The trigger source is selected by setting the ADC Trigger Select bits, ADTS in ADCSRB (See description of the ADTS bits for a list of the trigger sources). When a positive edge occurs on the selected trigger signal, the ADC prescaler is reset and a conversion is started. This provides a method of starting con- versions at fixed intervals. If the trigger signal still is set when the conversion completes, a new conversion will not be started. If another positive edge occurs on the trigger signal during con- version, the edge will be ignored. Note that an Interrupt Flag will be set even if the specific interrupt is disabled or the Global Interrupt Enable bit in SREG is cleared. A conversion can thus be triggered without causing an interrupt. However, the Interrupt Flag must be cleared in order to trigger a new conversion at the next interrupt event. Figure 22-2. ADC Auto Trigger Logic ADTS[2:0] PRESCALER START CLK ADC ADIF ADATE SOURCE 1 . CONVERSION . LOGIC . . EDGE DETECTOR SOURCE n ADSC Using the ADC Interrupt Flag as a trigger source makes the ADC start a new conversion as soon as the ongoing conversion has finished. The ADC then operates in Free Running mode, con- stantly sampling and updating the ADC Data Register. The first conversion must be started by writing a logical one to the ADSC bit in ADCSRA. In this mode the ADC will perform successive conversions independently of whether the ADC Interrupt Flag, ADIF is cleared or not. 215 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P If Auto Triggering is enabled, single conversions can be started by writing ADSC in ADCSRA to one. ADSC can also be used to determine if a conversion is in progress. The ADSC bit will be read as one during a conversion, independently of how the conversion was started. 22.5 Prescaling and Conversion Timing Figure 22-3. ADC Prescaler ADEN Reset START 7-BIT ADC PRESCALER CK 8 6 2 4 2 2 4 8 1 3 6 1 K/ K/ K/ K/ K/ K/ K/ C C C C C C C ADPS0 ADPS1 ADPS2 ADC CLOCK SOURCE By default, the successive approximation circuitry requires an input clock frequency between 50kHz and 200kHz to get maximum resolution. If a lower resolution than 10 bits is needed, the input clock frequency to the ADC can be higher than 200kHz to get a higher sample rate. The ADC module contains a prescaler, which generates an acceptable ADC clock frequency from any CPU frequency above 100kHz. The prescaling is set by the ADPS bits in ADCSRA. The prescaler starts counting from the moment the ADC is switched on by setting the ADEN bit in ADCSRA. The prescaler keeps running for as long as the ADEN bit is set, and is continuously reset when ADEN is low. When initiating a single ended conversion by setting the ADSC bit in ADCSRA, the conversion starts at the following rising edge of the ADC clock cycle. A normal conversion takes 13 ADC clock cycles. The first conversion after the ADC is switched on (ADEN in ADCSRA is set) takes 25 ADC clock cycles in order to initialize the analog circuitry. When the bandgap reference voltage is used as input to the ADC, it will take a certain time for the voltage to stabilize. If not stabilized the first value read after the first conversion may be wrong. The actual sample-and-hold takes place 1.5 ADC clock cycles after the start of a normal conver- sion and 13.5 ADC clock cycles after the start of an first conversion. When a conversion is complete, the result is written to the ADC Data Registers, and ADIF is set. In Single Conversion mode, ADSC is cleared simultaneously. The software may then set ADSC again, and a new conversion will be initiated on the first rising ADC clock edge. When Auto Triggering is used, the prescaler is reset when the trigger event occurs. This assures a fixed delay from the trigger event to the start of conversion. In this mode, the sample-and-hold takes place two ADC clock cycles after the rising edge on the trigger source signal. Three addi- tional CPU clock cycles are used for synchronization logic. When using Differential mode, along 216 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P with Auto triggering from a source other than the ADC Conversion Complete, each conversion will require 25 ADC clocks. This is because the ADC must be disabled and re-enabled after every conversion. In Free Running mode, a new conversion will be started immediately after the conversion com- pletes, while ADSC remains high. For a summary of conversion times, see Table 22-1. Figure 22-4. ADC Timing Diagram, First Conversion (Single Conversion Mode) Next First Conversion Conversion Cycle Number 1 2 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 1 2 3 ADC Clock ADEN ADSC ADIF ADCH Sign and MSB of Result ADCL LSB of Result MUX and REFS Conversion MUX and REFS Update Sample & Hold Complete Update Figure 22-5. ADC Timing Diagram, Single Conversion One Conversion Next Conversion Cycle Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 1 2 3 ADC Clock ADSC ADIF ADCH Sign and MSB of Result ADCL LSB of Result Sample & Hold Conversion MUX and REFS MUX and REFS Complete Update Update Figure 22-6. ADC Timing Diagram, Auto Triggered Conversion One Conversion Next Conversion Cycle Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 1 2 ADC Clock Trigger Source ADATE ADIF ADCH Sign and MSB of Result ADCL LSB of Result Sample & Conversion Prescaler Prescaler Hold Complete Reset Reset MUX and REFS Update 217 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Figure 22-7. ADC Timing Diagram, Free Running Conversion One Conversion Next Conversion 11 12 13 1 2 3 4 Cycle Number ADC Clock ADSC ADIF ADCH Sign and MSB of Result ADCL LSB of Result Conversion Sample & Hold Complete MUX and REFS Update Table 22-1. ADC Conversion Time Sample & Hold (Cycles from Condition Start of Conversion) Conversion Time (Cycles) First conversion 13.5 25 Normal conversions, single ended 1.5 13 Auto Triggered conversions 2 13.5 22.6 Changing Channel or Reference Selection The MUXn and REFS1:0 bits in the ADMUX Register are single buffered through a temporary register to which the CPU has random access. This ensures that the channels and reference selection only takes place at a safe point during the conversion. The channel and reference selection is continuously updated until a conversion is started. Once the conversion starts, the channel and reference selection is locked to ensure a sufficient sampling time for the ADC. Con- tinuous updating resumes in the last ADC clock cycle before the conversion completes (ADIF in ADCSRA is set). Note that the conversion starts on the following rising ADC clock edge after ADSC is written. The user is thus advised not to write new channel or reference selection values to ADMUX until one ADC clock cycle after ADSC is written. If Auto Triggering is used, the exact time of the triggering event can be indeterministic. Special care must be taken when updating the ADMUX Register, in order to control which conversion will be affected by the new settings. If both ADATE and ADEN is written to one, an interrupt event can occur at any time. If the ADMUX Register is changed in this period, the user cannot tell if the next conversion is based on the old or the new settings. ADMUX can be safely updated in the following ways: 1. When ADATE or ADEN is cleared. 2. During conversion, minimum one ADC clock cycle after the trigger event. 3. After a conversion, before the Interrupt Flag used as trigger source is cleared. When updating ADMUX in one of these conditions, the new settings will affect the next ADC conversion. 218 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 22.6.1 ADC Input Channels When changing channel selections, the user should observe the following guidelines to ensure that the correct channel is selected: In Single Conversion mode, always select the channel before starting the conversion. The chan- nel selection may be changed one ADC clock cycle after writing one to ADSC. However, the simplest method is to wait for the conversion to complete before changing the channel selection. In Free Running mode, always select the channel before starting the first conversion. The chan- nel selection may be changed one ADC clock cycle after writing one to ADSC. However, the simplest method is to wait for the first conversion to complete, and then change the channel selection. Since the next conversion has already started automatically, the next result will reflect the previous channel selection. Subsequent conversions will reflect the new channel selection. 22.6.2 ADC Voltage Reference The reference voltage for the ADC (V ) indicates the conversion range for the ADC. Single REF ended channels that exceed V will result in codes close to 0x3FF. V can be selected as REF REF either AVCC, internal 1.1V reference, or external AREF pin. AVCC is connected to the ADC through a passive switch. The internal 1.1V reference is gener- ated from the internal bandgap reference (V ) through an internal buffer. In either case, the BG external AREF pin is directly connected to the ADC, and the reference voltage can be made more immune to noise by connecting a capacitor between the AREF pin and ground. V can REF also be measured at the AREF pin with a high impedant voltmeter. Note that V is a high REF impedant source, and only a capacitive load should be connected in a system. If the user has a fixed voltage source connected to the AREF pin, the user may not use the other reference voltage options in the application, as they will be shorted to the external voltage. If no external voltage is applied to the AREF pin, the user may switch between AVCC and 1.1V as reference selection. The first ADC conversion result after switching reference voltage source may be inaccurate, and the user is advised to discard this result. 22.7 ADC Noise Canceler The ADC features a noise canceler that enables conversion during sleep mode to reduce noise induced from the CPU core and other I/O peripherals. The noise canceler can be used with ADC Noise Reduction and Idle mode. To make use of this feature, the following procedure should be used: 1. Make sure that the ADC is enabled and is not busy converting. Single Conversion mode must be selected and the ADC conversion complete interrupt must be enabled. 2. Enter ADC Noise Reduction mode (or Idle mode). The ADC will start a conversion once the CPU has been halted. 3. If no other interrupts occur before the ADC conversion completes, the ADC interrupt will wake up the CPU and execute the ADC Conversion Complete interrupt routine. If another interrupt wakes up the CPU before the ADC conversion is complete, that inter- rupt will be executed, and an ADC Conversion Complete interrupt request will be generated when the ADC conversion completes. The CPU will remain in active mode until a new sleep command is executed. Note that the ADC will not be automatically turned off when entering other sleep modes than Idle mode and ADC Noise Reduction mode. The user is advised to write zero to ADEN before enter- ing such sleep modes to avoid excessive power consumption. 219 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 22.7.1 Analog Input Circuitry The analog input circuitry for single ended channels is illustrated in Figure 22-8 An analog source applied to ADCn is subjected to the pin capacitance and input leakage of that pin, regard- less of whether that channel is selected as input for the ADC. When the channel is selected, the source must drive the S/H capacitor through the series resistance (combined resistance in the input path). The ADC is optimized for analog signals with an output impedance of approximately 10k or less. If such a source is used, the sampling time will be negligible. If a source with higher imped- ance is used, the sampling time will depend on how long time the source needs to charge the S/H capacitor, with can vary widely. The user is recommended to only use low impedant sources with slowly varying signals, since this minimizes the required charge transfer to the S/H capacitor. Signal components higher than the Nyquist frequency (f /2) should not be present for either ADC kind of channels, to avoid distortion from unpredictable signal convolution. The user is advised to remove high frequency components with a low-pass filter before applying the signals as inputs to the ADC. Figure 22-8. Analog Input Circuitry I IH ADCn 1..100 kΩ C = 14 pF S/H I IL V /2 CC 22.7.2 Analog Noise Canceling Techniques Digital circuitry inside and outside the device generates EMI which might affect the accuracy of analog measurements. If conversion accuracy is critical, the noise level can be reduced by applying the following techniques: 1. Keep analog signal paths as short as possible. Make sure analog tracks run over the analog ground plane, and keep them well away from high-speed switching digital tracks. 2. The AVCC pin on the device should be connected to the digital V supply voltage via an CC LC network as shown in Figure 22-9. 3. Use the ADC noise canceler function to reduce induced noise from the CPU. 4. If any ADC port pins are used as digital outputs, it is essential that these do not switch while a conversion is in progress. 220 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Figure 22-9. ADC Power Connections PA0 51 VCC 52 GND 53 (ADC7) PF7 54 (ADC6) PF6 55 (ADC5) PF5 56 (ADC4) PF4 57 (ADC3) PF3 58 (ADC2) PF2 59 (ADC1) PF1 60 (ADC0) PF0 6611 10μΗ AREF 6622 GND 6633 AVCC 6644 100nF 1 Analog Ground Plane P A C D C L 22.7.3 ADC Accuracy Definitions An n-bit single-ended ADC converts a voltage linearly between GND and V in 2n steps REF (LSBs). The lowest code is read as 0, and the highest code is read as 2n-1. Several parameters describe the deviation from the ideal behavior: • Offset: The deviation of the first transition (0x000 to 0x001) compared to the ideal transition (at 0.5 LSB). Ideal value: 0 LSB. Figure 22-10. Offset Error Output Code Ideal ADC Actual ADC Offset Error VREF Input Voltage 221 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P • Gain Error: After adjusting for offset, the Gain Error is found as the deviation of the last transition (0x3FE to 0x3FF) compared to the ideal transition (at 1.5 LSB below maximum). Ideal value: 0 LSB Figure 22-11. Gain Error Output Code Gain Error Ideal ADC Actual ADC VREF Input Voltage • Integral Non-linearity (INL): After adjusting for offset and gain error, the INL is the maximum deviation of an actual transition compared to an ideal transition for any code. Ideal value: 0 LSB. Figure 22-12. Integral Non-linearity (INL) Output Code IN L Ideal ADC Actual ADC V Input Voltage REF 222 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P • Differential Non-linearity (DNL): The maximum deviation of the actual code width (the interval between two adjacent transitions) from the ideal code width (1 LSB). Ideal value: 0 LSB. Figure 22-13. Differential Non-linearity (DNL) Output Code 0x3FF 1 LSB DNL 0x000 0 V Input Voltage REF • Quantization Error: Due to the quantization of the input voltage into a finite number of codes, a range of input voltages (1 LSB wide) will code to the same value. Always ± 0.5 LSB. • Absolute Accuracy: The maximum deviation of an actual (unadjusted) transition compared to an ideal transition for any code. This is the compound effect of offset, gain error, differential error, non-linearity, and quantization error. Ideal value: ± 0.5 LSB. 22.8 ADC Conversion Result After the conversion is complete (ADIF is high), the conversion result can be found in the ADC Result Registers (ADCL, ADCH). For single ended conversion, the result is V 1024 IN ADC = -------------------------- V REF where V is the voltage on the selected input pin and V the selected voltage reference (see IN REF Table 3 on page 225 and Table 22-3 on page 226). 0x000 represents analog ground, and 0x3FF represents the selected reference voltage minus one LSB. V –V 512 POS NEG ADC = ----------------------------------------------------- V REF 223 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Figure 22-14. Differential Measurement Range Output Code 0x1FF 0x000 - VREF 0x3FF 0 VREF DVoiflfteargeen t(iVaol Iltnsp)ut 0x200 Table 22-2. Correlation Between Input Voltage and Output Codes V Read Code Corresponding Decimal Value ADCn V + V 0x1FF 511 ADCm REF V + 511/ V 0x1FF 511 ADCm 512 REF V + 510/ V 0x1FE 510 ADCm 512 REF ... ... ... V + 1/ V 0x001 1 ADCm 512 REF V 0x000 0 ADCm V - 1/ V 0x3FF -1 ADCm 512 REF ... ... ... V - 511/ V 0x201 -511 ADCm 512 REF V - V 0x200 -512 ADCm REF ADMUX = 0xFB (ADC3 - ADC2, 1.1V reference, left adjusted result) Voltage on ADC3 is 300mV, voltage on ADC2 is 500mV. ADCR = 512 * (300 - 500) / 1100 = -93 = 0x3A3. ADCL will thus read 0xC0, and ADCH will read 0xD8. Writing zero to ADLAR right adjusts the result: ADCL = 0xA3, ADCH = 0x03. 224 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 22.9 Register Description 22.9.1 ADMUX – ADC Multiplexer Selection Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 (0x7C) REFS1 REFS0 ADLAR MUX4 MUX3 MUX2 MUX1 MUX0 ADMUX Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 • Bit 7:6 – REFS1:0: Reference Selection Bits These bits select the voltage reference for the ADC, as shown in Table 3. If these bits are changed during a conversion, the change will not go in effect until this conversion is complete (ADIF in ADCSRA is set). The internal voltage reference options may not be used if an external reference voltage is being applied to the AREF pin. Table 3. Voltage Reference Selections for ADC REFS1 REFS0 Voltage Reference Selection 0 0 AREF, Internal Voltage Reference turned off 0 1 AVCC with external capacitor at AREF pin 1 0 Reserved 1 1 Internal 1.1V Voltage Reference with external capacitor at AREF pin • Bit 5 – ADLAR: ADC Left Adjust Result The ADLAR bit affects the presentation of the ADC conversion result in the ADC Data Register. Write one to ADLAR to left adjust the result. Otherwise, the result is right adjusted. Changing the ADLAR bit will affect the ADC Data Register immediately, regardless of any ongoing conver- sions. For a complete description of this bit, see ”ADCL and ADCH – The ADC Data Register” on page 228. • Bits 4:0 – MUX4:0: Analog Channel Selection Bits The value of these bits selects which combination of analog inputs are connected to the ADC. See Table 22-3 for details. If these bits are changed during a conversion, the change will not go in effect until this conversion is complete (ADIF in ADCSRA is set). 225 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Table 22-3. Input Channel Selections MUX4:0 Single Ended Input Positive Differential Input Negative Differential Input 00000 ADC0 00001 ADC1 00010 ADC2 00011 ADC3 00100 ADC4 00101 ADC5 00110 ADC6 00111 ADC7 N/A 01000 01001 01010 01011 01100 01101 01110 01111 10000 ADC0 ADC1 10001 ADC1 ADC1 10010 N/A ADC2 ADC1 10011 ADC3 ADC1 10100 ADC4 ADC1 10101 ADC5 ADC1 10110 ADC6 ADC1 10111 ADC7 ADC1 11000 ADC0 ADC2 11001 ADC1 ADC2 11010 ADC2 ADC2 11011 ADC3 ADC2 11100 ADC4 ADC2 11101 ADC5 ADC2 11110 1.1V (V ) BG N/A 11111 0V (GND) 226 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 22.9.2 ADCSRA – ADC Control and Status Register A Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 (0x7A) ADEN ADSC ADATE ADIF ADIE ADPS2 ADPS1 ADPS0 ADCSRA Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 • Bit 7 – ADEN: ADC Enable Writing this bit to one enables the ADC. By writing it to zero, the ADC is turned off. Turning the ADC off while a conversion is in progress, will terminate this conversion. • Bit 6 – ADSC: ADC Start Conversion In Single Conversion mode, write this bit to one to start each conversion. In Free Running mode, write this bit to one to start the first conversion. The first conversion after ADSC has been written after the ADC has been enabled, or if ADSC is written at the same time as the ADC is enabled, will take 25 ADC clock cycles instead of the normal 13. This first conversion performs initializa- tion of the ADC. ADSC will read as one as long as a conversion is in progress. When the conversion is complete, it returns to zero. Writing zero to this bit has no effect. • Bit 5 – ADATE: ADC Auto Trigger Enable When this bit is written to one, Auto Triggering of the ADC is enabled. The ADC will start a con- version on a positive edge of the selected trigger signal. The trigger source is selected by setting the ADC Trigger Select bits, ADTS in ADCSRB. • Bit 4 – ADIF: ADC Interrupt Flag This bit is set when an ADC conversion completes and the Data Registers are updated. The ADC Conversion Complete Interrupt is executed if the ADIE bit and the I-bit in SREG are set. ADIF is cleared by hardware when executing the corresponding interrupt handling vector. Alter- natively, ADIF is cleared by writing a logical one to the flag. Beware that if doing a Read-Modify- Write on ADCSRA, a pending interrupt can be disabled. This also applies if the SBI and CBI instructions are used. • Bit 3 – ADIE: ADC Interrupt Enable When this bit is written to one and the I-bit in SREG is set, the ADC Conversion Complete Inter- rupt is activated. • Bits 2:0 – ADPS2:0: ADC Prescaler Select Bits Table 22-4. These bits determine the division factor between the XTAL frequency and the input clock to the ADC. Table 22-5. ADC Prescaler Selections ADPS2 ADPS1 ADPS0 Division Factor 0 0 0 2 0 0 1 2 0 1 0 4 0 1 1 8 1 0 0 16 227 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Table 22-5. ADC Prescaler Selections (Continued) ADPS2 ADPS1 ADPS0 Division Factor 1 0 1 32 1 1 0 64 1 1 1 128 22.9.3 ADCL and ADCH – The ADC Data Register 22.9.3.1 ADLAR = 0 Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 (0x79) – – – – – – ADC9 ADC8 ADCH (0x78) ADC7 ADC6 ADC5 ADC4 ADC3 ADC2 ADC1 ADC0 ADCL 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Read/Write R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 22.9.3.2 ADLAR = 1 Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 (0x79) ADC9 ADC8 ADC7 ADC6 ADC5 ADC4 ADC3 ADC2 ADCH (0x78) ADC1 ADC0 – – – – – – ADCL 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Read/Write R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 When an ADC conversion is complete, the result is found in these two registers. When ADCL is read, the ADC Data Register is not updated until ADCH is read. Consequently, if the result is left adjusted and no more than 8-bit precision is required, it is sufficient to read ADCH. Otherwise, ADCL must be read first, then ADCH. The ADLAR bit in ADMUX, and the MUXn bits in ADMUX affect the way the result is read from the registers. If ADLAR is set, the result is left adjusted. If ADLAR is cleared (default), the result is right adjusted. • ADC9:0: ADC Conversion Result These bits represent the result from the conversion, as detailed in ”ADC Conversion Result” on page 223. 22.9.4 ADCSRB – ADC Control and Status Register B Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 (0x7B) – ACME – – – ADTS2 ADTS1 ADTS0 ADCSRB Read/Write R R/W R R R R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 228 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P • Bit 7 – Reserved This bit is reserved for future use. To ensure compatibility with future devices, this bit must be written to zero when ADCSRB is written. • Bit 2:0 – ADTS2:0: ADC Auto Trigger Source If ADATE in ADCSRA is written to one, the value of these bits selects which source will trigger an ADC conversion. If ADATE is cleared, the ADTS2:0 settings will have no effect. A conversion will be triggered by the rising edge of the selected Interrupt Flag. Note that switching from a trig- ger source that is cleared to a trigger source that is set, will generate a positive edge on the trigger signal. If ADEN in ADCSRA is set, this will start a conversion. Switching to Free Running mode (ADTS[2:0]=0) will not cause a trigger event, even if the ADC Interrupt Flag is set. Table 22-6. ADC Auto Trigger Source Selections ADTS2 ADTS1 ADTS0 Trigger Source 0 0 0 Free Running mode 0 0 1 Analog Comparator 0 1 0 External Interrupt Request 0 0 1 1 Timer/Counter0 Compare MatchA 1 0 0 Timer/Counter0 Overflow 1 0 1 Timer/Counter1 Compare Match B 1 1 0 Timer/Counter1 Overflow 1 1 1 Timer/Counter1 Capture Event 22.9.5 DIDR0 – Digital Input Disable Register 0 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 (0x7E) ADC7D ADC6D ADC5D ADC4D ADC3D ADC2D ADC1D ADC0D DIDR0 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 • Bit 7:0 – ADC7D:ADC0D: ADC7:0 Digital Input Disable When this bit is written logic one, the digital input buffer on the corresponding ADC pin is dis- abled. The corresponding PIN Register bit will always read as zero when this bit is set. When an analog signal is applied to the ADC7:0 pin and the digital input from this pin is not needed, this bit should be written logic one to reduce power consumption in the digital input buffer. 229 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 23. LCD Controller 23.1 Features • Display Capacity of 25/40 Segments and Four Common Terminals • Support Static, 1/2, 1/3 and 1/4 Duty • Support Static, 1/2, 1/3 Bias • On-chip LCD Power Supply, only One External Capacitor needed • Display Possible in Power-save Mode for Low Power Consumption • Software Selectable Low Power Waveform Capability • Flexible Selection of Frame Frequency • Software Selection between System Clock or an External Asynchronous Clock Source • Equal Source and Sink Capability to maximize LCD Life Time • LCD Interrupt Can be Used for Display Data Update or Wake-up from Sleep Mode • Segment and Common Pins not Needed for Driving the Display Can be Used as Ordinary I/O Pins • Latching of Display Data gives Full Freedom in Register Update 23.2 Overview The LCD Controller/driver is intended for monochrome passive liquid crystal display (LCD) with up to four common terminals and up to 25/40 segment terminals. A simplified block diagram of the LCD Controller/Driver is shown in Figure 23-1. For the actual placement of I/O pins, refer to ”MLF/ Pinout ATmega329P” on page 2 and ”TQFP / Pinout ATmega3290P” on page 3. An LCD consists of several segments (pixels or complete symbols) which can be visible or non visible. A segment has two electrodes with liquid crystal between them. When a voltage above a threshold voltage is applied across the liquid crystal, the segment becomes visible. The voltage must alternate to avoid an electrophoresis effect in the liquid crystal, which degrades the display. Hence the waveform across a segment must not have a DC-component. The PRLCD bit in ”PRR – Power Reduction Register” on page 43 must be written to zero to enable the LCD module. 23.2.1 Definitions Several terms are used when describing LCD. The definitions in Table 23-1 are used throughout this document. Table 23-1. Definitions LCD A passive display panel with terminals leading directly to a segment Segment The least viewing element (pixel) which can be on or off Common Denotes how many segments are connected to a segment terminal Duty 1/(Number of common terminals on a actual LCD display) Bias 1/(Number of voltage levels used driving a LCD display -1) Frame Rate Number of times the LCD segments is energized per second. 230 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Figure 23-1. LCD Module Block Diagram clk clki/o 0 LCD 12-bit Prescaler 1 TOSC lcdcs LCD/16clk LCDclk/64 LCDclk/128 LCDclk/256 LCDclk/512 LCDclk/1024 LCDclk/2048 LCDclk/4096 lcdps2:0 Clock SEG0 LCDFRR Multiplexer SEG1 SEG2 SEG3 LCDCRA lcdcd2:0 SEG4 Divide by 1 to 8 SEG5 LCDCRB clk D LCD_PS A T LCD A Timing B U S LCDDR 19 -15 Analog Switch Array LCDDR 14 -10 40 x LATCH LCD Ouput 4:1 array Decoder MUX LCDDR 9 - 5 LCD_voltage_ok LCDDR 4 - 0 1/3 VLCD SEG35 LCDD rBivuefrfer/ 12//23 VVLCD SEG36 LCD SEG37 lcdcc3:0 V LCDCCR Contrast Controller/ LCD SEG38 Power Supply SEG39 LCD CAP COM0 LCD Display Configuration COM1 lcddc2:0 COM2 COM3 23.2.2 LCD Clock Sources The LCD Controller can be clocked by an internal synchronous or an external asynchronous clock source. The clock source clk is by default equal to the system clock, clk . When the LCD I/O LCDCS bit in the LCDCRB Register is written to logic one, the clock source is taken from the TOSC1 pin. The clock source must be stable to obtain accurate LCD timing and hence minimize DC voltage offset across LCD segments. 23.2.3 LCD Prescaler The prescaler consist of a 12-bit ripple counter and a 1- to 8-clock divider. The LCDPS2:0 bits selects clk divided by 16, 64, 128, 256, 512, 1024, 2048, or 4096. LCD If a finer resolution rate is required, the LCDCD2:0 bits can be used to divide the clock further by 1 to 8. Output from the clock divider clk is used as clock source for the LCD timing. LCD_PS 23.2.4 LCD Memory The display memory is available through I/O Registers grouped for each common terminal. When a bit in the display memory is written to one, the corresponding segment is energized (on), and non-energized when a bit in the display memory is written to zero. 231 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P To energize a segment, an absolute voltage above a certain threshold must be applied. This is done by letting the output voltage on corresponding COM pin and SEG pin have opposite phase. For display with more than one common, one (1/2 bias) or two (1/3 bias) additional voltage lev- els must be applied. Otherwise, non-energized segments on COM0 would be energized for all non-selected common. Addressing COM0 starts a frame by driving opposite phase with large amplitude out on COM0 compared to none addressed COM lines. Non-energized segments are in phase with the addressed COM0, and energized segments have opposite phase and large amplitude. For waveform figures refer to ”Mode of Operation” on page 233. Latched data from LCDDR4 - LCDDR0 is multiplexed into the decoder. The decoder is controlled from the LCD timing and sets up signals controlling the analog switches to produce an output waveform. Next, COM1 is addressed, and latched data from LCDDR9 - LCDDR5 is input to decoder. Addressing continu- ous until all COM lines are addressed according to number of common (duty). The display data are latched before a new frame start. 23.2.5 LCD Contrast Controller/Power Supply The peak value (V ) on the output waveform determines the LCD Contrast. V is controlled LCD LCD by software from 2.6V to 3.35V independent of V . An internal signal inhibits output to the LCD CC until V has reached its target value. LCD 23.2.6 LCDCAP An external capacitor (typical > 470 nF) must be connected to the LCDCAP pin as shown in Fig- ure 23-2, if the LCD module is enabled and configured to use internal power. This capacitor acts as a reservoir for LCD power (V ). A large capacitance reduces ripple on V but increases LCD LCD the time until V reaches its target value. LCD Figure 23-2. LCDCAP Connection 62 63 64 1 2 3 P A C D C L 23.2.7 LCD Buffer Driver Intermediate voltage levels are generated from buffers/drivers. The buffers are active the amount of time specified by LCDDC[2:0] in LCDCCR. Then LCD output pins are tri-stated and buffers are switched off. Shortening the drive time will reduce power consumption, but displays with high internal resistance or capacitance may need longer drive time to achieve sufficient contrast. 23.2.8 Display requirements When using more than one common pin, the maximum period the LCD drivers can be turned on for each voltage transition on the LCD pins is 50% of the prescaled LCD clock period, clk . LCD_PS To avoid flickering, it is recommended to keep the framerate above 30Hz, thus giving a maxi- 232 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P mum drive time of approximately 2ms when using 1/2 or 1/4 duty, and approximately 2.7ms when using 1/3 duty. To achieve satisfactory contrast, all segments on the LCD display must therefore be able to be fully charged/discharged within 2 or 2.7ms, depending on the number of common pins. 23.2.9 Minimizing power consumption By keeping the percentage of the time the LCD drivers are turned on at a minimum, the power consumption of the LCD driver can be minimized. This can be achieved by using the lowest acceptable frame rate, and using low power waveform if possible. The drive time should be kept at the lowest setting that achieves satisfactory contrast for a particular display, while allowing some headroom for production variations between individual LCD drivers and displays. Note that some of the highest LCD voltage settings may result in high power consumption when V CC is below 2.0V. The recommended maximum LCD voltage is 2*(V - 0.2V). CC 23.3 Mode of Operation 23.3.1 Static Duty and Bias If all segments on a LCD have one electrode common, then each segment must have a unique terminal. This kind of display is driven with the waveform shown in Figure 23-3. SEG0 - COM0 is the volt- age across a segment that is on, and SEG1 - COM0 is the voltage across a segment that is off. Figure 23-3. Driving a LCD with One Common Terminal V V LCD LCD SEG0 SEG1 GND GND V V LCD LCD COM0 COM0 GND GND V LCD GND SEG0 - COM0 GND SEG1 - COM0 -V LCD Frame Frame Frame Frame 23.3.2 1/2 Duty and 1/2 Bias For LCD with two common terminals (1/2 duty) a more complex waveform must be used to indi- vidually control segments. Although 1/3 bias can be selected 1/2 bias is most common for these displays. Waveform is shown in Figure 23-4. SEG0 - COM0 is the voltage across a segment that is on, and SEG0 - COM1 is the voltage across a segment that is off. 233 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Figure 23-4. Driving a LCD with Two Common Terminals V V LCD LCD SEG0 SEG0 GND GND V V LCD LCD 1/ V COM0 1/ V COM1 2 LCD 2 LCD GND GND V V LCD LCD 1/ V 1/ V 2 LCD 2 LCD GND SEG0 - COM0 GND SEG0 - COM1 -1/ V -1/ V 2 LCD 2 LCD -V -V LCD LCD Frame Frame Frame Frame 23.3.3 1/3 Duty and 1/3 Bias 1/3 bias is usually recommended for LCD with three common terminals (1/3 duty). Waveform is shown in Figure 23-5. SEG0 - COM0 is the voltage across a segment that is on and SEG0- COM1 is the voltage across a segment that is off. Figure 23-5. Driving a LCD with Three Common Terminals V V LCD LCD 2/ V 2/ V 3 LCD 3 LCD 1/ V SEG0 1/ V SEG0 3 LCD 3 LCD GND GND V V LCD LCD 2/ V 2/ V 3 LCD 3 LCD 1/ V COM0 1/ V COM1 3 LCD 3 LCD GND GND V V LCD LCD 2/ V 2/ V 3 LCD 3 LCD 1/ V 1/ V 3 LCD 3 LCD GND SEG0 - COM0 GND SEG0 - COM1 -1/ V -1/ V 3 LCD 3 LCD -2/ V -2/ V 3 LCD 3 LCD -V -V LCD LCD Frame Frame Frame Frame 23.3.4 1/4 Duty and 1/3 Bias 1/3 bias is optimal for LCD displays with four common terminals (1/4 duty). Waveform is shown in Figure 23-6. SEG0 - COM0 is the voltage across a segment that is on and SEG0 - COM1 is the voltage across a segment that is off. 234 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Figure 23-6. Driving a LCD with Four Common Terminals V V LCD LCD 2/ V 2/ V 3 LCD 3 LCD 1/ V SEG0 1/ V SEG0 3 LCD 3 LCD GND GND V V LCD LCD 2/ V 2/ V 3 LCD 3 LCD 1/ V COM0 1/ V COM1 3 LCD 3 LCD GND GND V V LCD LCD 2/ V 2/ V 3 LCD 3 LCD 1/ V 1/ V 3 LCD 3 LCD GND SEG0 - COM0 GND SEG0 - COM1 -1/ V -1/ V 3 LCD 3 LCD -2/ V -2/ V 3 LCD 3 LCD -V -V LCD LCD Frame Frame Frame Frame 23.3.5 Low Power Waveform To reduce toggle activity and hence power consumption a low power waveform can be selected by writing LCDAB to one. Low power waveform requires two subsequent frames with the same display data to obtain zero DC voltage. Consequently data latching and Interrupt Flag is only set every second frame. Default and low power waveform is shown in Figure 23-7 for 1/3 duty and 1/3 bias. For other selections of duty and bias, the effect is similar. Figure 23-7. Default and Low Power Waveform V V LCD LCD 2/ V 2/ V 3 LCD 3 LCD 1/ V SEG0 1/ V SEG0 3 LCD 3 LCD GND GND V V LCD LCD 2/ V 2/ V 3 LCD 3 LCD 1/ V COM0 1/ V COM0 3 LCD 3 LCD GND GND V V LCD LCD 2/ V 2/ V 3 LCD 3 LCD 1/ V 1/ V 3 LCD 3 LCD GND SEG0 - COM0 GND SEG0 - COM0 -1/ V -1/ V 3 LCD 3 LCD -2/ V -2/ V 3 LCD 3 LCD -V -V LCD LCD Frame Frame Frame Frame 23.3.6 Operation in Sleep Mode When synchronous LCD clock is selected (LCDCS = 0) the LCD display will operate in Idle mode and Power-save mode with any clock source. An asynchronous clock from TOSC1 can be selected as LCD clock by writing the LCDCS bit to one when Calibrated Internal RC Oscillator is selected as system clock source. The LCD will then operate in Idle mode, ADC Noise Reduction mode and Power-save mode. When EXCLK in ASSR Register is written to one, and asynchronous clock is selected, the exter- nal clock input buffer is enabled and an external clock can be input on Timer Oscillator 1 235 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P (TOSC1) pin instead of a 32kHz crystal. See ”Asynchronous Operation of Timer/Counter2” on page 152 for further details. Before entering Power-down mode, Standby mode or ADC Noise Reduction mode with synchro- nous LCD clock selected, the user have to disable the LCD. Refer to ”Disabling the LCD” on page 239. 23.3.7 Display Blanking When LCDBL is written to one, the LCD is blanked after completing the current frame. All seg- ments and common pins are connected to GND, discharging the LCD. Display memory is preserved. Display blanking should be used before disabling the LCD to avoid DC voltage across segments, and a slowly fading image. 23.3.8 Port Mask For LCD with less than 25/40 segment terminals, it is possible to mask some of the unused pins and use them as ordinary port pins instead. Refer to Table 23-3 for details. Unused common pins are automatically configured as port pins. 236 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 23.4 LCD Usage The following section describes how to use the LCD. 23.4.1 LCD Initialization Prior to enabling the LCD some initialization must be preformed. The initialization process nor- mally consists of setting the frame rate, duty, bias and port mask. LCD contrast is set initially, but can also be adjusted during operation. Consider the following LCD as an example: Figure 23-8. LCD 2a 1b 2f 2b 2g 1c 2e 2c 2d 0 1 2 M M M O O O C C C 51 50 49 SEG2 2f 2g .. COM3 48 SEG1 2c 2d 2e SEG0 47 SEG0 1b,1c 2a 2b COM0 COM1 COM2 SEG1 46 ATmega329 Connection table SEG2 45 Display: TN Positive, Reflective Number of common terminals: 3 Number of segment terminals: 21 Bias system: 1/3 Bias Drive system: 1/3 Duty Operating voltage: 3.0 ± 0.3 V 237 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Assembly Code Example(1) LCD_Init: ; Use 32kHz crystal oscillator ; 1/3 Bias and 1/3 duty, SEG21:SEG24 is used as port pins ldi r16, (1<<LCDCS) | (1<<LCDMUX1)| (1<<LCDPM2) sts LCDCRB, r16 ; Using 16 as prescaler selection and 7 as LCD Clock Divide ; gives a frame rate of 49 Hz ldi r16, (1<<LCDCD2) | (1<<LCDCD1) sts LCDFRR, r16 ; Set segment drive time to 125 µs and output voltage to 3.3 V ldi r16, (1<<LCDDC1) | (1<<LCDCC3) | (1<<LCDCC2) | (1<<LCDCC1) sts LCDCCR, r16 ; Enable LCD, default waveform and no interrupt enabled ldi r16, (1<<LCDEN) sts LCDCRA, r16 ret C Code Example(1) Void LCD_Init(void); { /* Use 32kHz crystal oscillator */ /* 1/3 Bias and 1/3 duty, SEG21:SEG24 is used as port pins */ LCDCRB = (1<<LCDCS) | (1<<LCDMUX1)| (1<<LCDPM2); /* Using 16 as prescaler selection and 7 as LCD Clock Divide */ /* gives a frame rate of 49 Hz */ LCDFRR = (1<<LCDCD2) | (1<<LCDCD1); /* Set segment drive time to 125 µs and output voltage to 3.3 V*/ LCDCCR = (1<<LCDDC1) | (1<<LCDCC3) | (1<<LCDCC2) | (1<<LCDCC1); /* Enable LCD, default waveform and no interrupt enabled */ LCDCRA = (1<<LCDEN); } Note: 1. See ”About Code Examples” on page 9 Before a re-initialization is done, the LCD controller/driver should be disabled 238 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 23.4.2 Updating the LCD Display memory (LCDDR0, LCDDR1,...), LCD Blanking (LCDBL), Low power waveform (LCDAB) and contrast control (LCDCCR) are latched prior to every new frame. There are no restrictions on writing these LCD Register locations, but an LCD data update may be split between two frames if data are latched while an update is in progress. To avoid this, an interrupt routine can be used to update Display memory, LCD Blanking, Low power waveform, and con- trast control, just after data are latched. In the example below we assume SEG10 and COM1 and SEG4 in COM0 are the only segments changed from frame to frame. Data are stored in r20 and r21 for simplicity Assembly Code Example(1) LCD_update: ; LCD Blanking and Low power waveform are unchanged. ; Update Display memory. sts LCDDR0, r20 sts LCDDR6, r21 ret C Code Example(1) Void LCD_update(unsigned char data1, data2); { /* LCD Blanking and Low power waveform are unchanged. */ /* Update Display memory. */ LCDDR0 = data1; LCDDR6 = data2; } Note: 1. See ”About Code Examples” on page 9. 23.4.3 Disabling the LCD In some application it may be necessary to disable the LCD. This is the case if the MCU enters Power-down mode where no clock source is present. The LCD should be completely discharged before being disabled. No DC voltage should be left across any segment. The best way to achieve this is to use the LCD Blanking feature that drives all segment pins and common pins to GND. When the LCD is disabled, port function is activated again. Therefore, the user must check that port pins connected to a LCD terminal are either tri-state or output low (sink). 239 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Assembly Code Example(1) LCD_disable: ; Wait until a new frame is started. Wait_1: lds r16, LCDCRA sbrs r16, LCDIF rjmp Wait_1 ; Set LCD Blanking and clear interrupt flag ; by writing a logical one to the flag. ldi r16, (1<<LCDEN)|(1<<LCDIF)|(1<<LCDBL) sts LCDCRA, r16 ; Wait until LCD Blanking is effective. Wait_2: lds r16, LCDCRA sbrs r16, LCDIF rjmp Wait_2 ; Disable LCD. ldi r16, (0<<LCDEN) sts LCDCRA, r16 ret C Code Example(1) Void LCD_disable(void); { /* Wait until a new frame is started. */ while ( !(LCDCRA & (1<<LCDIF)) ) ; /* Set LCD Blanking and clear interrupt flag */ /* by writing a logical one to the flag. */ LCDCRA = (1<<LCDEN)|(1<<LCDIF)|(1<<LCDBL); /* Wait until LCD Blanking is effective. */ while ( !(LCDCRA & (1<<LCDIF)) ) ; /* Disable LCD */ LCDCRA = (0<<LCDEN); } Note: 1. See ”About Code Examples” on page 9. 240 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 23.5 Register Description 23.5.1 LCDCRA – LCD Control and Status Register A Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 (0xE4) LCDEN LCDAB – LCDIF LCDIE LCDBD LCDCCD LCDBL LCDCRA Read/Write R/W R/W R R/W R/W R R R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 • Bit 7 – LCDEN: LCD Enable Writing this bit to one enables the LCD Controller/Driver. By writing it to zero, the LCD is turned off immediately. Turning the LCD Controller/Driver off while driving a display, enables ordinary port function, and DC voltage can be applied to the display if ports are configured as output. It is recommended to drive output to ground if the LCD Controller/Driver is disabled to discharge the display. • Bit 6 – LCDAB: LCD Low Power Waveform When LCDAB is written logic zero, the default waveform is output on the LCD pins. When LCDAB is written logic one, the Low Power Waveform is output on the LCD pins. If this bit is modified during display operation the change takes place at the beginning of a new frame. • Bit 5 – Reserved Bit This bit is reserved and will always read as zero. • Bit 4 – LCDIF: LCD Interrupt Flag This bit is set by hardware at the beginning of a new frame, at the same time as the display data is updated. The LCD Start of Frame Interrupt is executed if the LCDIE bit and the I-bit in SREG are set. LCDIF is cleared by hardware when executing the corresponding Interrupt Handling Vector. Alternatively, writing a logical one to the flag clears LCDIF. Beware that if doing a Read- Modify-Write on LCDCRA, a pending interrupt can be disabled. If Low Power Waveform is selected the Interrupt Flag is set every second frame. • Bit 3 – LCDIE: LCD Interrupt Enable When this bit is written to one and the I-bit in SREG is set, the LCD Start of Frame Interrupt is enabled. • Bit 2 – LCDBD: LCD Buffer Disable The intermediate voltage levels in the LCD are generated by an internal resistive voltage divider and passed through buffer to increase the current driving capability. By writing this bit to one the buffers are turned off and bypassed, resulting in decreased power consumption. The total resis- tance of the voltage divider is nominally 400 k between LCDCAP and GND. • Bit 1 – LCDCCD: LCD Contrast Control Disable Writing this bit to one disables the internal power supply for the LCD driver. The desired voltage must be applied to the LCDCAP pin from an external power supply. To avoid conflict between internal and external power supply, this bit must be written as '1' prior to or simultaneously with writing '1' to the LCDEN bit. 241 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P • Bit 0 – LCDBL: LCD Blanking When this bit is written to one, the display will be blanked after completion of a frame. All seg- ment and common pins will be driven to ground. 23.5.2 LCDCRB – LCD Control and Status Register B Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 (0xE5) LCDCS LCD2B LCDMUX1 LCDMUX0 LCDPM3 LCDPM2 LCDPM1 LCDPM0 LCDCRB Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Note: Bit 3, LCDPM3 is only available in ATmega3290P. • Bit 7 – LCDCS: LCD Clock Select When this bit is written to zero, the system clock is used. When this bit is written to one, the external asynchronous clock source is used. The asynchronous clock source is either Timer/Counter Oscillator or external clock, depending on EXCLK in ASSR. See ”Asynchronous Operation of Timer/Counter2” on page 152 for further details. • Bit 6 – LCD2B: LCD 1/2 Bias Select When this bit is written to zero, 1/3 bias is used. When this bit is written to one, ½ bias is used. Refer to the LCD Manufacture for recommended bias selection. • Bit 5:4 – LCDMUX1:0: LCD Mux Select The LCDMUX1:0 bits determine the duty cycle. Common pins that are not used are ordinary port pins. The different duty selections are shown in Table 23-2. Table 23-2. LCD Duty Select LCDMUX1 LCDMUX0 Duty Bias COM Pin I/O Port Pin 0 0 Static Static COM0 COM1:3 0 1 1/2 1/2 or 1/3(1) COM0:1 COM2:3 1 0 1/3 1/2 or 1/3(1) COM0:2 COM3 1 1 1/4 1/2 or 1/3(1) COM0:3 None Note: 1. 1/2 bias when LCD2B is written to one and 1/3 otherwise. • Bits 3:0 – LCDPM3:0: LCD Port Mask The LCDPM3:0 bits determine the number of port pins to be used as segment drivers. The dif- ferent selections are shown in Table 23-3. Unused pins can be used as ordinary port pins. Table 23-3. LCD Port Mask (Values in bold are only available in ATmega3290P) I/O Port in Use as Maximum Number LCDPM3 LCDPM2 LCDPM1 LCDPM0 Segment Driver of Segments 0 0 0 0 SEG0:12 13 0 0 0 1 SEG0:14 15 0 0 1 0 SEG0:16 17 0 0 1 1 SEG0:18 19 242 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Table 23-3. LCD Port Mask (Values in bold are only available in ATmega3290P) (Continued) I/O Port in Use as Maximum Number LCDPM3 LCDPM2 LCDPM1 LCDPM0 Segment Driver of Segments 0 1 0 0 SEG0:20 21 0 1 0 1 SEG0:22 23 0 1 1 0 SEG0:23 24 0 1 1 1 SEG0:24 25 1 0 0 0 SEG0:26 27 1 0 0 1 SEG0:28 29 1 0 1 0 SEG0:30 31 1 0 1 1 SEG0:32 33 1 1 0 0 SEG0:34 35 1 1 0 1 SEG0:36 37 1 1 1 0 SEG0:38 39 1 1 1 1 SEG0:39 40 Note: 1. LCDPM3 is reserved and will always read as zero in ATmega329P. 23.5.3 LCDFRR – LCD Frame Rate Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 (0xE6) – LCDPS2 LCDPS1 LCDPS0 – LCDCD2 LCDCD1 LCDCD0 LCDFRR Read/Write R R/W R/W R/W R R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 • Bit 7 – Reserved This bit is reserved and will always read as zero. • Bits 6:4 – LCDPS2:0: LCD Prescaler Select The LCDPS2:0 bits selects tap point from a prescaler. The prescaled output can be further divided by setting the clock divide bits (LCDCD2:0). The different selections are shown in Table 23-4. Together they determine the prescaled LCD clock (clk ), which is clocking the LCD LCD_PS module. Table 23-4. LCD Prescaler Select Output from Applied Prescaled LCD Clock Frequency Prescaler when LCDCD2:0 = 0, Duty=1/4, and LCDPS2 LCDPS1 LCDPS0 clk /N Frame Rate = 64 Hz LCD 0 0 0 clk /16 8.1kHz LCD 0 0 1 clk /64 33kHz LCD 0 1 0 clk /128 66kHz LCD 0 1 1 clk /256 130kHz LCD 1 0 0 clk /512 260kHz LCD 243 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Table 23-4. LCD Prescaler Select (Continued) Output from Applied Prescaled LCD Clock Frequency Prescaler when LCDCD2:0 = 0, Duty=1/4, and LCDPS2 LCDPS1 LCDPS0 clk /N Frame Rate = 64 Hz LCD 1 0 1 clk /1024 520kHz LCD 1 1 0 clk /2048 1MHz LCD 1 1 1 clk /4096 2MHz LCD • Bit 3 – Reserved This bit is reserved and will always read as zero. • Bits 2:0 – LCDCD2:0: LCD Clock Divide 2, 1, and 0 The LCDCD2:0 bits determine division ratio in the clock divider. The various selections are shown in Table 23-5. This Clock Divider gives extra flexibility in frame rate selection. Table 23-5. LCD Clock Divide Output from Prescaler clk = 32.768kHz, N = 16, and Duty = LCD LCDCD2 LCDCD1 LCDCD0 divided by (D): 1/4, gives a frame rate of: 0 0 0 1 256Hz 0 0 1 2 128Hz 0 1 0 3 85.3Hz 0 1 1 4 64Hz 1 0 0 5 51.2Hz 1 0 1 6 42.7Hz 1 1 0 7 36.6Hz 1 1 1 8 32Hz The frame frequency can be calculated by the following equation: f clk f = --------------L--C---D------- frame KND Where: N = prescaler divider (16, 64, 128, 256, 512, 1024, 2048, or 4096). K = 8 for duty = 1/4, 1/2, and static. K = 6 for duty = 1/3. D = Division factor (see Table 23-5 on page 244) This is a very flexible scheme, and users are encouraged to calculate their own table to investi- gate the possible frame rates from the formula above. Note when using 1/3 duty the frame rate 244 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P is increased with 33% when Frame Rate Register is constant. Example of frame rate calculation is shown in Table 23-6 on page 245. Table 23-6. Example of frame rate calculation clk duty K N LCDCD2:0 D Frame Rate LCD 4MHz 1/4 8 2048 011 4 4000000/(8*2048*4) = 61Hz 4MHz 1/3 6 2048 011 4 4000000/(6*2048*4) = 81Hz 32.768kHz Static 8 16 000 1 32768/(8*16*1) = 256Hz 32.768kHz 1/2 8 16 100 5 32768/(8*16*5) = 51Hz 23.5.4 LCDCCR – LCD Contrast Control Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 (0xE7) LCDDC2 LCDDC1 LCDDC0 LCDNDT LCDCC3 LCDCC2 LCDCC1 LCDCC0 LCDCCR Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 • Bits 7:5 – LCDDC2:0: LDC Display Configuration The LCDDC2:0 bits determine the amount of time the LCD drivers are turned on for each volt- age transition on segment and common pins. A short drive time will lead to lower power consumption, but displays with high internal resistance may need longer drive time to achieve satisfactory contrast. Note that the drive time will never be longer than one half prescaled LCD clock period, even if the selected drive time is longer. When using static duty or blanking, drive time will always be one half prescaled LCD clock period. New values take effect immediately, and can cause small glitches in the display output. This can be avoided by setting the LCDBL in LCDCRA, and wait to the next start of frame before chang- ing LCDDC2:0. Table 23-7. LCD Display Configuration LCDDC2 LCDDC1 LCDDC0 Nominal drive time 0 0 0 300µs 0 0 1 70µs 0 1 0 150µs 0 1 1 450µs 1 0 0 575µs 1 0 1 850µs 1 1 0 1150µs 1 1 1 50% of clk LCD_PS Note: The drive time will be longer dependent on oscillator startup time. • Bit 4 – LCDMDT: LCD Maximum Drive Time Writing this bit to one turns the LCD drivers on 100% all the time, regardless of the drive time configured by LCDDC2:0. 245 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P • Bits 3:0 – LCDCC3:0: LCD Contrast Control The LCDCC3:0 bits determine the maximum voltage V on segment and common pins. The LCD different selections are shown in Table 23-8 on page 246. New values take effect every begin- ning of a new frame. Table 23-8. LCD Contrast Control LCDCC3 LCDCC2 LCDCC1 LCDCC0 Maximum Voltage V LCD 0 0 0 0 2.60 0 0 0 1 2.65 0 0 1 0 2.70 0 0 1 1 2.75 0 1 0 0 2.80 0 1 0 1 2.85 0 1 1 0 2.90 0 1 1 1 2.95 1 0 0 0 3.00 1 0 0 1 3.05 1 0 1 0 3.10 1 0 1 1 3.15 1 1 0 0 3.20 1 1 0 1 3.25 1 1 1 0 3.30 1 1 1 1 3.35 246 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 23.5.5 LCD Memory Mapping Write a LCD memory bit to one and the corresponding segment will be energized (visible). Unused LCD Memory bits for the actual display can be used freely as storage. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 COM3 SEG339 SEG338 SEG337 SEG336 SEG335 SEG334 SEG333 SEG332 LCDDR19 COM3 SEG331 SEG330 SEG329 SEG328 SEG327 SEG326 SEG325 SEG324 LCDDR18 COM3 SEG323 SEG322 SEG321 SEG320 SEG319 SEG318 SEG317 SEG316 LCDDR17 COM3 SEG315 SEG314 SEG313 SEG312 SEG311 SEG310 SEG309 SEG308 LCDDR16 COM3 SEG307 SEG306 SEG305 SEG304 SEG303 SEG302 SEG301 SEG300 LCDDR15 COM2 SEG239 SEG238 SEG237 SEG236 SEG235 SEG234 SEG233 SEG232 LCDDR14 COM2 SEG231 SEG230 SEG229 SEG228 SEG227 SEG226 SEG225 SEG224 LCDDR13 COM2 SEG223 SEG222 SEG221 SEG220 SEG219 SEG218 SEG217 SEG216 LCDDR12 COM2 SEG215 SEG214 SEG213 SEG212 SEG211 SEG210 SEG209 SEG208 LCDDR11 COM2 SEG207 SEG206 SEG205 SEG204 SEG203 SEG202 SEG201 SEG200 LCDDR10 COM1 SEG139 SEG138 SEG137 SEG136 SEG135 SEG134 SEG133 SEG132 LCDDR9 COM1 SEG131 SEG130 SEG129 SEG128 SEG127 SEG126 SEG125 SEG124 LCDDR8 COM1 SEG123 SEG122 SEG121 SEG120 SEG119 SEG118 SEG117 SEG116 LCDDR7 COM1 SEG115 SEG114 SEG113 SEG112 SEG111 SEG110 SEG109 SEG108 LCDDR6 COM1 SEG107 SEG106 SEG105 SEG104 SEG103 SEG102 SEG101 SEG100 LCDDR5 COM0 SEG039 SEG038 SEG037 SEG036 SEG035 SEG034 SEG033 SEG032 LCDDR4 COM0 SEG031 SEG030 SEG029 SEG028 SEG027 SEG026 SEG025 SEG024 LCDDR3 COM0 SEG023 SEG022 SEG021 SEG020 SEG019 SEG018 SEG017 SEG016 LCDDR2 COM0 SEG015 SEG014 SEG013 SEG012 SEG011 SEG010 SEG009 SEG008 LCDDR1 COM0 SEG007 SEG006 SEG005 SEG004 SEG003 SEG002 SEG001 SEG000 LCDDR0 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 247 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 24. JTAG Interface and On-chip Debug System 24.1 Features • JTAG (IEEE std. 1149.1 Compliant) Interface • Boundary-scan Capabilities According to the IEEE std. 1149.1 (JTAG) Standard • Debugger Access to: – All Internal Peripheral Units – Internal and External RAM – The Internal Register File – Program Counter – EEPROM and Flash Memories • Extensive On-chip Debug Support for Break Conditions, Including – AVR Break Instruction – Break on Change of Program Memory Flow – Single Step Break – Program Memory Break Points on Single Address or Address Range – Data Memory Break Points on Single Address or Address Range • Programming of Flash, EEPROM, Fuses, and Lock Bits through the JTAG Interface • On-chip Debugging Supported by AVR Studio® 24.2 Overview The AVR IEEE std. 1149.1 compliant JTAG interface can be used for • Testing PCBs by using the JTAG Boundary-scan capability • Programming the non-volatile memories, Fuses and Lock bits • On-chip debugging A brief description is given in the following sections. Detailed descriptions for Programming via the JTAG interface, and using the Boundary-scan Chain can be found in the sections ”Program- ming via the JTAG Interface” on page 317 and ”IEEE 1149.1 (JTAG) Boundary-scan” on page 254, respectively. The On-chip Debug support is considered being private JTAG instructions, and distributed within ATMEL and to selected third party vendors only. Figure 24-1 shows a block diagram of the JTAG interface and the On-chip Debug system. The TAP Controller is a state machine controlled by the TCK and TMS signals. The TAP Controller selects either the JTAG Instruction Register or one of several Data Registers as the scan chain (Shift Register) between the TDI – input and TDO – output. The Instruction Register holds JTAG instructions controlling the behavior of a Data Register. The ID-Register, Bypass Register, and the Boundary-scan Chain are the Data Registers used for board-level testing. The JTAG Programming Interface (actually consisting of several physical and virtual Data Registers) is used for serial programming via the JTAG interface. The Internal Scan Chain and Break Point Scan Chain are used for On-chip debugging only. 24.3 TAP – Test Access Port The JTAG interface is accessed through four of the AVR’s pins. In JTAG terminology, these pins constitute the Test Access Port – TAP. These pins are: • TMS: Test mode select. This pin is used for navigating through the TAP-controller state machine. • TCK: Test Clock. JTAG operation is synchronous to TCK. 248 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P • TDI: Test Data In. Serial input data to be shifted in to the Instruction Register or Data Register (Scan Chains). • TDO: Test Data Out. Serial output data from Instruction Register or Data Register. The IEEE std. 1149.1 also specifies an optional TAP signal; TRST – Test ReSeT – which is not provided. When the JTAGEN fuse is unprogrammed, these four TAP pins are normal port pins and the TAP controller is in reset. When programmed and the JTD bit in MCUCR is cleared, the TAP pins are internally pulled high and the JTAG is enabled for Boundary-scan and programming. The device is shipped with this fuse programmed. For the On-chip Debug system, in addition to the JTAG interface pins, the RESET pin is moni- tored by the debugger to be able to detect external reset sources. The debugger can also pull the RESET pin low to reset the whole system, assuming only open collectors on the reset line are used in the application. Figure 24-1. Block Diagram I/O PORT 0 DEVICE BOUNDARY BOUNDARY SCAN CHAIN TDI JTAG PROGRAMMING TDO TAP INTERFACE TCK CONTROLLER TMS AVR CPU INTERNAL INRSETGRUISCTTEIRON MFELMAOSRHY AddDreastas CSHCAAINN PInCstruction ID REGISTER BREAKPOINT UNIT M FLOW CONTROL U BYPASS UNIT X REGISTER DIGITAL ANALOG PERIPHERAL PERIPHERIAL Analog inputs UNITS UNITS BREAKPOINT SCAN CHAIN JTAG / AVR CORE COMMUNICATION ADDRESS INTERFACE DECODER OCD STATUS AND CONTROL Control & Clock lines I/O PORT n 249 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Figure 24-2. TAP Controller State Diagram 1 Test-Logic-Reset 0 0 Run-Test/Idle 1 Select-DR Scan 1 Select-IR Scan 1 0 0 1 1 Capture-DR Capture-IR 0 0 Shift-DR 0 Shift-IR 0 1 1 1 1 Exit1-DR Exit1-IR 0 0 Pause-DR 0 Pause-IR 0 1 1 0 0 Exit2-DR Exit2-IR 1 1 Update-DR Update-IR 1 0 1 0 24.4 TAP Controller The TAP controller is a 16-state finite state machine that controls the operation of the Boundary- scan circuitry, JTAG programming circuitry, or On-chip Debug system. The state transitions depicted in Figure 24-2 depend on the signal present on TMS (shown adjacent to each state transition) at the time of the rising edge at TCK. The initial state after a Power-on Reset is Test- Logic-Reset. As a definition in this document, the LSB is shifted in and out first for all Shift Registers. Assuming Run-Test/Idle is the present state, a typical scenario for using the JTAG interface is: • At the TMS input, apply the sequence 1, 1, 0, 0 at the rising edges of TCK to enter the Shift Instruction Register – Shift-IR state. While in this state, shift the four bits of the JTAG instructions into the JTAG Instruction Register from the TDI input at the rising edge of TCK. The TMS input must be held low during input of the 3 LSBs in order to remain in the Shift-IR state. The MSB of the instruction is shifted in when this state is left by setting TMS high. While the instruction is shifted in from the TDI pin, the captured IR-state 0x01 is shifted out on the TDO pin. The JTAG Instruction selects a particular Data Register as path between TDI and TDO and controls the circuitry surrounding the selected Data Register. 250 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P • Apply the TMS sequence 1, 1, 0 to re-enter the Run-Test/Idle state. The instruction is latched onto the parallel output from the Shift Register path in the Update-IR state. The Exit-IR, Pause- IR, and Exit2-IR states are only used for navigating the state machine. • At the TMS input, apply the sequence 1, 0, 0 at the rising edges of TCK to enter the Shift Data Register – Shift-DR state. While in this state, upload the selected Data Register (selected by the present JTAG instruction in the JTAG Instruction Register) from the TDI input at the rising edge of TCK. In order to remain in the Shift-DR state, the TMS input must be held low during input of all bits except the MSB. The MSB of the data is shifted in when this state is left by setting TMS high. While the Data Register is shifted in from the TDI pin, the parallel inputs to the Data Register captured in the Capture-DR state is shifted out on the TDO pin. • Apply the TMS sequence 1, 1, 0 to re-enter the Run-Test/Idle state. If the selected Data Register has a latched parallel-output, the latching takes place in the Update-DR state. The Exit-DR, Pause-DR, and Exit2-DR states are only used for navigating the state machine. As shown in the state diagram, the Run-Test/Idle state need not be entered between selecting JTAG instruction and using Data Registers, and some JTAG instructions may select certain functions to be performed in the Run-Test/Idle, making it unsuitable as an Idle state. Note: 1. Independent of the initial state of the TAP Controller, the Test-Logic-Reset state can always be entered by holding TMS high for five TCK clock periods. For detailed information on the JTAG specification, refer to the literature listed in ”Bibliography” on page 253. 24.5 Using the Boundary-scan Chain A complete description of the Boundary-scan capabilities are given in the section ”IEEE 1149.1 (JTAG) Boundary-scan” on page 254. 24.6 Using the On-chip Debug System As shown in Figure 24-1, the hardware support for On-chip Debugging consists mainly of • A scan chain on the interface between the internal AVR CPU and the internal peripheral units. • Break Point unit. • Communication interface between the CPU and JTAG system. All read or modify/write operations needed for implementing the Debugger are done by applying AVR instructions via the internal AVR CPU Scan Chain. The CPU sends the result to an I/O memory mapped location which is part of the communication interface between the CPU and the JTAG system. The Break Point Unit implements Break on Change of Program Flow, Single Step Break, two Program Memory Break Points, and two combined Break Points. Together, the four Break Points can be configured as either: • 4 single Program Memory Break Points. • 3 Single Program Memory Break Point + 1 single Data Memory Break Point. • 2 single Program Memory Break Points + 2 single Data Memory Break Points. • 2 single Program Memory Break Points + 1 Program Memory Break Point with mask (“range Break Point”). • 2 single Program Memory Break Points + 1 Data Memory Break Point with mask (“range Break Point”). 251 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P A debugger, like the AVR Studio®, may however use one or more of these resources for its inter- nal purpose, leaving less flexibility to the end-user. A list of the On-chip Debug specific JTAG instructions is given in ”On-chip Debug Specific JTAG Instructions” on page 252. The JTAGEN Fuse must be programmed to enable the JTAG Test Access Port. In addition, the OCDEN Fuse must be programmed and no Lock bits must be set for the On-chip debug system to work. As a security feature, the On-chip debug system is disabled when either of the LB1 or LB2 Lock bits are set. Otherwise, the On-chip debug system would have provided a back-door into a secured device. The AVR Studio enables the user to fully control execution of programs on an AVR device with On-chip Debug capability, AVR In-Circuit Emulator, or the built-in AVR Instruction Set Simulator. AVR Studio supports source level execution of Assembly programs assembled with Atmel Cor- poration’s AVR Assembler and C programs compiled with third party vendors’ compilers. AVR Studio runs under Microsoft® Windows® 95/98/2000, Windows NT® and Windows XP®. For a full description of the AVR Studio, please refer to the AVR Studio User Guide. Only high- lights are presented in this document. All necessary execution commands are available in AVR Studio, both on source level and on disassembly level. The user can execute the program, single step through the code either by tracing into or stepping over functions, step out of functions, place the cursor on a statement and execute until the statement is reached, stop the execution, and reset the execution target. In addition, the user can have an unlimited number of code Break Points (using the BREAK instruction) and up to two data memory Break Points, alternatively combined as a mask (range) Break Point. 24.7 On-chip Debug Specific JTAG Instructions The On-chip debug support is considered being private JTAG instructions, and distributed within Atmel and to selected third party vendors only. Instruction opcodes are listed for reference. 24.7.1 PRIVATE0; 0x8 Private JTAG instruction for accessing On-chip debug system. 24.7.2 PRIVATE1; 0x9 Private JTAG instruction for accessing On-chip debug system. 24.7.3 PRIVATE2; 0xA Private JTAG instruction for accessing On-chip debug system. 24.7.4 PRIVATE3; 0xB Private JTAG instruction for accessing On-chip debug system. 24.8 Using the JTAG Programming Capabilities Programming of AVR parts via JTAG is performed via the 4-pin JTAG port, TCK, TMS, TDI, and TDO. These are the only pins that need to be controlled/observed to perform JTAG program- ming (in addition to power pins). It is not required to apply 12V externally. The JTAGEN Fuse must be programmed and the JTD bit in the MCUCR Register must be cleared to enable the JTAG Test Access Port. 252 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P The JTAG programming capability supports: • Flash programming and verifying. • EEPROM programming and verifying. • Fuse programming and verifying. • Lock bit programming and verifying. The Lock bit security is exactly as in parallel programming mode. If the Lock bits LB1 or LB2 are programmed, the OCDEN Fuse cannot be programmed unless first doing a chip erase. This is a security feature that ensures no back-door exists for reading out the content of a secured device. The details on programming through the JTAG interface and programming specific JTAG instructions are given in the section ”Programming via the JTAG Interface” on page 317. 24.9 Bibliography For more information about general Boundary-scan, the following literature can be consulted: • IEEE: IEEE Std. 1149.1-1990. IEEE Standard Test Access Port and Boundary-scan Architecture, IEEE, 1993. Colin Maunder: The Board Designers Guide to Testable Logic Circuits, Addison-Wesley, 1992. 24.10 Register Description 24.10.1 OCDR – On-chip Debug Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0x31 (0x51) MSB/IDRD LSB OCDR Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 The OCDR Register provides a communication channel from the running program in the micro- controller to the debugger. The CPU can transfer a byte to the debugger by writing to this location. At the same time, an internal flag; I/O Debug Register Dirty – IDRD – is set to indicate to the debugger that the register has been written. When the CPU reads the OCDR Register the 7 LSB will be from the OCDR Register, while the MSB is the IDRD bit. The debugger clears the IDRD bit when it has read the information. In some AVR devices, this register is shared with a standard I/O location. In this case, the OCDR Register can only be accessed if the OCDEN Fuse is programmed, and the debugger enables access to the OCDR Register. In all other cases, the standard I/O location is accessed. Refer to the debugger documentation for further information on how to use this register. 253 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 25. IEEE 1149.1 (JTAG) Boundary-scan 25.1 Features • JTAG (IEEE std. 1149.1 compliant) Interface • Boundary-scan Capabilities According to the JTAG Standard • Full Scan of all Port Functions as well as Analog Circuitry having Off-chip Connections • Supports the Optional IDCODE Instruction • Additional Public AVR_RESET Instruction to Reset the AVR 25.2 Overview The Boundary-scan chain has the capability of driving and observing the logic levels on the digi- tal I/O pins, as well as the boundary between digital and analog logic for analog circuitry having off-chip connections. At system level, all ICs having JTAG capabilities are connected serially by the TDI/TDO signals to form a long Shift Register. An external controller sets up the devices to drive values at their output pins, and observe the input values received from other devices. The controller compares the received data with the expected result. In this way, Boundary-scan pro- vides a mechanism for testing interconnections and integrity of components on Printed Circuits Boards by using the four TAP signals only. The four IEEE 1149.1 defined mandatory JTAG instructions IDCODE, BYPASS, SAMPLE/PRE- LOAD, and EXTEST, as well as the AVR specific public JTAG instruction AVR_RESET can be used for testing the Printed Circuit Board. Initial scanning of the Data Register path will show the ID-Code of the device, since IDCODE is the default JTAG instruction. It may be desirable to have the AVR device in reset during test mode. If not reset, inputs to the device may be deter- mined by the scan operations, and the internal software may be in an undetermined state when exiting the test mode. Entering reset, the outputs of any port pin will instantly enter the high impedance state, making the HIGHZ instruction redundant. If needed, the BYPASS instruction can be issued to make the shortest possible scan chain through the device. The device can be set in the reset state either by pulling the external RESET pin low, or issuing the AVR_RESET instruction with appropriate setting of the Reset Data Register. The EXTEST instruction is used for sampling external pins and loading output pins with data. The data from the output latch will be driven out on the pins as soon as the EXTEST instruction is loaded into the JTAG IR-Register. Therefore, the SAMPLE/PRELOAD should also be used for setting initial values to the scan ring, to avoid damaging the board when issuing the EXTEST instruction for the first time. SAMPLE/PRELOAD can also be used for taking a snapshot of the external pins during normal operation of the part. The JTAGEN Fuse must be programmed and the JTD bit in the I/O Register MCUCR must be cleared to enable the JTAG Test Access Port. When using the JTAG interface for Boundary-scan, using a JTAG TCK clock frequency higher than the internal chip frequency is possible. The chip clock is not required to run. 254 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 25.3 Data Registers The Data Registers relevant for Boundary-scan operations are: • Bypass Register • Device Identification Register • Reset Register • Boundary-scan Chain 25.3.1 Bypass Register The Bypass Register consists of a single Shift Register stage. When the Bypass Register is selected as path between TDI and TDO, the register is reset to 0 when leaving the Capture-DR controller state. The Bypass Register can be used to shorten the scan chain on a system when the other devices are to be tested. 25.3.2 Device Identification Register Figure 25-1 shows the structure of the Device Identification Register. Table 25-1. The Format of the Device Identification Register MSB LSB Bit 31 28 27 12 11 1 0 Device ID Version Part Number Manufacturer ID 1 4 bits 16 bits 11 bits 1-bit 25.3.2.1 Version Version is a 4-bit number identifying the revision of the component. The JTAG version number follows the revision of the device. Revision A is 0x0, revision B is 0x1 and so on. 25.3.2.2 Part Number The part number is a 16-bit code identifying the component. The JTAG Part Number is listed in Table 27-6 on page 299. 25.3.2.3 Manufacturer ID The Manufacturer ID is a 11-bit code identifying the manufacturer. The JTAG manufacturer ID for ATMEL is listed in Table 27-6 on page 299. 25.3.3 Reset Register The Reset Register is a test Data Register used to reset the part. Since the AVR tri-states Port Pins when reset, the Reset Register can also replace the function of the unimplemented optional JTAG instruction HIGHZ. A high value in the Reset Register corresponds to pulling the external Reset low. The part is reset as long as there is a high value present in the Reset Register. Depending on the fuse set- tings for the clock options, the part will remain reset for a reset time-out period (refer to ”Clock Sources” on page 28) after releasing the Reset Register. The output from this Data Register is not latched, so the reset will take place immediately, as shown in Figure 25-1. 255 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Figure 25-1. Reset Register To TDO From Other Internal and External Reset Sources From Internal reset D Q TDI ClockDR · AVR_RESET 25.3.4 Boundary-scan Chain The Boundary-scan Chain has the capability of driving and observing the logic levels on the dig- ital I/O pins, as well as the boundary between digital and analog logic for analog circuitry having off-chip connections. See ”Boundary-scan Chain” on page 257 for a complete description. 25.4 Boundary-scan Specific JTAG Instructions The Instruction Register is 4-bit wide, supporting up to 16 instructions. Listed below are the JTAG instructions useful for Boundary-scan operation. Note that the optional HIGHZ instruction is not implemented, but all outputs with tri-state capability can be set in high-impedant state by using the AVR_RESET instruction, since the initial state for all port pins is tri-state. As a definition in this data sheet, the LSB is shifted in and out first for all Shift Registers. The OPCODE for each instruction is shown behind the instruction name in hex format. The text describes which Data Register is selected as path between TDI and TDO for each instruction. 25.4.1 EXTEST; 0x0 Mandatory JTAG instruction for selecting the Boundary-scan Chain as Data Register for testing circuitry external to the AVR package. For port-pins, Pull-up Disable, Output Control, Output Data, and Input Data are all accessible in the scan chain. For Analog circuits having off-chip connections, the interface between the analog and the digital logic is in the scan chain. The con- tents of the latched outputs of the Boundary-scan chain is driven out as soon as the JTAG IR- Register is loaded with the EXTEST instruction. The active states are: • Capture-DR: Data on the external pins are sampled into the Boundary-scan Chain. • Shift-DR: The Internal Scan Chain is shifted by the TCK input. • Update-DR: Data from the scan chain is applied to output pins. 25.4.2 IDCODE; 0x1 Optional JTAG instruction selecting the 32 bit ID-Register as Data Register. The ID-Register consists of a version number, a device number and the manufacturer code chosen by JEDEC. This is the default instruction after power-up. 256 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P The active states are: • Capture-DR: Data in the IDCODE Register is sampled into the Boundary-scan Chain. • Shift-DR: The IDCODE scan chain is shifted by the TCK input. 25.4.3 SAMPLE_PRELOAD; 0x2 Mandatory JTAG instruction for pre-loading the output latches and taking a snap-shot of the input/output pins without affecting the system operation. However, the output latches are not connected to the pins. The Boundary-scan Chain is selected as Data Register. The active states are: • Capture-DR: Data on the external pins are sampled into the Boundary-scan Chain. • Shift-DR: The Boundary-scan Chain is shifted by the TCK input. • Update-DR: Data from the Boundary-scan chain is applied to the output latches. However, the output latches are not connected to the pins. 25.4.4 AVR_RESET; 0xC The AVR specific public JTAG instruction for forcing the AVR device into the Reset mode or releasing the JTAG reset source. The TAP controller is not reset by this instruction. The one bit Reset Register is selected as Data Register. Note that the reset will be active as long as there is a logic “one” in the Reset Chain. The output from this chain is not latched. The active states are: • Shift-DR: The Reset Register is shifted by the TCK input. 25.4.5 BYPASS; 0xF Mandatory JTAG instruction selecting the Bypass Register for Data Register. The active states are: • Capture-DR: Loads a logic “0” into the Bypass Register. • Shift-DR: The Bypass Register cell between TDI and TDO is shifted. 25.5 Boundary-scan Chain The Boundary-scan chain has the capability of driving and observing the logic levels on the digi- tal I/O pins, as well as the boundary between digital and analog logic for analog circuitry having off-chip connection. 25.5.1 Scanning the Digital Port Pins Figure 25-2 shows the Boundary-scan Cell for a bi-directional port pin with pull-up function. The cell consists of a standard Boundary-scan cell for the Pull-up Enable – PUExn – function, and a bi-directional pin cell that combines the three signals Output Control – OCxn, Output Data – ODxn, and Input Data – IDxn, into only a two-stage Shift Register. The port and pin indexes are not used in the following description The Boundary-scan logic is not included in the figures in the Data Sheet. Figure 25-3 shows a simple digital port pin as described in the section ”I/O-Ports” on page 63. The Boundary-scan details from Figure 25-2 replaces the dashed box in Figure 25-3. When no alternate port function is present, the Input Data – ID – corresponds to the PINxn Reg- ister value (but ID has no synchronizer), Output Data corresponds to the PORT Register, Output 257 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Control corresponds to the Data Direction – DD Register, and the Pull-up Enable – PUExn – cor- responds to logic expression PUD · DDxn · PORTxn. Digital alternate port functions are connected outside the dotted box in Figure 25-3 to make the scan chain read the actual pin value. For Analog function, there is a direct connection from the external pin to the analog circuit, and a scan chain is inserted on the interface between the digi- tal logic and the analog circuitry. Figure 25-2. Boundary-scan Cell for Bi-directional Port Pin with Pull-up Function. ShiftDR To Next Cell EXTEST Vcc Pullup Enable (PUE) 0 FF2 LD2 1 0 D Q D Q 1 G Output Control (OC) FF1 LD1 0 0 D Q D Q 1 1 G Output Data (OD) n) X 01 01 DFF0Q DLD0Q 01 Port Pin (P G Input Data (ID) From Last Cell ClockDR UpdateDR 258 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Figure 25-3. General Port Pin Schematic Diagram See Boundary-scan Description for Details! PUExn PUD Q D DDxn QCLR WDx RESET OCxn RDx S U B Pxn ODxn PQORTxDn 01 DATA IDxn QCLR RESET WPx SLEEP RRx WRx SYNCHRONIZER RPx D Q D Q PINxn L Q Q CLKI/O PUD: PULLUP DISABLE WDx: WRITE DDRx PUExn: PULLUP ENABLE for pin Pxn RDx: READ DDRx OCxn: OUTPUT CONTROL for pin Pxn WRx: WRITE PORTx ODxn: OUTPUT DATA to pin Pxn RRx: READ PORTx REGISTER IDxn: INPUT DATA from pin Pxn RPx: READ PORTx PIN SLEEP: SLEEP CONTROL WPx: WRITE PINx REGISTER CLK I / O : I/O CLOCK 25.5.2 Scanning the RESET Pin The RESET pin accepts 5V active low logic for standard reset operation, and 12V active high logic for High Voltage Parallel programming. An observe-only cell as shown in Figure 25-4 is inserted both for the 5V reset signal; RSTT, and the 12V reset signal; RSTHV. Figure 25-4. Observe-only Cell To Next ShiftDR Cell From System Pin To System Logic FF1 0 D Q 1 From ClockDR Previous Cell 259 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 25.5.3 Scanning the Clock Pins The AVR devices have many clock options selectable by fuses. These are: Internal RC Oscilla- tor, External Clock, (High Frequency) Crystal Oscillator, Low-frequency Crystal Oscillator, and Ceramic Resonator. Figure 25-5 shows how each Oscillator with external connection is supported in the scan chain. The Enable signal is supported with a general Boundary-scan cell, while the Oscillator/clock out- put is attached to an observe-only cell. In addition to the main clock, the timer Oscillator is scanned in the same way. The output from the internal RC Oscillator is not scanned, as this Oscillator does not have external connections. Figure 25-5. Boundary-scan Cells for Oscillators and Clock Options XTAL1/TOSC1 XTAL2/TOSC2 To Next To ShiftDR Cell EXTEST Oscillator Next ShiftDR Cell From Digital Logic 0 ENABLE OUTPUT To System Logic 1 0 FF1 D Q D Q 0 1 D Q G 1 From ClockDR UpdateDR Previous From ClockDR Cell Previous Cell Table 25-2 summaries the scan registers for the external clock pin XTAL1, oscillators with XTAL1/XTAL2 connections as well as 32kHz Timer Oscillator. Table 25-2. Scan Signals for the Oscillator(1)(2)(3) Scanned Clock Line Enable Signal Scanned Clock Line Clock Option when not Used EXTCLKEN EXTCLK (XTAL1) External Clock 0 External Crystal OSCON OSCCK 1 External Ceramic Resonator OSC32EN OSC32CK Low Freq. External Crystal 1 Notes: 1. Do not enable more than one clock source as main clock at a time. 2. Scanning an Oscillator output gives unpredictable results as there is a frequency drift between the internal Oscillator and the JTAG TCK clock. If possible, scanning an external clock is preferred. 3. The clock configuration is programmed by fuses. As a fuse is not changed run-time, the clock configuration is considered fixed for a given application. The user is advised to scan the same clock option as to be used in the final system. The enable signals are supported in the scan chain because the system logic can disable clock options in sleep modes, thereby disconnect- ing the Oscillator pins from the scan path if not provided. 260 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 25.5.4 Scanning the Analog Comparator The relevant Comparator signals regarding Boundary-scan are shown in Figure 25-6. The Boundary-scan cell from Figure 25-7 is attached to each of these signals. The signals are described in Table 25-3. The Comparator need not be used for pure connectivity testing, since all analog inputs are shared with a digital port pin as well. Figure 25-6. Analog Comparator BANDGAP REFERENCE ACBG ACD ACO AC_IDLE ACME ADCEN ADC MULTIPLEXER OUTPUT Figure 25-7. General Boundary-scan cell Used for Signals for Comparator and ADC To Next ShiftDR Cell EXTEST From Digital Logic/ 0 From Analog Ciruitry To Analog Circuitry/ 1 To Digital Logic 0 D Q D Q 1 G From ClockDR UpdateDR Previous Cell 261 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Table 25-3. Boundary-scan Signals for the Analog Comparator Direction as Recommended Output Values when Signal Seen from the Input when Not Recommended Inputs Name Comparator Description in Use are Used Turns off Analog Depends upon µC code AC_IDLE input Comparator when 1 being executed true Will become input Analog Comparator ACO output to µC code being 0 Output executed Uses output signal Depends upon µC code ACME input from ADC mux when 0 being executed true Bandgap Reference Depends upon µC code ACBG input 0 enable being executed 25.5.5 Scanning the ADC Figure 25-8 shows a block diagram of the ADC with all relevant control and observe signals. The Boundary-scan cell from Figure 25-4 is attached to each of these signals. The ADC need not be used for pure connectivity testing, since all analog inputs are shared with a digital port pin as well. Figure 25-8. Analog to Digital Converter VCCREN AREF IREFEN 1.11V To Comparator ref PASSEN MUXEN_7 ADC_7 MUXEN_6 ADC_6 MUXEN_5 ADC_5 MUXEN_4 ADCBGEN SCTEST ADC_4 EXTCH 1.22V PRECH MUXEN_3 ref PRECH AREF AREF ADC_3 MUXEN_2 DACOUT ADC_2 DAC_9..0 MUXEN_1 10-bit DAC + COMP COMP MUAXDECN__10 ADCEN - ADC_0 + ACTEN NEGSEL_2 1x ADC_2 - HOLD NEGSEL_1 ADC_1 GNDEN ST NEGSEL_0 ACLK ADC_0 AMPEN The signals are described briefly in Table 25-4. 262 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Table 25-4. Boundary-scan Signals for the ADC(1) Direction as Recommende Output Values when Signal seen d Input when recommended inputs are used, Name from the ADC Description not in use and CPU is not using the ADC COMP Output Comparator Output 0 0 Clock signal to differential amplifier ACLK Input 0 0 implemented as Switch-cap filters Enable path from differential amplifier to ACTEN Input 0 0 the comparator Enable Band-gap reference as negative ADCBGEN Input 0 0 input to comparator ADCEN Input Power-on signal to the ADC 0 0 AMPEN Input Power-on signal to the differential amplifier 0 0 DAC_9 Input Bit 9 of digital value to DAC 1 1 DAC_8 Input Bit 8 of digital value to DAC 0 0 DAC_7 Input Bit 7 of digital value to DAC 0 0 DAC_6 Input Bit 6 of digital value to DAC 0 0 DAC_5 Input Bit 5 of digital value to DAC 0 0 DAC_4 Input Bit 4 of digital value to DAC 0 0 DAC_3 Input Bit 3 of digital value to DAC 0 0 DAC_2 Input Bit 2 of digital value to DAC 0 0 DAC_1 Input Bit 1 of digital value to DAC 0 0 DAC_0 Input Bit 0 of digital value to DAC 0 0 Connect ADC channels 0 - 3 to by-pass EXTCH Input 1 1 path around differential amplifier Ground the negative input to comparator GNDEN Input 0 0 when true Sample & Hold signal. Sample analog signal when low. Hold signal when high. If HOLD Input 1 1 differential amplifier are used, this signal must go active when ACLK is high. Enables Band-gap reference as AREF IREFEN Input 0 0 signal to DAC MUXEN_7 Input Input Mux bit 7 0 0 MUXEN_6 Input Input Mux bit 6 0 0 MUXEN_5 Input Input Mux bit 5 0 0 MUXEN_4 Input Input Mux bit 4 0 0 MUXEN_3 Input Input Mux bit 3 0 0 MUXEN_2 Input Input Mux bit 2 0 0 MUXEN_1 Input Input Mux bit 1 0 0 MUXEN_0 Input Input Mux bit 0 1 1 263 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Table 25-4. Boundary-scan Signals for the ADC(1) (Continued) Direction as Recommende Output Values when Signal seen d Input when recommended inputs are used, Name from the ADC Description not in use and CPU is not using the ADC Input Mux for negative input for differential NEGSEL_2 Input 0 0 signal, bit 2 Input Mux for negative input for differential NEGSEL_1 Input 0 0 signal, bit 1 Input Mux for negative input for differential NEGSEL_0 Input 0 0 signal, bit 0 PASSEN Input Enable pass-gate of differential amplifier. 1 1 Precharge output latch of comparator. PRECH Input 1 1 (Active low) Switch-cap TEST enable. Output from SCTEST Input differential amplifier send out to Port Pin 0 0 having ADC_4 Output of differential amplifier will settle ST Input faster if this signal is high first two ACLK 0 0 periods after AMPEN goes high. VCCREN Input Selects Vcc as the ACC reference voltage. 0 0 Note: 1. Incorrect setting of the switches in Figure 25-8 will make signal contention and may damage the part. There are several input choices to the S&H circuitry on the negative input of the output comparator in Figure 25-8. Make sure only one path is selected from either one ADC pin, Bandgap reference source, or Ground. If the ADC is not to be used during scan, the recommended input values from Table 25-4 should be used. The user is recommended not to use the differential amplifier during scan. Switch-Cap based differential amplifier require fast operation and accurate timing which is difficult to obtain when used in a scan chain. Details concerning operations of the differential amplifier is therefore not provided. The AVR ADC is based on the analog circuitry shown in Figure 25-8 with a successive approxi- mation algorithm implemented in the digital logic. When used in Boundary-scan, the problem is usually to ensure that an applied analog voltage is measured within some limits. This can easily be done without running a successive approximation algorithm: apply the lower limit on the digi- tal DAC[9:0] lines, make sure the output from the comparator is low, then apply the upper limit on the digital DAC[9:0] lines, and verify the output from the comparator to be high. The ADC need not be used for pure connectivity testing, since all analog inputs are shared with a digital port pin as well. When using the ADC, remember the following • The port pin for the ADC channel in use must be configured to be an input with pull-up disabled to avoid signal contention. • In Normal mode, a dummy conversion (consisting of 10 comparisons) is performed when enabling the ADC. The user is advised to wait at least 200ns after enabling the ADC before controlling/observing any ADC signal, or perform a dummy conversion before using the first result. 264 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P • The DAC values must be stable at the midpoint value 0x200 when having the HOLD signal low (Sample mode). As an example, consider the task of verifying a 1.5V ± 5% input signal at ADC channel 3 when the power supply is 5.0V and AREF is externally connected to V . CC The lower limit is: 10241.5V0,955V = 291= 0x123 The upper limit is: 10241.5V1.055V = 323= 0x143 The recommended values from Table 25-4 are used unless other values are given in the algo- rithm in Table 25-5. Only the DAC and port pin values of the Scan Chain are shown. The column “Actions” describes what JTAG instruction to be used before filling the Boundary-scan Register with the succeeding columns. The verification should be done on the data scanned out when scanning in the data on the same row in the table. Table 25-5. Algorithm for Using the ADC PA3. PA3. PA3. Pull-up_ Step Actions ADCEN DAC MUXEN HOLD PRECH Data Control Enable SAMPLE_PR 1 1 0x200 0x08 1 1 0 0 0 ELOAD 2 EXTEST 1 0x200 0x08 0 1 0 0 0 3 1 0x200 0x08 1 1 0 0 0 4 1 0x123 0x08 1 1 0 0 0 5 1 0x123 0x08 1 0 0 0 0 Verify the COMP bit 6 1 0x200 0x08 1 1 0 0 0 scanned out to be 0 7 1 0x200 0x08 0 1 0 0 0 8 1 0x200 0x08 1 1 0 0 0 9 1 0x143 0x08 1 1 0 0 0 10 1 0x143 0x08 1 0 0 0 0 Verify the COMP bit 11 1 0x200 0x08 1 1 0 0 0 scanned out to be 1 Using this algorithm, the timing constraint on the HOLD signal constrains the TCK clock fre- quency. As the algorithm keeps HOLD high for five steps, the TCK clock frequency has to be at least five times the number of scan bits divided by the maximum hold time, t hold,max 265 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 25.6 ATmega329P/3290P Boundary-scan Order Table 25-6 and Table 25-7 shows the Scan order between TDI and TDO when the Boundary- scan chain is selected as data path. Bit 0 is the LSB; the first bit scanned in, and the first bit scanned out. The scan order follows the pin-out order as far as possible. Therefore, the bits of Port A is scanned in the opposite bit order of the other ports. Exceptions from the rules are the Scan chains for the analog circuits, which constitute the most significant bits of the scan chain regardless of which physical pin they are connected to. In Figure 25-2, PXn. Data corresponds to FF0, PXn. Control corresponds to FF1, and PXn. Pull-up_enable corresponds to FF2. Bit 4, 5, 6 and 7 of Port F is not in the scan chain, since these pins constitute the TAP pins when the JTAG is enabled. Table 25-6. ATmega329P Boundary-scan Order, 64-pin Bit Number Signal Name Module 197 AC_IDLE 196 ACO Comparator 195 ACME 194 AINBG 266 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Table 25-6. ATmega329P Boundary-scan Order, 64-pin (Continued) Bit Number Signal Name Module 193 COMP 192 ACLK 191 ACTEN 190 PRIVATE_SIGNAL1(1) 189 ADCBGEN 188 ADCEN 187 AMPEN 186 DAC_9 185 DAC_8 184 DAC_7 183 DAC_6 182 DAC_5 ADC 181 DAC_4 180 DAC_3 179 DAC_2 178 DAC_1 177 DAC_0 176 EXTCH 175 GNDEN 174 HOLD 173 IREFEN 172 MUXEN_7 171 MUXEN_6 170 MUXEN_5 169 MUXEN_4 168 MUXEN_3 167 MUXEN_2 166 MUXEN_1 165 MUXEN_0 164 NEGSEL_2 163 NEGSEL_1 162 NEGSEL_0 161 PASSEN 160 PRECH 159 ST 158 VCCREN 267 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Table 25-6. ATmega329P Boundary-scan Order, 64-pin (Continued) Bit Number Signal Name Module 157 PE0.Data 156 PE0.Control 155 PE0.Pull-up_Enable 154 PE1.Data 153 PE1.Control 152 PE1.Pull-up_Enable 151 PE2.Data 150 PE2.Control 149 PE2.Pull-up_Enable 148 PE3.Data 147 PE3.Control 146 PE3.Pull-up_Enable Port E 145 PE4.Data 144 PE4.Control 143 PE4.Pull-up_Enable 142 PE5.Data 141 PE5.Control 140 PE5.Pull-up_Enable 139 PE6.Data 138 PE6.Control 137 PE6.Pull-up_Enable 136 PE7.Data 135 PE7.Control 134 PE7.Pull-up_Enable 268 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Table 25-6. ATmega329P Boundary-scan Order, 64-pin (Continued) Bit Number Signal Name Module 133 PB0.Data 132 PB0.Control 131 PB0.Pull-up_Enable 130 PB1.Data 129 PB1.Control 128 PB1.Pull-up_Enable 127 PB2.Data 126 PB2.Control 125 PB2.Pull-up_Enable 124 PB3.Data 123 PB3.Control 122 PB3.Pull-up_Enable Port B 121 PB4.Data 120 PB4.Control 119 PB4.Pull-up_Enable 118 PB5.Data 117 PB5.Control 116 PB5.Pull-up_Enable 115 PB6.Data 114 PB6.Control 113 PB6.Pull-up_Enable 112 PB7.Data 111 PB7.Control 110 PB7.Pull-up_Enable 109 PG3.Data 108 PG3.Control 107 PG3.Pull-up_Enable Port G 106 PG4.Data 105 PG4.Control 104 PG4.Pull-up_Enable 103 PG5 (Observe Only) 102 RSTT Reset Logic 101 RSTHV (Observe-only) 269 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Table 25-6. ATmega329P Boundary-scan Order, 64-pin (Continued) Bit Number Signal Name Module 100 EXTCLKEN 99 OSCON Enable signals for main Clock/Oscillators 98 RCOSCEN 97 OSC32EN 96 EXTCLK (XTAL1) 95 OSCCK Clock input and Oscillators for the main clock (Observe-only) 94 RCCK 93 OSC32CK 92 PD0.Data 91 PD0.Control 90 PD0.Pull-up_Enable 89 PD1.Data 88 PD1.Control 87 PD1.Pull-up_Enable 86 PD2.Data 85 PD2.Control 84 PD2.Pull-up_Enable 83 PD3.Data 82 PD3.Control 81 PD3.Pull-up_Enable Port D 80 PD4.Data 79 PD4.Control 78 PD4.Pull-up_Enable 77 PD5.Data 76 PD5.Control 75 PD5.Pull-up_Enable 74 PD6.Data 73 PD6.Control 72 PD6.Pull-up_Enable 71 PD7.Data 70 PD7.Control 69 PD7.Pull-up_Enable 68 PG0.Data 67 PG0.Control Port G 66 PG0.Pull-up_Enable 65 PG1.Data 270 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Table 25-6. ATmega329P Boundary-scan Order, 64-pin (Continued) Bit Number Signal Name Module 64 PG1.Control 63 PG1.Pull-up_Enable 62 PC0.Data 61 PC0.Control 60 PC0.Pull-up_Enable 59 PC1.Data 58 PC1.Control 57 PC1.Pull-up_Enable 56 PC2.Data 55 PC2.Control 54 PC2.Pull-up_Enable 53 PC3.Data 52 PC3.Control 51 PC3.Pull-up_Enable Port C 50 PC4.Data 49 PC4.Control 48 PC4.Pull-up_Enable 47 PC5.Data 46 PC5.Control 45 PC5.Pull-up_Enable 44 PC6.Data 43 PC6.Control 42 PC6.Pull-up_Enable 41 PC7.Data 40 PC7.Control 39 PC7.Pull-up_Enable 38 PG2.Data 37 PG2.Control Port G 36 PG2.Pull-up_Enable 35 PA7.Data 34 PA7.Control 33 PA7.Pull-up_Enable 32 PA6.Data Port A 31 PA6.Control 30 PA6.Pull-up_Enable 29 PA5.Data 271 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Table 25-6. ATmega329P Boundary-scan Order, 64-pin (Continued) Bit Number Signal Name Module 28 PA5.Control 27 PA5.Pull-up_Enable 26 PA4.Data 25 PA4.Control 24 PA4.Pull-up_Enable 23 PA3.Data 22 PA3.Control 21 PA3.Pull-up_Enable 20 PA2.Data 19 PA2.Control 18 PA2.Pull-up_Enable 17 PA1.Data 16 PA1.Control 15 PA1.Pull-up_Enable 14 PA0.Data 13 PA0.Control 12 PA0.Pull-up_Enable 11 PF3.Data 10 PF3.Control 9 PF3.Pull-up_Enable 8 PF2.Data 7 PF2.Control 6 PF2.Pull-up_Enable Port F 5 PF1.Data 4 PF1.Control 3 PF1.Pull-up_Enable 2 PF0.Data 1 PF0.Control 0 PF0.Pull-up_Enable Note: 1. PRIVATE_SIGNAL1 should always be scanned in as zero. 272 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Table 25-7. ATmega3290P Boundary-scan Order, 100-pin Bit Number Signal Name Module 242 AC_IDLE 241 ACO Comparator 240 ACME 239 AINBG 238 COMP 237 ACLK 236 ACTEN 235 PRIVATE_SIGNAL1(1) 234 ADCBGEN 233 ADCEN 232 AMPEN 231 DAC_9 230 DAC_8 229 DAC_7 228 DAC_6 227 DAC_5 226 DAC_4 225 DAC_3 224 DAC_2 223 DAC_1 ADC 222 DAC_0 221 EXTCH 220 GNDEN 219 HOLD 218 IREFEN 217 MUXEN_7 216 MUXEN_6 215 MUXEN_5 214 MUXEN_4 213 MUXEN_3 212 MUXEN_2 211 MUXEN_1 210 MUXEN_0 209 NEGSEL_2 208 NEGSEL_1 273 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Table 25-7. ATmega3290P Boundary-scan Order, 100-pin (Continued) Bit Number Signal Name Module 207 NEGSEL_0 206 PASSEN 205 PRECH 204 ST 203 VCCREN 202 PE0.Data 201 PE0.Control 200 PE0.Pull-up_Enable 199 PE1.Data 198 PE1.Control 197 PE1.Pull-up_Enable 196 PE2.Data 195 PE2.Control 194 PE2.Pull-up_Enable 193 PE3.Data 192 PE3.Control 191 PE3.Pull-up_Enable Port E 190 PE4.Data 189 PE4.Control 188 PE4.Pull-up_Enable 187 PE5.Data 186 PE5.Control 185 PE5.Pull-up_Enable 184 PE6.Data 183 PE6.Control 182 PE6.Pull-up_Enable 181 PE7.Data 180 PE7.Control 179 PE7.Pull-up_Enable 178 PJ0.Data 177 PJ0.Control 176 PJ0.Pull-up_Enable Port J 175 PJ1.Data 174 PJ1.Control 173 PJ1.Pull-up_Enable 172 PB0.Data Port B 274 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Table 25-7. ATmega3290P Boundary-scan Order, 100-pin (Continued) Bit Number Signal Name Module 171 PB0.Control 170 PB0.Pull-up_Enable 169 PB1.Data 168 PB1.Control 167 PB1.Pull-up_Enable 166 PB2.Data 165 PB2.Control 164 PB2.Pull-up_Enable 163 PB3.Data 162 PB3.Control 161 PB3.Pull-up_Enable 160 PB4.Data 159 PB4.Control 158 PB4.Pull-up_Enable 157 PB5.Data 156 PB5.Control 155 PB5.Pull-up_Enable 154 PB6.Data 153 PB6.Control 152 PB6.Pull-up_Enable 151 PB7.Data 150 PB7.Control 149 PB7.Pull-up_Enable 148 PG3.Data 147 PG3.Control 146 PG3.Pull-up_Enable Port G 145 PG4.Data 144 PG4.Control 143 PG4.Pull-up_Enable 142 PG5 (Observe Only) 141 RSTT Reset Logic 140 RSTHV (Observe-only) 139 EXTCLKEN 138 OSCON Enable signals for main Clock/Oscillators 137 RCOSCEN 136 OSC32EN 275 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Table 25-7. ATmega3290P Boundary-scan Order, 100-pin (Continued) Bit Number Signal Name Module 135 EXTCLK (XTAL1) 134 OSCCK Clock input and Oscillators for the main clock 133 RCCK (Observe-only) 132 OSC32CK 131 PJ2.Data 130 PJ2.Control 129 PJ2.Pull-up_Enable 128 PJ3.Data 127 PJ3.Control 126 PJ3.Pull-up_Enable 125 PJ4.Data 124 PJ4.Control Port J 123 PJ4.Pull-up_Enable 122 PJ5.Data 121 PJ5.Control 120 PJ5.Pull-up_Enable 119 PJ6.Data 118 PJ6.Control 117 PJ6.Pull-up_Enable 116 PD0.Data 115 PD0.Control 114 PD0.Pull-up_Enable 113 PD1.Data 112 PD1.Control 111 PD1.Pull-up_Enable 110 PD2.Data 109 PD2.Control 108 PD2.Pull-up_Enable Port D 107 PD3.Data 106 PD3.Control 105 PD3.Pull-up_Enable 104 PD4.Data 103 PD4.Control 102 PD4.Pull-up_Enable 101 PD5.Data 100 PD5.Control 276 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Table 25-7. ATmega3290P Boundary-scan Order, 100-pin (Continued) Bit Number Signal Name Module 99 PD5.Pull-up_Enable 98 PD6.Data 97 PD6.Control 96 PD6.Pull-up_Enable 95 PD7.Data 94 PD7.Control 93 PD7.Pull-up_Enable 92 PG0.Data 91 PG0.Control 90 PG0.Pull-up_Enable Port G 89 PG1.Data 88 PG1.Control 87 PG1.Pull-up_Enable 86 PC0.Data 85 PC0.Control 84 PC0.Pull-up_Enable 83 PC1.Data 82 PC1.Control 81 PC1.Pull-up_Enable 80 PC2.Data 79 PC2.Control 78 PC2.Pull-up_Enable Port C 77 PC3.Data 76 PC3.Control 75 PC3.Pull-up_Enable 74 PC4.Data 73 PC4.Control 72 PC4.Pull-up_Enable 71 PC5.Data 70 PC5.Control 69 PC5.Pull-up_Enable 68 PH0.Data 67 PH0.Control 66 PH0.Pull-up_Enable Port H 65 PH1.Data 64 PH1.Control 277 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Table 25-7. ATmega3290P Boundary-scan Order, 100-pin (Continued) Bit Number Signal Name Module 63 PH1.Pull-up_Enable 62 PH2.Data 61 PH2.Control 60 PH2.Pull-up_Enable 59 PH3.Data 58 PH3.Control 57 PH3.Pull-up_Enable 56 PC6.Data 55 PC6.Control 54 PC6.Pull-up_Enable Port C 53 PC7.Data 52 PC7.Control 51 PC7.Pull-up_Enable 50 PG2.Data 49 PG2.Control Port G 48 PG2.Pull-up_Enable 47 PA7.Data 46 PA7.Control 45 PA7.Pull-up_Enable 44 PA6.Data 43 PA6.Control 42 PA6.Pull-up_Enable 41 PA5.Data 40 PA5.Control 39 PA5.Pull-up_Enable 38 PA4.Data Port A 37 PA4.Control 36 PA4.Pull-up_Enable 35 PA3.Data 34 PA3.Control 33 PA3.Pull-up_Enable 32 PA2.Data 31 PA2.Control 30 PA2.Pull-up_Enable 29 PA1.Data 28 PA1.Control 278 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Table 25-7. ATmega3290P Boundary-scan Order, 100-pin (Continued) Bit Number Signal Name Module 27 PA1.Pull-up_Enable 26 PA0.Data 25 PA0.Control 24 PA0.Pull-up_Enable 23 PH4.Data 22 PH4.Control 21 PH4.Pull-up_Enable 20 PH5.Data 19 PH5.Control 18 PH5.Pull-up_Enable Port H 17 PH6.Data 16 PH6.Control 15 PH6.Pull-up_Enable 14 PH7.Data 13 PH7.Control 12 PH7.Pull-up_Enable 11 PF3.Data 10 PF3.Control 9 PF3.Pull-up_Enable 8 PF2.Data 7 PF2.Control 6 PF2.Pull-up_Enable Port F 5 PF1.Data 4 PF1.Control 3 PF1.Pull-up_Enable 2 PF0.Data 1 PF0.Control 0 PF0.Pull-up_Enable Note: 1. PRIVATE_SIGNAL1 should always be scanned in as zero. 25.7 Boundary-scan Description Language Files Boundary-scan Description Language (BSDL) files describe Boundary-scan capable devices in a standard format used by automated test-generation software. The order and function of bits in the Boundary-scan Data Register are included in this description. A BSDL file for ATmega329P/3290P is available. 279 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 25.8 Register Description 25.8.1 MCUCR – MCU Control Register The MCU Control Register contains control bits for general MCU functions. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0x35 (0x55) JTD BODS BODSE PUD – – IVSEL IVCE MCUCR Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R R R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 • Bit 7 – JTD: JTAG Interface Disable When this bit is zero, the JTAG interface is enabled if the JTAGEN Fuse is programmed. If this bit is one, the JTAG interface is disabled. In order to avoid unintentional disabling or enabling of the JTAG interface, a timed sequence must be followed when changing this bit: The application software must write this bit to the desired value twice within four cycles to change its value. Note that this bit must not be altered when using the On-chip Debug system. If the JTAG interface is left unconnected to other JTAG circuitry, the JTD bit should be set to one. The reason for this is to avoid static current at the TDO pin in the JTAG interface. 25.8.2 MCUSR – MCU Status Register The MCU Status Register provides information on which reset source caused an MCU reset. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0x34 (0x54) – – – JTRF WDRF BORF EXTRF PORF MCUSR Read/Write R R R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 See Bit Description • Bit 4 – JTRF: JTAG Reset Flag This bit is set if a reset is being caused by a logic one in the JTAG Reset Register selected by the JTAG instruction AVR_RESET. This bit is reset by a Power-on Reset, or by writing a logic zero to the flag. 280 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 26. Boot Loader Support – Read-While-Write Self-Programming 26.1 Features • Read-While-Write Self-Programming • Flexible Boot Memory Size • High Security (Separate Boot Lock Bits for a Flexible Protection) • Separate Fuse to Select Reset Vector • Optimized Page(1) Size • Code Efficient Algorithm • Efficient Read-Modify-Write Support Note: 1. A page is a section in the Flash consisting of several bytes (see Table 27-13 on page 301) used during programming. The page organization does not affect normal operation. 26.2 Overview The Boot Loader Support provides a real Read-While-Write Self-Programming mechanism for downloading and uploading program code by the MCU itself. This feature allows flexible applica- tion software updates controlled by the MCU using a Flash-resident Boot Loader program. The Boot Loader program can use any available data interface and associated protocol to read code and write (program) that code into the Flash memory, or read the code from the program mem- ory. The program code within the Boot Loader section has the capability to write into the entire Flash, including the Boot Loader memory. The Boot Loader can thus even modify itself, and it can also erase itself from the code if the feature is not needed anymore. The size of the Boot Loader memory is configurable with fuses and the Boot Loader has two separate sets of Boot Lock bits which can be set independently. This gives the user a unique flexibility to select differ- ent levels of protection. 26.3 Application and Boot Loader Flash Sections The Flash memory is organized in two main sections, the Application section and the Boot Loader section (see Figure 26-2). The size of the different sections is configured by the BOOTSZ Fuses as shown in Table 26-6 on page 292 and Figure 26-2. These two sections can have different level of protection since they have different sets of Lock bits. 26.3.1 Application Section The Application section is the section of the Flash that is used for storing the application code. The protection level for the Application section can be selected by the application Boot Lock bits (Boot Lock bits 0), see Table 26-2 on page 285. The Application section can never store any Boot Loader code since the SPM instruction is disabled when executed from the Application section. 26.3.2 BLS – Boot Loader Section While the Application section is used for storing the application code, the The Boot Loader soft- ware must be located in the BLS since the SPM instruction can initiate a programming when executing from the BLS only. The SPM instruction can access the entire Flash, including the BLS itself. The protection level for the Boot Loader section can be selected by the Boot Loader Lock bits (Boot Lock bits 1), see Table 26-3 on page 285. 281 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 26.4 Read-While-Write and No Read-While-Write Flash Sections Whether the CPU supports Read-While-Write or if the CPU is halted during a Boot Loader soft- ware update is dependent on which address that is being programmed. In addition to the two sections that are configurable by the BOOTSZ Fuses as described above, the Flash is also divided into two fixed sections, the Read-While-Write (RWW) section and the No Read-While- Write (NRWW) section. The limit between the RWW- and NRWW sections is given in Table 26- 7 on page 293 and Figure 26-2 on page 284. The main difference between the two sections is: • When erasing or writing a page located inside the RWW section, the NRWW section can be read during the operation. • When erasing or writing a page located inside the NRWW section, the CPU is halted during the entire operation. Note that the user software can never read any code that is located inside the RWW section dur- ing a Boot Loader software operation. The syntax “Read-While-Write section” refers to which section that is being programmed (erased or written), not which section that actually is being read during a Boot Loader software update. 26.4.1 RWW – Read-While-Write Section If a Boot Loader software update is programming a page inside the RWW section, it is possible to read code from the Flash, but only code that is located in the NRWW section. During an on- going programming, the software must ensure that the RWW section never is being read. If the user software is trying to read code that is located inside the RWW section (i.e., by a call/jmp/lpm or an interrupt) during programming, the software might end up in an unknown state. To avoid this, the interrupts should either be disabled or moved to the Boot Loader sec- tion. The Boot Loader section is always located in the NRWW section. The RWW Section Busy bit (RWWSB) in the Store Program Memory Control and Status Register (SPMCSR) will be read as logical one as long as the RWW section is blocked for reading. After a programming is com- pleted, the RWWSB must be cleared by software before reading code located in the RWW section. See Section “26.9.1” on page 294. for details on how to clear RWWSB. 26.4.2 NRWW – No Read-While-Write Section The code located in the NRWW section can be read when the Boot Loader software is updating a page in the RWW section. When the Boot Loader code updates the NRWW section, the CPU is halted during the entire Page Erase or Page Write operation. Table 26-1. Read-While-Write Features Which Section Can Which Section does the Z-pointer be Read During Is the CPU Read-While-Write Address During the Programming? Programming? Halted? Supported? RWW Section NRWW Section No Yes NRWW Section None Yes No 282 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Figure 26-1. Read-While-Write vs. No Read-While-Write Read-While-Write (RWW) Section Z-pointer Addresses NRWW Section Z-pointer Addresses RWW No Read-While-Write Section (NRWW) Section CPU is Halted During the Operation Code Located in NRWW Section Can be Read During the Operation 283 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Figure 26-2. Memory Sections Program Memory Program Memory BOOTSZ = '11' BOOTSZ = '10' 0x0000 0x0000 Section Section Write Application Flash Section Write Application Flash Section While- While- Read- Read- Section ESntadr tR NWRWWW Section ESntadr tR NWRWWW Write Application Flash Section Write Application Flash Section While- End Application While- ESntadr tA Bpopolitc Laotioander Read- Boot Loader Flash Section FSltaasrth Benodot Loader Read- Boot Loader Flash Section Flashend No No Program Memory Program Memory BOOTSZ = '01' BOOTSZ = '00' 0x0000 0x0000 Section Section Write Application Flash Section Write Application Flash Section While- While- Read- Read- Write Section Application Flash Section ESEntnaddr tRA NpWRpWWlicWation Write Section ESntadr tR NWRWW,W E,n Sdt aArpt pBliocoatt iLoonader While- Boot Loader Flash Section Start Boot Loader While- Boot Loader Flash Section Read- Flashend Read- Flashend No No Note: 1. The parameters in the figure above are given in Table 26-6 on page 292. 26.5 Boot Loader Lock Bits If no Boot Loader capability is needed, the entire Flash is available for application code. The Boot Loader has two separate sets of Boot Lock bits which can be set independently. This gives the user a unique flexibility to select different levels of protection. The user can select: • To protect the entire Flash from a software update by the MCU. • To protect only the Boot Loader Flash section from a software update by the MCU. • To protect only the Application Flash section from a software update by the MCU. • Allow software update in the entire Flash. See Table 26-2 and Table 26-3 for further details. The Boot Lock bits and general Lock bits can be set in software and in Serial or Parallel Programming mode, but they can be cleared by a Chip Erase command only. The general Write Lock (Lock Bit mode 2) does not control the pro- gramming of the Flash memory by SPM instruction. Similarly, the general Read/Write Lock (Lock Bit mode 1) does not control reading nor writing by LPM/SPM, if it is attempted. 284 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Table 26-2. Boot Lock Bit0 Protection Modes (Application Section)(1) BLB0 Mode BLB02 BLB01 Protection No restrictions for SPM or LPM accessing the Application 1 1 1 section. 2 1 0 SPM is not allowed to write to the Application section. SPM is not allowed to write to the Application section, and LPM executing from the Boot Loader section is not allowed to read 3 0 0 from the Application section. If Interrupt Vectors are placed in the Boot Loader section, interrupts are disabled while executing from the Application section. LPM executing from the Boot Loader section is not allowed to read from the Application section. If Interrupt Vectors are placed 4 0 1 in the Boot Loader section, interrupts are disabled while executing from the Application section. Note: 1. “1” means unprogrammed, “0” means programmed Table 26-3. Boot Lock Bit1 Protection Modes (Boot Loader Section)(1) BLB1 Mode BLB12 BLB11 Protection No restrictions for SPM or LPM accessing the Boot Loader 1 1 1 section. 2 1 0 SPM is not allowed to write to the Boot Loader section. SPM is not allowed to write to the Boot Loader section, and LPM executing from the Application section is not allowed to read 3 0 0 from the Boot Loader section. If Interrupt Vectors are placed in the Application section, interrupts are disabled while executing from the Boot Loader section. LPM executing from the Application section is not allowed to read from the Boot Loader section. If Interrupt Vectors are 4 0 1 placed in the Application section, interrupts are disabled while executing from the Boot Loader section. Note: 1. “1” means unprogrammed, “0” means programmed 285 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 26.6 Entering the Boot Loader Program Entering the Boot Loader takes place by a jump or call from the application program. This may be initiated by a trigger such as a command received via USART, or SPI interface. Alternatively, the Boot Reset Fuse can be programmed so that the Reset Vector is pointing to the Boot Flash start address after a reset. In this case, the Boot Loader is started after a reset. After the applica- tion code is loaded, the program can start executing the application code. Note that the fuses cannot be changed by the MCU itself. This means that once the Boot Reset Fuse is pro- grammed, the Reset Vector will always point to the Boot Loader Reset and the fuse can only be changed through the serial or parallel programming interface. Table 26-4. Boot Reset Fuse(1) BOOTRST Reset Address 1 Reset Vector = Application Reset (address 0x0000) 0 Reset Vector = Boot Loader Reset (see Table 26-6 on page 292) Note: 1. “1” means unprogrammed, “0” means programmed 26.7 Addressing the Flash During Self-Programming The Z-pointer is used to address the SPM commands. Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 ZH (R31) Z15 Z14 Z13 Z12 Z11 Z10 Z9 Z8 ZL (R30) Z7 Z6 Z5 Z4 Z3 Z2 Z1 Z0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Since the Flash is organized in pages (see Table 27-13 on page 301), the Program Counter can be treated as having two different sections. One section, consisting of the least significant bits, is addressing the words within a page, while the most significant bits are addressing the pages. This is shown in Figure 26-3. Note that the Page Erase and Page Write operations are addressed independently. Therefore it is of major importance that the Boot Loader software addresses the same page in both the Page Erase and Page Write operation. Once a program- ming operation is initiated, the address is latched and the Z-pointer can be used for other operations. The only SPM operation that does not use the Z-pointer is Setting the Boot Loader Lock bits. The content of the Z-pointer is ignored and will have no effect on the operation. The LPM instruction does also use the Z-pointer to store the address. Since this instruction addresses the Flash byte-by-byte, also the LSB (bit Z0) of the Z-pointer is used. 286 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Figure 26-3. Addressing the Flash During SPM(1) BIT 15 ZPCMSB ZPAGEMSB 1 0 Z - REGISTER 0 PCMSB PAGEMSB PROGRAM PCPAGE PCWORD COUNTER PAGE ADDRESS WORD ADDRESS WITHIN THE FLASH WITHIN A PAGE PROGRAM MEMORY PAGE PCWORD[PAGEMSB:0]: PAGE INSTRUCTION WORD 00 01 02 PAGEEND Notes: 1. The different variables used in Figure 26-3 on page 287 are listed in Table 26-8 on page 293. 2. PCPAGE and PCWORD are listed in Table 27-13 on page 301. 26.8 Self-Programming the Flash The program memory is updated in a page by page fashion. Before programming a page with the data stored in the temporary page buffer, the page must be erased. The temporary page buf- fer is filled one word at a time using SPM and the buffer can be filled either before the Page Erase command or between a Page Erase and a Page Write operation: Alternative 1, fill the buffer before a Page Erase • Fill temporary page buffer • Perform a Page Erase • Perform a Page Write Alternative 2, fill the buffer after Page Erase • Perform a Page Erase • Fill temporary page buffer • Perform a Page Write If only a part of the page needs to be changed, the rest of the page must be stored (for example in the temporary page buffer) before the erase, and then be rewritten. When using alternative 1, the Boot Loader provides an effective Read-Modify-Write feature which allows the user software to first read the page, do the necessary changes, and then write back the modified data. If alter- native 2 is used, it is not possible to read the old data while loading since the page is already erased. The temporary page buffer can be accessed in a random sequence. It is essential that the page address used in both the Page Erase and Page Write operation is addressing the same page. See ”Simple Assembly Code Example for a Boot Loader” on page 291 for an assembly code example. 287 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 26.8.1 Performing Page Erase by SPM To execute Page Erase, set up the address in the Z-pointer, write “X0000011” to SPMCSR and execute SPM within four clock cycles after writing SPMCSR. The data in R1 and R0 is ignored. The page address must be written to PCPAGE in the Z-register. Other bits in the Z-pointer will be ignored during this operation. • Page Erase to the RWW section: The NRWW section can be read during the Page Erase. • Page Erase to the NRWW section: The CPU is halted during the operation. 26.8.2 Filling the Temporary Buffer (Page Loading) To write an instruction word, set up the address in the Z-pointer and data in R1:R0, write “00000001” to SPMCSR and execute SPM within four clock cycles after writing SPMCSR. The content of PCWORD in the Z-register is used to address the data in the temporary buffer. The temporary buffer will auto-erase after a Page Write operation or by writing the RWWSRE bit in SPMCSR. It is also erased after a system reset. Note that it is not possible to write more than one time to each address without erasing the temporary buffer. If the EEPROM is written in the middle of an SPM Page Load operation, all data loaded will be lost. 26.8.3 Performing a Page Write To execute Page Write, set up the address in the Z-pointer, write “X0000101” to SPMCSR and execute SPM within four clock cycles after writing SPMCSR. The data in R1 and R0 is ignored. The page address must be written to PCPAGE. Other bits in the Z-pointer must be written to zero during this operation. • Page Write to the RWW section: The NRWW section can be read during the Page Write. • Page Write to the NRWW section: The CPU is halted during the operation. 26.8.4 Using the SPM Interrupt If the SPM interrupt is enabled, the SPM interrupt will generate a constant interrupt when the SPMEN bit in SPMCSR is cleared. This means that the interrupt can be used instead of polling the SPMCSR Register in software. When using the SPM interrupt, the Interrupt Vectors should be moved to the BLS section to avoid that an interrupt is accessing the RWW section when it is blocked for reading. How to move the interrupts is described in ”Interrupts” on page 53. 26.8.5 Consideration While Updating BLS Special care must be taken if the user allows the Boot Loader section to be updated by leaving Boot Lock bit11 unprogrammed. An accidental write to the Boot Loader itself can corrupt the entire Boot Loader, and further software updates might be impossible. If it is not necessary to change the Boot Loader software itself, it is recommended to program the Boot Lock bit11 to protect the Boot Loader software from any internal software changes. 26.8.6 Prevent Reading the RWW Section During Self-Programming During Self-Programming (either Page Erase or Page Write), the RWW section is always blocked for reading. The user software itself must prevent that this section is addressed during the self programming operation. The RWWSB in the SPMCSR will be set as long as the RWW section is busy. During Self-Programming the Interrupt Vector table should be moved to the BLS as described in ”Interrupts” on page 53, or the interrupts must be disabled. Before addressing the RWW section after the programming is completed, the user software must clear the 288 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P RWWSB by writing the RWWSRE. See ”Simple Assembly Code Example for a Boot Loader” on page 291 for an example. 26.8.7 Setting the Boot Loader Lock Bits by SPM To set the Boot Loader Lock bits and general Lock bits, write the desired data to R0, write “X0001001” to SPMCSR and execute SPM within four clock cycles after writing SPMCSR. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 R0 1 1 BLB12 BLB11 BLB02 BLB01 LB2 LB1 See Table 26-2 and Table 26-3 for how the different settings of the Boot Loader bits affect the Flash access. If bits 5...0 in R0 are cleared (zero), the corresponding Lock bit will be programmed if an SPM instruction is executed within four cycles after BLBSET and SPMEN are set in SPMCSR. The Z- pointer is don’t care during this operation, but for future compatibility it is recommended to load the Z-pointer with 0x0001 (same as used for reading the Lock bits). For future compatibility it is also recommended to set bits 7, and 6 in R0 to “1” when writing the Lock bits. When program- ming the Lock bits the entire Flash can be read during the operation. 26.8.8 EEPROM Write Prevents Writing to SPMCSR Note that an EEPROM write operation will block all software programming to Flash. Reading the Fuses and Lock bits from software will also be prevented during the EEPROM write operation. It is recommended that the user checks the status bit (EEWE) in the EECR Register and verifies that the bit is cleared before writing to the SPMCSR Register. 26.8.9 Reading the Fuse and Lock Bits from Software It is possible to read both the Fuse and Lock bits from software. To read the Lock bits, load the Z-pointer with 0x0001 and set the BLBSET and SPMEN bits in SPMCSR. When an LPM instruc- tion is executed within three CPU cycles after the BLBSET and SPMEN bits are set in SPMCSR, the value of the Lock bits will be loaded in the destination register. The BLBSET and SPMEN bits will auto-clear upon completion of reading the Lock bits or if no LPM instruction is executed within three CPU cycles or no SPM instruction is executed within four CPU cycles. When BLB- SET and SPMEN are cleared, LPM will work as described in the Instruction set Manual. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Rd – – BLB12 BLB11 BLB02 BLB01 LB2 LB1 The algorithm for reading the Fuse Low byte is similar to the one described above for reading the Lock bits. To read the Fuse Low byte, load the Z-pointer with 0x0000 and set the BLBSET and SPMEN bits in SPMCSR. When an LPM instruction is executed within three cycles after the BLBSET and SPMEN bits are set in the SPMCSR, the value of the Fuse Low byte (FLB) will be loaded in the destination register as shown below. Refer to Table 27-5 on page 298 for a detailed description and mapping of the Fuse Low byte. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Rd FLB7 FLB6 FLB5 FLB4 FLB3 FLB2 FLB1 FLB0 Similarly, when reading the Fuse High byte, load 0x0003 in the Z-pointer. When an LPM instruc- tion is executed within three cycles after the BLBSET and SPMEN bits are set in the SPMCSR, the value of the Fuse High byte (FHB) will be loaded in the destination register as shown below. Refer to Table 27-4 on page 298 for detailed description and mapping of the Fuse High byte. 289 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Rd FHB7 FHB6 FHB5 FHB4 FHB3 FHB2 FHB1 FHB0 When reading the Extended Fuse byte, load 0x0002 in the Z-pointer. When an LPM instruction is executed within three cycles after the BLBSET and SPMEN bits are set in the SPMCSR, the value of the Extended Fuse byte (EFB) will be loaded in the destination register as shown below. Refer to Table 27-3 on page 297 for detailed description and mapping of the Extended Fuse byte. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Rd – – – – – EFB2 EFB1 EFB0 Fuse and Lock bits that are programmed, will be read as zero. Fuse and Lock bits that are unprogrammed, will be read as one. 26.8.10 Preventing Flash Corruption During periods of low V , the Flash program can be corrupted because the supply voltage is CC too low for the CPU and the Flash to operate properly. These issues are the same as for board level systems using the Flash, and the same design solutions should be applied. A Flash program corruption can be caused by two situations when the voltage is too low. First, a regular write sequence to the Flash requires a minimum voltage to operate correctly. Secondly, the CPU itself can execute instructions incorrectly, if the supply voltage for executing instructions is too low. Flash corruption can easily be avoided by following these design recommendations (one is sufficient): 1. If there is no need for a Boot Loader update in the system, program the Boot Loader Lock bits to prevent any Boot Loader software updates. 2. Keep the AVR RESET active (low) during periods of insufficient power supply voltage. This can be done by enabling the internal Brown-out Detector (BOD) if the operating volt- age matches the detection level. If not, an external low V reset protection circuit can be CC used. If a reset occurs while a write operation is in progress, the write operation will be completed provided that the power supply voltage is sufficient. 3. Keep the AVR core in Power-down sleep mode during periods of low V . This will pre- CC vent the CPU from attempting to decode and execute instructions, effectively protecting the SPMCSR Register and thus the Flash from unintentional writes. 26.8.11 Programming Time for Flash when Using SPM The calibrated RC Oscillator is used to time Flash accesses. Table 26-5 shows the typical pro- gramming time for Flash accesses from the CPU. Table 26-5. SPM Programming Time Symbol Min Programming Time Max Programming Time Flash write (Page Erase, Page Write, and 3.7 ms 4.5 ms write Lock bits by SPM) Note: 1. Minimum and maximum programming time is per individual operation. 290 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 26.8.12 Simple Assembly Code Example for a Boot Loader ;-the routine writes one page of data from RAM to Flash ; the first data location in RAM is pointed to by the Y pointer ; the first data location in Flash is pointed to by the Z-pointer ;-error handling is not included ;-the routine must be placed inside the Boot space ; (at least the Do_spm sub routine). Only code inside NRWW section can ; be read during Self-Programming (Page Erase and Page Write). ;-registers used: r0, r1, temp1 (r16), temp2 (r17), looplo (r24), ; loophi (r25), spmcrval (r20) ; storing and restoring of registers is not included in the routine ; register usage can be optimized at the expense of code size ;-It is assumed that either the interrupt table is moved to the Boot ; loader section or that the interrupts are disabled. .equ PAGESIZEB = PAGESIZE*2 ;PAGESIZEB is page size in BYTES, not words .org SMALLBOOTSTART Write_page: ; Page Erase ldi spmcrval, (1<<PGERS) | (1<<SPMEN) call Do_spm ; re-enable the RWW section ldi spmcrval, (1<<RWWSRE) | (1<<SPMEN) call Do_spm ; transfer data from RAM to Flash page buffer ldi looplo, low(PAGESIZEB) ;init loop variable ldi loophi, high(PAGESIZEB) ;not required for PAGESIZEB<=256 Wrloop: ld r0, Y+ ld r1, Y+ ldi spmcrval, (1<<SPMEN) call Do_spm adiw ZH:ZL, 2 sbiw loophi:looplo, 2 ;use subi for PAGESIZEB<=256 brne Wrloop ; execute Page Write subi ZL, low(PAGESIZEB) ;restore pointer sbci ZH, high(PAGESIZEB) ;not required for PAGESIZEB<=256 ldi spmcrval, (1<<PGWRT) | (1<<SPMEN) call Do_spm ; re-enable the RWW section ldi spmcrval, (1<<RWWSRE) | (1<<SPMEN) call Do_spm ; read back and check, optional ldi looplo, low(PAGESIZEB) ;init loop variable ldi loophi, high(PAGESIZEB) ;not required for PAGESIZEB<=256 subi YL, low(PAGESIZEB) ;restore pointer sbci YH, high(PAGESIZEB) Rdloop: lpm r0, Z+ ld r1, Y+ cpse r0, r1 jmp Error sbiw loophi:looplo, 1 ;use subi for PAGESIZEB<=256 291 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P brne Rdloop ; return to RWW section ; verify that RWW section is safe to read Return: in temp1, SPMCSR sbrs temp1, RWWSB ; If RWWSB is set, the RWW section is not ready yet ret ; re-enable the RWW section ldi spmcrval, (1<<RWWSRE) | (1<<SPMEN) call Do_spm rjmp Return Do_spm: ; check for previous SPM complete Wait_spm: in temp1, SPMCSR sbrc temp1, SPMEN rjmp Wait_spm ; input: spmcrval determines SPM action ; disable interrupts if enabled, store status in temp2, SREG cli ; check that no EEPROM write access is present Wait_ee: sbic EECR, EEWE rjmp Wait_ee ; SPM timed sequence out SPMCSR, spmcrval spm ; restore SREG (to enable interrupts if originally enabled) out SREG, temp2 ret 26.8.13 Boot Loader Parameters 26.8.13.1 ATmega329P/3290P In Table 26-6 through Table 26-8, the parameters used in the description of the Self-Programming are given. Table 26-6. Boot Size Configuration (ATmega329P/3290P)(1) Boot Reset Address End (Start Application Boot Loader Application Boot Loader BOOTSZ1 BOOTSZ0 Boot Size Pages Flash Section Flash Section Section Section) 1 1 256 words 4 0x0000-0x3EFF 0x3F00-0x3FFF 0x3EFF 0x3F00 1 0 512 words 8 0x0000-0x3DFF 0x3E00-0x3FFF 0x3DFF 0x3E00 0 1 1024 words 16 0x0000-0x3BFF 0x3C00-0x3FFF 0x3BFF 0x3C00 0 0 2048 words 32 0x0000-0x37FF 0x3800-0x3FFF 0x37FF 0x3800 Note: 1. The different BOOTSZ Fuse configurations are shown in Figure 26-2 292 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Table 26-7. Read-While-Write Limit (ATmega329P/3290P)(1) Section Pages Address Read-While-Write section (RWW) 224 0x0000 - 0x37FF No Read-While-Write section (NRWW) 32 0x3800 - 0x3FFF Note: 1. For details about these two section, see ”NRWW – No Read-While-Write Section” on page 282 and ”RWW – Read-While- Write Section” on page 282. Table 26-8. Explanation of different variables used in Figure 26-3 and the mapping to the Z-pointer (ATmega329P/3290P)(1) Corresponding Variable Z-value Description Most significant bit in the Program Counter. (Program Counter is 14 bits PCMSB 13 PC[13:0]) Most significant bit which is used to address the words within one page PAGEMSB 5 (64 words in a page requires six/seven bits PC [5:0]). Bit in Z-register that is mapped to PCMSB. Because Z0 is not used, the ZPCMSB Z14 ZPCMSB equals PCMSB + 1. Bit in Z-register that is mapped to PCMSB. Because Z0 is not used, the ZPAGEMSB Z6 ZPAGEMSB equals PAGEMSB + 1. Program Counter page address: Page select, for Page Erase and Page PCPAGE PC[13:6] Z14:Z7 Write Program Counter word address: Word select, for filling temporary buffer PCWORD PC[5:0] Z6:Z1 (must be zero during Page Write operation) Note: 1. Z0: should be zero for all SPM commands, byte select for the LPM instruction. See ”Addressing the Flash During Self-Pro- gramming” on page 286 for details about the use of Z-pointer during Self-Programming. 293 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 26.9 Register Description 26.9.1 SPMCSR – Store Program Memory Control and Status Register The Store Program Memory Control and Status Register contains the control bits needed to con- trol the Boot Loader operations. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0x37 (0x57) SPMIE RWWSB – RWWSRE BLBSET PGWRT PGERS SPMEN SPMCSR Read/Write R/W R R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 • Bit 7 – SPMIE: SPM Interrupt Enable When the SPMIE bit is written to one, and the I-bit in the Status Register is set (one), the SPM ready interrupt will be enabled. The SPM ready Interrupt will be executed as long as the SPMEN bit in the SPMCSR Register is cleared. • Bit 6 – RWWSB: Read-While-Write Section Busy When a Self-Programming (Page Erase or Page Write) operation to the RWW section is initi- ated, the RWWSB will be set (one) by hardware. When the RWWSB bit is set, the RWW section cannot be accessed. The RWWSB bit will be cleared if the RWWSRE bit is written to one after a Self-Programming operation is completed. Alternatively the RWWSB bit will automatically be cleared if a page load operation is initiated. • Bit 5 – Reserved This bit is reserved and always read as zero. • Bit 4 – RWWSRE: Read-While-Write Section Read Enable When programming (Page Erase or Page Write) to the RWW section, the RWW section is blocked for reading (the RWWSB will be set by hardware). To re-enable the RWW section, the user software must wait until the programming is completed (SPMEN will be cleared). Then, if the RWWSRE bit is written to one at the same time as SPMEN, the next SPM instruction within four clock cycles re-enables the RWW section. The RWW section cannot be re-enabled while the Flash is busy with a Page Erase or a Page Write (SPMEN is set). If the RWWSRE bit is writ- ten while the Flash is being loaded, the Flash load operation will abort and the data loaded will be lost. • Bit 3 – BLBSET: Boot Lock Bit Set If this bit is written to one at the same time as SPMEN, the next SPM instruction within four clock cycles sets Boot Lock bits and general Lock bits, according to the data in R0. The data in R1 and the address in the Z-pointer are ignored. The BLBSET bit will automatically be cleared upon completion of the Lock bit set, or if no SPM instruction is executed within four clock cycles. An LPM instruction within three cycles after BLBSET and SPMEN are set in the SPMCSR Reg- ister, will read either the Lock bits or the Fuse bits (depending on Z0 in the Z-pointer) into the destination register. See ”Reading the Fuse and Lock Bits from Software” on page 289 for details. • Bit 2 – PGWRT: Page Write If this bit is written to one at the same time as SPMEN, the next SPM instruction within four clock cycles executes Page Write, with the data stored in the temporary buffer. The page address is 294 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P taken from the high part of the Z-pointer. The data in R1 and R0 are ignored. The PGWRT bit will auto-clear upon completion of a Page Write, or if no SPM instruction is executed within four clock cycles. The CPU is halted during the entire Page Write operation if the NRWW section is addressed. • Bit 1 – PGERS: Page Erase If this bit is written to one at the same time as SPMEN, the next SPM instruction within four clock cycles executes Page Erase. The page address is taken from the high part of the Z-pointer. The data in R1 and R0 are ignored. The PGERS bit will auto-clear upon completion of a Page Erase, or if no SPM instruction is executed within four clock cycles. The CPU is halted during the entire Page Write operation if the NRWW section is addressed. • Bit 0 – SPMEN: Store Program Memory Enable This bit enables the SPM instruction for the next four clock cycles. If written to one together with either RWWSRE, BLBSET, PGWRT’ or PGERS, the following SPM instruction will have a spe- cial meaning, see description above. If only SPMEN is written, the following SPM instruction will store the value in R1:R0 in the temporary page buffer addressed by the Z-pointer. The LSB of the Z-pointer is ignored. The SPMEN bit will auto-clear upon completion of an SPM instruction, or if no SPM instruction is executed within four clock cycles. During Page Erase and Page Write, the SPMEN bit remains high until the operation is completed. Writing any other combination than “10001”, “01001”, “00101”, “00011” or “00001” in the lower five bits will have no effect. 295 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 27. Memory Programming 27.1 Program And Data Memory Lock Bits The ATmega329P/3290P provides six Lock bits which can be left unprogrammed (“1”) or can be programmed (“0”) to obtain the additional features listed in Table 27-2. The Lock bits can only be erased to “1” with the Chip Erase command. Table 27-1. Lock Bit Byte(1) Lock Bit Byte Bit No Description Default Value 7 – 1 (unprogrammed) 6 – 1 (unprogrammed) BLB12 5 Boot Lock bit 1 (unprogrammed) BLB11 4 Boot Lock bit 1 (unprogrammed) BLB02 3 Boot Lock bit 1 (unprogrammed) BLB01 2 Boot Lock bit 1 (unprogrammed) LB2 1 Lock bit 1 (unprogrammed) LB1 0 Lock bit 1 (unprogrammed) Note: 1. “1” means unprogrammed, “0” means programmed Table 27-2. Lock Bit Protection Modes(1)(2) Memory Lock Bits Protection Type LB Mode LB2 LB1 1 1 1 No memory lock features enabled. Further programming of the Flash and EEPROM is disabled in 2 1 0 Parallel and Serial Programming mode. The Fuse bits are locked in both Serial and Parallel Programming mode.(1) Further programming and verification of the Flash and EEPROM is disabled in Parallel and Serial Programming mode. 3 0 0 The Boot Lock bits and Fuse bits are locked in both Serial and Parallel Programming mode.(1) BLB0 Mode BLB02 BLB01 No restrictions for SPM or LPM accessing the Application 1 1 1 section. 2 1 0 SPM is not allowed to write to the Application section. SPM is not allowed to write to the Application section, and LPM executing from the Boot Loader section is not allowed to read 3 0 0 from the Application section. If Interrupt Vectors are placed in the Boot Loader section, interrupts are disabled while executing from the Application section. LPM executing from the Boot Loader section is not allowed to read from the Application section. If Interrupt Vectors are placed 4 0 1 in the Boot Loader section, interrupts are disabled while executing from the Application section. 296 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Table 27-2. Lock Bit Protection Modes(1)(2) (Continued) Memory Lock Bits Protection Type BLB1 Mode BLB12 BLB11 No restrictions for SPM or LPM accessing the Boot Loader 1 1 1 section. 2 1 0 SPM is not allowed to write to the Boot Loader section. SPM is not allowed to write to the Boot Loader section, and LPM executing from the Application section is not allowed to read 3 0 0 from the Boot Loader section. If Interrupt Vectors are placed in the Application section, interrupts are disabled while executing from the Boot Loader section. LPM executing from the Application section is not allowed to read from the Boot Loader section. If Interrupt Vectors are 4 0 1 placed in the Application section, interrupts are disabled while executing from the Boot Loader section. Notes: 1. Program the Fuse bits and Boot Lock bits before programming the LB1 and LB2. 2. “1” means unprogrammed, “0” means programmed 27.2 Fuse Bits The ATmega329P/3290P has three Fuse bytes. Table 27-3 - Table 27-5 describe briefly the functionality of all the fuses and how they are mapped into the Fuse bytes. Note that the fuses are read as logical zero, “0”, if they are programmed. Table 27-3. Extended Fuse Byte Extended Fuse Byte Bit No Description Default Value – 7 – 1 – 6 – 1 – 5 – 1 – 4 – 1 – 5 – 1 BODLEVEL1(1) 2 Brown-out Detector trigger level 1 (unprogrammed) BODLEVEL0(1) 1 Brown-out Detector trigger level 1 (unprogrammed) RSTDISBL(2) 0 External Reset Disable 1 (unprogrammed) Notes: 1. See Table 28-9 on page 337 for BODLEVEL Fuse decoding. 2. Port G, PG5 is input only. Pull-up is always on. See ”Alternate Functions of Port G” on page 82 297 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Table 27-4. Fuse High Byte Fuse High Byte Bit No Description Default Value 1 (unprogrammed, OCD OCDEN(4) 7 Enable OCD disabled) 0 (programmed, JTAG JTAGEN(5) 6 Enable JTAG enabled) Enable Serial Program and Data 0 (programmed, SPI SPIEN(1) 5 Downloading prog. enabled) WDTON(3) 4 Watchdog Timer always on 1 (unprogrammed) EEPROM memory is preserved 1 (unprogrammed, EESAVE 3 through the Chip Erase EEPROM not preserved) Select Boot Size (see Table 27-9 on BOOTSZ1 2 0 (programmed)(2) page 300 for details) Select Boot Size (see Table 27-9 on BOOTSZ0 1 0 (programmed)(2) page 300 for details) BOOTRST 0 Select Reset Vector 1 (unprogrammed) Notes: 1. The SPIEN Fuse is not accessible in serial programming mode. 2. The default value of BOOTSZ1...0 results in maximum Boot Size. See Table 26-6 on page 292 for details. 3. See ”WDTCR – Watchdog Timer Control Register” on page 50 for details. 4. Never ship a product with the OCDEN Fuse programmed regardless of the setting of Lock bits and JTAGEN Fuse. A programmed OCDEN Fuse enables some parts of the clock system to be running in all sleep modes. This may increase the power consumption. 5. If the JTAG interface is left unconnected, the JTAGEN fuse should if possible be disabled. This to avoid static current at the TDO pin in the JTAG interface. Table 27-5. Fuse Low Byte Fuse Low Byte Bit No Description Default Value CKDIV8(4) 7 Divide clock by 8 0 (programmed) CKOUT(3) 6 Clock output 1 (unprogrammed) SUT1 5 Select start-up time 1 (unprogrammed)(1) SUT0 4 Select start-up time 0 (programmed)(1) CKSEL3 3 Select Clock source 0 (programmed)(2) CKSEL2 2 Select Clock source 0 (programmed)(2) CKSEL1 1 Select Clock source 1 (unprogrammed)(2) CKSEL0 0 Select Clock source 0 (programmed)(2) Notes: 1. The default value of SUT1...0 results in maximum start-up time for the default clock source. See ”System and Reset Characteristics” on page 336 for details. 2. The default setting of CKSEL3...0 results in internal RC Oscillator @ 8MHz. See Table 8-7 on page 31 for details. 3. The CKOUT Fuse allow the system clock to be output on PORTE7. See ”Clock Output Buffer” on page 33 for details. 4. See ”System Clock Prescaler” on page 33 for details. The status of the Fuse bits is not affected by Chip Erase. Note that the Fuse bits are locked if Lock bit1 (LB1) is programmed. Program the Fuse bits before programming the Lock bits. 298 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 27.2.1 Latching of Fuses The fuse values are latched when the device enters programming mode and changes of the fuse values will have no effect until the part leaves Programming mode. This does not apply to the EESAVE Fuse which will take effect once it is programmed. The fuses are also latched on Power-up in Normal mode. 27.3 Signature Bytes All Atmel microcontrollers have a three-byte signature code which identifies the device. This code can be read in both serial and parallel mode, also when the device is locked. The three bytes reside in a separate address space. For the ATmega329P/3290P the signature bytes are given in Table 27-6. Table 27-6. Device and JTAG ID Signature Bytes JTAG Part 0x000 0x001 0x002 Part Number Manufacture ID ATmega329P 0x1E 0x95 0x0B 950B 0x1F ATmega3290P 0x1E 0x95 0x0C 950C 0x1F 27.4 Calibration Byte The ATmega329P/3290P has a byte calibration value for the internal RC Oscillator. This byte resides in the high byte of address 0x000 in the signature address space. During reset, this byte is automatically written into the OSCCAL Register to ensure correct frequency of the calibrated RC Oscillator. 27.5 Page Size Table 27-7. No. of Words in a Page and No. of Pages in the Flash Flash Size Page Size PCWORD No. of Pages PCPAGE PCMSB 16K words 64 words PC[5:0] 256 PC[13:6] 13 (32Kbytes) Table 27-8. No. of Words in a Page and No. of Pages in the EEPROM EEPROM Size Page Size PCWORD No. of Pages PCPAGE EEAMSB 1Kbytes 4bytes EEA[1:0] 256 EEA[13:2] 13 27.6 Parallel Programming Parameters, Pin Mapping, and Commands This section describes how to parallel program and verify Flash Program memory, EEPROM Data memory, Memory Lock bits, and Fuse bits in the ATmega329P/3290P. Pulses are assumed to be at least 250ns unless otherwise noted. 299 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 27.6.1 Signal Names In this section, some pins of the ATmega329P/3290P are referenced by signal names describ- ing their functionality during parallel programming, see Figure 27-1 and Table 27-9. Pins not described in the following table are referenced by pin names. The XA1/XA0 pins determine the action executed when the XTAL1 pin is given a positive pulse. The bit coding is shown in Table 27-11. When pulsing WR or OE, the command loaded determines the action executed. The different Commands are shown in Table 27-12. Figure 27-1. Parallel Programming +5V RDY/BSY PD1 VCC OE PD2 +5V WR PD3 AVCC BS1 PD4 PB7 - PB0 DATA XA0 PD5 XA1 PD6 PAGEL PD7 +12 V RESET BS2 PA0 XTAL1 GND Table 27-9. Pin Name Mapping Signal Name in Programming Mode Pin Name I/O Function 0: Device is busy programming, 1: Device is ready for RDY/BSY PD1 O new command. OE PD2 I Output Enable (Active low). WR PD3 I Write Pulse (Active low). Byte Select 1 (“0” selects low byte, “1” selects high BS1 PD4 I byte). XA0 PD5 I XTAL Action Bit 0 XA1 PD6 I XTAL Action Bit 1 PAGEL PD7 I Program Memory and EEPROM data Page Load. Byte Select 2 (“0” selects low byte, “1” selects 2’nd high BS2 PA0 I byte). DATA PB7-0 I/O Bi-directional Data bus (Output when OE is low). 300 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Table 27-10. Pin Values Used to Enter Programming Mode Pin Symbol Value PAGEL Prog_enable[3] 0 XA1 Prog_enable[2] 0 XA0 Prog_enable[1] 0 BS1 Prog_enable[0] 0 Table 27-11. XA1 and XA0 Coding XA1 XA0 Action when XTAL1 is Pulsed 0 0 Load Flash or EEPROM Address (High or low address byte determined by BS1). 0 1 Load Data (High or Low data byte for Flash determined by BS1). 1 0 Load Command 1 1 No Action, Idle Table 27-12. Command Byte Bit Coding Command Byte Command Executed 1000 0000 Chip Erase 0100 0000 Write Fuse bits 0010 0000 Write Lock bits 0001 0000 Write Flash 0001 0001 Write EEPROM 0000 1000 Read Signature Bytes and Calibration byte 0000 0100 Read Fuse and Lock bits 0000 0010 Read Flash 0000 0011 Read EEPROM Table 27-13. No. of Words in a Page and No. of Pages in the Flash Flash Size Page Size PCWORD No. of Pages PCPAGE PCMSB 16K words 64 words PC[5:0] 256 PC[13:6] 13 (32Kbytes) Table 27-14. No. of Words in a Page and No. of Pages in the EEPROM EEPROM Size Page Size PCWORD No. of Pages PCPAGE EEAMSB 1Kbytes 4bytes EEA[1:0] 256 EEA[13:2] 13 301 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 27.7 Parallel Programming 27.7.1 Enter Programming Mode The following algorithm puts the device in Parallel (High-voltage) Programming mode: 1. Set Prog_enable pins listed in Table 27-10 on page 301 to “0000”, RESET pin and V to CC 0V. 2. Apply 4.5 - 5.5V between V and GND. CC 3. Ensure that V reaches at least 1.8V within the next 20 µs. CC 4. Wait 20 - 60 µs, and apply 11.5 - 12.5V to RESET. 5. Keep the Prog_enable pins unchanged for at least 10µs after the High-voltage has been applied to ensure the Prog_enable Signature has been latched. 6. Wait at least 300 µs before giving any parallel programming commands. 7. Exit Programming mode by power the device down or by bringing RESET pin to 0V. If the rise time of the V is unable to fulfill the requirements listed above, the following alterna- CC tive algorithm can be used. 1. Set Prog_enable pins listed in Table 27-10 on page 301 to “0000”, RESET pin to 0V and V to 0V. CC 2. Apply 4.5 - 5.5V between V and GND. CC 3. Monitor V , and as soon as V reaches 0.9 - 1.1V, apply 11.5 - 12.5V to RESET. CC CC 4. Keep the Prog_enable pins unchanged for at least 10µs after the High-voltage has been applied to ensure the Prog_enable Signature has been latched. 5. Wait until V actually reaches 4.5 -5.5V before giving any parallel programming CC commands. 6. Exit Programming mode by power the device down or by bringing RESET pin to 0V. 27.7.2 Considerations for Efficient Programming The loaded command and address are retained in the device during programming. For efficient programming, the following should be considered. • The command needs only be loaded once when writing or reading multiple memory locations. • Skip writing the data value 0xFF, that is the contents of the entire EEPROM (unless the EESAVE Fuse is programmed) and Flash after a Chip Erase. • Address high byte needs only be loaded before programming or reading a new 256 word window in Flash or 256 byte EEPROM. This consideration also applies to Signature bytes reading. 27.7.3 Chip Erase The Chip Erase will erase the Flash and EEPROM(1) memories plus Lock bits. The Lock bits are not reset until the program memory has been completely erased. The Fuse bits are not changed. A Chip Erase must be performed before the Flash and/or EEPROM are reprogrammed. Note: 1. The EEPRPOM memory is preserved during Chip Erase if the EESAVE Fuse is programmed. Load Command “Chip Erase” 1. Set XA1, XA0 to “10”. This enables command loading. 2. Set BS1 to “0”. 3. Set DATA to “1000 0000”. This is the command for Chip Erase. 302 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 4. Give XTAL1 a positive pulse. This loads the command. 5. Give WR a negative pulse. This starts the Chip Erase. RDY/BSY goes low. 6. Wait until RDY/BSY goes high before loading a new command. 27.7.4 Programming the Flash The Flash is organized in pages, see Table 27-13 on page 301. When programming the Flash, the program data is latched into a page buffer. This allows one page of program data to be pro- grammed simultaneously. The following procedure describes how to program the entire Flash memory: A. Load Command “Write Flash” 1. Set XA1, XA0 to “10”. This enables command loading. 2. Set BS1 to “0”. 3. Set DATA to “0001 0000”. This is the command for Write Flash. 4. Give XTAL1 a positive pulse. This loads the command. B. Load Address Low byte 1. Set XA1, XA0 to “00”. This enables address loading. 2. Set BS1 to “0”. This selects low address. 3. Set DATA = Address low byte (0x00 - 0xFF). 4. Give XTAL1 a positive pulse. This loads the address low byte. C. Load Data Low Byte 1. Set XA1, XA0 to “01”. This enables data loading. 2. Set DATA = Data low byte (0x00 - 0xFF). 3. Give XTAL1 a positive pulse. This loads the data byte. D. Load Data High Byte 1. Set BS1 to “1”. This selects high data byte. 2. Set XA1, XA0 to “01”. This enables data loading. 3. Set DATA = Data high byte (0x00 - 0xFF). 4. Give XTAL1 a positive pulse. This loads the data byte. E. Latch Data 1. Set BS1 to “1”. This selects high data byte. 2. Give PAGEL a positive pulse. This latches the data bytes. (See Figure 27-3 for signal waveforms) F. Repeat B through E until the entire buffer is filled or until all data within the page is loaded. While the lower bits in the address are mapped to words within the page, the higher bits address the pages within the FLASH. This is illustrated in Figure 27-2 on page 304. Note that if less than eight bits are required to address words in the page (pagesize < 256), the most significant bit(s) in the address low byte are used to address the page when performing a Page Write. G. Load Address High byte 1. Set XA1, XA0 to “00”. This enables address loading. 2. Set BS1 to “1”. This selects high address. 3. Set DATA = Address high byte (0x00 - 0xFF). 4. Give XTAL1 a positive pulse. This loads the address high byte. 303 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P H. Program Page 1. Give WR a negative pulse. This starts programming of the entire page of data. RDY/BSY goes low. 2. Wait until RDY/BSY goes high (See Figure 27-3 for signal waveforms). I. Repeat B through H until the entire Flash is programmed or until all data has been programmed. J. End Page Programming 1. 1. Set XA1, XA0 to “10”. This enables command loading. 2. Set DATA to “0000 0000”. This is the command for No Operation. 3. Give XTAL1 a positive pulse. This loads the command, and the internal write signals are reset. Figure 27-2. Addressing the Flash Which is Organized in Pages(1) PCMSB PAGEMSB PROGRAM PCPAGE PCWORD COUNTER PAGE ADDRESS WORD ADDRESS WITHIN THE FLASH WITHIN A PAGE PROGRAM MEMORY PAGE PCWORD[PAGEMSB:0]: PAGE INSTRUCTION WORD 00 01 02 PAGEEND Note: 1. PCPAGE and PCWORD are listed in Table 27-13 on page 301. 304 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Figure 27-3. Programming the Flash Waveforms(1) F A B C D E B C D E G H DATA 0x10 ADDR. LOW DATA LOW DATA HIGH XX ADDR. LOW DATA LOW DATA HIGH XX ADDR. HIGH XX XA1 XA0 BS1 XTAL1 WR RDY/BSY RESET +12V OE PAGEL BS2 Note: 1. “XX” is don’t care. The letters refer to the programming description above. 305 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 27.7.5 Programming the EEPROM The EEPROM is organized in pages, see Table 27-14 on page 301. When programming the EEPROM, the program data is latched into a page buffer. This allows one page of data to be programmed simultaneously. The programming algorithm for the EEPROM data memory is as follows (refer to ”Programming the Flash” on page 303 for details on Command, Address and Data loading): 1. A: Load Command “0001 0001”. 2. G: Load Address High Byte (0x00 - 0xFF). 3. B: Load Address Low Byte (0x00 - 0xFF). 4. C: Load Data (0x00 - 0xFF). 5. E: Latch data (give PAGEL a positive pulse). K: Repeat 3 through 5 until the entire buffer is filled. L: Program EEPROM page 1. Set BS1 to “0”. 2. Give WR a negative pulse. This starts programming of the EEPROM page. RDY/BSY goes low. 3. Wait until to RDY/BSY goes high before programming the next page (See Figure 27-4 for signal waveforms). Figure 27-4. Programming the EEPROM Waveforms K A G B C E B C E L DATA 0x11 ADDR. HIGH ADDR. LOW DATA XX ADDR. LOW DATA XX XA1 XA0 BS1 XTAL1 WR RDY/BSY RESET +12V OE PAGEL BS2 27.7.6 Reading the Flash The algorithm for reading the Flash memory is as follows (refer to ”Programming the Flash” on page 303 for details on Command and Address loading): 1. A: Load Command “0000 0010”. 2. G: Load Address High Byte (0x00 - 0xFF). 3. B: Load Address Low Byte (0x00 - 0xFF). 4. Set OE to “0”, and BS1 to “0”. The Flash word low byte can now be read at DATA. 5. Set BS1 to “1”. The Flash word high byte can now be read at DATA. 6. Set OE to “1”. 306 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 27.7.7 Reading the EEPROM The algorithm for reading the EEPROM memory is as follows (refer to ”Programming the Flash” on page 303 for details on Command and Address loading): 1. A: Load Command “0000 0011”. 2. G: Load Address High Byte (0x00 - 0xFF). 3. B: Load Address Low Byte (0x00 - 0xFF). 4. Set OE to “0”, and BS1 to “0”. The EEPROM Data byte can now be read at DATA. 5. Set OE to “1”. 27.7.8 Programming the Fuse Low Bits The algorithm for programming the Fuse Low bits is as follows (refer to ”Programming the Flash” on page 303 for details on Command and Data loading): 1. A: Load Command “0100 0000”. 2. C: Load Data Low Byte. Bit n = “0” programs and bit n = “1” erases the Fuse bit. 3. Give WR a negative pulse and wait for RDY/BSY to go high. 27.7.9 Programming the Fuse High Bits The algorithm for programming the Fuse High bits is as follows (refer to ”Programming the Flash” on page 303 for details on Command and Data loading): 1. A: Load Command “0100 0000”. 2. C: Load Data Low Byte. Bit n = “0” programs and bit n = “1” erases the Fuse bit. 3. Set BS1 to “1” and BS2 to “0”. This selects high data byte. 4. Give WR a negative pulse and wait for RDY/BSY to go high. 5. Set BS1 to “0”. This selects low data byte. 27.7.10 Programming the Extended Fuse Bits The algorithm for programming the Extended Fuse bits is as follows (refer to ”Programming the Flash” on page 303 for details on Command and Data loading): 1. 1. A: Load Command “0100 0000”. 2. 2. C: Load Data Low Byte. Bit n = “0” programs and bit n = “1” erases the Fuse bit. 3. 3. Set BS1 to “0” and BS2 to “1”. This selects extended data byte. 4. 4. Give WR a negative pulse and wait for RDY/BSY to go high. 5. 5. Set BS2 to “0”. This selects low data byte. 307 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Figure 27-5. Programming the FUSES Waveforms Write Fuse Low byte Write Fuse high byte Write Extended Fuse byte A C A C A C DATA 0x40 DATA XX 0x40 DATA XX 0x40 DATA XX XA1 XA0 BS1 BS2 XTAL1 WR RDY/BSY RESET +12V OE PAGEL 27.7.11 Programming the Lock Bits The algorithm for programming the Lock bits is as follows (refer to ”Programming the Flash” on page 303 for details on Command and Data loading): 1. A: Load Command “0010 0000”. 2. C: Load Data Low Byte. Bit n = “0” programs the Lock bit. If LB mode 3 is programmed (LB1 and LB2 is programmed), it is not possible to program the Boot Lock bits by any External Programming mode. 3. Give WR a negative pulse and wait for RDY/BSY to go high. The Lock bits can only be cleared by executing Chip Erase. 27.7.12 Reading the Fuse and Lock Bits The algorithm for reading the Fuse and Lock bits is as follows (refer to ”Programming the Flash” on page 303 for details on Command loading): 1. A: Load Command “0000 0100”. 2. Set OE to “0”, BS2 to “0” and BS1 to “0”. The status of the Fuse Low bits can now be read at DATA (“0” means programmed). 3. Set OE to “0”, BS2 to “1” and BS1 to “1”. The status of the Fuse High bits can now be read at DATA (“0” means programmed). 4. Set OE to “0”, BS2 to “1”, and BS1 to “0”. The status of the Extended Fuse bits can now be read at DATA (“0” means programmed). 5. Set OE to “0”, BS2 to “0” and BS1 to “1”. The status of the Lock bits can now be read at DATA (“0” means programmed). 6. Set OE to “1”. 308 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Figure 27-6. Mapping Between BS1, BS2 and the Fuse and Lock Bits During Read Fuse Low Byte 0 0 Extended Fuse Byte 1 DATA BS2 Lock Bits 0 1 BS1 Fuse High Byte 1 BS2 27.7.13 Reading the Signature Bytes The algorithm for reading the Signature bytes is as follows (refer to ”Programming the Flash” on page 303 for details on Command and Address loading): 1. A: Load Command “0000 1000”. 2. B: Load Address Low Byte (0x00 - 0x02). 3. Set OE to “0”, and BS1 to “0”. The selected Signature byte can now be read at DATA. 4. Set OE to “1”. 27.7.14 Reading the Calibration Byte The algorithm for reading the Calibration byte is as follows (refer to ”Programming the Flash” on page 303 for details on Command and Address loading): 1. A: Load Command “0000 1000”. 2. B: Load Address Low Byte, 0x00. 3. Set OE to “0”, and BS1 to “1”. The Calibration byte can now be read at DATA. 4. Set OE to “1”. 27.7.15 Parallel Programming Characteristics Table 27-15. Parallel Programming Characteristics, V = 5V ± 10% CC Symbol Parameter Min Typ Max Units V Programming Enable Voltage 11.5 12.5 V PP I Programming Enable Current 250 A PP t Data and Control Valid before XTAL1 High 67 ns DVXH t XTAL1 Low to XTAL1 High 200 ns XLXH t XTAL1 Pulse Width High 150 ns XHXL t Data and Control Hold after XTAL1 Low 67 ns XLDX t XTAL1 Low to WR Low 0 ns XLWL t XTAL1 Low to PAGEL high 0 ns XLPH t PAGEL low to XTAL1 high 150 ns PLXH 309 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Table 27-15. Parallel Programming Characteristics, V = 5V ± 10% (Continued) CC Symbol Parameter Min Typ Max Units t BS1 Valid before PAGEL High 67 ns BVPH t PAGEL Pulse Width High 150 ns PHPL t BS1 Hold after PAGEL Low 67 ns PLBX t BS2/1 Hold after WR Low 67 ns WLBX t PAGEL Low to WR Low 67 ns PLWL t BS1 Valid to WR Low 67 ns BVWL t WR Pulse Width Low 150 ns WLWH t WR Low to RDY/BSY Low 0 1 s WLRL t WR Low to RDY/BSY High(1) 3.7 4.5 ms WLRH t WR Low to RDY/BSY High for Chip Erase(2) 7.5 9 ms WLRH_CE t XTAL1 Low to OE Low 0 ns XLOL t BS1 Valid to DATA valid 0 250 ns BVDV t OE Low to DATA Valid 250 ns OLDV t OE High to DATA Tri-stated 250 ns OHDZ Notes: 1. t is valid for the Write Flash, Write EEPROM, Write Fuse bits and Write Lock bits WLRH commands. 2. t is valid for the Chip Erase command. WLRH_CE Figure 27-7. Parallel Programming Timing, Including some General Timing Requirements t XLWL t XTAL1 XHXL t t DVXH XLDX Data & Contol (DATA, XA0/1, BS1, BS2) t t t BVPH PLBX BVWL t WLBX PAGEL t PHPL t WLWH WR t PLWL WLRL RDY/BSY t WLRH 310 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Figure 27-8. Parallel Programming Timing, Loading Sequence with Timing Requirements(1) LOAD ADDRESS LOAD DATA LOAD DATA LOAD DATA LOAD ADDRESS (LOW BYTE) (LOW BYTE) (HIGH BYTE) (LOW BYTE) tXLXH tXLPH tPLXH XTAL1 BS1 PAGEL DATA ADDR0 (Low Byte) DATA (Low Byte) DATA (High Byte) ADDR1 (Low Byte) XA0 XA1 Note: 1. The timing requirements shown in Figure 27-7 (i.e., t , t , and t ) also apply to load- DVXH XHXL XLDX ing operation. Figure 27-9. Parallel Programming Timing, Reading Sequence (within the Same Page) with Timing Requirements(1) LOAD ADDRESS READ DATA READ DATA LOAD ADDRESS (LOW BYTE) (LOW BYTE) (HIGH BYTE) (LOW BYTE) tXLOL XTAL1 tBVDV BS1 tOLDV OE tOHDZ DATA ADDR0 (Low Byte) DATA (Low Byte) DATA (High Byte) ADDR1 (Low Byte) XA0 XA1 Note: 1. The timing requirements shown in Figure 27-7 (i.e., t , t , and t ) also apply to read- DVXH XHXL XLDX ing operation.Serial Downloading Both the Flash and EEPROM memory arrays can be programmed using the serial SPI bus while RESET is pulled to GND. The serial interface consists of pins SCK, MOSI (input) and MISO (out- put). After RESET is set low, the Programming Enable instruction needs to be executed first before program/erase operations can be executed. NOTE, in Table 27-16 on page 312, the pin mapping for SPI programming is listed. Not all parts use the SPI pins dedicated for the internal SPI interface. 311 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 27.7.16 Serial Programming Pin Mapping Table 27-16. Pin Mapping Serial Programming Symbol Pins I/O Description MOSI PB2 I Serial Data in MISO PB3 O Serial Data out SCK PB1 I Serial Clock Figure 27-10. Serial Programming and Verify(1) +1.8 - 5.5V VCC +1.8 - 5.5V(2) MOSI AVCC MISO SCK XTAL1 RESET GND Notes: 1. If the device is clocked by the internal Oscillator, it is no need to connect a clock source to the XTAL1 pin. 2. V - 0.3V < AVCC < V + 0.3V, however, AVCC should always be within 1.8 - 5.5V CC CC When programming the EEPROM, an auto-erase cycle is built into the self-timed programming operation (in the Serial mode ONLY) and there is no need to first execute the Chip Erase instruction. The Chip Erase operation turns the content of every memory location in both the Program and EEPROM arrays into 0xFF. Depending on CKSEL Fuses, a valid clock must be present. The minimum low and high periods for the serial clock (SCK) input are defined as follows: Low: > 2 CPU clock cycles for f < 12MHz, 3 CPU clock cycles for f >= 12MHz ck ck High: > 2 CPU clock cycles for f < 12MHz, 3 CPU clock cycles for f >= 12MHz ck ck 27.7.17 Serial Programming Algorithm When writing serial data to the ATmega329P/3290P, data is clocked on the rising edge of SCK. When reading data from the ATmega329P/3290P, data is clocked on the falling edge of SCK. See Figure 27-11 for timing details. To program and verify the ATmega329P/3290P in the serial programming mode, the following sequence is recommended (See four byte instruction formats in Table 27-18): 1. Power-up sequence: Apply power between V and GND while RESET and SCK are set to “0”. In some sys- CC 312 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P tems, the programmer can not guarantee that SCK is held low during power-up. In this case, RESET must be given a positive pulse of at least two CPU clock cycles duration after SCK has been set to “0”. 2. Wait for at least 20 ms and enable serial programming by sending the Programming Enable serial instruction to pin MOSI. 3. The serial programming instructions will not work if the communication is out of synchro- nization. When in sync. the second byte (0x53), will echo back when issuing the third byte of the Programming Enable instruction. Whether the echo is correct or not, all four bytes of the instruction must be transmitted. If the 0x53 did not echo back, give RESET a positive pulse and issue a new Programming Enable command. 4. The Flash is programmed one page at a time. The page size is found in Table 27-13 on page 301. The memory page is loaded one byte at a time by supplying the 6 LSB of the address and data together with the Load Program Memory Page instruction. To ensure correct loading of the page, the data low byte must be loaded before data high byte is applied for a given address. The Program Memory Page is stored by loading the Write Program Memory Page instruction with the 8 MSB of the address. If polling is not used, the user must wait at least t before issuing the next page. (See Table 27-17.) WD_FLASH Accessing the serial programming interface before the Flash write operation completes can result in incorrect programming. 5. A: The EEPROM array is programmed one byte at a time by supplying the address and data together with the appropriate Write instruction. An EEPROM memory location is first automatically erased before new data is written. If polling (RDY/BSY) is not used, the user must wait at least t before issuing the next byte (See Table 27-17.) In a WD_EEPROM chip erased device, no 0xFFs in the data file(s) need to be programmed. B: The EEPROM array is programmed one page at a time. The Memory page is loaded one byte at a time by supplying the 2 LSB of the address and data together with the Load EEPROM Memory Page instruction. The EEPROM Memory Page is stored by loading the Write EEPROM Memory Page Instruction with the 4 MSB of the address. When using EEPROM page access only byte locations loaded with the Load EEPROM Memory Page instruction is altered. The remaining locations remain unchanged. If polling (RDY/BSY) is not used, the used must wait at least t before issuing the next page (See Table WD_EEPROM 27-14). In a chip erased device, no 0xFF in the data file(s) need to be programmed. 6. Any memory location can be verified by using the Read instruction which returns the con- tent at the selected address at serial output MISO. 7. At the end of the programming session, RESET can be set high to commence normal operation. 8. Power-off sequence (if needed): Set RESET to “1”. Turn V power off. CC Table 27-17. Minimum Wait Delay Before Writing the Next Flash or EEPROM Location Symbol Minimum Wait Delay t 4.5ms WD_FUSE t 4.5ms WD_FLASH t 9.0ms WD_EEPROM t 9.0ms WD_ERASE 313 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Figure 27-11. Serial Programming Waveforms SERIAL DATA INPUT MSB LSB (MOSI) SERIAL DATA OUTPUT MSB LSB (MISO) SERIAL CLOCK INPUT (SCK) SAMPLE 27.7.18 Serial Programming Instruction set Table 27-18 and Figure 27-12 on page 316 describes the Instruction set. Table 27-18. Serial Programming Instruction Set Instruction Format Instruction/Operation Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte4 Programming Enable $AC $53 $00 $00 Chip Erase (Program Memory/EEPROM) $AC $80 $00 $00 Poll RDY/BSY $F0 $00 $00 data byte out Load Instructions Load Extended Address byte(1) $4D $00 Extended adr $00 Load Program Memory Page, High byte $48 $00 adr LSB high data byte in Load Program Memory Page, Low byte $40 $00 adr LSB low data byte in 0000 00aa Load EEPROM Memory Page (page access) $C1 $00 / data byte in 0000 0aaa Read Instructions Read Program Memory, High byte $28 adr MSB adr LSB high data byte out Read Program Memory, Low byte $20 adr MSB adr LSB low data byte out 0000 00aa Read EEPROM Memory $A0 / aaaa aaaa data byte out 0000 0aaa Read Lock bits $58 $00 $00 data byte out Read Signature Byte $30 $00 0000 000aa data byte out Read Fuse bits $50 $00 $00 data byte out Read Fuse High bits $58 $08 $00 data byte out Read Extended Fuse Bits $50 $08 $00 data byte out Read Calibration Byte $38 $00 $00 data byte out Write Instructions(6) Write Program Memory Page $4C adr MSB adr LSB $00 314 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Table 27-18. Serial Programming Instruction Set Instruction Format Instruction/Operation Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte4 0000 00aa Write EEPROM Memory $C0 / aaaa aaaa data byte in 0000 0aaa 0000 00aa aaaa aa00 Write EEPROM Memory Page (page access) $C2 / / $00 0000 0aaa aaaa a000 Write Lock bits $AC $E0 $00 data byte in Write Fuse bits $AC $A0 $00 data byte in Write Fuse High bits $AC $A8 $00 data byte in Write Extended Fuse Bits $AC $A4 $00 data byte in Notes: 1. Not all instructions are applicable for all parts 2. a = address 3. Bits are programmed ‘0’, unprogrammed ‘1’. 4. To ensure future compatibility, unused Fuses and Lock bits should be unprogrammed (‘1’). 5. Refer to the corresponding section for Fuse and Lock bits, Calibration and Signature bytes and Page size. 6. Instructions accessing program memory use a word address. This address may be random within the page range. 7. See http://www.atmel.com/avr for Application Notes regarding programming and programmers. If the LSB in RDY/BSY data byte out is ‘1’, a programming operation is still pending. Wait until this bit returns ‘0’ before the next instruction is carried out. Within the same page, the low data byte must be loaded prior to the high data byte. After data is loaded to the page buffer, program the EEPROM page, see Figure 27-12. 315 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Figure 27-12. Serial Programming Instruction example Serial Programming Instruction Load Program Memory Page (High/Low Byte)/ Write Program Memory Page/ Load EEPROM Memory Page (page access) Write EEPROM Memory Page Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4 AAdr MMSSB Adr LSB Adr MSB AAdrr LLSBB Bit 15 B 0 Bit 15 B 0 Page Buffer Page Offset Page 0 Page 1 Page 2 Page Number Page N-1 Program Memory/ EEPROM Memory 27.7.19 SPI Serial Programming Characteristics For characteristics of the SPI module, see ”SPI Timing Characteristics” on page 338. 316 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 27.8 Programming via the JTAG Interface Programming through the JTAG interface requires control of the four JTAG specific pins: TCK, TMS, TDI, and TDO. Control of the reset and clock pins is not required. To be able to use the JTAG interface, the JTAGEN Fuse must be programmed. The device is default shipped with the fuse programmed. In addition, the JTD bit in MCUCR must be cleared. Alternatively, if the JTD bit is set, the external reset can be forced low. Then, the JTD bit will be cleared after two chip clocks, and the JTAG pins are available for programming. This provides a means of using the JTAG pins as normal port pins in Running mode while still allowing In-Sys- tem Programming via the JTAG interface. Note that this technique can not be used when using the JTAG pins for Boundary-scan or On-chip Debug. In these cases the JTAG pins must be ded- icated for this purpose. During programming the clock frequency of the TCK Input must be less than the maximum fre- quency of the chip. The System Clock Prescaler can not be used to divide the TCK Clock Input into a sufficiently low frequency. As a definition in this data sheet, the LSB is shifted in and out first of all Shift Registers. 27.8.1 Programming Specific JTAG Instructions The Instruction Register is 4-bit wide, supporting up to 16 instructions. The JTAG instructions useful for programming are listed below. The OPCODE for each instruction is shown behind the instruction name in hex format. The text describes which Data Register is selected as path between TDI and TDO for each instruction. The Run-Test/Idle state of the TAP controller is used to generate internal clocks. It can also be used as an idle state between JTAG sequences. The state machine sequence for changing the instruction word is shown in Figure 27-13. 317 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Figure 27-13. State Machine Sequence for Changing the Instruction Word 1 Test-Logic-Reset 0 0 Run-Test/Idle 1 Select-DR Scan 1 Select-IR Scan 1 0 0 1 1 Capture-DR Capture-IR 0 0 Shift-DR 0 Shift-IR 0 1 1 1 1 Exit1-DR Exit1-IR 0 0 Pause-DR 0 Pause-IR 0 1 1 0 0 Exit2-DR Exit2-IR 1 1 Update-DR Update-IR 1 0 1 0 27.8.2 AVR_RESET (0xC) The AVR specific public JTAG instruction for setting the AVR device in the Reset mode or taking the device out from the Reset mode. The TAP controller is not reset by this instruction. The one bit Reset Register is selected as Data Register. Note that the reset will be active as long as there is a logic “one” in the Reset Chain. The output from this chain is not latched. The active states are: • Shift-DR: The Reset Register is shifted by the TCK input. 27.8.3 PROG_ENABLE (0x4) The AVR specific public JTAG instruction for enabling programming via the JTAG port. The 16- bit Programming Enable Register is selected as Data Register. The active states are the following: • Shift-DR: The programming enable signature is shifted into the Data Register. • Update-DR: The programming enable signature is compared to the correct value, and Programming mode is entered if the signature is valid. 318 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 27.8.4 PROG_COMMANDS (0x5) The AVR specific public JTAG instruction for entering programming commands via the JTAG port. The 15-bit Programming Command Register is selected as Data Register. The active states are the following: • Capture-DR: The result of the previous command is loaded into the Data Register. • Shift-DR: The Data Register is shifted by the TCK input, shifting out the result of the previous command and shifting in the new command. • Update-DR: The programming command is applied to the Flash inputs • Run-Test/Idle: One clock cycle is generated, executing the applied command (not always required, see Table 27-19 below). 27.8.5 PROG_PAGELOAD (0x6) The AVR specific public JTAG instruction to directly load the Flash data page via the JTAG port. An 8-bit Flash Data Byte Register is selected as the Data Register. This is physically the 8 LSBs of the Programming Command Register. The active states are the following: • Shift-DR: The Flash Data Byte Register is shifted by the TCK input. • Update-DR: The content of the Flash Data Byte Register is copied into a temporary register. A write sequence is initiated that within 11 TCK cycles loads the content of the temporary register into the Flash page buffer. The AVR automatically alternates between writing the low and the high byte for each new Update-DR state, starting with the low byte for the first Update-DR encountered after entering the PROG_PAGELOAD command. The Program Counter is pre- incremented before writing the low byte, except for the first written byte. This ensures that the first data is written to the address set up by PROG_COMMANDS, and loading the last location in the page buffer does not make the program counter increment into the next page. 27.8.6 PROG_PAGEREAD (0x7) The AVR specific public JTAG instruction to directly capture the Flash content via the JTAG port. An 8-bit Flash Data Byte Register is selected as the Data Register. This is physically the 8 LSBs of the Programming Command Register. The active states are the following: • Capture-DR: The content of the selected Flash byte is captured into the Flash Data Byte Register. The AVR automatically alternates between reading the low and the high byte for each new Capture-DR state, starting with the low byte for the first Capture-DR encountered after entering the PROG_PAGEREAD command. The Program Counter is post-incremented after reading each high byte, including the first read byte. This ensures that the first data is captured from the first address set up by PROG_COMMANDS, and reading the last location in the page makes the program counter increment into the next page. • Shift-DR: The Flash Data Byte Register is shifted by the TCK input. 319 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 27.8.7 Data Registers The Data Registers are selected by the JTAG instruction registers described in section ”Pro- gramming Specific JTAG Instructions” on page 317. The Data Registers relevant for programming operations are: • Reset Register • Programming Enable Register • Programming Command Register • Flash Data Byte Register 27.8.8 Reset Register The Reset Register is a Test Data Register used to reset the part during programming. It is required to reset the part before entering Programming mode. A high value in the Reset Register corresponds to pulling the external reset low. The part is reset as long as there is a high value present in the Reset Register. Depending on the Fuse settings for the clock options, the part will remain reset for a Reset Time-out period (refer to ”Clock Sources” on page 28) after releasing the Reset Register. The output from this Data Register is not latched, so the reset will take place immediately, as shown in Figure 25-1 on page 256. 27.8.9 Programming Enable Register The Programming Enable Register is a 16-bit register. The contents of this register is compared to the programming enable signature, binary code 0b1010_0011_0111_0000. When the con- tents of the register is equal to the programming enable signature, programming via the JTAG port is enabled. The register is reset to 0 on Power-on Reset, and should always be reset when leaving Programming mode. Figure 27-14. Programming Enable Register TDI D 0xA370 = A D Q Programming Enable T A ClockDR & PROG_ENABLE TDO 27.8.10 Programming Command Register The Programming Command Register is a 15-bit register. This register is used to serially shift in programming commands, and to serially shift out the result of the previous command, if any. The JTAG Programming Instruction Set is shown in Table 27-19. The state sequence when shifting in the programming commands is illustrated in Figure 27-16. 320 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Figure 27-15. Programming Command Register TDI S T R O B E S Flash EEPROM A Fuses D Lock Bits D R E S S / D A T A TDO 321 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Table 27-19. JTAG Programming Instruction Set a = address high bits, b = address low bits, H = 0 - Low byte, 1 - High Byte, o = data out, i = data in, x = don’t care Instruction TDI Sequence TDO Sequence Notes 0100011_10000000 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx 0110001_10000000 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx 1a. Chip Erase 0110011_10000000 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx 0110011_10000000 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx 1b. Poll for Chip Erase Complete 0110011_10000000 xxxxxox_xxxxxxxx (2) 2a. Enter Flash Write 0100011_00010000 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx 2b. Load Address High Byte 0000111_aaaaaaaa xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx (9) 2c. Load Address Low Byte 0000011_bbbbbbbb xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx 2d. Load Data Low Byte 0010011_iiiiiiii xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx 2e. Load Data High Byte 0010111_iiiiiiii xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx 0110111_00000000 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx 2f. Latch Data 1110111_00000000 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx (1) 0110111_00000000 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx 0110111_00000000 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx 0110101_00000000 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx 2g. Write Flash Page (1) 0110111_00000000 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx 0110111_00000000 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx 2h. Poll for Page Write Complete 0110111_00000000 xxxxxox_xxxxxxxx (2) 3a. Enter Flash Read 0100011_00000010 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx 3b. Load Address High Byte 0000111_aaaaaaaa xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx (9) 3c. Load Address Low Byte 0000011_bbbbbbbb xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx 0110010_00000000 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx 3d. Read Data Low and High Byte 0110110_00000000 xxxxxxx_oooooooo Low byte 0110111_00000000 xxxxxxx_oooooooo High byte 4a. Enter EEPROM Write 0100011_00010001 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx 4b. Load Address High Byte 0000111_aaaaaaaa xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx (9) 4c. Load Address Low Byte 0000011_bbbbbbbb xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx 4d. Load Data Byte 0010011_iiiiiiii xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx 0110111_00000000 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx 4e. Latch Data 1110111_00000000 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx (1) 0110111_00000000 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx 0110011_00000000 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx 0110001_00000000 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx 4f. Write EEPROM Page (1) 0110011_00000000 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx 0110011_00000000 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx 4g. Poll for Page Write Complete 0110011_00000000 xxxxxox_xxxxxxxx (2) 5a. Enter EEPROM Read 0100011_00000011 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx 5b. Load Address High Byte 0000111_aaaaaaaa xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx (9) 322 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Table 27-19. JTAG Programming Instruction Set (Continued) a = address high bits, b = address low bits, H = 0 - Low byte, 1 - High Byte, o = data out, i = data in, x = don’t care Instruction TDI Sequence TDO Sequence Notes 5c. Load Address Low Byte 0000011_bbbbbbbb xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx 0110011_bbbbbbbb xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx 5d. Read Data Byte 0110010_00000000 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx 0110011_00000000 xxxxxxx_oooooooo 6a. Enter Fuse Write 0100011_01000000 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx 6b. Load Data Low Byte(6) 0010011_iiiiiiii xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx (3) 0111011_00000000 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx 0111001_00000000 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx 6c. Write Fuse Extended Byte (1) 0111011_00000000 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx 0111011_00000000 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx 6d. Poll for Fuse Write Complete 0110111_00000000 xxxxxox_xxxxxxxx (2) 6e. Load Data Low Byte(7) 0010011_iiiiiiii xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx (3) 0110111_00000000 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx 0110101_00000000 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx 6f. Write Fuse High Byte (1) 0110111_00000000 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx 0110111_00000000 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx 6g. Poll for Fuse Write Complete 0110111_00000000 xxxxxox_xxxxxxxx (2) 6h. Load Data Low Byte(7) 0010011_iiiiiiii xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx (3) 0110011_00000000 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx 0110001_00000000 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx 6i. Write Fuse Low Byte (1) 0110011_00000000 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx 0110011_00000000 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx 6j. Poll for Fuse Write Complete 0110011_00000000 xxxxxox_xxxxxxxx (2) 7a. Enter Lock Bit Write 0100011_00100000 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx 7b. Load Data Byte(9) 0010011_11iiiiii xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx (4) 0110011_00000000 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx 0110001_00000000 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx 7c. Write Lock Bits (1) 0110011_00000000 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx 0110011_00000000 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx 7d. Poll for Lock Bit Write complete 0110011_00000000 xxxxxox_xxxxxxxx (2) 8a. Enter Fuse/Lock Bit Read 0100011_00000100 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx 0111010_00000000 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx 8b. Read Extended Fuse Byte(6) 0111011_00000000 xxxxxxx_oooooooo 0111110_00000000 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx 8c. Read Fuse High Byte(7) 0111111_00000000 xxxxxxx_oooooooo 0110010_00000000 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx 8d. Read Fuse Low Byte(8) 0110011_00000000 xxxxxxx_oooooooo 0110110_00000000 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx 8e. Read Lock Bits(9) (5) 0110111_00000000 xxxxxxx_xxoooooo 323 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Table 27-19. JTAG Programming Instruction Set (Continued) a = address high bits, b = address low bits, H = 0 - Low byte, 1 - High Byte, o = data out, i = data in, x = don’t care Instruction TDI Sequence TDO Sequence Notes 0111010_00000000 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx (5) 0111110_00000000 xxxxxxx_oooooooo Fuse Ext. byte 8f. Read Fuses and Lock Bits 0110010_00000000 xxxxxxx_oooooooo Fuse High byte 0110110_00000000 xxxxxxx_oooooooo Fuse Low byte 0110111_00000000 xxxxxxx_oooooooo Lock bits 9a. Enter Signature Byte Read 0100011_00001000 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx 9b. Load Address Byte 0000011_bbbbbbbb xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx 0110010_00000000 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx 9c. Read Signature Byte 0110011_00000000 xxxxxxx_oooooooo 10a. Enter Calibration Byte Read 0100011_00001000 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx 10b. Load Address Byte 0000011_bbbbbbbb xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx 0110110_00000000 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx 10c. Read Calibration Byte 0110111_00000000 xxxxxxx_oooooooo 0100011_00000000 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx 11a. Load No Operation Command 0110011_00000000 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx Notes: 1. This command sequence is not required if the seven MSB are correctly set by the previous command sequence (which is normally the case). 2. Repeat until o = “1”. 3. Set bits to “0” to program the corresponding Fuse, “1” to unprogram the Fuse. 4. Set bits to “0” to program the corresponding Lock bit, “1” to leave the Lock bit unchanged. 5. “0” = programmed, “1” = unprogrammed. 6. The bit mapping for Fuses Extended byte is listed in Table 27-3 on page 297 7. The bit mapping for Fuses High byte is listed in Table 27-4 on page 298 8. The bit mapping for Fuses Low byte is listed in Table 27-5 on page 298 9. The bit mapping for Lock bits byte is listed in Table 27-1 on page 296 10.Address bits exceeding PCMSB and EEAMSB (Table 27-13 and Table 27-14) are don’t care 11.All TDI and TDO sequences are represented by binary digits (0b...). 324 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Figure 27-16. State Machine Sequence for Changing/Reading the Data Word 1 Test-Logic-Reset 0 0 Run-Test/Idle 1 Select-DR Scan 1 Select-IR Scan 1 0 0 1 1 Capture-DR Capture-IR 0 0 Shift-DR 0 Shift-IR 0 1 1 1 1 Exit1-DR Exit1-IR 0 0 Pause-DR 0 Pause-IR 0 1 1 0 0 Exit2-DR Exit2-IR 1 1 Update-DR Update-IR 1 0 1 0 27.8.11 Flash Data Byte Register The Flash Data Byte Register provides an efficient way to load the entire Flash page buffer before executing Page Write, or to read out/verify the content of the Flash. A state machine sets up the control signals to the Flash and senses the strobe signals from the Flash, thus only the data words need to be shifted in/out. The Flash Data Byte Register actually consists of the 8-bit scan chain and a 8-bit temporary reg- ister. During page load, the Update-DR state copies the content of the scan chain over to the temporary register and initiates a write sequence that within 11 TCK cycles loads the content of the temporary register into the Flash page buffer. The AVR automatically alternates between writing the low and the high byte for each new Update-DR state, starting with the low byte for the first Update-DR encountered after entering the PROG_PAGELOAD command. The Program Counter is pre-incremented before writing the low byte, except for the first written byte. This ensures that the first data is written to the address set up by PROG_COMMANDS, and loading the last location in the page buffer does not make the Program Counter increment into the next page. During Page Read, the content of the selected Flash byte is captured into the Flash Data Byte Register during the Capture-DR state. The AVR automatically alternates between reading the low and the high byte for each new Capture-DR state, starting with the low byte for the first Cap- 325 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P ture-DR encountered after entering the PROG_PAGEREAD command. The Program Counter is post-incremented after reading each high byte, including the first read byte. This ensures that the first data is captured from the first address set up by PROG_COMMANDS, and reading the last location in the page makes the program counter increment into the next page. Figure 27-17. Flash Data Byte Register STROBES State Machine TDI ADDRESS Flash EEPROM Fuses Lock Bits D A T A TDO The state machine controlling the Flash Data Byte Register is clocked by TCK. During normal operation in which eight bits are shifted for each Flash byte, the clock cycles needed to navigate through the TAP controller automatically feeds the state machine for the Flash Data Byte Regis- ter with sufficient number of clock pulses to complete its operation transparently for the user. However, if too few bits are shifted between each Update-DR state during page load, the TAP controller should stay in the Run-Test/Idle state for some TCK cycles to ensure that there are at least 11 TCK cycles between each Update-DR state. 27.8.12 Programming Algorithm All references below of type “1a”, “1b”, and so on, refer to Table 27-19. 27.8.13 Entering Programming Mode 1. Enter JTAG instruction AVR_RESET and shift 1 in the Reset Register. 2. Enter instruction PROG_ENABLE and shift 0b1010_0011_0111_0000 in the Program- ming Enable Register. 27.8.14 Leaving Programming Mode 1. Enter JTAG instruction PROG_COMMANDS. 2. Disable all programming instructions by using no operation instruction 11a. 3. Enter instruction PROG_ENABLE and shift 0b0000_0000_0000_0000 in the program- ming Enable Register. 4. Enter JTAG instruction AVR_RESET and shift 0 in the Reset Register. 326 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 27.8.15 Performing Chip Erase 1. Enter JTAG instruction PROG_COMMANDS. 2. Start Chip Erase using programming instruction 1a. 3. Poll for Chip Erase complete using programming instruction 1b, or wait for t (refer WLRH_CE to Table 27-15 on page 309). 27.8.16 Programming the Flash Before programming the Flash a Chip Erase must be performed, see “Performing Chip Erase” on page 327. 1. Enter JTAG instruction PROG_COMMANDS. 2. Enable Flash write using programming instruction 2a. 3. Load address High byte using programming instruction 2b. 4. Load address Low byte using programming instruction 2c. 5. Load data using programming instructions 2d, 2e and 2f. 6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for all instruction words in the page. 7. Write the page using programming instruction 2g. 8. Poll for Flash write complete using programming instruction 2h, or wait for t (refer to WLRH Table 27-15 on page 309). 9. Repeat steps 3 to 7 until all data have been programmed. A more efficient data transfer can be achieved using the PROG_PAGELOAD instruction: 1. Enter JTAG instruction PROG_COMMANDS. 2. Enable Flash write using programming instruction 2a. 3. Load the page address using programming instructions 2b and 2c. PCWORD (refer to Table 27-13 on page 301) is used to address within one page and must be written as 0. 4. Enter JTAG instruction PROG_PAGELOAD. 5. Load the entire page by shifting in all instruction words in the page byte-by-byte, starting with the LSB of the first instruction in the page and ending with the MSB of the last instruction in the page. Use Update-DR to copy the contents of the Flash Data Byte Reg- ister into the Flash page location and to auto-increment the Program Counter before each new word. 6. Enter JTAG instruction PROG_COMMANDS. 7. Write the page using programming instruction 2g. 8. Poll for Flash write complete using programming instruction 2h, or wait for t (refer to WLRH Table 27-15 on page 309). 9. Repeat steps 3 to 8 until all data have been programmed. 27.8.17 Reading the Flash 1. Enter JTAG instruction PROG_COMMANDS. 2. Enable Flash read using programming instruction 3a. 3. Load address using programming instructions 3b and 3c. 4. Read data using programming instruction 3d. 5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 until all data have been read. A more efficient data transfer can be achieved using the PROG_PAGEREAD instruction: 1. Enter JTAG instruction PROG_COMMANDS. 2. Enable Flash read using programming instruction 3a. 327 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 3. Load the page address using programming instructions 3b and 3c. PCWORD (refer to Table 27-13 on page 301) is used to address within one page and must be written as 0. 4. Enter JTAG instruction PROG_PAGEREAD. 5. Read the entire page (or Flash) by shifting out all instruction words in the page (or Flash), starting with the LSB of the first instruction in the page (Flash) and ending with the MSB of the last instruction in the page (Flash). The Capture-DR state both captures the data from the Flash, and also auto-increments the program counter after each word is read. Note that Capture-DR comes before the shift-DR state. Hence, the first byte which is shifted out contains valid data. 6. Enter JTAG instruction PROG_COMMANDS. 7. Repeat steps 3 to 6 until all data have been read. 27.8.18 Programming the EEPROM Before programming the EEPROM a Chip Erase must be performed, see “Performing Chip Erase” on page 327. 1. Enter JTAG instruction PROG_COMMANDS. 2. Enable EEPROM write using programming instruction 4a. 3. Load address High byte using programming instruction 4b. 4. Load address Low byte using programming instruction 4c. 5. Load data using programming instructions 4d and 4e. 6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for all data bytes in the page. 7. Write the data using programming instruction 4f. 8. Poll for EEPROM write complete using programming instruction 4g, or wait for t WLRH (refer to Table 27-15 on page 309). 9. Repeat steps 3 to 8 until all data have been programmed. Note that the PROG_PAGELOAD instruction can not be used when programming the EEPROM. 27.8.19 Reading the EEPROM 1. Enter JTAG instruction PROG_COMMANDS. 2. Enable EEPROM read using programming instruction 5a. 3. Load address using programming instructions 5b and 5c. 4. Read data using programming instruction 5d. 5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 until all data have been read. Note that the PROG_PAGEREAD instruction can not be used when reading the EEPROM. 27.8.20 Programming the Fuses 1. Enter JTAG instruction PROG_COMMANDS. 2. Enable Fuse write using programming instruction 6a. 3. Load data high byte using programming instructions 6b. A bit value of “0” will program the corresponding fuse, a “1” will unprogram the fuse. 4. Write Fuse High byte using programming instruction 6c. 5. Poll for Fuse write complete using programming instruction 6d, or wait for t (refer to WLRH Table 27-15 on page 309). 6. Load data low byte using programming instructions 6e. A “0” will program the fuse, a “1” will unprogram the fuse. 7. Write Fuse low byte using programming instruction 6f. 328 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 8. Poll for Fuse write complete using programming instruction 6g, or wait for t (refer to WLRH Table 27-15 on page 309). 27.8.21 Programming the Lock Bits 1. Enter JTAG instruction PROG_COMMANDS. 2. Enable Lock bit write using programming instruction 7a. 3. Load data using programming instructions 7b. A bit value of “0” will program the corre- sponding lock bit, a “1” will leave the lock bit unchanged. 4. Write Lock bits using programming instruction 7c. 5. Poll for Lock bit write complete using programming instruction 7d, or wait for t (refer WLRH to Table 27-15 on page 309). 27.8.22 Reading the Fuses and Lock Bits 1. Enter JTAG instruction PROG_COMMANDS. 2. Enable Fuse/Lock bit read using programming instruction 8a. 3. To read all Fuses and Lock bits, use programming instruction 8e. To only read Fuse High byte, use programming instruction 8b. To only read Fuse Low byte, use programming instruction 8c. To only read Lock bits, use programming instruction 8d. 27.8.23 Reading the Signature Bytes 1. Enter JTAG instruction PROG_COMMANDS. 2. Enable Signature byte read using programming instruction 9a. 3. Load address 0x00 using programming instruction 9b. 4. Read first signature byte using programming instruction 9c. 5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 with address 0x01 and address 0x02 to read the second and third signature bytes, respectively. 27.8.24 Reading the Calibration Byte 1. Enter JTAG instruction PROG_COMMANDS. 2. Enable Calibration byte read using programming instruction 10a. 3. Load address 0x00 using programming instruction 10b. Read the calibration byte using programming instruction 10c. 329 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 28. Electrical Characteristics 28.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings* Operating Temperature..................................-55C to +125C *NOTICE: Stresses beyond those listed under “Absolute Maximum Ratings” may cause permanent dam- Storage Temperature.....................................-65°C to +150°C age to the device. This is a stress rating only and functional operation of the device at these or Voltage on any Pin except RESET other conditions beyond those indicated in the with respect to Ground................................-0.5V to V +0.5V operational sections of this specification is not CC implied. Exposure to absolute maximum rating Voltage on RESET with respect to Ground......-0.5V to +13.0V conditions for extended periods may affect device reliability. Maximum Operating Voltage............................................6.0V DC Current per I/O Pin................................................40.0mA DC Current V and GND Pins.................................200.0mA CC 28.2 DC Characteristics Table 28-1. T = -40C to 85C, V = 1.8V to 5.5V (unless otherwise noted) A CC Symbol Parameter Condition Min. Typ. Max. Units Input Low Voltage, V = 1.8V - 2.4V -0.5 0.2V (1) V CC CC V IL Except XTAL1 pin V = 2.4V - 5.5V -0.5 0.3V (1) CC CC Input Low Voltage, XTAL1 V V = 1.8V - 5.5V -0.5 0.1V (1) V IL1 pin CC CC Input High Voltage, V = 1.8V - 2.4V 0.7V (2) V + 0.5 V Except XTAL1 and CC CC CC V IH V = 2.4V - 5.5V 0.6V (2) V + 0.5 RESET pins CC CC CC Input High Voltage, V = 1.8V - 2.4V 0.8V (2) V + 0.5 V CC CC CC V IH1 XTAL1 pin V = 2.4V - 5.5V 0.7V (2) V + 0.5 CC CC CC Input High Voltage, V V = 1.8V - 5.5V 0.85V (2) V + 0.5 V IH2 RESET pin CC CC CC Output Low Voltage(3), I = 10mA, V = 5V 0.9 V OL CC V OL Port A, C, D, E, F, G, H, J I = 5mA, V = 3V 0.6 OL CC Output Low Voltage(3), I = 20mA, V = 5V 0.9 V OL CC V OL1 Port B I = 10mA, V = 3V 0.6 OL CC Output High Voltage(4), I = -10mA, V = 5V 4.2 V OH CC V OH Port A, C, D, E, F, G, H, J I = -5mA, V = 3V 2.3 OH CC Output High Voltage(4), I = -20mA, V = 5V 4.2 V OH CC V OH1 Port B I = -10mA, V = 3V 2.3 OH CC Input Leakage V = 5.5V, pin low I CC 1 µA IL Current I/O Pin (absolute value) Input Leakage V = 5.5V, pin high I CC 1 µA IH Current I/O Pin (absolute value) R Reset Pull-up Resistor 20 100 k RST R I/O Pin Pull-up Resistor 20 100 k PU 330 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Table 28-1. T = -40C to 85C, V = 1.8V to 5.5V (unless otherwise noted) (Continued) A CC Symbol Parameter Condition Min. Typ. Max. Units Analog Comparator V = 5V V CC <10 40 mV ACIO Input Offset Voltage V = V /2 in CC Analog Comparator V = 5V I CC -50 50 nA ACLK Input Leakage Current V = V /2 in CC Analog Comparator V = 2.7V 750 t CC ns ACID Propagation Delay V = 4.0V 500 CC Notes: 1. “Max” means the highest value where the pin is guaranteed to be read as low 2. “Min.” means the lowest value where the pin is guaranteed to be read as high 3. Although each I/O port can sink more than the test conditions (20mA at V = 5V, 10mA at V = 3V for Port B and 10mA at CC CC V = 5V, 5mA at V = 3V for all other ports) under steady state conditions (non-transient), the following must be observed: CC CC TQFP and QFN/MLF Package: 1] The sum of all IOL, for all ports, should not exceed 400mA. 2] The sum of all IOL, for ports A0 - A7, C4 - C7, G2 should not exceed 100mA. 3] The sum of all IOL, for ports B0 - B7, E0 - E7, G3 - G5 should not exceed 100mA. 4] The sum of all IOL, for ports D0 - D7, C0 - C3, G0 - G1 should not exceed 100mA. 5] The sum of all IOL, for ports F0 - F7, should not exceed 100mA. If IOL exceeds the test condition, VOLmAy exceed the related specification. Pins are not guaranteed to sink current greater than the listed test condition. 4. Although each I/O port can source more than the test conditions (20mA at V = 5V, 10mA at V = 3V for Port B and 10mA CC CC at V = 5V, 5mA at V = 3V for all other ports) under steady state conditions (non-transient), the following must be CC CC observed: TQFP and QFN/MLF Package: 1] The sum of all IOL, for all ports, should not exceed 400mA. 2] The sum of all IOL, for ports A0 - A7, C4 - C7, G2 should not exceed 100mA. 3] The sum of all IOL, for ports B0 - B7, E0 - E7, G3 - G5 should not exceed 100mA. 4] The sum of all IOL, for ports D0 - D7, C0 - C3, G0 - G1 should not exceed 100mA. 5] The sum of all IOL, for ports F0 - F7, should not exceed 100mA. If IOH exceeds the test condition, VOH may exceed the related specification. Pins are not guaranteed to source current greater than the listed test condition. 331 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 28.2.1 ATmega329P DC Characteristics Table 28-2. T = -40C to 85C, V = 1.8V to 5.5V (unless otherwise noted) A CC Symbol Parameter Condition Min. Typ. Max. Units Active 1MHz, V = 2V 0.5 0.75 mA CC Active 4MHz, V = 3V 2.6 3.5 mA CC Active 8MHz, V = 5V 9 12 mA CC Power Supply Current Idle 1MHz, V = 2V 0.14 0.25 mA CC Idle 4MHz, V = 3V 0.75 1.5 mA CC ICC Idle 8MHz, VCC = 5V 2.9 5 mA 32kHz TOSC enabled, 0.75 µA V = 1.8V CC Power-save mode 32kHz TOSC enabled, 1 µA V = 3V CC WDT enabled, V = 3V 6.7 15 µA Power-down mode(1) CC WDT disabled, V = 3V 0.2 2 µA CC Notes: 1. Typical value at 25C 332 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 28.2.2 ATmega3290P DC Characteristics Table 28-3. T = -40C to 85C, V = 1.8V to 5.5V (unless otherwise noted) A CC Symbol Parameter Condition Min. Typ. Max. Units Active 1MHz, V = 2V 0.5 0.75 mA CC Active 4MHz, V = 3V 2.6 3.5 mA CC Active 8MHz, V = 5V 9 12 mA CC Power Supply Current Idle 1MHz, V = 2V 0.14 0.25 mA CC Idle 4MHz, V = 3V 0.75 1.5 mA CC ICC Idle 8MHz, VCC = 5V 2.9 5 mA 32kHz TOSC enabled, 0.75 µA V = 1.8V CC Power-save mode 32kHz TOSC enabled, 1 µA V = 3V CC WDT enabled, V = 3V 6.7 15 µA Power-down mode(1) CC WDT disabled, V = 3V 0.2 2 µA CC Note: 1. Typical value at 25C 28.3 Speed Grades Maximum frequency is depending on V As shown in Figure 28-1, the Maximum Frequency vs. CC. V curve is linear between 1.8V < V < 2.7 and between 2.7V < V < 4.5. CC CC CC Figure 28-1. Maximum Frequency vs. V , ATmega329P/ATmega3290P CC 20 MHz 8 MHz Safe Operating Area 4 MHz 1.8V 2.7V 4.5V 5.5V 333 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Figure 28-2. Maximum Frequency vs. V (4 - 10MHz) CC 10 MHz 4 MHz Safe Operating Area 1.8V 2.7V 5.5V Figure 28-3. Maximum Frequency vs. V (10 - 20MHz) CC 20 MHz 10 MHz Safe Operating Area 2.7V 4.5V 5.5V 334 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 28.4 Clock Characteristics 28.4.1 Calibrated Internal RC Oscillator Accuracy Table 28-4. Calibration Accuracy of Internal RC Oscillator Frequency V Temperature Calibration Accuracy CC Factory 8.0MHz 3V 25C ±10% Calibration User 7.3 - 8.1MHz 1.8V - 5.5V(1) -40C - 85C ±1% Calibration Notes: 1. Voltage range for ATmega329P/3290P 28.4.2 External Clock Drive Waveforms Figure 28-4. External Clock Drive Waveforms VIH1 VIL1 28.4.3 External Clock Drive Table 28-5. External Clock Drive V =1.8-5.5V V =2.7-5.5V V =4.5-5.5V CC CC CC Symbol Parameter Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Units Oscillator 1/t 0 4 0 10 0 20 MHz CLCL Frequency t Clock Period 1000 100 50 ns CLCL t High Time 400 40 20 ns CHCX t Low Time 400 40 20 ns CLCX t Rise Time 2.0 1.6 0.5 s CLCH t Fall Time 2.0 1.6 0.5 s CHCL Change in period t from one clock 2 2 2 % CLCL cycle to the next 335 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 28.5 System and Reset Characteristics Table 28-6. Reset, Brown-out, and Internal Voltage Characteristics Symbol Parameter Condition Min Typ Max Units V RESET Pin Threshold Voltage V = 3V 0.2 V 0.9 V V RST CC CC CC Minimum pulse width on RESET t V = 3V 2.5 µs RST Pin CC V Brown-out Detector Hysteresis 50 mV HYST Min Pulse Width on Brown-out t 2 µs BOD Reset V = 2.7V, V Bandgap reference voltage CC 1.0 1.1 1.2 V BG T =25°C A V = 2.7V, t Bandgap reference start-up time CC 40 70 µs BG T =25°C A Bandgap reference current V = 2.7V, I CC 15 µA BG consumption T =25°C A Note: 1. The Power-on Reset will not work unless the supply voltage has been below V (falling) POT 28.6 Standard Power-on Reset This implementation of power-on reset existed in early versions of ATmega329P/ATmega3290P. The table below describes the characteristics of this power-on reset and it is valid for the following devices, only: • ATmega329P revision B and older • ATmega3290P revision B and older Table 28-7. Reset, Brown-out, and Internal Voltage Reference Characteristics, T = -40°C to 85°C A Symbol Parameter Min. Typ Max Units Power-on Reset Threshold Voltage (rising) 0.7 1.0 1.4 V V POT Power-on Reset Threshold Voltage (falling)(1) 0.05 0.9 1.3 V SR Power-on Slope Rate 0.01 4.5 V/ms ON Note: 1. The Power-on Reset will not work unless the supply voltage has been below V (falling) POT 336 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 28.7 Enhanced Power-on Reset This implementation of power-on reset exists in newer versions of ATmega329P/ATmega3290P. The table below describes the characteristics of this power-on reset and it is valid for the following devices only: • ATmega329P revision C and newer • ATmega3290P revision C and newer Table 28-8. Reset, Brown-out and Internal Voltage Reference Characteristics(1), T = -40°C to 85°C A Symbol Parameter Min. Typ Max Units Power-on Reset Threshold Voltage (rising) 1.1 1.4 1.6 V V POT Power-on Reset Threshold Voltage (falling)(2) 0.6 1.3 1.6 V SR Power-on Slope Rate 0.01 10 V/ms ON Notes: 1. Values are guidelines only. 2. The Power-on Reset will not work unless the supply voltage has been below V (falling) POT 28.8 Brown-out Detection Table 28-9. BODLEVEL Fuse Coding(1) BODLEVEL 1:0 Fuses Min. V Typ V Max V Units BOT BOT BOT 11 BOD Disabled 10 1.7 1.8 2 01 2.5 2.7 2.9 V 00 4.1 4.3 4.5 Note: 1. V may be below nominal minimum operating voltage for some devices. For devices where BOT this is the case, the device is tested down to V = V during the production test. This guar- CC BOT antees that a Brown-Out Reset will occur before V drops to a voltage where correct CC operation of the microcontroller is no longer guaranteed. The test is performed using BODLEVEL=10 for ATmega329P/3290PV and BODLEVEL=01 for ATmega329P/3290P. 337 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 28.9 SPI Timing Characteristics See Figure 28-5 and Figure 28-6 for details. Table 28-10. SPI Timing Parameters Description Mode Min Typ Max 1 SCK period Master See Table 18-5 on page 168 2 SCK high/low Master 50% duty cycle 3 Rise/Fall time Master 3.6 4 Setup Master 10 5 Hold Master 10 6 Out to SCK Master 0.5 • t ns sck 7 SCK to out Master 10 8 SCK to out high Master 10 9 SS low to out Slave 15 10 SCK period Slave 4 • t ck 11 SCK high/low(1) Slave 2 • t ck 12 Rise/Fall time Slave 1.6 µs 13 Setup Slave 10 14 Hold Slave t ck 15 SCK to out Slave 15 ns 16 SCK to SS high Slave 20 17 SS high to tri-state Slave 10 18 SS low to SCK Slave 20 • t ck Notes: 1. In SPI Programming mode the minimum SCK high/low period is: - 2 t for f < 12MHz CLCL CK - 3 t for f > 12MHz CLCL CK Figure 28-5. SPI Interface Timing Requirements (Master Mode) SS 6 1 SCK (CPOL = 0) 2 2 SCK (CPOL = 1) 4 5 3 MISO MSB ... LSB (Data Input) 7 8 MOSI MSB ... LSB (Data Output) 338 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Figure 28-6. SPI Interface Timing Requirements (Slave Mode) SS 10 16 9 SCK (CPOL = 0) 11 11 SCK (CPOL = 1) 13 14 12 MOSI MSB ... LSB (Data Input) 15 17 MISO MSB ... LSB X (Data Output) 339 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 28.10 ADC Characteristics – Preliminary Data Table 28-11. ADC Characteristics Symbol Parameter Condition Min. Typ Max Units Single Ended Conversion 10 Bits Resolution Differential Conversion 8 Bits Single Ended Conversion V = 4V, V = 4V, 2 2.5 LSB REF CC ADC clock = 200kHz Single Ended Conversion V = 4V, V = 4V, 2.5 LSB REF CC ADC clock = 1MHz Absolute accuracy (Including Single Ended Conversion INL, DNL, quantization error, V = 4V, V = 4V, gain and offset error) REF CC 2 LSB ADC clock = 200kHz Noise Reduction Mode Single Ended Conversion V = 4V, V = 4V, REF CC 2.5 LSB ADC clock = 1MHz Noise Reduction Mode Single Ended Conversion Integral Non-Linearity (INL) V = 4V, V = 4V, 1.25 LSB REF CC ADC clock = 200kHz Single Ended Conversion Differential Non-Linearity V = 4V, V = 4V, 0.25 LSB (DNL) REF CC ADC clock = 200kHz Single Ended Conversion Gain Error V = 4V, V = 4V, 2 LSB REF CC ADC clock = 200kHz Single Ended Conversion Offset Error V = 4V, V = 4V, 1.25 LSB REF CC ADC clock = 200kHz Conversion Time Free Running Conversion 13 260 µs Clock Frequency Single Ended Conversion 50 1000 kHz AVCC Analog Supply Voltage V - 0.3 V + 0.3 V CC CC Single Ended Conversion 1.0 AVCC V V Reference Voltage REF Differential Conversion 1.0 AVCC - 0.5 V Single Ended Channels GND V V REF Pin Input Voltage Differential Channels GND AVCC V V IN Single Ended Channels GND V V REF Input Range Differential Channels(1) -0.85V V V REF REF Single Ended Channels 38.5 kHz Input Bandwidth Differential Channels 4 kHz 340 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Table 28-11. ADC Characteristics Symbol Parameter Condition Min. Typ Max Units V Internal Voltage Reference 1.0 1.1 1.2 V INT R Reference Input Resistance 32 k REF R Analog Input Resistance 100 M AIN Notes: 1. Voltage difference between channels 28.11 LCD Controller Characteristics Table 28-12. LCD Controller Characteristics Symbol Parameter Condition Min. Typ Max Units I LCD Driver Current Total for All COM and SEG pins 6 µA LCD R Segment Driver Output Impedance 10 k SEG R Blackplane Driver Output Impedance 2 k COM 341 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 29. Typical Characteristics The following charts show typical behavior. These figures are not tested during manufacturing. All current consumption measurements are performed with all I/O pins configured as inputs and with internal pull-ups enabled. A square wave generator with rail-to-rail output is used as clock source. All Active- and Idle current consumption measurements are done with all bits in the PRR register set and thus, the corresponding I/O modules are turned off. Also the Analog Comparator is dis- abled during these measurements.The power consumption in Power-down mode is independent of clock selection. The current consumption is a function of several factors such as: operating voltage, operating frequency, loading of I/O pins, switching rate of I/O pins, code executed and ambient tempera- ture. The dominating factors are operating voltage and frequency. The current drawn from capacitive loaded pins may be estimated (for one pin) as C *V *f where L CC C = load capacitance, V = operating voltage and f = average switching frequency of I/O pin. L CC The parts are characterized at frequencies higher than test limits. Parts are not guaranteed to function properly at frequencies higher than the ordering code indicates. The difference between current consumption in Power-down mode with Watchdog Timer enabled and Power-down mode with Watchdog Timer disabled represents the differential cur- rent drawn by the Watchdog Timer. 342 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 29.1 ATmega329P 29.1.1 Active Supply Current Figure 29-1. ATmega329P: Active Supply Current vs. Low Frequency (0.1 - 1.0MHz) 1.8 5.5 V 1.6 5.0 V 1.4 4.5 V 1.2 4.0 V A) 1 m (CC 0.8 3.3 V I 2.7 V 0.6 0.4 1.8 V 0.2 0 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1 Frequency (MHz) Figure 29-2. ATmega329P: Active Supply Current vs. Frequency (1 - 20MHz) 25 5.5 V 20 5.0 V 4.5 V 15 A) m (C C 4.0 V I 10 3.3 V 5 2.7 V 1.8 V 0 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 Frequency (MHz) 343 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Figure 29-3. ATmega329P: Active Supply Current vs. V (Internal RC Oscillator, 8MHz CC 12 85 °C 10 25 °C -40 °C 8 A) m 6 (C C I 4 2 0 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 V (V) CC Figure 29-4. )ATmega329P: Active Supply Current vs. V (Internal RC Oscillator, 1MHz) CC 2.5 85 °C 2 25 °C -40 °C 1.5 A) m (C C I 1 0.5 0 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 VCC (V) 344 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Figure 29-5. ATmega329P: Active Supply Current vs. V (32kHz Watch Crystal) CC 40 85 °C 25 °C 35 -40 °C 30 25 A) m 20 c ( c I 15 10 5 0 0 1.8 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 Vcc (V) 29.1.2 Idle Supply Current Figure 29-6. ATmega329P: Idle Supply Current vs. Low Frequency (0.1 - 1.0MHz) 0.6 0.5 5.5 V 5.0 V 0.4 4.5 V mA) 4.0 V 0.3 (C C I 3.3 V 0.2 2.7 V 1.8 V 0.1 0 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1 Frequency (MHz) 345 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Figure 29-7. ATmega329P: Idle Supply Current vs. Frequency (1 - 20MHz) 8 5.5V 7 5.0V 6 4.5V 5 A) 4.0V m 4 (C C I 3 3.3V 2 2.7V 1 1.8V 0 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 Frequency (MHz) Figure 29-8. ATmega329P: Idle Supply Current vs. V (Internal RC Oscillator, 8MHz) CC 3.5 85 °C 25 °C 3 -40 °C 2.5 A) 2 m (C IC 1.5 1 0.5 0 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 VCC (V) 346 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Figure 29-9. ATmega329P: Idle Supply Current vs. V (Internal RC Oscillator, 1MHz) CC 0.9 85 °C 0.8 25 °C 0.7 -40 °C 0.6 A) 0.5 m (C C 0.4 I 0.3 0.2 0.1 0 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 VCC (V) 29.1.3 Supply Current of I/O modules The tables and formulas below can be used to calculate the additional current consumption for the different I/O modules in Active and Idle mode. The enabling or disabling of the I/O modules are controlled by the Power Reduction Register. See ”PRR – Power Reduction Register” on page 43 for details. Table 29-1. ATmega329P: Additional Current Consumption for the different I/O modules (absolute values) PRR bit Typical numbers V = 2V, F = 1MHz V = 3V, F = 4MHz V = 5V, F = 8MHz CC CC CC PRADC 19µA 102µA 395µA PRUSART0 9µA 57µA 240µA PRSPI 11µA 68µA 276µA PRTIM1 5µA 30µA 116µA PRLCD 6µA 38µA 150µA Table 29-2. ATmega329P: Additional Current Consumption (percentage) in Active and Idle mode Additional Current consumption compared to Active with external Additional Current consumption clock compared to Idle with external clock PRR bit (see Figure 29-1 and Figure 29-3) (see Figure 29-6 and Figure 29-7) PRADC 4.2% 9.0% PRUSART0 2.3% 4.9% PRSPI 2.7% 5.9% PRTIM1 1.2% 2.6% PRLCD 1.5% 3.2% 347 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P It is possible to calculate the typical current consumption based on the numbers from Table 29-2 for other V and frequency settings than listed in Table 29-1. CC 29.1.4 Example Calculate the expected current consumption in idle mode with USART0, TIMER1, and SPI enabled at V = 3.0V and F = 1MHz. Table 29-2 shows that we need to add 4.9% for the CC USART0, 5.9% for the SPI, and 2.6% for the TIMER1 module. From Figure 29-6, we find that the idle current consumption is ~0.21mA at V = 3.0V and F = 1MHz. The total current con- CC sumption in idle mode with USART0, TIMER1, and SPI enabled, gives: ICCtotal0.21mA1+0.049+0.059+0.0260.24mA 29.1.5 Power-down Supply Current Figure 29-10. ATmega329P: Power-down Supply Current vs. V (Watchdog Timer Disabled) CC 3 85 °C 2.5 2 A) (uC 1.5 C I 1 -40 °C 25 °C 0.5 0 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 VCC (V) 348 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Figure 29-11. ATmega329P: Power-down Supply Current vs. V (Watchdog Timer Enabled) CC 20 85 °C 18 -40 °C 16 25 °C 14 12 A) (uC 10 C I 8 6 4 2 0 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 V (V) CC 29.1.6 Power-save Supply Current Figure 29-12. ATmega329P: Power-save Supply Current vs. V (Watchdog Timer Disabled) CC 3.5 85 °C 3 2.5 2 A) u (C IC 1.5 25 °C -40 °C 1 0.5 0 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 VCC (V) 349 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 29.1.7 Standby Supply Current Figure 29-13. ATmega329P: Standby Supply Current vs. V (Watchdog Timer Disabled) CC 0.2 0.18 6MHz_xtal 6MHz_res 0.16 0.14 4MHz_res 4MHz_xtal 0.12 A) m 0.1 (C C I 0.08 2MHz_res 2MHz_xtal 0.06 1MHz_res 450kHz_res 0.04 0.02 0 32kHz_xtal 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 VCC (MHz) 29.1.8 Pin Pull-up Figure 29-14. ATmega329P: I/O Pin Pull-up Resistor Current vs. Input Voltage (V = 1.8V) CC 60 50 40 A) (uP 30 O I 20 10 25 °C -40 °C 0 85 °C 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2 V (V) OP 350 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Figure 29-15. ATmega329P: I/O Pin Pull-up Resistor Current vs. Input Voltage (V = 2.7V) CC 80 70 60 50 A) (uP 40 O I 30 20 25 °C 10 85 °C -40 °C 0 0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 VOP (V) Figure 29-16. ATmega329P: I/O Pin Pull-up Resistor Current vs. Input Voltage (V = 5V) CC 160 140 120 100 A) (uP 80 O I 60 40 25 °C 20 85 °C 0 -40 °C 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 V (V) OP 351 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Figure 29-17. ATmega329P: Reset Pull-up Resistor Current vs. Reset Pin Voltage (V = 1.8V) CC 40 35 30 25 A) u (T 20 E S E R I 15 10 25 °C 5 -40 °C 85 °C 0 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2 VRESET (V) Figure 29-18. ATmega329P: Reset Pull-up Resistor Current vs. Reset Pin Voltage (V = 2.7V) CC 70 60 50 A) 40 u (T E S RE 30 I 20 25 °C 10 -40 °C 0 85 °C 0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 V (V) RESET 352 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Figure 29-19. ATmega329P: Reset Pull-up Resistor Current vs. Reset Pin Voltage (V = 5V) CC 120 100 80 A) u (T 60 E S E R I 40 25 °C 20 -40 °C 85 °C 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 V (V) RESET 29.1.9 Pin Driver Strength Figure 29-20. ATmega329P: I/O Pin Sink Current vs. Output Voltage, Port B (V = 1.8V) CC 14 12 -40 °C 10 25 °C 85 °C A) 8 m (L IO 6 4 2 0 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 VOL (V) 353 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Figure 29-21. ATmega329P: I/O Pin Sink Current vs. Output Voltage, Port B (V = 2.7 V) CC 40 35 30 25 °C 25 A) m 20 (L O I 15 10 5 0 0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 VOL (V) Figure 29-22. ATmega329P: I/O Pin Sink Current vs. Output Voltage, Port B (V = 5V) CC 80 70 60 25 °C 50 A) m 40 (L O I 30 20 10 0 0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 V (V) OL 354 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Figure 29-23. ATmega329P: I/O Pin Sink Current vs. Output Voltage, Port A,C,D,E,F,G,H,J (V = 1.8 V) CC 7 6 -40 °C 5 25 °C 85 °C A) 4 m (L IO 3 2 1 0 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 VOL (V) Figure 29-24. ATmega329P: I/O Pin Sink Current vs. Output Voltage, Port A,C,D,E,F,G,H,J (V = 2.7V) CC 16 14 25 °C 12 10 A) m 8 (OL I 6 4 2 0 0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 VOL (V) 355 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Figure 29-25. ATmega329P: I/O Pin Sink Current vs. Output Voltage, Port A,C,D,E,F,G,H,J (V = 5 V) CC 40 35 30 25 °C 25 A) m 20 (L O I 15 10 5 0 0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 V (V) OL Figure 29-26. ATmega329P: I/O Pin Source Current vs. Output Voltage, Port B (V = 1.8V) CC 8 -40 °C 7 25 °C 6 85 °C 5 A) m 4 (H O I 3 2 1 0 -1.8 -1.6 -1.4 -1.2 -1 -0.8 -0.6 -0.4 -0.2 0 0.2 V (V) OH 356 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Figure 29-27. ATmega329P: I/O Pin Source Current vs. Output Voltage, Port B (V = 2.7V) CC 25 25 °C 20 15 A) m (H O I 10 5 0 0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 V (V) OH Figure 29-28. ATmega329P: I/O Pin Source Current vs. Output Voltage, Port B (V = 5 V) CC 70 60 50 25 °C A) 40 m (H IO 30 20 10 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 VOH (V) 357 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Figure 29-29. ATmega329P: I/O Pin Source Current vs. Output Voltage, Port A,C,D,E,F,G,H,J (V =1.8V) CC 6 -40 °C 5 25 °C 85 °C 4 A) m 3 (H O I 2 1 0 -1.8 -1.6 -1.4 -1.2 -1 -0.8 -0.6 -0.4 -0.2 0 0.2 V (V) OH Figure 29-30. ATmega329P: I/O Pin Source Current vs. Output Voltage, Port A,C,D,E,F,G,H,J(V =2.7V) CC 20 18 16 14 25 °C 12 A) m 10 (H O I 8 6 4 2 0 0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 VOH (V) 358 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Figure 29-31. ATmega329P: I/O Pin Source Current vs. Output Voltage, Port A,C,D,E,F,G,H,J (V =5V) CC 60 50 25 °C 40 A) m 30 (H O I 20 10 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 V (V) OH 29.1.10 Pin Threshold and Hysteresis Figure 29-32. ATmega329P: I/O Pin Input Threshold Voltage vs. V , Port B (V , IO Pin Read as ¨1¨) CC IH 3 -40 °C 25 °C 2.5 85 °C 2 V) d ( ol 1.5 h s e hr T 1 0.5 0 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 VCC (V) 359 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Figure 29-33. ATmega329P: I/O Pin Input Threshold Voltage vs. V , Port B (V , IO Pin Read as ¨0¨) CC IL 2.5 85 °C 25 °C 2 -40 °C V) 1.5 d ( ol h s e hr 1 T 0.5 0 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 V (V) CC Figure 29-34. ATmega329P: I/O Pin Input Hysteresis vs. V , Port B CC 0.7 0.6 -40 °C 0.5 25 °C V) sis ( 0.4 85 °C e er st Hy 0.3 ut p n I 0.2 0.1 0 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 V (V) CC 360 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Figure 29-35. ATmega329P: I/O Pin Input Threshold Voltage vs. V , Port A,C,D,E,F,G,H,J CC (V , IO Pin Read as ¨1¨) IH 3 -40 °C 25 °C 85 °C 2.5 2 V) d ( hol 1.5 s e hr T 1 0.5 0 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 VCC (V) Figure 29-36. ATmega329P: I/O Pin Input Threshold Voltage vs. V , Port A,C,D,E,F,G,H,J CC (V , IO Pin Read as ¨0¨) IL 2.5 85 °C 25 °C -40 °C 2 V) 1.5 d ( ol h s e hr 1 T 0.5 0 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 VCC (V) 361 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Figure 29-37. ATmega329P: I/O Pin Hysteresis vs. V , Port A,C,D,E,F,G,H,J CC 0.7 0.6 -40 °C 25 °C 0.5 V) 85 °C sis ( 0.4 e er st Hy 0.3 ut p n I 0.2 0.1 0 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 V (V) CC Figure 29-38. ATmega329P: Reset Input Threshold Voltage vs. V (V , IO Pin Read as ¨1¨) CC IH 2.5 -40 °C 25 °C 2 85 °C V) 1.5 d ( ol h s e hr 1 T 0.5 0 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 VCC (V) 362 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Figure 29-39. ATmega329P: Reset Input Threshold Voltage vs. V (V , IO Pin Read as ¨0¨) CC IL 2.5 85 °C 25 °C 2 -40 °C V) 1.5 d ( ol h s e hr 1 T 0.5 0 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 VCC (V) Figure 29-40. ATmega329P: Reset Pin Input Hysteresis vs. V CC 0.7 0.6 0.5 V) s ( si 0.4 e er st Hy 0.3 ut p n I 0.2 -40 °C 0.1 25 °C 85 °C 0 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 V (V) CC 363 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 29.1.11 Internal Oscillator Speed Figure 29-41. ATmega329P: Watchdog Oscillator Frequency vs. V CC 1300 -45 °C 25 °C 1250 85 °C 1200 z) H k 1150 (C R F 1100 1050 1000 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 V (V) CC Figure 29-42. ATmega329P: Watchdog Oscillator Frequency vs. Temperature 170 165 160 5.5 V z) H (kC 155 R F 4.0 V 150 3.3 V 2.7 V 145 2.1 V 140 -60 -40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100 Temperature (°C) 364 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Figure 29-43. ATmega329P: Calibrated 8MHz RC Oscillator Frequency vs. V CC 8.4 85 °C 8.2 25 °C 8 z) H M (C 7.8 -40 °C R F 7.6 7.4 7.2 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5,5 V (V) CC Figure 29-44. ATmega329P: Calibrated 8MHz RC Oscillator Frequency vs. Temperature 8.4 5.5 V 4.0 V 8.2 3.3 V 2.7 V 8 1.8 V z) H M (C R F 7.8 7.6 7.4 -60 -40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100 Temperature (°C) 365 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Figure 29-45. ATmega329P: Calibrated 8MHz RC Oscillator Frequency vs. Osccal Value 16 85 °C 14 25 °C 12 -40 °C 10 z) H M 8 (C R F 6 4 2 0 0 16 32 48 64 80 96 112 128 144 160 176 192 208 224 240 256 OSCCAL (X1) 29.1.12 Current Consumption of Peripheral Units Figure 29-46. ATmega329P: Brownout Detector Current vs. V CC 25 85 °C 24 23 25 °C 22 21 -40 °C ) A 20 µ ( CC 19 I 18 17 16 15 14 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 V (V) CC 366 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Figure 29-47. ATmega329P: Active Supply Current with ADC at 50kHz vs. Vcc 350 -40 °C 330 85 °C 25 °C 310 290 270 A] u 250 [C C I 230 210 190 170 150 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 V [V] CC Figure 29-48. ATmega329P: Active Supply Current with ADC at 200kHz vs. Vcc 350 -40 °C 330 85 °C 25 °C 310 290 270 A] u 250 [C C I 230 210 190 170 150 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 V [V] CC 367 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Figure 29-49. ATmega329P: Active Supply Current with ADC at 1MHz vs. Vcc 350 85 °C 25 °C 300 -45 °C 250 A) 200 u (C IC 150 100 50 0 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 V (V) CC Figure 29-50. ATmega329P: ADC Current vs. V (AREF = AV ) CC CC 360 -40 °C 340 25 °C 320 85 °C 300 280 ) A 260 µ ( C 240 C I 220 200 180 160 140 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 V (V) CC 368 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Figure 29-51. ATmega329P: AREF External Reference Current vs. V CC 180 -40 °C 160 25 °C 140 85 °C 120 A) 100 u (C C 80 I 60 40 20 0 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 VCC (V) Figure 29-52. ATmega329P: Watchdog Timer Current vs. V CC 18 -40 °C 16 85 °C 14 25 °C 12 A) 10 u (C C 8 I 6 4 2 0 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 V (V) CC 369 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Figure 29-53. ATmega329P: Analog Comparator Current vs. V CC 100 90 -40 °C 80 25 °C 85 °C 70 60 A) (uC 50 C I 40 30 20 10 0 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 V (V) CC Figure 29-54. ATmega329P: Programming Current vs. V CC 12 -40 °C 25 °C 10 85 °C 8 A) m 6 (C C I 4 2 0 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 V (V) CC 370 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 29.1.13 Current Consumption in Reset and Reset Pulswidth Figure 29-55. ATmega329P: Reset Supply Current vs. Low Frequency (0.1 - 1.0MHz) 0.25 5.5 V 0.2 5.0 V 4.5 V 0.15 4.0 V A) m (C 3.3 V C I 0.1 2.7 V 1.8 V 0.05 0 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1 Frequency (MHz) Figure 29-56. ATmega329P: Reset Supply Current vs. Frequency (1 - 20MHz) 4 5.5 V 3.5 5.0 V 3 4.5 V 2.5 A) 4.0 V m 2 (C C I 1.5 3.6 V 1 3.3 V 0.5 1.8 V 0 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 Frequency (MHz) 371 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Figure 29-57. ATmega329P: Minimum Reset Pulse Width vs. V CC 2200 2000 1800 ) 1600 s n ( h 1400 dt wi 1200 e s ul 1000 P 800 600 85 °C 400 25 °C -40 °C 200 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 V (V) CC 372 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 29.2 ATmega3290P 29.2.1 Active Supply Current Figure 29-58. ATmega3290P: Active Supply Current vs. Low Frequency (0.1 - 1.0MHz) 1.8 5.5 V 1.6 5.0 V 1.4 4.5 V 1.2 4.0 V A) 1 m (CC 0.8 3.3 V I 2.7 V 0.6 0.4 1.8 V 0.2 0 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1 Frequency (MHz) Figure 29-59. ATmega3290P: Active Supply Current vs. Frequency (1 - 20MHz) 25 5.5 V 20 5.0 V 4.5 V 15 A) m (C C 4.0 V I 10 3.3 V 5 2.7 V 1.8 V 0 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 Frequency (MHz) 373 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Figure 29-60. ATmega3290P: Active Supply Current vs. V (Internal RC Oscillator, 8MHz CC 12 85 °C 10 25 °C -40 °C 8 A) m 6 (C C I 4 2 0 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 V (V) CC Figure 29-61. )ATmega3290P: Active Supply Current vs. V (Internal RC Oscillator, 1MHz) CC 2.5 85 °C 2 25 °C -40 °C 1.5 A) m (C C I 1 0.5 0 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 VCC (V) 374 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Figure 29-62. ATmega3290P: Active Supply Current vs. V (32kHz Watch Crystal) CC 40 85 °C 25 °C 35 -40 °C 30 25 A) m 20 c ( c I 15 10 5 0 0 1.8 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 Vcc (V) 29.2.2 Idle Supply Current Figure 29-63. ATmega3290P: Idle Supply Current vs. Low Frequency (0.1 - 1.0MHz) 0.6 0.5 5.5 V 5.0 V 0.4 4.5 V mA) 4.0 V 0.3 (C C I 3.3 V 0.2 2.7 V 1.8 V 0.1 0 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1 Frequency (MHz) 375 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Figure 29-64. ATmega3290P: Idle Supply Current vs. Frequency (1 - 20MHz) 8 5.5V 7 5.0V 6 4.5V 5 A) 4.0V m 4 (C C I 3 3.3V 2 2.7V 1 1.8V 0 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 Frequency (MHz) Figure 29-65. ATmega3290P: Idle Supply Current vs. V (Internal RC Oscillator, 8MHz) CC 3.5 85 °C 25 °C 3 -40 °C 2.5 A) 2 m (C IC 1.5 1 0.5 0 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 VCC (V) 376 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Figure 29-66. ATmega3290P: Idle Supply Current vs. V (Internal RC Oscillator, 1MHz) CC 0.9 85 °C 0.8 25 °C 0.7 -40 °C 0.6 A) 0.5 m (C C 0.4 I 0.3 0.2 0.1 0 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 VCC (V) 29.2.3 Supply Current of I/O modules The tables and formulas below can be used to calculate the additional current consumption for the different I/O modules in Active and Idle mode. The enabling or disabling of the I/O modules are controlled by the Power Reduction Register. See ”PRR – Power Reduction Register” on page 43 for details. Table 29-3. ATmega3290P: Additional Current Consumption for the different I/O modules (absolute values) PRR bit Typical numbers V = 2V, F = 1MHz V = 3V, F = 4MHz V = 5V, F = 8MHz CC CC CC PRADC 19µA 102µA 395µA PRUSART0 9µA 57µA 240µA PRSPI 11µA 68µA 276µA PRTIM1 5µA 30µA 116µA PRLCD 6µA 38µA 150µA Table 29-4. ATmega3290P: Additional Current Consumption (percentage) in Active and Idle mode Additional Current consumption compared to Active with external Additional Current consumption clock compared to Idle with external clock PRR bit (see Figure 29-58 and Figure 29-60) (see Figure 29-63 and Figure 29-64) PRADC 4.2% 9.0% PRUSART0 2.3% 4.9% PRSPI 2.7% 5.9% PRTIM1 1.2% 2.6% PRLCD 1.5% 3.2% 377 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P It is possible to calculate the typical current consumption based on the numbers from Table 29-4 for other V and frequency settings than listed in Table 29-3. CC 29.2.4 Example Calculate the expected current consumption in idle mode with USART0, TIMER1, and SPI enabled at V = 3.0V and F = 1MHz. Table 29-4 shows that we need to add 4.9% for the CC USART0, 5.9% for the SPI, and 2.6% for the TIMER1 module. From Figure 29-63, we find that the idle current consumption is ~0.21mA at V = 3.0V and F = 1MHz. The total current con- CC sumption in idle mode with USART0, TIMER1, and SPI enabled, gives: ICCtotal0.21mA1+0.049+0.059+0.0260.24mA 29.2.5 Power-down Supply Current Figure 29-67. ATmega3290P: Power-down Supply Current vs. V (Watchdog Timer Disabled) CC 3 85 °C 2.5 2 A) (uC 1.5 C I 1 -40 °C 25 °C 0.5 0 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 VCC (V) 378 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Figure 29-68. ATmega3290P: Power-down Supply Current vs. V (Watchdog Timer Enabled) CC 20 85 °C 18 -40 °C 16 25 °C 14 12 A) (uC 10 C I 8 6 4 2 0 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 V (V) CC 29.2.6 Power-save Supply Current Figure 29-69. ATmega3290P: Power-save Supply Current vs. V (Watchdog Timer Disabled) CC 3.5 85 °C 3 2.5 2 A) u (C IC 1.5 25 °C -40 °C 1 0.5 0 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 VCC (V) 379 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 29.2.7 Standby Supply Current Figure 29-70. ATmega3290P: Standby Supply Current vs. V (Watchdog Timer Disabled) CC 0.2 0.18 6MHz_xtal 6MHz_res 0.16 0.14 4MHz_res 4MHz_xtal 0.12 A) m 0.1 (C C I 0.08 2MHz_res 2MHz_xtal 0.06 1MHz_res 450kHz_res 0.04 0.02 0 32kHz_xtal 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 VCC (MHz) 29.2.8 Pin Pull-up Figure 29-71. ATmega3290P: I/O Pin Pull-up Resistor Current vs. Input Voltage (V = 1.8V) CC 60 50 40 A) (uP 30 O I 20 10 25 °C -40 °C 0 85 °C 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2 V (V) OP 380 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Figure 29-72. ATmega3290P: I/O Pin Pull-up Resistor Current vs. Input Voltage (V = 2.7V) CC 80 70 60 50 A) (uP 40 O I 30 20 25 °C 10 85 °C -40 °C 0 0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 VOP (V) Figure 29-73. ATmega3290P: I/O Pin Pull-up Resistor Current vs. Input Voltage (V = 5V) CC 160 140 120 100 A) (uP 80 O I 60 40 25 °C 20 85 °C 0 -40 °C 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 V (V) OP 381 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Figure 29-74. ATmega3290P: Reset Pull-up Resistor Current vs. Reset Pin Voltage (V = 1.8V) CC 40 35 30 25 A) u (T 20 E S E R I 15 10 25 °C 5 -40 °C 85 °C 0 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2 VRESET (V) Figure 29-75. ATmega3290P: Reset Pull-up Resistor Current vs. Reset Pin Voltage (V = 2.7V) CC 70 60 50 A) 40 u (T E S RE 30 I 20 25 °C 10 -40 °C 0 85 °C 0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 V (V) RESET 382 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Figure 29-76. ATmega3290P: Reset Pull-up Resistor Current vs. Reset Pin Voltage (V = 5V) CC 120 100 80 A) u (T 60 E S E R I 40 25 °C 20 -40 °C 85 °C 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 V (V) RESET 29.2.9 Pin Driver Strength Figure 29-77. ATmega3290P: I/O Pin Sink Current vs. Output Voltage, Port B (V = 1.8V) CC 14 12 -40 °C 10 25 °C 85 °C A) 8 m (L IO 6 4 2 0 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 VOL (V) 383 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Figure 29-78. ATmega3290P: I/O Pin Sink Current vs. Output Voltage, Port B (V = 2.7V) CC 40 35 30 25 °C 25 A) m 20 (L O I 15 10 5 0 0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 VOL (V) Figure 29-79. ATmega3290P: I/O Pin Sink Current vs. Output Voltage, Port B (V = 5V) CC 80 70 60 25 °C 50 A) m 40 (L O I 30 20 10 0 0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 V (V) OL 384 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Figure 29-80. ATmega3290P: I/O Pin Sink Current vs. Output Voltage, Port A,C,D,E,F,G,H,J (V =1.8V) CC 7 6 -40 °C 5 25 °C 85 °C A) 4 m (L IO 3 2 1 0 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 VOL (V) Figure 29-81. ATmega3290P: I/O Pin Sink Current vs. Output Voltage, Port A,C,D,E,F,G,H,J (V = 2.7V) CC 16 14 25 °C 12 10 A) m 8 (OL I 6 4 2 0 0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 VOL (V) 385 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Figure 29-82. ATmega3290P: I/O Pin Sink Current vs. Output Voltage, Port A,C,D,E,F,G,H,J (V =5V) CC 40 35 30 25 °C 25 A) m 20 (L O I 15 10 5 0 0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 V (V) OL Figure 29-83. ATmega3290P: I/O Pin Source Current vs. Output Voltage, Port B (V =1.8V) CC 8 -40 °C 7 25 °C 6 85 °C 5 A) m 4 (H O I 3 2 1 0 -1.8 -1.6 -1.4 -1.2 -1 -0.8 -0.6 -0.4 -0.2 0 0.2 V (V) OH 386 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Figure 29-84. ATmega3290P: I/O Pin Source Current vs. Output Voltage, Port B (V = 2.7V) CC 25 25 °C 20 15 A) m (H O I 10 5 0 0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 V (V) OH Figure 29-85. ATmega3290P: I/O Pin Source Current vs. Output Voltage, Port B (V = 5V) CC 70 60 50 25 °C A) 40 m (H IO 30 20 10 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 VOH (V) 387 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Figure 29-86. ATmega3290P: I/O Pin Source Current vs. Output Voltage, Port A,C,D,E,F,G,H,J (V =1.8V) CC 6 -40 °C 5 25 °C 85 °C 4 A) m 3 (H O I 2 1 0 -1.8 -1.6 -1.4 -1.2 -1 -0.8 -0.6 -0.4 -0.2 0 0.2 V (V) OH Figure 29-87. ATmega3290P: I/O Pin Source Current vs. Output Voltage, Port A,C,D,E,F,G,H,J (V =2.7V) CC 20 18 16 14 25 °C 12 A) m 10 (H O I 8 6 4 2 0 0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 VOH (V) 388 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Figure 29-88. ATmega3290P: I/O Pin Source Current vs. Output Voltage, Port A,C,D,E,F,G,H,J (V =5V) CC 60 50 25 °C 40 A) m 30 (H O I 20 10 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 V (V) OH 29.2.10 Pin Threshold and Hysteresis Figure 29-89. ATmega3290P: I/O Pin Input Threshold Voltage vs. V , Port B (V , IO Pin Read as ¨1¨) CC IH 3 -40 °C 25 °C 2.5 85 °C 2 V) d ( ol 1.5 h s e hr T 1 0.5 0 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 VCC (V) 389 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Figure 29-90. ATmega3290P: I/O Pin Input Threshold Voltage vs. V , Port B (V , IO Pin Read as ¨0¨) CC IL 2.5 85 °C 25 °C 2 -40 °C V) 1.5 d ( ol h s e hr 1 T 0.5 0 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 V (V) CC Figure 29-91. ATmega3290P: I/O Pin Input Hysteresis vs. V , Port B CC 0.7 0.6 -40 °C 0.5 25 °C V) sis ( 0.4 85 °C e er st Hy 0.3 ut p n I 0.2 0.1 0 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 V (V) CC 390 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Figure 29-92. ATmega3290P: I/O Pin Input Threshold Voltage vs. V , Port A,C,D,E,F,G,H,J CC (V , IO Pin Read as ¨1¨) IH 3 -40 °C 25 °C 85 °C 2.5 2 V) d ( hol 1.5 s e hr T 1 0.5 0 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 VCC (V) Figure 29-93. ATmega3290P: I/O Pin Input Threshold Voltage vs. V , Port A,C,D,E,F,G,H,J CC (V , IO Pin Read as ¨0¨) IL 2.5 85 °C 25 °C -40 °C 2 V) 1.5 d ( ol h s e hr 1 T 0.5 0 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 VCC (V) 391 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Figure 29-94. ATmega3290P: I/O Pin Hysteresis vs. V , Port A,C,D,E,F,G,H,J CC 0.7 0.6 -40 °C 25 °C 0.5 V) 85 °C sis ( 0.4 e er st Hy 0.3 ut p n I 0.2 0.1 0 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 V (V) CC Figure 29-95. ATmega3290P: Reset Input Threshold Voltage vs. V (V , IO Pin Read as ¨1¨) CC IH 2.5 -40 °C 25 °C 2 85 °C V) 1.5 d ( ol h s e hr 1 T 0.5 0 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 VCC (V) 392 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Figure 29-96. ATmega3290P: Reset Input Threshold Voltage vs. V (V , IO Pin Read as ¨0¨) CC IL 2.5 85 °C 25 °C 2 -40 °C V) 1.5 d ( ol h s e hr 1 T 0.5 0 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 VCC (V) Figure 29-97. ATmega3290P: Reset Pin Input Hysteresis vs. V CC 0.7 0.6 0.5 V) s ( si 0.4 e er st Hy 0.3 ut p n I 0.2 -40 °C 0.1 25 °C 85 °C 0 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 V (V) CC 393 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 29.2.11 Internal Oscillator Speed Figure 29-98. ATmega3290P: Watchdog Oscillator Frequency vs. V CC 1300 -45 °C 25 °C 1250 85 °C 1200 z) H k 1150 (C R F 1100 1050 1000 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 V (V) CC Figure 29-99. ATmega3290P: Watchdog Oscillator Frequency vs. Temperature 170 165 160 5.5 V z) H (kC 155 R F 4.0 V 150 3.3 V 2.7 V 145 2.1 V 140 -60 -40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100 Temperature (°C) 394 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Figure 29-100.ATmega3290P: Calibrated 8MHz RC Oscillator Frequency vs. V CC 8.4 85 °C 8.2 25 °C 8 z) H M (C 7.8 -40 °C R F 7.6 7.4 7.2 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5,5 V (V) CC Figure 29-101.ATmega3290P: Calibrated 8MHz RC Oscillator Frequency vs. Temperature 8.4 5.5 V 4.0 V 8.2 3.3 V 2.7 V 8 1.8 V z) H M (C R F 7.8 7.6 7.4 -60 -40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100 Temperature (°C) 395 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Figure 29-102.ATmega3290P: Calibrated 8MHz RC Oscillator Frequency vs. Osccal Value 16 85 °C 14 25 °C 12 -40 °C 10 z) H M 8 (C R F 6 4 2 0 0 16 32 48 64 80 96 112 128 144 160 176 192 208 224 240 256 OSCCAL (X1) 29.2.12 Current Consumption of Peripheral Units Figure 29-103.ATmega3290P: Brownout Detector Current vs. V CC 25 85 °C 24 23 25 °C 22 21 -40 °C ) A 20 µ ( CC 19 I 18 17 16 15 14 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 V (V) CC 396 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Figure 29-104.ATmega3290P: Active Supply Current with ADC at 50kHz vs. Vcc 350 -40 °C 330 85 °C 25 °C 310 290 270 A] u 250 [C C I 230 210 190 170 150 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 V [V] CC Figure 29-105.ATmega3290P: Active Supply Current with ADC at 200kHz vs. Vcc 350 -40 °C 330 85 °C 25 °C 310 290 270 A] u 250 [C C I 230 210 190 170 150 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 V [V] CC 397 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Figure 29-106.ATmega3290P: Active Supply Current with ADC at 1MHz vs. Vcc 350 85 °C 25 °C 300 -45 °C 250 A) 200 u (C IC 150 100 50 0 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 V (V) CC Figure 29-107.ATmega3290P: ADC Current vs. V (AREF = AV ) CC CC 360 -40 °C 340 25 °C 320 85 °C 300 280 ) A 260 µ ( C 240 C I 220 200 180 160 140 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 V (V) CC 398 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Figure 29-108.ATmega3290P: AREF External Reference Current vs. V CC 180 -40 °C 160 25 °C 140 85 °C 120 A) 100 u (C C 80 I 60 40 20 0 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 VCC (V) Figure 29-109.ATmega3290P: Watchdog Timer Current vs. V CC 18 -40 °C 16 85 °C 14 25 °C 12 A) 10 u (C C 8 I 6 4 2 0 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 V (V) CC 399 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Figure 29-110.ATmega3290P: Analog Comparator Current vs. V CC 100 90 -40 °C 80 25 °C 85 °C 70 60 A) (uC 50 C I 40 30 20 10 0 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 V (V) CC Figure 29-111.ATmega3290P: Programming Current vs. V CC 12 -40 °C 25 °C 10 85 °C 8 A) m 6 (C C I 4 2 0 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 V (V) CC 400 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 29.2.13 Current Consumption in Reset and Reset Pulswidth Figure 29-112.ATmega3290P: Reset Supply Current vs. Low Frequency (0.1 - 1.0MHz) 0.25 5.5 V 0.2 5.0 V 4.5 V 0.15 4.0 V A) m (C 3.3 V C I 0.1 2.7 V 1.8 V 0.05 0 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1 Frequency (MHz) Figure 29-113.ATmega3290P: Reset Supply Current vs. Frequency (1 - 20MHz) 4 5.5 V 3.5 5.0 V 3 4.5 V 2.5 A) 4.0 V m 2 (C C I 1.5 3.6 V 1 3.3 V 0.5 1.8 V 0 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 Frequency (MHz) 401 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Figure 29-114.ATmega3290P: Minimum Reset Pulse Width vs. V CC 2200 2000 1800 ) 1600 s n ( h 1400 dt wi 1200 e s ul 1000 P 800 600 85 °C 400 25 °C -40 °C 200 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 V (V) CC 402 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 30. Register Summary Note: Registers with bold type only available in ATmega3290P. Address Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Page (0xFF) LCDDR19 SEG339 SEG338 SEG337 SEG336 SEG335 SEG334 SEG333 SEG332 247 (0xFE) LCDDR18 SEG331 SEG330 SEG329 SEG328 SEG327 SEG326 SEG325 SEG324 247 (0xFD) LCDDR17 SEG323 SEG322 SEG321 SEG320 SEG319 SEG318 SEG317 SEG316 247 (0xFC) LCDDR16 SEG315 SEG314 SEG313 SEG312 SEG311 SEG310 SEG309 SEG308 247 (0xFB) LCDDR15 SEG307 SEG306 SEG305 SEG304 SEG303 SEG302 SEG301 SEG300 247 (0xFA) LCDDR14 SEG239 SEG238 SEG237 SEG236 SEG235 SEG234 SEG233 SEG232 247 (0xF9) LCDDR13 SEG231 SEG230 SEG229 SEG228 SEG227 SEG226 SEG225 SEG224 247 (0xF8) LCDDR12 SEG223 SEG222 SEG221 SEG220 SEG219 SEG218 SEG217 SEG216 247 (0xF7) LCDDR11 SEG215 SEG214 SEG213 SEG212 SEG211 SEG210 SEG209 SEG208 247 (0xF6) LCDDR10 SEG207 SEG206 SEG205 SEG204 SEG203 SEG202 SEG201 SEG200 247 (0xF5) LCDDR09 SEG139 SEG138 SEG137 SEG136 SEG135 SEG134 SEG133 SEG132 247 (0xF4) LCDDR08 SEG131 SEG130 SEG129 SEG128 SEG127 SEG126 SEG125 SEG124 247 (0xF3) LCDDR07 SEG123 SEG122 SEG121 SEG120 SEG119 SEG118 SEG117 SEG116 247 (0xF2) LCDDR06 SEG115 SEG114 SEG113 SEG112 SEG111 SEG110 SEG109 SEG108 247 (0xF1) LCDDR05 SEG107 SEG106 SEG105 SEG104 SEG103 SEG102 SEG101 SEG100 247 (0xF0) LCDDR04 SEG039 SEG038 SEG037 SEG036 SEG035 SEG034 SEG033 SEG032 247 (0xEF) LCDDR03 SEG031 SEG030 SEG029 SEG028 SEG027 SEG026 SEG025 SEG024 247 (0xEE) LCDDR02 SEG023 SEG022 SEG021 SEG020 SEG019 SEG018 SEG017 SEG016 247 (0xED) LCDDR01 SEG015 SEG014 SEG013 SEG012 SEG011 SEG010 SEG009 SEG008 247 (0xEC) LCDDR00 SEG007 SEG006 SEG005 SEG004 SEG003 SEG002 SEG001 SEG000 247 (0xEB) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0xEA) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0xE9) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0xE8) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0xE7) LCDCCR LCDDC2 LCDDC1 LCDDC0 LCDMDT LCDCC3 LCDCC2 LCDCC1 LCDCC0 245 (0xE6) LCDFRR - LCDPS2 LCDPS1 LCDPS0 - LCDCD2 LCDCD1 LCDCD0 243 (0xE5) LCDCRB LCDCS LCD2B LCDMUX1 LCDMUX0 LCDPM3 LCDPM2 LCDPM1 LCDPM0 242 (0xE4) LCDCRA LCDEN LCDAB - LCDIF LCDIE LCDBD LCDCCD LCDBL 241 (0xE3) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0xE2) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0xE1) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0xE0) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0xDF) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0xDE) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0xDD) PORTJ - PORTJ6 PORTJ5 PORTJ4 PORTJ3 PORTJ2 PORTJ1 PORTJ0 93 (0xDC) DDRJ - DDJ6 DDJ5 DDJ4 DDJ3 DDJ2 DDJ1 DDJ0 93 (0xDB) PINJ - PINJ6 PINJ5 PINJ4 PINJ3 PINJ2 PINJ1 PINJ0 93 (0xDA) PORTH PORTH7 PORTH6 PORTH5 PORTH4 PORTH3 PORTH2 PORTH1 PORTH0 92 (0xD9) DDRH DDH7 DDH6 DDH5 DDH4 DDH3 DDH2 DDH1 DDH0 93 (0xD8) PINH PINH7 PINH6 PINH5 PINH4 PINH3 PINH2 PINH1 PINH0 93 (0xD7) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0xD6) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0xD5) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0xD4) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0xD3) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0xD2) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0xD1) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0xD0) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0xCF) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0xCE) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0xCD) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0xCC) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0xCB) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0xCA) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0xC9) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0xC8) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0xC7) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0xC6) UDR0 USART0 Data Register 189 (0xC5) UBRR0H USART0 Baud Rate Register High 193 403 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Address Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Page (0xC4) UBRR0L USART0 Baud Rate Register Low 193 (0xC3) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0xC2) UCSR0C - UMSEL0 UPM01 UPM00 USBS0 UCSZ01 UCSZ00 UCPOL0 191 (0xC1) UCSR0B RXCIE0 TXCIE0 UDRIE0 RXEN0 TXEN0 UCSZ02 RXB80 TXB80 190 (0xC0) UCSR0A RXC0 TXC0 UDRE0 FE0 DOR0 UPE0 U2X0 MPCM0 189 (0xBF) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0xBE) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0xBD) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0xBC) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0xBB) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0xBA) USIDR USI Data Register 206 (0xB9) USISR USISIF USIOIF USIPF USIDC USICNT3 USICNT2 USICNT1 USICNT0 206 (0xB8) USICR USISIE USIOIE USIWM1 USIWM0 USICS1 USICS0 USICLK USITC 207 (0xB7) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0xB6) ASSR - - - EXCLK AS2 TCN2UB OCR2UB TCR2UB 157 (0xB5) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0xB4) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0xB3) OCR2A Timer/Counter 2 Output Compare Register A 157 (0xB2) TCNT2 Timer/Counter2 157 (0xB1) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0xB0) TCCR2A FOC2A WGM20 COM2A1 COM2A0 WGM21 CS22 CS21 CS20 155 (0xAF) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0xAE) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0xAD) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0xAC) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0xAB) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0xAA) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0xA9) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0xA8) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0xA7) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0xA6) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0xA5) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0xA4) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0xA3) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0xA2) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0xA1) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0xA0) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0x9F) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0x9E) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0x9D) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0x9C) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0x9B) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0x9A) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0x99) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0x98) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0x97) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0x96) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0x95) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0x94) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0x93) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0x92) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0x91) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0x90) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0x8F) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0x8E) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0x8D) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0x8C) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0x8B) OCR1BH Timer/Counter1 Output Compare Register B High 131 (0x8A) OCR1BL Timer/Counter1 Output Compare Register B Low 131 (0x89) OCR1AH Timer/Counter1 Output Compare Register A High 131 (0x88) OCR1AL Timer/Counter1 Output Compare Register A Low 131 (0x87) ICR1H Timer/Counter1 Input Capture Register High 132 (0x86) ICR1L Timer/Counter1 Input Capture Register Low 132 404 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Address Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Page (0x85) TCNT1H Timer/Counter1 High 131 (0x84) TCNT1L Timer/Counter1 Low 131 (0x83) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0x82) TCCR1C FOC1A FOC1B - - - - - - 130 (0x81) TCCR1B ICNC1 ICES1 - WGM13 WGM12 CS12 CS11 CS10 129 (0x80) TCCR1A COM1A1 COM1A0 COM1B1 COM1B0 - - WGM11 WGM10 127 (0x7F) DIDR1 - - - - - - AIN1D AIN0D 212 (0x7E) DIDR0 ADC7D ADC6D ADC5D ADC4D ADC3D ADC2D ADC1D ADC0D 229 (0x7D) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0x7C) ADMUX REFS1 REFS0 ADLAR MUX4 MUX3 MUX2 MUX1 MUX0 225 (0x7B) ADCSRB - ACME - - - ADTS2 ADTS1 ADTS0 211/228 (0x7A) ADCSRA ADEN ADSC ADATE ADIF ADIE ADPS2 ADPS1 ADPS0 227 (0x79) ADCH ADC Data Register High 228 (0x78) ADCL ADC Data Register Low 228 (0x77) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0x76) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0x75) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0x74) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0x73) PCMSK3 - PCINT30 PCINT29 PCINT28 PCINT27 PCINT26 PCINT25 PCINT24 62 (0x72) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0x71) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0x70) TIMSK2 - - - - - - OCIE2A TOIE2 158 (0x6F) TIMSK1 - - ICIE1 - - OCIE1B OCIE1A TOIE1 132 (0x6E) TIMSK0 - - - - - - OCIE0A TOIE0 139 (0x6D) PCMSK2 PCINT23 PCINT22 PCINT21 PCINT20 PCINT19 PCINT18 PCINT17 PCINT16 62 (0x6C) PCMSK1 PCINT15 PCINT14 PCINT13 PCINT12 PCINT11 PCINT10 PCINT9 PCINT8 62 (0x6B) PCMSK0 PCINT7 PCINT6 PCINT5 PCINT4 PCINT3 PCINT2 PCINT1 PCINT0 62 (0x6A) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0x69) EICRA - - - - - - ISC01 ISC00 59 (0x68) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0x67) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0x66) OSCCAL Oscillator Calibration Register [CAL7...0] 35 (0x65) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0x64) PRR - - - PRLCD PRTIM1 PRSPI PSUSART0 PRADC 43 (0x63) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0x62) Reserved - - - - - - - - (0x61) CLKPR CLKPCE - - - CLKPS3 CLKPS2 CLKPS1 CLKPS0 35 (0x60) WDTCR - - - WDCE WDE WDP2 WDP1 WDP0 50 0x3F (0x5F) SREG I T H S V N Z C 12 0x3E (0x5E) SPH Stack Pointer High 14 0x3D (0x5D) SPL Stack Pointer Low 14 0x3C (0x5C) Reserved - - - - - - - - 0x3B (0x5B) Reserved - - - - - - - - 0x3A (0x5A) Reserved - - - - - - - - 0x39 (0x59) Reserved - - - - - - - - 0x38 (0x58) Reserved - - - - - - - - 0x37 (0x57) SPMCSR SPMIE RWWSB - RWWSRE BLBSET PGWRT PGERS SPMEN 294 0x36 (0x56) Reserved 0x35 (0x55) MCUCR JTD BODS BODSE PUD - - IVSEL IVCE 57/90/280 0x34 (0x54) MCUSR - - - JTRF WDRF BORF EXTRF PORF 50 0x33 (0x53) SMCR - - - - SM2 SM1 SM0 SE 42 0x32 (0x52) Reserved - - - - - - - - 0x31 (0x51) OCDR IDRD/OCDR7 OCDR6 OCDR5 OCDR4 OCDR3 OCDR2 OCDR1 OCDR0 253 0x30 (0x50) ACSR ACD ACBG ACO ACI ACIE ACIC ACIS1 ACIS0 211 0x2F (0x4F) Reserved - - - - - - - - 0x2E (0x4E) SPDR SPI Data Register 169 0x2D (0x4D) SPSR SPIF WCOL - - - - - SPI2X 168 0x2C (0x4C) SPCR SPIE SPE DORD MSTR CPOL CPHA SPR1 SPR0 167 0x2B (0x4B) GPIOR2 General Purpose I/O Register 26 0x2A (0x4A) GPIOR1 General Purpose I/O Register 26 0x29 (0x49) Reserved - - - - - - - - 0x28 (0x48) Reserved - - - - - - - - 0x27 (0x47) OCR0A Timer/Counter0 Output Compare A 139 405 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Address Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Page 0x26 (0x46) TCNT0 Timer/Counter0 138 0x25 (0x45) Reserved - - - - - - - - 0x24 (0x44) TCCR0A FOC0A WGM00 COM0A1 COM0A0 WGM01 CS02 CS01 CS00 136 0x23 (0x43) GTCCR TSM - - - - - PSR2 PSR10 140/159 0x22 (0x42) EEARH - - - - - - EEPROM Address Register High 22 0x21 (0x41) EEARL EEPROM Address Register Low 22 0x20 (0x40) EEDR EEPROM Data Register 22 0x1F (0x3F) EECR - - - - EERIE EEMWE EEWE EERE 23 0x1E (0x3E) GPIOR0 General Purpose I/O Register 26 0x1D (0x3D) EIMSK PCIE PCIE2 PCIE1 PCIE0 - - - INT0 60 0x1C (0x3C) EIFR PCIF3 PCIF2 PCIF1 PCIF0 - - - INTF0 61 0x1B (0x3B) Reserved - - - - - - - - 0x1A (0x3A) Reserved - - - - - - - - 0x19 (0x39) Reserved - - - - - - - - 0x18 (0x38) Reserved - - - - - - - - 0x17 (0x37) TIFR2 - - - - - - OCF2A TOV2 159 0x16 (0x36) TIFR1 - - ICF1 - - OCF1B OCF1A TOV1 133 0x15 (0x35) TIFR0 - - - - - - OCF0A TOV0 140 0x14 (0x34) PORTG - - - PORTG4 PORTG3 PORTG2 PORTG1 PORTG0 92 0x13 (0x33) DDRG - - - DDG4 DDG3 DDG2 DDG1 DDG0 92 0x12 (0x32) PING - - PING5 PING4 PING3 PING2 PING1 PING0 92 0x11 (0x31) PORTF PORTF7 PORTF6 PORTF5 PORTF4 PORTF3 PORTF2 PORTF1 PORTF0 92 0x10 (0x30) DDRF DDF7 DDF6 DDF5 DDF4 DDF3 DDF2 DDF1 DDF0 92 0x0F (0x2F) PINF PINF7 PINF6 PINF5 PINF4 PINF3 PINF2 PINF1 PINF0 92 0x0E (0x2E) PORTE PORTE7 PORTE6 PORTE5 PORTE4 PORTE3 PORTE2 PORTE1 PORTE0 91 0x0D (0x2D) DDRE DDE7 DDE6 DDE5 DDE4 DDE3 DDE2 DDE1 DDE0 91 0x0C (0x2C) PINE PINE7 PINE6 PINE5 PINE4 PINE3 PINE2 PINE1 PINE0 92 0x0B (0x2B) PORTD PORTD7 PORTD6 PORTD5 PORTD4 PORTD3 PORTD2 PORTD1 PORTD0 91 0x0A (0x2A) DDRD DDD7 DDD6 DDD5 DDD4 DDD3 DDD2 DDD1 DDD0 91 0x09 (0x29) PIND PIND7 PIND6 PIND5 PIND4 PIND3 PIND2 PIND1 PIND0 91 0x08 (0x28) PORTC PORTC7 PORTC6 PORTC5 PORTC4 PORTC3 PORTC2 PORTC1 PORTC0 91 0x07 (0x27) DDRC DDC7 DDC6 DDC5 DDC4 DDC3 DDC2 DDC1 DDC0 91 0x06 (0x26) PINC PINC7 PINC6 PINC5 PINC4 PINC3 PINC2 PINC1 PINC0 91 0x05 (0x25) PORTB PORTB7 PORTB6 PORTB5 PORTB4 PORTB3 PORTB2 PORTB1 PORTB0 90 0x04 (0x24) DDRB DDB7 DDB6 DDB5 DDB4 DDB3 DDB2 DDB1 DDB0 90 0x03 (0x23) PINB PINB7 PINB6 PINB5 PINB4 PINB3 PINB2 PINB1 PINB0 90 0x02 (0x22) PORTA PORTA7 PORTA6 PORTA5 PORTA4 PORTA3 PORTA2 PORTA1 PORTA0 90 0x01 (0x21) DDRA DDA7 DDA6 DDA5 DDA4 DDA3 DDA2 DDA1 DDA0 90 0x00 (0x20) PINA PINA7 PINA6 PINA5 PINA4 PINA3 PINA2 PINA1 PINA0 90 Notes: 1. For compatibility with future devices, reserved bits should be written to zero if accessed. Reserved I/O memory addresses should never be written. 2. I/O Registers within the address range 0x00 - 0x1F are directly bit-accessible using the SBI and CBI instructions. In these registers, the value of single bits can be checked by using the SBIS and SBIC instructions. 3. Some of the Status Flags are cleared by writing a logical one to them. Note that, unlike most other AVRs, the CBI and SBI instructions will only operate on the specified bit, and can therefore be used on registers containing such Status Flags. The CBI and SBI instructions work with registers 0x00 to 0x1F only. 4. When using the I/O specific commands IN and OUT, the I/O addresses 0x00 - 0x3F must be used. When addressing I/O Registers as data space using LD and ST instructions, 0x20 must be added to these addresses. The ATmega329P/3290P is a complex microcontroller with more peripheral units than can be supported within the 64 location reserved in Opcode for the IN and OUT instructions. For the Extended I/O space from 0x60 - 0xFF in SRAM, only the ST/STS/STD and LD/LDS/LDD instructions can be used. 406 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 31. Instruction Set Summary Mnemonics Operands Description Operation Flags #Clocks ARITHMETIC AND LOGIC INSTRUCTIONS ADD Rd, Rr Add two Registers Rd  Rd + Rr Z,C,N,V,H 1 ADC Rd, Rr Add with Carry two Registers Rd  Rd + Rr + C Z,C,N,V,H 1 ADIW Rdl,K Add Immediate to Word Rdh:Rdl  Rdh:Rdl + K Z,C,N,V,S 2 SUB Rd, Rr Subtract two Registers Rd  Rd - Rr Z,C,N,V,H 1 SUBI Rd, K Subtract Constant from Register Rd  Rd - K Z,C,N,V,H 1 SBC Rd, Rr Subtract with Carry two Registers Rd  Rd - Rr - C Z,C,N,V,H 1 SBCI Rd, K Subtract with Carry Constant from Reg. Rd  Rd - K - C Z,C,N,V,H 1 SBIW Rdl,K Subtract Immediate from Word Rdh:Rdl  Rdh:Rdl - K Z,C,N,V,S 2 AND Rd, Rr Logical AND Registers Rd Rd  Rr Z,N,V 1 ANDI Rd, K Logical AND Register and Constant Rd  Rd K Z,N,V 1 OR Rd, Rr Logical OR Registers Rd  Rd v Rr Z,N,V 1 ORI Rd, K Logical OR Register and Constant Rd Rd v K Z,N,V 1 EOR Rd, Rr Exclusive OR Registers Rd  Rd  Rr Z,N,V 1 COM Rd One’s Complement Rd  0xFF  Rd Z,C,N,V 1 NEG Rd Two’s Complement Rd  0x00  Rd Z,C,N,V,H 1 SBR Rd,K Set Bit(s) in Register Rd  Rd v K Z,N,V 1 CBR Rd,K Clear Bit(s) in Register Rd  Rd  (0xFF - K) Z,N,V 1 INC Rd Increment Rd  Rd + 1 Z,N,V 1 DEC Rd Decrement Rd  Rd  1 Z,N,V 1 TST Rd Test for Zero or Minus Rd  Rd  Rd Z,N,V 1 CLR Rd Clear Register Rd  Rd  Rd Z,N,V 1 SER Rd Set Register Rd  0xFF None 1 MUL Rd, Rr Multiply Unsigned R1:R0  Rd x Rr Z,C 2 MULS Rd, Rr Multiply Signed R1:R0  Rd x Rr Z,C 2 MULSU Rd, Rr Multiply Signed with Unsigned R1:R0  Rd x Rr Z,C 2 FMUL Rd, Rr Fractional Multiply Unsigned R1:R0  (Rd x Rr) << 1 Z,C 2 FMULS Rd, Rr Fractional Multiply Signed R1:R0  (Rd x Rr) << 1 Z,C 2 FMULSU Rd, Rr Fractional Multiply Signed with Unsigned R1:R0  (Rd x Rr) << 1 Z,C 2 BRANCH INSTRUCTIONS RJMP k Relative Jump PC PC + k + 1 None 2 IJMP Indirect Jump to (Z) PC  Z None 2 JMP k Direct Jump PC k None 3 RCALL k Relative Subroutine Call PC  PC + k + 1 None 3 ICALL Indirect Call to (Z) PC  Z None 3 CALL k Direct Subroutine Call PC  k None 4 RET Subroutine Return PC  STACK None 4 RETI Interrupt Return PC  STACK I 4 CPSE Rd,Rr Compare, Skip if Equal if (Rd = Rr) PC PC + 2 or 3 None 1/2/3 CP Rd,Rr Compare Rd  Rr Z, N,V,C,H 1 CPC Rd,Rr Compare with Carry Rd  Rr  C Z, N,V,C,H 1 CPI Rd,K Compare Register with Immediate Rd  K Z, N,V,C,H 1 SBRC Rr, b Skip if Bit in Register Cleared if (Rr(b)=0) PC  PC + 2 or 3 None 1/2/3 SBRS Rr, b Skip if Bit in Register is Set if (Rr(b)=1) PC  PC + 2 or 3 None 1/2/3 SBIC P, b Skip if Bit in I/O Register Cleared if (P(b)=0) PC  PC + 2 or 3 None 1/2/3 SBIS P, b Skip if Bit in I/O Register is Set if (P(b)=1) PC  PC + 2 or 3 None 1/2/3 BRBS s, k Branch if Status Flag Set if (SREG(s) = 1) then PCPC+k + 1 None 1/2 BRBC s, k Branch if Status Flag Cleared if (SREG(s) = 0) then PCPC+k + 1 None 1/2 BREQ k Branch if Equal if (Z = 1) then PC  PC + k + 1 None 1/2 BRNE k Branch if Not Equal if (Z = 0) then PC  PC + k + 1 None 1/2 BRCS k Branch if Carry Set if (C = 1) then PC  PC + k + 1 None 1/2 BRCC k Branch if Carry Cleared if (C = 0) then PC  PC + k + 1 None 1/2 BRSH k Branch if Same or Higher if (C = 0) then PC  PC + k + 1 None 1/2 BRLO k Branch if Lower if (C = 1) then PC  PC + k + 1 None 1/2 BRMI k Branch if Minus if (N = 1) then PC  PC + k + 1 None 1/2 BRPL k Branch if Plus if (N = 0) then PC  PC + k + 1 None 1/2 BRGE k Branch if Greater or Equal, Signed if (N  V= 0) then PC  PC + k + 1 None 1/2 BRLT k Branch if Less Than Zero, Signed if (N  V= 1) then PC  PC + k + 1 None 1/2 BRHS k Branch if Half Carry Flag Set if (H = 1) then PC  PC + k + 1 None 1/2 BRHC k Branch if Half Carry Flag Cleared if (H = 0) then PC  PC + k + 1 None 1/2 BRTS k Branch if T Flag Set if (T = 1) then PC  PC + k + 1 None 1/2 BRTC k Branch if T Flag Cleared if (T = 0) then PC  PC + k + 1 None 1/2 BRVS k Branch if Overflow Flag is Set if (V = 1) then PC  PC + k + 1 None 1/2 407 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Mnemonics Operands Description Operation Flags #Clocks BRVC k Branch if Overflow Flag is Cleared if (V = 0) then PC  PC + k + 1 None 1/2 BRIE k Branch if Interrupt Enabled if ( I = 1) then PC  PC + k + 1 None 1/2 BRID k Branch if Interrupt Disabled if ( I = 0) then PC  PC + k + 1 None 1/2 BIT AND BIT-TEST INSTRUCTIONS SBI P,b Set Bit in I/O Register I/O(P,b)  1 None 2 CBI P,b Clear Bit in I/O Register I/O(P,b)  0 None 2 LSL Rd Logical Shift Left Rd(n+1)  Rd(n), Rd(0)  0 Z,C,N,V 1 LSR Rd Logical Shift Right Rd(n)  Rd(n+1), Rd(7)  0 Z,C,N,V 1 ROL Rd Rotate Left Through Carry Rd(0)C,Rd(n+1) Rd(n),CRd(7) Z,C,N,V 1 ROR Rd Rotate Right Through Carry Rd(7)C,Rd(n) Rd(n+1),CRd(0) Z,C,N,V 1 ASR Rd Arithmetic Shift Right Rd(n)  Rd(n+1), n=0..6 Z,C,N,V 1 SWAP Rd Swap Nibbles Rd(3..0)Rd(7..4),Rd(7..4)Rd(3..0) None 1 BSET s Flag Set SREG(s)  1 SREG(s) 1 BCLR s Flag Clear SREG(s)  0 SREG(s) 1 BST Rr, b Bit Store from Register to T T  Rr(b) T 1 BLD Rd, b Bit load from T to Register Rd(b)  T None 1 SEC Set Carry C  1 C 1 CLC Clear Carry C  0 C 1 SEN Set Negative Flag N  1 N 1 CLN Clear Negative Flag N  0 N 1 SEZ Set Zero Flag Z  1 Z 1 CLZ Clear Zero Flag Z  0 Z 1 SEI Global Interrupt Enable I  1 I 1 CLI Global Interrupt Disable I 0 I 1 SES Set Signed Test Flag S  1 S 1 CLS Clear Signed Test Flag S  0 S 1 SEV Set Twos Complement Overflow. V  1 V 1 CLV Clear Twos Complement Overflow V  0 V 1 SET Set T in SREG T  1 T 1 CLT Clear T in SREG T  0 T 1 SEH Set Half Carry Flag in SREG H  1 H 1 CLH Clear Half Carry Flag in SREG H  0 H 1 DATA TRANSFER INSTRUCTIONS MOV Rd, Rr Move Between Registers Rd  Rr None 1 MOVW Rd, Rr Copy Register Word Rd+1:Rd  Rr+1:Rr None 1 LDI Rd, K Load Immediate Rd  K None 1 LD Rd, X Load Indirect Rd  (X) None 2 LD Rd, X+ Load Indirect and Post-Inc. Rd  (X), X  X + 1 None 2 LD Rd, - X Load Indirect and Pre-Dec. X  X - 1, Rd  (X) None 2 LD Rd, Y Load Indirect Rd  (Y) None 2 LD Rd, Y+ Load Indirect and Post-Inc. Rd  (Y), Y  Y + 1 None 2 LD Rd, - Y Load Indirect and Pre-Dec. Y  Y - 1, Rd  (Y) None 2 LDD Rd,Y+q Load Indirect with Displacement Rd  (Y + q) None 2 LD Rd, Z Load Indirect Rd  (Z) None 2 LD Rd, Z+ Load Indirect and Post-Inc. Rd  (Z), Z  Z+1 None 2 LD Rd, -Z Load Indirect and Pre-Dec. Z  Z - 1, Rd  (Z) None 2 LDD Rd, Z+q Load Indirect with Displacement Rd  (Z + q) None 2 LDS Rd, k Load Direct from SRAM Rd  (k) None 2 ST X, Rr Store Indirect (X) Rr None 2 ST X+, Rr Store Indirect and Post-Inc. (X) Rr, X  X + 1 None 2 ST - X, Rr Store Indirect and Pre-Dec. X  X - 1, (X)  Rr None 2 ST Y, Rr Store Indirect (Y)  Rr None 2 ST Y+, Rr Store Indirect and Post-Inc. (Y)  Rr, Y  Y + 1 None 2 ST - Y, Rr Store Indirect and Pre-Dec. Y  Y - 1, (Y)  Rr None 2 STD Y+q,Rr Store Indirect with Displacement (Y + q)  Rr None 2 ST Z, Rr Store Indirect (Z)  Rr None 2 ST Z+, Rr Store Indirect and Post-Inc. (Z)  Rr, Z  Z + 1 None 2 ST -Z, Rr Store Indirect and Pre-Dec. Z  Z - 1, (Z)  Rr None 2 STD Z+q,Rr Store Indirect with Displacement (Z + q)  Rr None 2 STS k, Rr Store Direct to SRAM (k)  Rr None 2 LPM Load Program Memory R0  (Z) None 3 LPM Rd, Z Load Program Memory Rd  (Z) None 3 LPM Rd, Z+ Load Program Memory and Post-Inc Rd  (Z), Z  Z+1 None 3 SPM Store Program Memory (Z)  R1:R0 None - IN Rd, P In Port Rd  P None 1 OUT P, Rr Out Port P  Rr None 1 408 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Mnemonics Operands Description Operation Flags #Clocks PUSH Rr Push Register on Stack STACK  Rr None 2 POP Rd Pop Register from Stack Rd  STACK None 2 MCU CONTROL INSTRUCTIONS NOP No Operation None 1 SLEEP Sleep (see specific descr. for Sleep function) None 1 WDR Watchdog Reset (see specific descr. for WDR/timer) None 1 BREAK Break For On-chip Debug Only None N/A 409 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 32. Ordering Information 32.1 ATmega329P Speed (MHz)(3) Power Supply Ordering Code(2) Package Type(1) Operational Range ATmega329PV-10AU 64A ATmega329PV-10AUR(4) 64A 10 1.8 - 5.5V ATmega329PV-10MU 64M1 ATmega329PV-10MUR(4) 64M1 Industrial ATmega329P-20AU 64A (-40C to 85C) ATmega329P-20AUR(4) 64A 20 2.7 - 5.5V ATmega329P-20MU 64M1 ATmega329P-20MUR(4) 64M1 ATmega329P-20AN 64A ATmega329P-20ANR(4) 64A Extended 20 1.8 - 5.5V ATmega329P-20MN 64M1 (-40C to 105C)(5) ATmega329P-20MNR(4) 64M1 Notes: 1. This device can also be supplied in wafer form. Please contact your local Atmel sales office for detailed ordering information and minimum quantities. 2. Pb-free packaging complies to the European Directive for Restriction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS directive). Also Halide free and fully Green. 3. For Speed vs. V see Figure 28-2 on page 334 and Figure 28-3 on page 334. CC 4. Tape & Reel 5. See Appendix A ATmega169PA/329P/3290P 105°C Package Type 64A 64-lead, 14 x 14 x 1.0 mm, Thin Profile Plastic Quad Flat Package (TQFP) 64M1 64-pad, 9 x 9 x 1.0 mm, Quad Flat No-Lead/Micro Lead Frame Package (QFN/MLF) 410 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 32.2 ATmega3290P Speed (MHz)(3) Power Supply Ordering Code(2) Package Type(1) Operational Range ATmega3290PV-10AU 10 1.8 - 5.5V ATmega3290PV-10AUR(4) Industrial 100A ATmega3290P-20AU (-40C to 85C) 20 2.7 - 5.5V ATmega3290P-20AUR(4) ATmega3290P-20AN 64A ATmega3290P-20ANR(4) 64A Extended 20 1.8 - 5.5V ATmega3290P-20MN 64M1 (-40C to 105C)(5) ATmega3290P-20MNR(4) 64M1 Notes: 1. This device can also be supplied in wafer form. Please contact your local Atmel sales office for detailed ordering information and minimum quantities. 2. Pb-free packaging complies to the European Directive for Restriction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS directive). Also Halide free and fully Green. 3. For Speed vs. V see Figure 28-2 on page 334 and Figure 28-3 on page 334. CC 4. Tape & Reel 5. See Appendix A ATmega169PA/329P/3290P 105°C Package Type 100A 100-lead, 14 x 14 x 1.0 mm, 0.5 mm Lead Pitch, Thin Profile Plastic Quad Flat Package (TQFP) 411 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 412 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 33. Packaging Information 33.1 64A PIN 1 B e PIN 1 IDENTIFIER E1 E D1 D C 0°~7° A1 A2 A L COMMON DIMENSIONS (Unit of measure = mm) SYMBOL MIN NOM MAX NOTE A – – 1.20 A1 0.05 – 0.15 A2 0.95 1.00 1.05 D 15.75 16.00 16.25 D1 13.90 14.00 14.10 Note 2 E 15.75 16.00 16.25 Notes: E1 13.90 14.00 14.10 Note 2 1.This package conforms to JEDEC reference MS-026, Variation AEB. 2. Dimensions D1 and E1 do not include mold protrusion. Allowable B 0.30 – 0.45 protrusion is 0.25mm per side. Dimensions D1 and E1 are maximum C 0.09 – 0.20 plastic body size dimensions including mold mismatch. 3. Lead coplanarity is 0.10mm maximum. L 0.45 – 0.75 e 0.80 TYP 2010-10-20 TITLE DRAWING NO. REV. 2325 Orchard Parkway 64A, 64-lead, 14 x 14mm Body Size, 1.0mm Body Thickness, San Jose, CA 95131 64A C 0.8mm Lead Pitch, Thin Profile Plastic Quad Flat Package (TQFP) 413 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 33.2 64M1 D Marked Pin# 1 ID E C SEATING PLANE A1 TOP VIEW A K 0.08 C L Pin #1 Corner SIDE VIEW D2 1 Option A Pin #1 Triangle 2 3 COMMON DIMENSIONS (Unit of Measure = mm) E2 SYMBOL MIN NOM MAX NOTE Option B Pin #1 A 0.80 0.90 1.00 Chamfer (C 0.30) A1 – 0.02 0.05 b 0.18 0.25 0.30 D 8.90 9.00 9.10 D2 5.20 5.40 5.60 K Option C Pin #1 b e Notch E 8.9 0 9.00 9.10 (0.20 R) E2 5.20 5.40 5.60 BOTTOM VIEW e 0.50 BSC L 0.35 0.40 0.45 K 1.25 1.40 1.55 Notes: 1. JEDEC Standard MO-220, (SAW Singulation) Fig. 1, VMMD. 2. Dimension and tolerance conform to ASMEY14.5M-1994. 2010-10-19 TITLE DRAWING NO. REV. 2325 Orchard Parkway 64M1, 64-pad, 9 x 9 x 1.0 mm Body, Lead Pitch 0.50 mm, San Jose, CA 95131 5.40 mm Exposed Pad, Micro Lead Frame Package (MLF) 64M1 H 414 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 33.3 100A PIN 1 B PIN 1 IDENTIFIER e E1 E D1 D C 0°~7° A1 A2 A L COMMON DIMENSIONS (Unit of Measure = mm) SYMBOL MIN NOM MAX NOTE A – – 1.20 A1 0.05 – 0.15 A2 0.95 1.00 1.05 D 15.75 16.00 16.25 D1 13.90 14.00 14.10 Note 2 E 15.75 16.00 16.25 Notes: 1. This package conforms to JEDEC reference MS-026, Variation AED. E1 13.90 14.00 14.10 Note 2 2. Dimensions D1 and E1 do not include mold protrusion. Allowable B 0.17 – 0.27 protrusion is 0.25mm per side. Dimensions D1 and E1 are maximum C 0.09 – 0.20 plastic body size dimensions including mold mismatch. 3. Lead coplanarity is 0.08mm maximum. L 0.45 – 0.75 e 0.50 TYP 2014-02-05 100A, 100-lead, 14 x 14mm Body Size, 1.0mm Body Thickness, 0.5mm Lead Pitch, Thin Profile Plastic Quad Flat Package (TQFP) 100A E 415 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 34. Errata 34.1 ATmega329P rev. A • Interrupts may be lost when writing the timer registers in the asynchronous timer • Using BOD disable will make the chip reset 1. Interrupts may be lost when writing the timer registers in the asynchronous timer The interrupt will be lost if a timer register that is synchronous timer clock is written when the asynchronous Timer/Counter register (TCNTx) is 0x00. Problem Fix/ Workaround Always check that the asynchronous Timer/Counter register neither have the value 0xFF nor 0x00 before writing to the asynchronous Timer Control Register (TCCRx), asynchronous Timer Counter Register (TCNTx), or asynchronous Output Compare Register (OCRx). 2. Using BOD disable will make the chip reset If the part enters sleep with the BOD turned off with the BOD disable option enabled, a BOD reset will be generated at wakeup and the chip will reset. Problem Fix/Workaround Do not use BOD disable 34.2 ATmega329P rev. B • Interrupts may be lost when writing the timer registers in the asynchronous timer 1. Interrupts may be lost when writing the timer registers in the asynchronous timer The interrupt will be lost if a timer register that is synchronous timer clock is written when the asynchronous Timer/Counter register (TCNTx) is 0x00. Problem Fix/ Workaround Always check that the asynchronous Timer/Counter register neither have the value 0xFF nor 0x00 before writing to the asynchronous Timer Control Register (TCCRx), asynchronous Timer Counter Register (TCNTx), or asynchronous Output Compare Register (OCRx). 34.3 ATmega329P rev. C • Interrupts may be lost when writing the timer registers in the asynchronous timer 1. Interrupts may be lost when writing the timer registers in the asynchronous timer The interrupt will be lost if a timer register that is synchronous timer clock is written when the asynchronous Timer/Counter register (TCNTx) is 0x00. Problem Fix/ Workaround Always check that the asynchronous Timer/Counter register neither have the value 0xFF nor 0x00 before writing to the asynchronous Timer Control Register (TCCRx), asynchronous Timer Counter Register (TCNTx), or asynchronous Output Compare Register (OCRx). 416 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 34.4 ATmega3290P rev. A • Interrupts may be lost when writing the timer registers in the asynchronous timer • Using BOD disable will make the chip reset 1. Interrupts may be lost when writing the timer registers in the asynchronous timer The interrupt will be lost if a timer register that is synchronous timer clock is written when the asynchronous Timer/Counter register (TCNTx) is 0x00. Problem Fix/ Workaround Always check that the asynchronous Timer/Counter register neither have the value 0xFF nor 0x00 before writing to the asynchronous Timer Control Register (TCCRx), asynchronous Timer Counter Register (TCNTx), or asynchronous Output Compare Register (OCRx). 2. Using BOD disable will make the chip reset If the part enters sleep with the BOD turned off with the BOD disable option enabled, a BOD reset will be generated at wakeup and the chip will reset. Problem Fix/Workaround Do not use BOD disable 34.5 ATmega3290P rev. B • Interrupts may be lost when writing the timer registers in the asynchronous timer 1. Interrupts may be lost when writing the timer registers in the asynchronous timer The interrupt will be lost if a timer register that is synchronous timer clock is written when the asynchronous Timer/Counter register (TCNTx) is 0x00. Problem Fix/ Workaround Always check that the asynchronous Timer/Counter register neither have the value 0xFF nor 0x00 before writing to the asynchronous Timer Control Register (TCCRx), asynchronous Timer Counter Register (TCNTx), or asynchronous Output Compare Register (OCRx). 34.6 ATmega3290P rev. C • Interrupts may be lost when writing the timer registers in the asynchronous timer 1. Interrupts may be lost when writing the timer registers in the asynchronous timer The interrupt will be lost if a timer register that is synchronous timer clock is written when the asynchronous Timer/Counter register (TCNTx) is 0x00. Problem Fix/ Workaround Always check that the asynchronous Timer/Counter register neither have the value 0xFF nor 0x00 before writing to the asynchronous Timer Control Register (TCCRx), asynchronous Timer Counter Register (TCNTx), or asynchronous Output Compare Register (OCRx). 417 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 35. Datasheet Revision History Please note that the referring page numbers in this section are referring to this document.The referring revision in this section are referring to the document revision. 35.1 Rev.8021H - 07/2015 1. Updated “Ordering Information” for 105°C temperature extension offering: ”ATmega329P” on page 410 ”ATmega3290P” on page 411 35.2 Rev.8021G - 03/2011 1. Removed ATmega169PA/649P/6490P from the datasheet and updated it accordingly. 2. Updated Feature Overviews. 3. Removed Typical and electrical characteristics and Ordering information for ATmega169PA, ATmega649P and ATmega6490P. 4. Errata updated. 4. Updated the datasheet according to the Atmel new brand style guide. 5. Editing update. 35.3 Rev.8021F - 02/2011 1. Integrated ATmega169PA/649P/6490P into the manual and updated the datasheet accordingly. 2. Updated Feature Overviews. 3. Updated text in Section 8.5 ”Low-frequency Crystal Oscillator” on page 30. 4. Added Table 8-6 on page 30, Capacitance for Low-frequency Oscillator. 5. Updated the document with Atmel new style guide included “Atmel blue logo”. 6. Updated Figure 29-11 on page 356 Power-down Supply Current. 7. Added Typical chara for ”ATmega329P” on page 349, ”ATmega3290P” on page 373, ”ATmega649P” on page 443, and ”ATmega6490P” on page 473. All other typical chara updated. 8. Updated ”Ordering Information” on page 410. 9. Updated ”Packaging Information” on page 413. 10. Updated last page. 418 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 35.4 Rev.8021E – 07/2009 1. Updated ”Errata” on page 416. 2. Updated the last page with Atmel’s new addresses. 35.5 Rev.8021D – 06/2008 1. Added ”Data Retention” on page 9. 2. Updated description of ”Stack Pointer” on page 14. 3. Updated description of ”Low-frequency Crystal Oscillator” on page 30. 4. Added notes to the overview section of ”External Interrupts” on page 58. 5. Updated address of ”PORTA – Port A Data Register” on page 90. 6. Bullet five updated in ”Asynchronous Operation of Timer/Counter2” on page 152. 7. Updated ”System and Reset Characteristics” on page 336. 8. Added errata for ”ATmega329P rev. C” on page 416 and ”ATmega3290P rev. C” on page 417. 35.6 Rev.8021C – 08/2007 1. Updated.”Errata” on page 416. 35.7 Rev.8021B – 08/2007 1. Updated ”Features” on page 1. 2. Updated ”System and Reset Characteristics” on page 336. 3. Updated ”Typical Characteristics” on page 342. 35.8 Rev.8021A – 12/2006 1. Initial version. 419 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P Table of Contents Features.....................................................................................................1 1 Pin Configurations ...................................................................................2 2 Overview ...................................................................................................4 2.1Block Diagram ...........................................................................................................4 2.2Comparison between ATmega329P, and ATmega3290P. ........................................5 2.3Pin Descriptions ........................................................................................................6 3 Resources .................................................................................................9 4 Data Retention ..........................................................................................9 5 About Code Examples .............................................................................9 6 AVR CPU Core ........................................................................................10 6.1Overview .................................................................................................................10 6.2Architectural Overview ............................................................................................10 6.3ALU – Arithmetic Logic Unit ....................................................................................11 6.4AVR Status Register ...............................................................................................11 6.5General Purpose Register File ................................................................................13 6.6Stack Pointer ...........................................................................................................14 6.7Instruction Execution Timing ...................................................................................15 6.8Reset and Interrupt Handling ..................................................................................16 7 AVR Memories ........................................................................................18 7.1Overview .................................................................................................................18 7.2In-System Reprogrammable Flash Program Memory .............................................18 7.3SRAM Data Memory ...............................................................................................18 7.4EEPROM Data Memory ..........................................................................................20 7.5I/O Memory ..............................................................................................................21 7.6Register Description ................................................................................................22 8 System Clock and Clock Options .........................................................27 8.1Clock Systems and their Distribution .......................................................................27 8.2Clock Sources .........................................................................................................28 8.3Default Clock Source ...............................................................................................28 8.4Crystal Oscillator .....................................................................................................29 8.5Low-frequency Crystal Oscillator .............................................................................30 8.6Calibrated Internal RC Oscillator .............................................................................31 i 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 8.7External Clock .........................................................................................................32 8.8Clock Output Buffer .................................................................................................33 8.9Timer/Counter Oscillator .........................................................................................33 8.10System Clock Prescaler ........................................................................................33 8.11Register Description ..............................................................................................35 9 Power Management and Sleep Modes .................................................37 9.1Overview .................................................................................................................37 9.2Sleep Modes ...........................................................................................................37 9.3BOD Disable ............................................................................................................38 9.4Idle Mode .................................................................................................................38 9.5ADC Noise Reduction Mode ...................................................................................38 9.6Power-down Mode ..................................................................................................38 9.7Power-save Mode ...................................................................................................39 9.8Standby Mode .........................................................................................................39 9.9Power Reduction Register .......................................................................................39 9.10Minimizing Power Consumption ............................................................................40 9.11Register Description ..............................................................................................42 10 System Control and Reset ....................................................................44 10.1Resetting the AVR .................................................................................................44 10.2Reset Sources .......................................................................................................44 10.3Internal Voltage Reference ....................................................................................48 10.4Watchdog Timer ....................................................................................................48 10.5Register Description ..............................................................................................50 11 Interrupts ................................................................................................53 11.1Overview ...............................................................................................................53 11.2Interrupt Vectors ....................................................................................................53 11.3Register Description ..............................................................................................57 12 External Interrupts .................................................................................58 12.1Overview ...............................................................................................................58 12.2Pin Change Interrupt Timing .................................................................................59 12.3Register Description ..............................................................................................59 13 I/O-Ports ..................................................................................................63 13.1Overview ...............................................................................................................63 13.2Ports as General Digital I/O ...................................................................................64 ii 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 13.3Alternate Port Functions ........................................................................................69 13.4Register Description ..............................................................................................90 14 8-bit Timer/Counter0 with PWM ............................................................94 14.1Features ................................................................................................................94 14.2Overview ...............................................................................................................94 14.3Timer/Counter Clock Sources ...............................................................................95 14.4Counter Unit ..........................................................................................................95 14.5Output Compare Unit ............................................................................................97 14.6Compare Match Output Unit ..................................................................................98 14.7Modes of Operation ...............................................................................................99 14.8Timer/Counter Timing Diagrams .........................................................................104 15 16-bit Timer/Counter1 ..........................................................................106 15.1Features ..............................................................................................................106 15.2Overview .............................................................................................................106 15.3Accessing 16-bit Registers ..................................................................................109 15.4Timer/Counter Clock Sources .............................................................................111 15.5Counter Unit ........................................................................................................112 15.6Input Capture Unit ...............................................................................................113 15.7Output Compare Units .........................................................................................115 15.8Compare Match Output Unit ................................................................................117 15.9Modes of Operation .............................................................................................118 15.10Timer/Counter Timing Diagrams .......................................................................125 15.11Register Description ..........................................................................................127 16 Timer/Counter0 and Timer/Counter1 Prescalers ..............................134 16.1Register Description ............................................................................................136 17 8-bit Timer/Counter2 with PWM and Asynchronous Operation ......141 17.1Features ..............................................................................................................141 17.2Overview .............................................................................................................141 17.3Timer/Counter Clock Sources .............................................................................142 17.4Counter Unit ........................................................................................................143 17.5Output Compare Unit ..........................................................................................143 17.6Compare Match Output Unit ................................................................................145 17.7Modes of Operation .............................................................................................146 17.8Timer/Counter Timing Diagrams .........................................................................150 17.9Asynchronous Operation of Timer/Counter2 .......................................................152 iii 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 17.10Register Description ..........................................................................................155 18 SPI – Serial Peripheral Interface .........................................................160 18.1Features ..............................................................................................................160 18.2Overview .............................................................................................................160 18.3SS Pin Functionality ............................................................................................165 18.4Data Modes .........................................................................................................165 18.5Register Description ............................................................................................167 19 USART0 .................................................................................................170 19.1Features ..............................................................................................................170 19.2Overview .............................................................................................................170 19.3Clock Generation .................................................................................................172 19.4Frame Formats ....................................................................................................175 19.5USART Initialization ............................................................................................176 19.6Data Transmission – The USART Transmitter ....................................................178 19.7Data Reception – The USART Receiver .............................................................180 19.8Asynchronous Data Reception ............................................................................184 19.9Multi-processor Communication Mode ................................................................187 19.10Register Description ..........................................................................................189 19.11Examples of Baud Rate Setting ........................................................................193 20 USI – Universal Serial Interface ..........................................................198 20.1Features ..............................................................................................................198 20.2Overview .............................................................................................................198 20.3Functional Descriptions .......................................................................................199 20.4Alternative USI Usage .........................................................................................205 20.5Register Description ............................................................................................206 21 Analog Comparator .............................................................................210 21.1Overview .............................................................................................................210 21.2Analog Comparator Multiplexed Input .................................................................210 21.3Register Description ............................................................................................211 22 Analog to Digital Converter ................................................................213 22.1Features ..............................................................................................................213 22.2Overview .............................................................................................................213 22.3Operation .............................................................................................................214 22.4Starting a Conversion ..........................................................................................215 iv 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 22.5Prescaling and Conversion Timing ......................................................................216 22.6Changing Channel or Reference Selection .........................................................218 22.7ADC Noise Canceler ...........................................................................................219 22.8ADC Conversion Result ......................................................................................223 22.9Register Description ............................................................................................225 23 LCD Controller .....................................................................................230 23.1Features ..............................................................................................................230 23.2Overview .............................................................................................................230 23.3Mode of Operation ...............................................................................................233 23.4LCD Usage ..........................................................................................................237 23.5Register Description ............................................................................................241 24 JTAG Interface and On-chip Debug System .....................................248 24.1Features ..............................................................................................................248 24.2Overview .............................................................................................................248 24.3TAP – Test Access Port ......................................................................................248 24.4TAP Controller .....................................................................................................250 24.5Using the Boundary-scan Chain ..........................................................................251 24.6Using the On-chip Debug System .......................................................................251 24.7On-chip Debug Specific JTAG Instructions .........................................................252 24.8Using the JTAG Programming Capabilities .........................................................252 24.9Bibliography .........................................................................................................253 24.10Register Description ..........................................................................................253 25 IEEE 1149.1 (JTAG) Boundary-scan ...................................................254 25.1Features ..............................................................................................................254 25.2Overview .............................................................................................................254 25.3Data Registers .....................................................................................................255 25.4Boundary-scan Specific JTAG Instructions .........................................................256 25.5Boundary-scan Chain ..........................................................................................257 25.6ATmega329P/3290P Boundary-scan Order ........................................................266 25.7Boundary-scan Description Language Files ........................................................279 25.8Register Description ............................................................................................280 26 Boot Loader Support – Read-While-Write Self-Programming .........281 26.1Features ..............................................................................................................281 26.2Overview .............................................................................................................281 26.3Application and Boot Loader Flash Sections .......................................................281 v 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 26.4Read-While-Write and No Read-While-Write Flash Sections ..............................282 26.5Boot Loader Lock Bits .........................................................................................284 26.6Entering the Boot Loader Program ......................................................................286 26.7Addressing the Flash During Self-Programming .................................................286 26.8Self-Programming the Flash ................................................................................287 26.9Register Description ............................................................................................294 27 Memory Programming .........................................................................296 27.1Program And Data Memory Lock Bits .................................................................296 27.2Fuse Bits .............................................................................................................297 27.3Signature Bytes ...................................................................................................299 27.4Calibration Byte ...................................................................................................299 27.5Page Size ............................................................................................................299 27.6Parallel Programming Parameters, Pin Mapping, and Commands .....................299 27.7Parallel Programming ..........................................................................................302 27.8Programming via the JTAG Interface ..................................................................317 28 Electrical Characteristics ....................................................................330 28.1Absolute Maximum Ratings* ...............................................................................330 28.2DC Characteristics ..............................................................................................330 28.3Speed Grades .....................................................................................................333 28.4Clock Characteristics ...........................................................................................335 28.5System and Reset Characteristics ......................................................................336 28.6Standard Power-on Reset ...................................................................................336 28.7Enhanced Power-on Reset .................................................................................337 28.8Brown-out Detection ............................................................................................337 28.9SPI Timing Characteristics ..................................................................................338 28.10ADC Characteristics – Preliminary Data ............................................................340 28.11LCD Controller Characteristics ..........................................................................341 29 Typical Characteristics ........................................................................342 29.1ATmega329P ......................................................................................................343 29.2ATmega3290P ....................................................................................................373 30 Register Summary ...............................................................................403 31 Instruction Set Summary ....................................................................407 32 Ordering Information ...........................................................................410 32.1ATmega329P ......................................................................................................410 vi 8021H–AVR–07/2015

ATmega329P/3290P 32.2ATmega3290P ....................................................................................................411 33 Packaging Information ........................................................................413 33.164A ......................................................................................................................413 33.264M1 ...................................................................................................................414 33.3100A ....................................................................................................................415 34 Errata .....................................................................................................416 34.1ATmega329P rev. A ............................................................................................416 34.2ATmega329P rev. B ............................................................................................416 34.3ATmega329P rev. C ............................................................................................416 34.4ATmega3290P rev. A ..........................................................................................417 34.5ATmega3290P rev. B ..........................................................................................417 34.6ATmega3290P rev. C ..........................................................................................417 35 Datasheet Revision History ................................................................418 35.1Rev.8021H - 07/2015 ..........................................................................................418 35.2Rev.8021G - 03/2011 ..........................................................................................418 35.3Rev.8021F - 02/2011 ...........................................................................................418 35.4Rev.8021E – 07/2009 ..........................................................................................419 35.5Rev.8021D – 06/2008 .........................................................................................419 35.6Rev.8021C – 08/2007 .........................................................................................419 35.7Rev.8021B – 08/2007 ..........................................................................................419 35.8Rev.8021A – 12/2006 ..........................................................................................419 Table of Contents.......................................................................................i vii 8021H–AVR–07/2015

Atmel Corporation 1600 Technology Drive, San Jose, CA 95110 USA T: (+1)(408) 441.0311 F: (+1)(408) 436.4200 | www.atmel.com © 2015 Atmel Corporation. / Rev.: Atmel-8021H-AVR-ATmega329P-3290P_Datasheet_07/2015. Atmel®, Atmel logo and combinations thereof, Enabling Unlimited Possibilities®, AVR® and others are registered trademarks or trademarks of Atmel Corporation in U.S. and other countries. Other terms and product names may be trademarks of others. DISCLAIMER: The information in this document is provided in connection with Atmel products. No license, express or implied, by estoppel or otherwise, to any intellectual property right is granted by this document or in connection with the sale of Atmel products. EXCEPT AS SET FORTH IN THE ATMEL TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF SALES LOCATED ON THE ATMEL WEBSITE, ATMEL ASSUMES NO LIABILITY WHATSOEVER AND DISCLAIMS ANY EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY WARRANTY RELATING TO ITS PRODUCTS INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OR NON-INFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL ATMEL BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE, SPECIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS AND PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, OR LOSS OF INFORMATION) ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THIS DOCUMENT, EVEN IF ATMEL HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Atmel makes no representations or warranties with respect to the accuracy or completeness of the contents of this document and reserves the right to make changes to specifications and products descriptions at any time without notice. Atmel does not make any commitment to update the information contained herein. Unless specifically provided otherwise, Atmel products are not suitable for, and shall not be used in, automotive applications. Atmel products are not intended, authorized, or warranted for use as components in applications intended to support or sustain life. SAFETY-CRITICAL, MILITARY, AND AUTOMOTIVE APPLICATIONS DISCLAIMER: Atmel products are not designed for and will not be used in connection with any applications where the failure of such products would reasonably be expected to result in significant personal injury or death (“Safety-Critical Applications”) without an Atmel officer's specific written consent. Safety-Critical Applications include, without limitation, life support devices and systems, equipment or systems for the operation of nuclear facilities and weapons systems. Atmel products are not designed nor intended for use in military or aerospace applications or environments unless specifically designated by Atmel as military-grade. Atmel products are not designed nor intended for use in automotive applications unless specifically designated by Atmel as automotive-grade. 8021H–AVR–07/2015

Mouser Electronics Authorized Distributor Click to View Pricing, Inventory, Delivery & Lifecycle Information: M icrochip: ATMEGA3290P-20AU ATMEGA3290PV-10AU ATMEGA329P-20AU ATMEGA329P-20MU ATMEGA329PV-10AU ATMEGA329PV-10MU ATMEGA3290P-20AUR ATMEGA3290PV-10AUR ATMEGA329P-20ANR ATMEGA329P- 20AUR ATMEGA329P-20MNR ATMEGA329P-20MUR ATMEGA329PV-10ANR ATMEGA329PV-10AUR ATMEGA329PV-10MNR ATMEGA329PV-10MUR ATMEGA3290PV-W-11 ATMEGA329P-20AN ATMEGA329P- 20MN ATMEGA329PV-10AN ATMEGA329PV-10MN